Naxa AC-1 AC-1 Owner Manual

Add to my manuals

advertisement

Naxa AC-1 AC-1 Owner Manual | Manualzz

Magento Community Edition, Version 1.9

Copyright © 2014 Magento, Inc. All rights reserved.

Contents

Getting Started

Chapter 1: Welcome to Magento!

Resources

Join the Conversation!

Chapter 2: Installing Magento

System Requirements

Part I: Magento Installation

Part II: Magento Installation

Reinstalling Magento CE

Staging Environment

Chapter 3: Your Magento Account

Sharing Your Account

Chapter 4: Quick Tour

Your Storefront

Customer Journey

Attract New Customers

Engage Your Customers

Increase Average Order Value (AOV)

Moment of Purchase

Customer Retention

Loyalty & Advocacy

Success!

Basic Configuration

Chapter 5: Store Admin

Admin Login

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

9

10

11

20

24

24

25

26

33

34

36

37

29

29

30

32

38

39

3

4

6

i

41

43

44

iii

iv

Message InBox

Dashboard

Admin Menu

Admin Tools

Global Record Search

List Controls

Actions Control

Selecting Records

Checkbox States

Chapter 6: Multiple Sites, Stores & Views

Setting Up Store Hierarchy

Configuration Scope

Chapter 7: Store Information

Locale Options

States Options

Countries Options

Currency Setup

Shipping Settings

Store Email Addresses

Contact Us

Chapter 8: Industry Compliance

PCI Compliance Guidelines

Privacy Policy

Cookie Law Compliance

Cookie Restriction Mode

Google Analytics Cookies

Product Catalog

Chapter 9: Navigation by Category

Top Navigation

Breadcrumb Trail

Layered Navigation

Filterable Attributes

Contents

71

73

75

77

67

68

69

70

61

61

63

79

80

81

82

82

85

53

54

56

56

56

44

48

49

52

87

89

90

91

92

93

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

Price Navigation

Iterative Splitting

Creating Categories

Modifying Categories

Root Categories

Hidden Categories

General Information

Display Settings

Custom Design

Category Products

Chapter 10: Managing Attributes

Attribute Input Types

Creating Attributes

Deleting Attributes

Creating an Attribute Set

Attribute Quick Reference

Attribute Properties

Attribute Frontend Properties

Chapter 11: Flat Catalog

Flat Catalog Configuration

Chapter 12: Creating Products

Product Types

Simple Product

Grouped Product

Configurable Product

Virtual Product

Bundle Product

Downloadable Product

Downloadable Product Configuration

Chapter 13: Product Information

General

Meta Information

Recurring Profile

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

138

145

148

153

159

127

128

130

135

161

162

165

166

114

116

118

121

109

110

111

114

123

124

100

102

103

104

94

95

96

99

106

107

v

vi

Design

Gift Options

Websites

Categories

Related Products

Up-sells

Cross-sells

Custom Options

Chapter 14: Inventory

Inventory Configuration

Managing Stock

Stock Availability

Stock Availability Message Scenarios

Product Page Messages

Catalog Page Messages

Out of Stock Threshold

Product Alert Configuration

Product Alerts Run Settings

Managing Stock for Configurable Products

Chapter 15: Product Images

Thumbnail Gallery

Light Boxes and Sliders

Image Zoom

Image Size and Type

Adding Product Images

Placeholders

Watermarks

Shopping Cart Thumbnails

Chapter 16: Product Pricing

Special Price

Tier Price

Minimum Advertised Price (MAP)

Global Configuration

Contents

197

198

200

201

202

195

195

196

196

203

205

206

208

209

188

188

189

190

181

181

183

186

191

191

192

175

176

177

178

171

172

173

174

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

Product Group Price

Group Price Examples

Group Price Attribute

Search & SEO

Chapter 17: Storefront Search Tools

Quick Search

Advanced Search

Search Results

Popular Search Terms

Catalog Search Configuration

Chapter 18: Managing Search Terms

Adding Search Terms

Chapter 19: SEO Best Practices

Meta Information

Sitemap

Catalog URL Options

Dynamic URL

Static URL

URL Key

Store Code

HTML Suffix

Category Path

Dynamic Media URLs

Canonical Meta Tag

Chapter 20: Managing URL Rewrites

Automatic Product Redirects

Creating URL Rewrites

Creating a Product Rewrite

Creating a Category Rewrite

Creating a Custom Rewrite

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

213

214

215

217

219

220

221

223

226

227

229

229

236

236

237

237

233

234

235

236

238

238

240

242

245

245

247

248

250

252

vii

Contents viii

Marketing

Chapter 21: Promotions

Product Relationships

Catalog Price Rules

Price Rule with Multiple SKUs

Shopping Cart Price Rules

Coupon Codes

Auto-Generating Coupon Codes

Exporting Auto-Generated Coupon Codes

Tracking Coupon Usage

Free Shipping Promotion

Buy X Get Y Free

Discount with Minimum Purchase

Chapter 22: Shopping Tools

Wishlists

Wishlist Configuration

Compare Products

Recently Viewed/Compared Products

Product Reviews

Writing Product Reviews

Moderating Reviews

Custom Ratings

Tags

Products Tagged by Administrators

Moderating Tags

Tag Activity

Polls

Editing a Poll

Email a Friend

Gift Options

Gift Options Configuration

Chapter 23: Newsletters

306

306

308

309

302

303

304

305

310

310

299

300

300

301

293

294

295

296

313

257

267

278

280

281

259

260

261

266

282

283

286

287

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

Newsletter Configuration

Newsletter Templates

Newsletter Queue

Chapter 24: Sales Channels

Social Marketing

Facebook Open Graph

Setting Up RSS Feeds

Chapter 25: Mobile Apps

Creating a Mobile App

Managing AirMail

Creating a Message Template

Message Queue Management

Chapter 26: Google Tools

Google Merchant Center

Google Sitemap

Google Analytics

Google Shopping

Content Elements

Chapter 27: Mastering Magento CMS

CMS Menu

Chapter 28: Content Pages

Core Content

Creating a Page

Using the Editor

Inserting a Link

Inserting Images

Adding a Widget

Chapter 29: Static Blocks

Creating a Static Block

Positioning Blocks

Block References

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

314

315

316

323

323

332

333

334

317

317

317

321

337

337

342

346

349

351

353

353

355

355

357

360

361

362

363

367

368

369

369

ix

x

Chapter 30: Widgets

Widget Types

Creating a Widget

CMS Static Block Widget

New Products List

Mini Shopping Cart Widget

Chapter 31: Variables

Predefined Variables

Custom Variables

Chapter 32: Layout Updates

Placing a Block with a Layout Update

Controlling Block Order

Standard Block Layout

Layout Update Syntax

Layout Update Examples

XML Load Sequence

Default Layout

Changes to Specific Pages

Chapter 33: Markup Tags

Using Markup Tags in Links

Design & Theme

Chapter 34: Your Store Design

Your Store Logo

Changing the Welcome Message

Store Demo Notice

Chapter 35: Page Layout

Page Layout Variations

Page Layout Examples

1 Column Layout

2 Columns with Left Bar

2 Columns with Right Bar

Contents

385

385

387

394

397

399

399

399

389

390

391

392

401

403

373

373

374

377

378

382

405

407

407

408

409

411

411

413

413

414

414

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

3 Columns

Uploading a Favicon

Chapter 36: Page Configuration

HTML Head

Header

Page Footer

Chapter 37: Your Store’s Theme

Responsive Web Design

Using the Default Theme

Exceptions

Technical Information

Code Location

Installing a New Theme

Customers

Chapter 38: Customer Accounts

Account Dashboard

Chapter 39: Customer Groups

Sales & Orders

Chapter 40: Managing Orders

Order Process Overview

Chapter 41: Assisted Shopping

Online Customers

Create an Order

Update an Order

Create a Customer Account

Update a Customer Account

Persistent Shopping Cart

Types of Cookies

Cookie Scenarios

Cookie Workflow

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

431

433

433

437

439

441

442

451

454

455

455

443

444

445

449

456

457

415

416

423

423

424

425

425

426

427

419

419

421

422

xi

xii

Terms and Conditions

Chapter 42: Order Fulfillment

Order Workflow

Order Status

Custom Order Status

Invoice an Order

Print Invoices

Ship an Order

View Shipment Detail

Packing Slips

Shipping Labels

PDF Printouts

Customer Address Formats

Examples

Chapter 43: Store Credit and Refunds

Product Return Workflow

Create a Credit Memo

Print a Credit Memo

Payments

Chapter 44: Basic Payment Methods

Merchant Location

Bank Transfer Payment

Cash On Delivery

Check / Money Order

Purchase Order

Zero Subtotal Checkout

Saved Credit Cards

Chapter 45: PayPal Payment Solutions

PayPal Express Checkout

All-In-One Solutions

Payment Gateways

PayPal Business Accounts

Contents

460

468

471

472

473

463

464

465

466

473

475

482

482

484

485

486

487

491

493

499

501

502

504

495

496

496

498

507

507

507

508

508

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

PayPal Payments Advanced

Merchant Requirements

Configuration

Checkout Workflow

Order Processing Workflow

PayPal Payments Pro

Requirements

Configuration

Checkout Workflow

Order Processing Workflow

PayPal Payments Standard

Merchant Requirements

Configuration

Checkout Workflow

PayPal Express Checkout

Requirements

Configuration

Checkout Workflow

Save Customer Billing Address

Manage Order Transactions

Payment Action Set to “Order”

Bill Me Later

Billing Agreements

Workflow

Create Billing Agreement from Customer Account

Create Billing Agreement with Order

Managing Billing Agreements

Create Sales Order with Billing Agreement

Settlement Reports

View a Settlement Report

PayPal Payflow Pro

Customer Workflow

Order Processing Workflow

PayPal Payflow Link

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

522

524

525

525

520

521

522

522

526

526

515

516

519

520

513

513

514

515

512

512

512

513

510

511

511

512

510

510

510

510

509

509

509

509

xiii

xiv

Customer Workflow

Order Workflow

PayPal Payment Solutions by Country

Chapter 46: Payment Solutions & Gateways

Worldwide

Europe

Oceania

Authorize.Net

Direct Post Method

Admin Workflow

Customer Workflow

Partial Authorization with Authorize.Net

Customer Workflow

Admin Workflow

Partial Authorization Refunds

Chapter 47: Payment Services

3D Secure Credit Card Validation

3D Secure Customer Workflow

Shipping

Chapter 48: Basic Shipping Methods

Shipping Settings

Flat Rate

Free Shipping

Table Rates

Price v. Destination Example

Online Rates

Chapter 49: Shipping Carriers

Package Type by Carrier

FedEx

UPS

USPS

DHL

Contents

526

527

528

533

534

538

538

531

531

532

533

539

539

541

541

543

543

546

547

549

550

551

552

554

559

560

561

562

562

563

564

565

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

Chapter 50: Shipping Labels

Workflow

Shipping Label Configuration

Generate Shipping Labels

Create Packages

Change Product Quantities in Package

Print Labels for Multiple Orders

Tracking Numbers

Taxes

Chapter 51: Managing Taxes

Tax Resource Permissions

General Tax Configuration

Tax Classes

Product Tax Classes

Customer Tax Classes

Tax Zones & Rates

Tax Rules

Cross-Border Price Consistency

Fixed Product Tax

Fixed Product Tax Calculations

Fixed Product Tax Setup

Be Careful Disclosing FPT Prices in Email

Compound Taxes

Setting Up Compound Taxes

Chapter 52: Value Added Tax (VAT)

VAT ID Validation

Setting Up VAT ID Validation

VAT Validation Customer Workflow

During Registration

During Checkout

Managing VAT Validation

VAT Number Customer Address Attribute

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

577

589

590

590

591

595

595

596

584

585

585

587

579

579

579

584

609

609

610

610

599

601

602

609

572

575

575

575

567

567

568

570

xv

xvi

Disable Automatic Customer Group Change

VAT ID Validation in Customer Accounts

VAT ID Validation When Creating an Order

Store Operations

Chapter 53: Managing Email Templates

Uploading Your Email Logo

Customizing Email Templates

Email Template Configuration

Chapter 54: Managing Data Transfer

Working with CSV Files

Product CSV Structure

Customer CSV Structure

Importing Data

File Validation

Importing Product Images

Import Guidelines

Exporting Data

Chapter 55: Reports

Dashboard

Snapshot Reports

Dashboard Configuration

Running Reports

Orders Report

Refreshing Sales Report Statistics

Available Reports

Chapter 56: Admin Permissions

Creating New Users

Creating Custom Roles

Chapter 57: Security

Security Configuration

CAPTCHA

Contents

611

612

612

615

617

617

618

621

626

627

627

628

629

623

623

623

625

641

641

643

647

647

648

634

634

637

638

631

631

632

633

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Contents

Admin CAPTCHA Configuration

Customer CAPTCHA Configuration

System Operations

Chapter 58: Index Management

Manual Reindexing

Index Modes

Chapter 59: Cache Storage Management

Clearing Caches

External Full-Page Cache

Chapter 60: Alternate Media Storage

Using a Database for Media Storage

Accessing Media from a Database

Using a Content Delivery Network

Accessing Media from a CDN

Chapter 61: Server Backups & Rollback

Creating a Backup

Roll Back Changes

Limiting Access to Backup and Rollback

Create a Backup from Magento Connect Manager

Chapter 62: Magento Connect

Updating Magento

Installing Extensions

Chapter 63: Web Services

Magento Core API Settings

WS-I Endpoint URL

General Settings

Activating Web Services

REST Roles

Appendix A: Glossary

Appendix B: Editor Toolbar

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

649

651

675

675

677

679

679

679

679

680

681

671

671

672

672

672

667

667

668

668

670

683

695

655

657

659

659

663

663

666

xvii

Index

Contents

705

xviii Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Getting Started

Chapter 1:

Welcome to Magento!

Magento Community Edition is a feature-rich eCommerce platform, built on opensource technology that provides online merchants with unprecedented flexibility and control over the look, content, and functionality of their eCommerce store. Magento

CE’s intuitive administration interface features powerful marketing, search engine optimization, and catalog management tools to give merchants the power to create sites that are tailored to their unique business needs. Designed to be completely scalable, Magento CE offers companies a stable, secure, customizable eCommerce solution.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Magento Community Edition

3

4

Resources Chapter 1:  Welcome to Magento!

Resources

Magento provides a wealth of business and technical resources, self-help tools, and services to help you succeed.

Knowledge Base

Got a question? The Magento Knowledge

Base has an answer. Our Knowledge

Base is your one-stop shop for helpful articles and how-to instructions, as well as technical product documentation.

Guides and Tips

Our user guides, eBooks, and articles provide a wealth of information that is ready for download.

Wiki

The Magento Wiki is where you can learn from others, and share what you know! To help you get started, we’ve gathered a list of articles that will help you on your way.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 1:  Welcome to Magento!

Forums

The Magento forums provide access to a network of dedicated Magento enthusiasts who share tips, tricks and support.

Resources

Blog

Check out the Magento blog for the latest information about new features, trends, best practices, upcoming events, and more!

Webinars

Expand your horizons! Register to attend the upcoming Magento webinar, or catch up on previous, archived webinars.

Training & Certification

Magento has training courses for every role, including marketers, product managers, designers and developers.

Magento U courses provide practical, hands-on exercises that help students learn quickly.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 5

6

Join the Conversation!

Chapter 1:  Welcome to Magento!

Partners

Need help to set up or fine-tune your store? Magento’s certified developers and consultants are experts in store setup, design, integration and marketing. Find a certified expert and jumpstart your business today!

Expert Consulting Services

Magento’s Expert Consulting Group

(ECG) helps Magento merchants and

Solution Partners maximize their success. Our experts offer comprehensive analysis and best practice recommendations, from architecture planning through post-deployment.

Join the Conversation!

Facebook

Find out what’s happening and join the discussion on our Facebook page!

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 1:  Welcome to Magento!

Twitter

Follow us on Twitter!

Join the Conversation!

LinkedIn

Join the users group and connect with others on LinkedIn!

YouTube

Learn while you watch videos on our YouTube channel!

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 7

Join the Conversation!

8

Chapter 1:  Welcome to Magento!

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:

Installing Magento

Magento Community Edition is open source software and can be downloaded for free. Developers can modify the core code and add features and functionality by installing extensions from the Magento Connec t marketplace.

Because Magento does not provide technical support for this software, businesses using Magento Community Edition to run their stores might need access to their own Magento experts to help with the installation and configuration. Answers to many technical questions can be found on our user forum .

Magento Community Edition is licensed under the Open Software License (OSL) v3.0, an open source certified license. To learn more, see the License / Trademark

FAQ on our site.

After you have verified that your hosting environment meets Magento’s system requirements , you can download Magento CE free of charge from the Magento community site. Although optional, we recommend that you register on our site so you have access to the forums, wiki, groups, screencasts, and other resources the community has to offer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 9

System Requirements Chapter 2:  Installing Magento

System Requirements

See our website for a complete list of system requirements .

Base System Requirements

Operating Environment LAMP (Linux, Apache, MySQL, and PHP)

Operating Systems

(Unix only)

Web Servers

Linux x86

Linux x86-64

Apache 1.3.x

Apache 2.0.x

Apache 2.2.x

PHP Version

PHP Configuration

5.2.13

safe_mode memory_limit off

512 MB recommended

256 MB minimum

MySQL

SSL

4.1.20

InnoDB storage engine

A valid security certificate is required to work over a secure channel (HTTPS) from the Magento Admin, or when submitting form data from the storefront. Self-signed SSL certificates are not supported.

10 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento Part I: Magento Installation

Part I: Magento Installation

During the first part of the installation, you will download the scripts and sample data files needed to install Magento. You will also set up permissions on the server, and create a new database.

Downloader

Process Overview:

Step 1: Download the Magento CE Downloader Script

Step 2: Download the Sample Data

Step 3: Upload the Downloader Script to Your Server

Step 4: Grant File Access Permissions

Step 5: Set Up the Store Database

Step 6: Upload the Sample Data to Your Server

Step 7: Run the Magento CE Downloader

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 11

Part I: Magento Installation Chapter 2:  Installing Magento

Step 1:

Download Magento CE Downloader Script

1.

Navigate to the Magento Community Edition download page.

2.

In the Downloader section, select one of the following formats for the archived downloader. The archive file name is: magento-downloader-x.x.x.zip (or .tar.gz, or

.tar.bz2). The size of the archive is approximately 46K.

l l l

.zip

.tar.gz

.tar.bz2

3.

Click the Download button. While the file is downloading, take a moment to look over the resources on the Magento Community page.

4.

Extract the archive to a directory of your choice on your local computer. The name of the extracted file is: downloader.php

Step 2:

Download the Sample Data

Magento provides sample data with examples of products and basic content pages to help you get started. When you are ready to build your own catalog, you can reinstall

Magento without the sample data. This step is recommended, but is not required.

1.

In the Sample Data section, Select your format for the archived sample data.

2.

Click the Download button, and Save the file anywhere on your local computer. The file name is: magento-sample-data-x.x.x.zip (or .tar.gz, or .tar.bz2). The size of the archive is approximately 10MB.

Sample Data Download

Step 3:

Upload the Downloader Script to Your Server

3.

Use an FTP or SFTP tool to copy the extracted downloader script to the root www directory of the server. (The root www directory is usually named public_html.) As an alternative, you can copy the file to another subdirectory, such as /store.

12 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento Part I: Magento Installation

Step 4:

Grant File Access Permissions

For the Magento Installer to work correctly, the top-level Magento directory on the server, and all directories beneath it must have correct permissions. To learn more, see the Knowledge Base article: Recommended File System Ownership and Privileges .

Step 5:

Set Up the Store Database

1.

Create a new, empty database using one of the following methods: l l

Use phpMyAdmin or a similar tool provided by your hosting company. For instructions, see the documentation for the specific tool.

MySQL command line

2.

Create a new user with full permissions to the database. Then, write down the following information: dbname dbuser dbpassword

The database name.

The name of the database user.

The password for the database user.

Step 6:

Upload the Sample Data to Your Server

If you want to use the sample data, it must be installed now. If you are ready to add your own products, skip this step. You can use either of the following methods to install the sample data:

Method 1: a.

Extract the sample data archive that you downloaded in

Step 2 , to a directory of

your choice on your local computer. The file name is similar to: magento_sample_ data_for_x.x.x.sql.

The archive contains an SQL script with a dump of the sample data, and a media/catalog folder with category and product images.

Sample Data Archive

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 13

Part I: Magento Installation Chapter 2:  Installing Magento b.

Use an FTP or SFTP tool to copy the media folder and its subdirectories from your local computer to the magento installation directory on the server. Depending on your server, the path will look something like this: l

/var/www.magento/media l

/var/www/html/magento/media c.

Use an FTP or SFTP tool to copy the magento sample data script to the server. A good place to put it is in the media/catalog folder.

l

/var/www/magento/media/catalog l

/var/www/html/magento/media/catalog d.

Do one of the following: l l

Use phpMyAdmin, or a similar tool to run the sample data script and import the data into the new database.

On the command line, enter the following: mysql -u <root user> -p <magent-db-name> < <path-and-filename of db-script>

You are now ready to install Magento!

Method 2:

If you prefer to install the sample data from the command line, see this Knowledge Base article, under the heading:  Installing Optional Sample Data .

14 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento Part I: Magento Installation

Step 7:

Run the Magento CE Downloader

1.

From your browser, navigate to the location of the Magento downloader on your server.

The Magento Downloader welcome page appears.

Welcome

2.

To validate your server environment, click the Continue button. If error warnings appear, correct the errors and click the Check Again button.

Validation

3.

When you pass the validation test, do the following: a.

Enter the following Database Connection information: l l l

Host

User Name

User Password

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 15

Part I: Magento Installation Chapter 2:  Installing Magento

Database Connection b.

Click the Check InnoDB button to confirm the connection.

c.

When you receive confirmation that the credentials are valid, click the Continue button.

4.

On the Magento Connect Manager Deployment page, do the following:

16

Magento Connect Manager Deployment a.

In the Loader Protocol section, set Magento Connect Channel Protocol to one of the following:

HTTP

FTP

(Recommended) HTTP is faster than FTP.

Choose FTP if outgoing connections are not allowed in your hosting environment.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento Part I: Magento Installation

Loader Protocol b.

In the Stability section, set Magento Connect Manager Version Stability to

“Stable.”

Stability c.

In the Deployment Type section, select one of the following:

FTP Connection

Local Filesystem

Deployment Type

(Recommended) FTP allows you to upload files to the server without changing read/write/execute permissions.

After choosing FTP connection, complete the following with information provided by your FTP server administrator:

Host Name

Credentials

Installation

Path

Enter the host name of the FTP server.

Enter the FTP credentials provided by your FTP server administrator

Enter the path where Magento CE will be installed. The installation path points to the same directory that contains the downloader.php

file.

Deploying through the local file system requires the

Apache account permissions to be changed. When the installation is complete, contact your server administrator to update the file permissions.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 17

Part I: Magento Installation Chapter 2:  Installing Magento

If the web server user can't write to the magento directory, you should not proceed. It’s most likely an ownership issue, rather than a permissions issue.

d.

To verify the connection, click the Check FTP button. You will not be able to continue if any of the deployment parameters are invalid. After the FTP connection is verified, click the Continue button.

5.

On the Welcome to Magento's Installation Wizard Page, do the following:

18

Magento Installation Wizard a.

Set Magento Connect Channel Protocol to the same protocol you selected in the previous step. (Options include: HTTP/FTP) b.

Custom permissions determine how read, write, and execute permissions are applied to the downloaded folders and files. Set Use Custom Permissions to one of the following:

Yes

No

The Magento CE administrator can execute, write, and read files in the downloaded folders. In the Folders and Files fields that appear, specify values in the octal number system to denote the permissions that the Magento administrator has for folders and files on the server.

Custom permissions are not specified for downloaded folders and files. In this case the system default values are used:

0777

0666

Folder permissions to read, write, and execute.

File permissions to read and write.

c.

Set Deployment Type to the type specified in the previous step. (Options include

Local Filesystem/FTP)

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento Part I: Magento Installation d.

When you are ready to start the download, click the Start the Download Process button to begin.

Starting to Download e.

When the "Download completed" message appears, click the Continue to Magento

Installation button.

If you were unable to complete the download process due to a connection error, try to upload the Full Magento Package from the Community download page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 19

Part II: Magento Installation Chapter 2:  Installing Magento

Part II: Magento Installation

During the second part of the Magento installation, you will complete the initial configuration, and create an admin account. The initial installation creates a single website, one store, and three store views, which can be used for different languages.

Process Overview:

Step 1: License Agreement

Step 2: Localization

Step 3: Configuration

Step 4: Create an Admin Account

Step 1:

License Agreement

Read the terms of the Magento Community Edition End User License Agreement. If you agree to the terms, click the Continue button.

20

License

Step 2:

Localization

Select the default localization settings for your Magento CE installation. The values can be changed later for specific stores, store views, and websites.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento l l l

Locale

Time Zone

Default Currency

Part II: Magento Installation

Locale Settings

Step 3:

Configuration

1.

In the Database Connection section, do the following: a.

Set Database Type to “MySQL.” b.

In the Host field, enter the server's fully qualified host name or IP address. If your database server is on the same host as your web server, enter “localhost.” c.

Refer to the database credentials from

Part 1: Step 5,

and enter the following: l l l

Database Name

User Name

User Password d.

(Optional) The Table prefix is used when there are multiple instances of Magneto that share a single database. To learn more, see the Knowledge Base article:

Installing and Verifying Magento Community Edition .

Database Connection

2.

In the Web Access Options section, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 21

Part II: Magento Installation Chapter 2:  Installing Magento a.

Enter the Base URL for the Magento store.

b.

In the Admin Path filed, enter the base URL for the store’s Admin Panel. (The default value is “admin.”) c.

To display charts in the Dashboard, select the Enable Charts checkbox.

d.

If you are installing Magento to a development or test environment, and the Web server is not verifiable, select the Skip Base URL Validation Before the Next Step checkbox. Otherwise, leave the checkbox unselected.

e.

(Recommended) To enable the Apache mod_rewrite module, select the Use Web

Server (Apache) Rewrites checkbox. To learn more, see the Knowledge Base article:

Installing and Configuring Required Prerequisite Software .

f.

(Recommended) If your server has a valid security certificate, select the Use Secure

URLs (SSL) checkbox. Then, complete the following:

Secure Base URL

Run the Admin

Interface with SSL

Enter the complete base URL for the SSL connection.

Select the checkbox to run the store admin on the secure channel.

These initial SSL settings can be modified later.

22

Web Access Options

3.

In the Session Storage Options section, set Save Session Data In to one of the following:

Session Storage Options

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 2:  Installing Magento Part II: Magento Installation

File System

Database

Stores user session data on the file system in the magentoinstall-dir/var/session directory. File-based session storage is the most common configuration.

Stores user session data in the database. Choose database storage if you have a clustered database, or if system access is slow.

4.

When the Configuration settings are complete, click the Continue button.

Step 4:

Create an Admin Account

1.

In the Personal Information section, enter the following: l l l

First Name

Last Name

Email

Personal Information

2.

In the Login Information section, do the following: a.

Enter the Username you of the owner of the Magento store.

b.

Enter the Password associated with the Admin account. To confirm, enter it again in the Confirm Password field.

Login Information

3.

(Optional) If you already have one, enter the Encryption Key . Otherwise, Magento will generate one for you.

The encryption key protects sensitive data such as passwords and personally identifiable customer information. The encryption key is stored on the server at: /app/etc/local.xml

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 23

Staging Environment Chapter 2:  Installing Magento

Important! When Magento generates your encryption key, write it down and keep it in a safe place. If you ever move your data to another Magento CE site, you will need the encryption key to recover the data.

Encryption Key

4.

Click the Continue button, and you’re all set!

l l

To explore your new store, click the Go to Frontend button.

To explore your store’s admin, click the Go to Backend button.

Reinstalling Magento CE

If you want to repeat the installation on the same server, it is not necessary to download the files again.

1.

On the server, delete the file: app/etc/local.xml

2.

Delete any files and directories found in: var/

3.

With your browser, navigate to your Magento directory. For example: http://www.yourDomain.com/magento-directory

The Magento Installation Wizard launches automatically.

Staging Environment

If you plan to develop your store over a period of time, we recommend that you set up a staging environment where you can test changes before applying them to the live store.

A staging environment is just like any other Magento CE installation, but is not accessible to the public. You can use a version control tool to keep files synchronized between the staging environment and the live store.

We highly recommend that you use a staging environment to test extensions and before updating your live store to a new version of Magento CE.

24 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 3:

Your Magento Account

You can find the information related to the products and services you have signed up to receive, as well as your contact and billing information in the dashboard of your Magento account. Your Magento account has a separate login from your store, and can be accessed from either the Magento website or from your store’s Admin.

Your Magento Account

To log in to your Magento account:

1.

Navigate to the Magento site: http://www.magento.com

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the My Account link.

3.

Enter your First Name , Last Name , Email Address , and select the functions My

Company Primarily performs and My Role .

4.

Enter your User Name or Email , and Password . Then, click the Submit button.

Your account dashboard appears.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 25

Sharing Your Account Chapter 3:  Your Magento Account

26

Log In to Your Account

Sharing Your Account

Your Magento account contains information that can be useful to trusted employees and service providers who help to manage your site. As the primary account holder, you have authority to grant limited access to your account to other Magento account holders.

Shared Access

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 3:  Your Magento Account Sharing Your Account

When your account is shared, all sensitive information—such as your billing history or credit card information—remains protected. It is not shared at any time with other users.

All actions taken by users with shared access to your account are your sole responsibility. Magento Inc. is not responsible for any actions taken by users to whom you grant shared account access.

To set up a shared account:

1.

Before you begin, get the following information from the new user’s Magento account: l l

Account ID

Email address

2.

Log in to your

Magento account .

3.

In the My Account panel on the left, under Shared Access, click Add New User .

4.

In the New User Information section, do the following: l l

Enter the Account ID of the new user’s Magento account.

Enter the Email address that is associated with the new user’s Magento account.

5.

In the Shared Information section, do the following: a.

Enter a Sharename to identify your shared account. Because the Sharename becomes an option in the Switch Accounts list, it should be something that the other person will recognize as your account.

b.

To share your personal contact information, select the checkbox of each item that you want to make available to the other person: l l

Your Email

Your Phone

6.

In the Grant Account Permissions section, select the checkbox of each item that you want to share.

7.

When complete, click the Create Shared Access button.

You are notified when the new role is saved, and the new user record appears in the

Manage Users & Permissions section of the Shared Access page. Magento also sends an email invitation with instructions for accessing the shared account to the new user.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 27

Sharing Your Account Chapter 3:  Your Magento Account

Add a New User

To access a shared account:

1.

When you receive the invitation to a shared account, the first thing you must do is to log in to your own Magento account.

Your account dashboard has a new Switch Accounts listbox in the upper-right corner, with options for “My Account” and the name of the shared account.

2.

To gain access to the shared account, set the Switch Accounts listbox to the name of the shared account.

The shared account displays a welcome message and contact information. The left panel includes only the items that you have been given permission to use.

28

Switch Accounts

3.

When you are ready to return to your own account, simply set Switch Accounts to “My

Account.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 4:

Quick Tour

This quick tour follows the customer-decision journey that leads to a purchase on an eCommerce site powered by Magento Community Edition. Each item is linked to a topic in this guide, where you can learn more about the subject. You can also follow along on your computer with the sample data.

Your Storefront

Our storefront example is Madison Island, a fictional fashion website that we created to highlight some of Magento’s key features and functionality.

To access your storefront:

Using your browser, navigate to your store. The URL is something like this: http://www.yourdomain.com

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Home Page

29

Customer Journey

Customer Journey

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Attract New Customers

Magento Community Edition includes

SEO functionality out of the box.

Improve your search ranking and attract the most visitors to your site.

Engage Your Customers

Design your site with pre-designed templates, or create a custom design with features that invite people to interact with your store.

Increase AOV

Increase average order value with promotions and content that encourage your customers to shop more.

30 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Moment of Purchase

Give your customers a faster and easier way to check out. Calculate shipping and taxes automatically, and integrate multiple payment methods on a single page.

Customer Journey

Customer Retention

Create and manage newsletters and promotions to keep your customers coming back for more.

Loyalty & Advocacy

Encourage customers to write product reviews, create wishlists, and send email about products to their friends. This will strengthen your relationship with your customers, who in return, will speak positively of your business to friends and family.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 31

Customer Journey Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Attract New Customers

Magento Community Edition is packed with features that make it easy to create a

“search engine friendly” websites and increase the likelihood of bringing the right customers to your site.

Search Engine Optimization

Magento offers powerful, native capabilities to streamline Search Engine Optimization

(SEO) practices for content and site exposure that are integrated with the Admin, and tied directly into the user experience.

Custom URLs

Custom URLs are short, clean, and easy to remember. You can also autogenerate searchfriendly URLs to streamline your purchase path.

Meta Data

Improve your search engine rankings by choosing specific criteria that helps search engines to find and index your products more easily. Meta data can be entered for product, category, and content pages.

Sitemap

Link to a sitemap from the footer of your store to give customers an overview of the catalog structure, with links to all categories and products in the store. You can also easily integrate your store with Google Sitemap.

Analytics

In addition to monitoring your site from the Admin dashboard, you can integrate thirdparty analytics tools such as Google Analytics, for detailed statistics on traffic and sales.

32 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour Customer Journey

Engage Your Customers

Magento Community Edition makes it easy to create a customized, engaging site experience. Encourage your customers to spend more time exploring your site, and give them the tools to make it easy to find what they want faster.

Content Management System

Magento’s CMS makes it easy to store pages, or parts of pages, that you can use in your store. It’s so intuitive that someone without a technology background can create and manage site content.

Design & Theme

Control the visual elements of your store with a collection of templates and skin files. You can apply these visual elements to all pages in your store, giving your store a cohesive look and feel.

Multiple Stores, Sites & Views

Control the look and feel of multiple sites, introduce new market and languages, and track analytics from a single Admin.

Multiple Devices

Magento’s powerful features make it easy to create storefronts optimized for iPhone, Android, and Mobile Opera browsers to help you engage consumers with mobile eCommerce now and into the future.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 33

Customer Journey

Sophisticated Search

Filter product by price, manufacturer, or any other criteria to reduce the time to purchase.

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Shopping Tools

Your store includes a set of shopping tools that create opportunities for your customers to interact with your store, connect on social media, and share with friends.

Increase Average Order Value (AOV)

Magento Community Edition provides a range of tools to help you tailor the shopping experience, and encourage your customers to put more items in their shopping carts and spend more money.

Promotions

Magento's catalog and shopping cart price rules let you create promotions that kick into gear when a set of conditions is met.

34 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour Customer Journey

Coupons

Create limited-time offers and coupons that customers can scan with their phone and apply to a purchase.

Product Suggestions

Another way to increase AOV is to offer suggestions for related products and opportunities to up-sell and cross-sell at strategic points along the path to conversion.

User Permissions & Roles

Restrict access to data in the Admin on a “need to know” basis. Create multiple admin roles for read-only or and editing privileges. Track and review all activity at a granular level to specific stores and websites.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 35

Customer Journey Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Moment of Purchase

Now that you’ve given your customer an engaging shopping experience, make it easy for them to complete their purchases. Magento is designed to help you streamline your checkout process experience while boosting conversion rates.

Order Processing

Magento supports a complete order processing workflow. It's easy to customize order statuses and track communications between sales reps and customers.

Shipping Labels

Merchants have complete control over package characteristics such as weight and size.

Shipping labels, rate, and barcode information originates directly from the carrier. Labels can be generated for single or multiple orders.

Multiple Shipping Options

Magento supports a variety of shipping methods so you can give your customers a choice at checkout. Customers can see a real-time estimate of shipping charges right from the shopping cart.

Multiple Payment Options

Magento Community Edition supports the payment methods and currencies needed for global commerce. You can choose the ones you want to offer, and at checkout, your customers can choose the ones they prefer.

PayPal Merchant Solutions

It's easy to integrate a PayPal Payments account to provide your customers faster, more secure checkout options.

Assisted Shopping

Assisted shopping makes it easy for customer service reps to create orders for customers.

Customer service reps have access to shopping cart contents, and can move items from a wishlist to a shopping cart, apply coupon codes, and more.

Security

Whether an order is fulfilled online or over the phone, Magento provides sophisticated security, including CAPTCHA and SSL encryption, with best-in-breed encryption and hashing algorithms to protect the security of the system.

36 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour Customer Journey

Customer Retention

Magento makes it easy for you to get repeat business and build brand loyalty. Magento gives you total control and flexibility over creating and revising goodies like rewards programs, custom coupons and automated emails to keep your customers coming back again and again.

Custom Coupons

Create coupons codes for social media, email, or print campaigns. You can incorporate coupon codes into any design you like.

Newsletters

Stay in touch with current customers who’ve opted to receive newsletters. You can create as many newsletter templates as you want.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 37

Customer Journey Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Loyalty & Advocacy

Give customers a direct connection to your brand by allowing them to create customer accounts where they can see their purchase history, wishlist, and newsletter subscriptions. Use product ratings and reviews to give new customers objective product opinions and promote a sense of community. These features turn customer satisfaction into one of the most powerful and cost-efficient marketing tools at your disposal.

Dashboard Snapshots

Knowing what’s of interest on your site is crucial to maximize your marketing budget.

Use this information to determine what you should cross- and up-sell to loyal customers, or which products to put on sale.

Customer Accounts

Opening as account provides customers with a personalized shopping experience that they can share with their friends. Customers can save their shopping preferences, and manage their own store billing and shipping information.

Advocacy Tools

Customers who share their wishlists with family and friends make a powerful endorsement of your brand. Customers create these personalized lists from products they choose. When shared by email or RSS feed, these simple lists become powerful advocacy tools.

Reviews & Ratings

Product reviews give your customers a way to engage with your brand while fostering a sense of community. You can curate your reviews with tools to help you edit and approve comments for inappropriate content before they go live.

38 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour Customer Journey

Success!

Opening your Magento store for business requires the following areas of consideration.

While there are virtually any number of customizations you can make to the storefront and Admin, you can use each link in this is list as a place to start.

Implementation

If you need help setting up your store, you can choose from our vast network of Magento Solutions Partners.

Design

You can design your own home page or work with an experienced Magento designer or Solutions Partner to customize your site.

Product Catalog

Configure products, create categories, import existing product catalogs, and leverage APIs or third-party data management solutions.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 39

Customer Journey

Payment Methods

Magento supports a wide variety of payment methods, services, and gateways that you can offer for your customers’ convenience.

Chapter 4:  Quick Tour

Taxes

Manage your taxes with our native tools, or add third-party extensions from

Magento Connect.

Shipping Methods

Magento shipping methods are easy to set up and give you the ability to connect with carriers who can ship your products all over the world.

Thanks for your order!

Magento can help you build relationships with your customers, to bring them back to your store, again and again.

40 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Basic Configuration

Chapter 5:

Store Admin

Your store Admin is the password-protected back office where you can set up products, promotions, manage orders, and perform other administrative tasks.

This chapter provides a high-level overview of the management tasks that you can perform while running your store on a day-to-day basis.

Store Admin

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 43

Admin Login Chapter 5:  Store Admin

Admin Login

All of the basic configuration tasks are performed in the Magento Admin Panel, which is referred to in this guide as your store Admin.

44

Admin Login

To log in to your store Admin:

1.

For a new Magento installation, do the following: a.

On the last page of the Magento Installation Wizard, click the Go to Backend button.

b.

In the address bar of your browser, enter the URL that you specified in the Magento

Installation Wizard, followed by the base URL of your store’s Admin. Most Admin

URLs looks like this: http://www.mystore.com/admin

You can bookmark the Admin Login page for easy access.

2.

Enter the User Name and Password that was specified during the Magento installation.

3.

Click the Login button.

Message InBox

Your store has an inbox for the messages received from Magento. The messages are rated by importance, and might refer to updates, patches, new releases, scheduled maintenance, upcoming events, and more. Any message that is considered to be of major importance appears in a pop-up window when you log into your store. You can manage your message inbox much as you would manage your email. Check it often to stay up-to-date on the latest information from Magento!

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin Message InBox

Incoming Message

To manage incoming messages:

1.

When the Incoming Messages box appears, do one of the following: l l

Click the Read Details link for more information.

Click the Close box to remove the popup and continue.

A Latest Message notice also appears to the left, just below the header of your store. As with the popup box, you can click the Read Details link for more information.

Message Notifications Below Header

2.

To read your messages, click Go to messages inbox .

The messages in your inbox are marked by severity listed with the most recent at the top.

3.

After reading a message, you can apply any of the following actions to the message:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 45

Message InBox l l l

For more information, click the Read Details link.

To keep the message, click the Mark As Read link.

To delete the message from your inbox, click the Remove link.

Chapter 5:  Store Admin

46

Messages Inbox

To apply an action to multiple messages:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Notifications .

2.

In your message inbox, do one of the following: l l

Select the checkbox at the beginning of each message you want to manage.

Click one of the group selection options above the list to select multiple messages.

3.

When the messages that you want to manage are selected, set Actions to one of the following: l l

Mark as Read

Remove

4.

Click the Submit button to complete the process.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin Message InBox

Messages Inbox

Message Importance

Severity Color

Critical

Major

Red

Orange

Notice Green

Description

Indicates an important, time-sensitive message.

The default message severity level.

Indicates that a routine operation has taken place.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 47

Dashboard Chapter 5:  Store Admin

Dashboard

The Dashboard is the first page that appears when you log in to the Admin. It’s a hub of important information about the health of your eCommerce site, and includes snapshots of Lifetime Sales, Average Orders, Top Search Terms, Bestsellers, Most Viewed Items, and more.

Dashboard

48 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin Admin Menu

Admin Menu

All of the tools you need to manage the operation and maintenance of your store are available in the Admin menu.

Dashboard

The Dashboard gives you a quick overview of the sales and customer activity in your store. It is usually the first page that appears when you log in to the Admin.

Sales

The Sales menu is where you can find everything related to processing an order, including current and past orders, invoices, shipments, credit memos, terms and conditions, and taxes.

Catalog

The Catalog menu controls everything related to your product catalog, including products, categories, attributes, URL rewrites, search terms and indexing, product reviews, tags, and Google

Sitemap.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 49

Admin Menu Chapter 5:  Store Admin

Mobile

The Mobile menu is where you can configure the templates, content, and apps for various mobile devices and store views.

Customers

The Customers menu is where you can manage customer accounts, and customer groups. You can even see which customers are online at the moment.

Promotions

The Promotions menu is where you set up catalog and shopping cart price rules and coupons. Price rules trigger actions when a set of specific conditions is met.

Newsletter

The Newsletter menu contains the tools you need to publish newsletters and manage your list of subscribers.

50 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin

CMS

The CMS menu is where you create and manage content for your store. In addition to content pages, you can create static blocks, “widgets,” and polls.

Admin Menu

System

The System menu includes tools to configure and maintain every aspect of your store. In addition, you can install extensions and manage Web Services for integration with other applications.

Reports

The Reports menu provides a broad selection of reports that give you insight into every aspect of your store, including sales, shopping cart, products, customers, tags, reviews, and search terms.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 51

Admin Tools Chapter 5:  Store Admin

Admin Tools

The Admin includes many lists of data for products, orders, customers, search terms, pages, blocks, and so on. Each list has the same set of tools for finding records, pagination, sorting, filtering, selecting, and applying actions to records.

Global Search

The Global Search box can be used to find any value in the database, including product, customer, and order records.

Sorting

The header of each column can be used to sort the list in ascending or descending order.

Filters

The filters in the header of each column can be used to limit the list to specific values.

Some filters have additional options that can be selected from a list box, and for others, you can simply type the value you want to find.

Pagination

The pagination controls are used to view the additional pages of results.

Selection

The Selection controls above the column headers have links to Select All, Unselect All,

Select Visible, and Unselect Visible

Actions

The Action control applies an operation to any record with a checkmark in the first column.

52 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin Admin Tools

Global Record Search

The global search box is located in the Admin header, and can be used to find any record in the database. The results can include customers, products, orders, or any related attribute.

Global Record Search

To do a global search:

1.

Type the first few letters of what you are looking for into the global search box.

2.

In the list of closely matching items, click the one that you want to find.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 53

Admin Tools Chapter 5:  Store Admin

List Controls

Many pages in the Admin include a list of records displayed in a grid, with controls at the top of each column. The controls can be used to sort the list in ascending, or descending order based on the values in the column. In addition, you can filter the list based on a value in each column.

Sort Controls

To sort the data:

1.

In the upper-left corner, set Choose the Store View to the define the scope of the data to be retrieved.

2.

Click the column name of any header. The arrow indicates the current order as either ascending or descending.

3.

Use the pagination controls to view additional pages in the collection.

To set the pagination controls:

1.

Set View to the number of records that you want to view per page.

2.

In the Page box, enter the page number you want to view, or click the arrow button to advance to the next or previous, page.

54 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin Admin Tools

Pagination Controls

To filter the data:

1.

In the box below the column header, either enter or select the value you want to find.

2.

Click the Search button.

Filter Controls

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 55

Admin Tools Chapter 5:  Store Admin

Actions Control

When working with lists of data, you can use the Actions control to apply an operation to a single record, or to multiple records. The Actions control lists the operations that can be applied to the selected records. When working with the Manage Products list, you can use the Actions control to update the attributes of the group of selected products, change their status from “Disabled” to “Enabled,” or delete them from the database.

The selection of available actions varies by list, and additional options may appear, depending on the action selected. For example, when changing the status of a group of records, a Status box appears next to the Actions control with additional options.

56

Applying an Action to Selected Records

Selecting Records

The checkbox in the first column identifies each record that is a target for the action. The search filters can be used to narrow the list to the records you want to target for the action.

The selection links above the list to the left, can be used to change the checkbox state of groups of records. The options include: l l

Select All / Unselect All

Select Visible / Unselect Visible

Checkbox States

You can also use the search filter at the top of the column to list any (or all) records, or only those with a selected or unselected checkbox.. The checkbox search filter settings include:

Any Lists all records, regardless of checkbox status.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin Admin Tools

Yes

No

Lists only records with the checkbox selected.

Lists only records without the checkbox selected.

When using the Actions control to update attribute settings, you can make as many changes as necessary, and then update the records in a single step. It’s much more efficient than changing settings individually for each product record.

To apply an action to selected records:

1.

In the list, select the checkbox of each record that is targeted for the action.

2.

Set the Actions control to the operation you want to apply.

3.

Click the Submit button.

To update attributes:

1.

In the list, select the checkbox of each record to be updated.

2.

Set the Actions control to “Update Attributes,” and click the Submit button.

The Update Attributes page lists all the available attributes, which are organized by group in the Product Information panel on the left.

Update Attributes

3.

Select the Change checkbox next to each attribute, and make the necessary changes.

4.

Click the Save button to update the attributes for the group of selected records.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 57

Admin Tools

Actions by List

List

Sales

Orders

Actions

Invoices

Shipments

Cancel

Hold

Unhold

Print Invoices

Print Packingslips

Print Credit Memos

Print All

Print Shipping Labels

PDF Invoices

PDF Packing Slips

Print Shipping Labels

PDF Credit Memos

Delete

Credit Memos

Search Terms

Catalog

Manage Products

Search Terms

Manage Tags

Reviews (All / Pending)

Tags (All / Pending)

Delete

Change Status

Update Attributes

Delete

Delete

Change Status

Delete

Update Status

Delete

Change Status

Mobile

Message Queue Delete

Cancel

Customers

Manage Customers Delete

Subscribe to Newsletter

Unsubscribe from Newsletter

Assign a Customer Group

Chapter 5:  Store Admin

58 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 5:  Store Admin

List

Newsletter

Newsletter Subscribers

Actions

Unsubscribe

Delete

Admin Tools

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 59

Admin Tools

60

Chapter 5:  Store Admin

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 6:

Multiple Sites, Stores & Views

When Magento Community Edition is installed, a main website, a store, and three store views are created. You can create additional websites, stores, and store views, according to your needs. For example, in addition to your main website, you might have a additional websites with separate domains. Within each website, you can have multiple stores, and within each store, separate views.

Websites

Suppose you want to sell machine shop equipment online, and your spouse wants to sell handmade baskets. It is unlikely that you would sell both of these product lines in a single store. However, in a single Magento installation, you can do both by setting up separate websites. Each website can have its own domain name. The websites can be set up to share customer data, or to have entirely separate sets of customer data.

Stores

For your handmade baskets website, you might want to set up two stores, one specializing in wicker and one for other materials. You can set up two root categories

(one for wicker items and one for other items) and assign one to each store. Several stores of one website can have different independent domain names as well, but it should be configured on the store view level of each store.

Store Views

Your market research indicates that about half of your potential customer base speaks English, and the other half speaks Spanish. Within each store, you can create a separate store view for each language. The store views share the same catalog, but each is presented in its respective language. Customers can switch from one store view to another using the “language chooser” in the header of the store.

Setting Up Store Hierarchy

Before you begin, carefully plan your store hierarchy in advance because it is referred to throughout the configuration. Each store can have a separate root category, which makes it possible to have an entirely different set of navigation for each store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 61

Setting Up Store Hierarchy Chapter 6:  Multiple Sites, Stores & Views

To have a separate domain for each website, you must modify the configuration files on the server. To learn more, see: Tutorial: Multi-Site, Multi-Domain Setup .

62

Manage Stores

To set up a new website:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Manage Stores .

2.

From Manage Stores, click the Create Website button. Then, do the following:

Website Information a.

Enter the Name of the website. The name is for internal reference, and can refer to the domain of the site or anything else distinguish it from other sites in the hierarchy.

b.

Enter a Code that will be used on the server to point to the domain. The code must begin with a lower-case letter, and can include any combination of letters (a-z), numbers (0-9), and the hyphen (-) character.

c.

(Optional) Enter a Sort Order number to determine the sequence in which this site is listed with other sites. Enter a zero to make this site appear at the top of the list.

3.

When complete, click the Save Website button.

To set up a new store:

1.

Before you begin, set up the root category that will be used for this store.

2.

On the Admin menu, select System > Manage Stores .

3.

From Manage Stores, click the Create Store button. Then, do the following:

New Store

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 6:  Multiple Sites, Stores & Views Configuration Scope a.

Set Website to the site that is the parent of this store.

b.

Enter a Name for the store. The name is for internal reference to distinguish it from other stores in the hierarchy. For example: Private Sales Store.

c.

Set Root Category to the root category that will be used for the main navigation of the store. The root category can be the same as used for other stores, or unique to this store. For example: Private Sales Root.

4.

When complete, click Save Store .

To set up a new store view:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Manage Stores .

2.

From Manage Stores, click the Create Store View button. Then, do the following:

Store View Information a.

Set Store to the parent store of this view.

b.

Enter a Name for this store view. The name appears in the “language chooser” in the header of the store. For example: French.

c.

Enter a Code in lowercase characters to identify the view. For example: privatesales.fr.

d.

To activate the view, set Status to “Enabled.” e.

(Optional) Enter a Sort Order number to determine the sequence in which this view is listed with other views.

3.

When complete, click the Save Store View button.

Configuration Scope

If your Magento installation has multiple websites, stores, or views, you can set the scope of a configuration parameter to apply to a specific part of your installation. The

Current Configuration Scope box in the upper-left corner of the Admin workspace determines the scope of the current settings. By default, the configuration scope is set to

“Default Config.” For Admin users with restricted access, the list includes only the areas where the user is granted permission to access.

The configuration scope applies to products categories, attributes, customer management setting, and so on. The scope of each item appears in brackets after the field to indicate the range of the setting.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 63

Configuration Scope Chapter 6:  Multiple Sites, Stores & Views

64

Current Configuration Scope

If your installation includes multiple websites, stores or views, you should always set the scope to identify where you want the settings to apply. The possible settings are:

[STORE], [WEBSITE], and [GLOBAL].

Any item with the scope of [STORE] can be set differently for each view. For example, because the scope of a product name and description is [STORE], the fields can have a different value for each language. However, some configuration settings—such as postal code—are [GLOBAL] because the same setting applies throughout the system. The

[WEBSITE] scope also applies to the entire site, including all views.

To set the configuration scope:

Before making a configuration setting that applies only to a specific website, store, or view, do the following:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, select the page with the configuration settings you want to change. If necessary, click to expand the section to be configured. Then, do the following: a.

In the upper-left corner of a configuration page, set Current Configuration Scope to the website, store, or view where the configuration applies.

A checkbox appears after each field, and sometimes additional fields become available.

b.

Clear the Use Default checkbox that is after the field that you want to edit. Then, enter the new value.

c.

Repeat this process for every field that needs to be updated on the page.

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 6:  Multiple Sites, Stores & Views

Scope Settings

Scope

Store

Website

Global

Configuration Scope

Description

The setting is limited to the store view, which is often used to display a store in multiple languages.

The setting is limited to the website.

The setting applies to the entire installation.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 65

Configuration Scope

66

Chapter 6:  Multiple Sites, Stores & Views

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 7:

Store Information

The basic information for your store includes the store name and address, telephone number and email address, that appear on email messages, invoices, and other communications sent to your customers. In this chapter, you will configure the following information: l l l l l l

Store Locale

Countries Options

State Options

Shipping Settings

Store Email Addresses

Contact Us

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 67

Locale Options Chapter 7:  Store Information

Locale Options

The locale determines the language, country, tax rate, and other settings used throughout a store. The Locale Options configure the time zone and language of each store, and identify the days of your work week in the area.

68

Locale Options

To set the locale of a store:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

Click to expand the Locale Options section.

3.

Select your Timezone from the list. Then, do the following: a.

Set Locale to the store language.

b.

Set First Day of the Week to the day that is considered to be the first day of the week in your area.

c.

In the Weekend Days list, select the days which fall on a weekend in your area. (To select multiple options, hold down the Ctrl (PC) or Command (Mac) key.)

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Timezone

Locale

First Day of Week

Weekend Days

Scope

Description

Website Identifies the time zone of the primary market served by the store. Usually the timezone is the same as that used in the physical location of your business.

Store View Identifies the language, currency, and system of measurement used in the market served.

Store View Identifies the day that is considered to be the first day of the week in the market served.

Store View Identifies the days that fall on the weekend in the market served by the store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 7:  Store Information States Options

States Options

In many countries, the state, province, or region is a required part of a postal address.

The information is used for shipping and billing information, to calculate tax rates, and so on. For countries where it is not required, the field can be omitted entirely from the address, or included as an optional field.

Because standard address formats vary from one country to another, you can also edit the address template that determines how the information appears on invoices, packing slips, and shipping labels.

States Options

To set up the state options:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

Click to expand the States Options section, and do the following:

3.

In the State is required for list, select each country where you want State / Province to be a required entry. To select multiple options, hold down the Ctrl (PC) or Command

(Mac) key.

4.

Set Display not required State to one of the following:

Yes

No

In countries where the state field is not required, the field is included in the form as an optional entry.

In countries where the state field is not required, the field is omitted from the form.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

State is required for

Display not required

Scope

Global

Global

Description

Identifies the countries where you conduct business that do not require a state or province to be included in a postal address.

For countries where it is not required, determ-

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 69

Countries Options Chapter 7:  Store Information

Field

State

Scope Description ines if the State/Province field is included in the postal address of the customer. Options include:

Yes Includes the State/Province field in the customer address, even if not required by the country.

No Omits the State/Province field from the customer address if not required by the country.

Countries Options

The Countries Options establish the country where your business is located, and the countries from which you accept payment.

70

Countries Options

To set the country options for your store:

1.

From the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

Click to expand the Countries Options section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Default Country to the country where your business is located.

b.

In the Allow Countries list, select each country from which you accept orders. By default, all countries in the list are selected. To select multiple countries, hold down the Ctrl (PC) or Command (Mac) key.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 7:  Store Information Currency Setup c.

In the Postal Code is Optional list, select each country where you conduct business that does not require a ZIP or postal code to be included as part of the street address.

d.

In the European Union Countries list, select each country in the EU where you conduct business. By default, all EU countries are selected.

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Default Country

Allow Countries

Postal Code is Optional for the following countries

European Union Countries

Scope Description

Store View Identifies the country where your store is located.

Store View Identifies each country from which you accept orders.

Global

Global

Identifies the countries that do not require a ZIP or postal code in the shipping address.

Identifies the countries that are members of the

European Union.

Currency Setup

Magento Community Edition gives you the ability to accept currencies that are used in more than two hundred countries around the world. In addition to choosing the currencies that you accept, you can also manage currency rates for the store. If you accept payment in multiple currencies, make sure to monitor the currency rate settings, because any fluctuation can affect your profit margin. Currency rates can be set manually, or imported into the store. Currency symbols are used throughout the store, and appear in product prices and sales documents such as orders and invoices.

Before you can set currency rates, you must first specify the currencies that you accept, and which currency is used to display prices in your store. You can customize the currency symbols as needed, and also set the price display separately for each store or view.

Currency Options

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 71

Currency Setup Chapter 7:  Store Information

To set up currency for your store:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Currency Setup .

3.

Click to expand the Currency Options section, and do the following: a.

Set Base Currency to the primary currency that you use for online transactions.

b.

Set Default Display Currency to the currency that you use to display pricing in your store.

c.

In the Allowed Currencies list, select all currencies that you accept as payment in your store. (To select multiple currencies, hold down the Ctrl key and click each option.)

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Scope

Description

Base Currency Website The primary currency used in store transactions.

Default Display Currency Store View The primary currency used to display prices.

Allowed Currencies Store View The currencies accepted by your store for payment.

72 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 7:  Store Information Shipping Settings

Shipping Settings

The Shipping Settings establish the point of origin for all shipments made from your store or warehouse, and also your preference for managing orders that are shipped to multiple addresses.

To establish the point of origin:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Settings .

3.

If applicable, set Current Configuration Scope to the store where the configuration applies.

4.

Click to expand the Origin section.

Shipping Origin

5.

Complete the fields for each part of your point-of-origin address. If you need more room for the street address, use both address lines.

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Country

Region/State

ZIP/Postal Code

City

Street Address

Street Address Line 2

Scope

Website

Website

Website

Website

Website

Website

Description

The point-of-origin country.

The point-of-origin region or state.

The point-of-origin ZIP or postal code.

The point-of-origin city.

The point-of-origin street address.

An additional line for the point-of-origin street address, if needed.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 73

Shipping Settings Chapter 7:  Store Information

To configure shipments to multiple addresses:

1.

On the Shipping Settings page, click to expand the Options section. Then, do the following:

Shipping Options a.

To allow items from a single order to be shipping to multiple addresses, set Allow

Shipping to Multiple Addresses to “Yes.” b.

To limit the quantity of a single item that can be shipping to multiple addresses, enter the number in the Maximum Qty Allowed for Shipping to Multiple

Addresses field.

2.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Allow Shipping to Multiple Addresses

Scope

Website

Maximum Qty Allowed for Shipping to Multiple

Addresses

Website

Description

Determines if you allow single orders to be shipping to multiple addresses. Options include: Yes

/ No

Sets a limit for the number of units of a product that can be shipping to multiple addresses.

74 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 7:  Store Information Store Email Addresses

Store Email Addresses

You can have up to five different email addresses to represent distinct functions or departments for each store or view. In addition to the following predefined email identities, there are two custom identities that you can set up according to your needs.

l l l

General Contact

Sales Representative

Customer Support

Each identity and its associated email address can be associated with specific automated email messages and appear as the sender of email messages that are sent from your store.

Store Email Addresses

Step 1:

Set Up the Email Addresses for Your Domain

Before you can configure email addresses for the store, each must be set up as a valid email address for your domain. Follow the instructions from your server administrator or email hosting provider to create the email address you need.

Step 2:

Configure the Email Addresses for Your Store

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Store Email Addresses .

Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 75

Store Email Addresses Chapter 7:  Store Information a.

Click to expand the General Contact section.

b.

If you have multiple stores or views, set the Current Configuration Scope in the upper-left corner to identify the store or view where the configuration applies. Then, clear the checkbox after each field so new values can be entered.

General Contact c.

In the Sender Name field, type the name of the person that you to appear as the sender of all email messages that are associated with the General Contact.

d.

In the Sender Email field, type the associated email address.

3.

Repeat this process for any other email addresses that you plan to use.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Step 3: Update the Sales Email Configuration as Needed

If you use custom email addresses, make sure to update the configuration of any related email messages, so the correct identity appears as the sender.

1.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales Email .

2.

Click to expand each section, and make sure that the correct store email is selected as the sender of the message.

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

76 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 7:  Store Information Contact Us

Contact Us

The Contact Us link in the footer of each page is an easy way for customers to keep in touch with you. The form is enabled by default, and can be configured to send inquiries to a specific email address and replies from a specific store identity.

Contact Us

To configure the Contact Us form:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, click Contacts .

3.

Click to expand the Contact Us section, and set Enable Contact Us to “Yes.”

4.

Click to expand the Email Options section. Then, do the following:

Email Options a.

In the Send Emails To field, enter the email address where the form information is to be sent.

b.

Set Email Sender to the store identity you want to use for the replies sent.

c.

Select the Email Template used to format the data sent from the form.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 77

Contact Us

78

Chapter 7:  Store Information

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 8:

Industry Compliance

Magento Community Edition offers a range of security and privacy capabilities that meet legal requirements and industry guidelines for online merchants. Some are mandated by the payment card industry, and others are required by law, depending on your location. The topics covered in this chapter include: l l l

PCI Compliance

Privacy Policy

Cookie Law

You will learn about PCI compliance, and the importance of establishing procedures to protect payment information. You will also learn how to bring your store into compliance with the Cookie Law, which is a requirement in some countries, and considered a “best practice” in others. In addition, you will learn how to customize and maintain a privacy policy for your store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 79

PCI Compliance Guidelines Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance

PCI Compliance Guidelines

The Payment Card Industry (PCI) has established a set of requirements for businesses that accept payment by credit card over the Internet. In addition to the need to maintain a secure hosting environment, there are additional requirements that merchants must meet to ensure the privacy of cardholder data. Every merchant who handles customer credit card information is required by the Payment Card Industry to conduct business within the following guidelines:

PCI Requirement Checklist

Install and maintain a firewall configuration to protect cardholder data.

Do not use vendor-supplied defaults for system passwords and other security parameters.

Protect stored cardholder data.

Encrypt transmission of cardholder data across open, public networks.

Use and regularly update antivirus software.

Develop and maintain secure systems and applications.

Restrict access to cardholder data by business need to know.

Assign a unique ID to each person with computer access.

Restrict physical access to cardholder data.

Track and monitor all access to network resources and cardholder data.

Regularly test security systems and processes.

Maintain a policy that addresses information security.

As your business grows, you may be required to file a compliance report on an annual basis. PCI reporting requirements increase in proportion to merchant level, but are waived for businesses that process fewer than 20,000 credit card transactions per year.

To learn more, visit the PCI Security Standards Council website.

80 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance Privacy Policy

Privacy Policy

Your store includes a sample privacy policy that must be updated with your own information. Your privacy policy should describe the type of information that your company collects, and how it is used. It should also list the filenames of cookies that are placed on the computers of people who visit your store. Any additional cookies that are associated with third-party extensions and add-ons should be included in the list. For a complete list of the cookies used by Magento, see

Cookie Restriction Mode .

Privacy Policy

To edit your privacy policy:

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content .

2.

Find the privacy policy in the list, and click to open the page.

3.

In the panel on the left, click Content .

4.

To work in WYSIWYG mode, click the Show/Hide Editor button.

5.

Make the necessary changes to the content.

6.

When complete, click the Save Page button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 81

Cookie Law Compliance Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance

Cookie Law Compliance

Cookies are small files that are saved to the computer of each visitor to your site, and used as temporary holding places for information. Information that is saved in cookies is used to personalize the shopping experience, link visitors to their shopping carts, measure traffic patterns, and improve the effectiveness of promotions.

To keep pace with legislation in many countries regarding the use of cookies, Magento offers merchants a choice of methods for obtaining customer consent.

Implied Consent

Using cookies with implied consent is the method that is currently the most widely adopted in the UK. Implied consent means that visitors to your store have a clear understanding that cookies are a necessary part of operations, and by using your site, have indirectly granted permission to use them.

The key to gaining implied consent is to provide enough information for a visitor to make an informed decision. Many stores display a message at the top of all standard pages that provides a brief overview of how cookies are used, with a link to the store’s privacy policy. The privacy policy should describe the type of information that your store collects, and how it is used.

Expressed Consent

Using cookies with implied consent is the method that is currently the most widely adopted in the UK. Implied consent means that visitors to your store have a clear understanding that cookies are a necessary part of operations, and by using your site, have indirectly granted permission to use them.

Cookie Restriction Mode

Operating your store in “Cookie Restriction Mode” requires that visitors express their consent before cookies can be saved to their computers. Unless consent is granted, many features of your store become unavailable. For example, if Google Analytics is available for your store, it can be invoked only after the visitor has granted permission to use cookies.

82

Cookie Restriction Notice In Footer

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance Cookie Law Compliance

When Cookie Restriction Mode is enabled, visitors to your store are notified that cookies are required for full-featured operations. Depending on your theme, the message might appear above the header, below the footer, or somewhere else on the page. The message links to your privacy policy for more information, and encourages visitors to click the

Allow button to grant consent. After consent is granted, the message disappears. The

Cookie Restriction Mode message resides in a CMS static block, and can be edited to suit your voice and style.

Your privacy policy should include the name of your store and contact information, and explain the purpose of each cookie that is used by your store. See the end of this topic for a complete list of the cookies used.

Step 1:

Enable Cookie Restriction Mode

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under General, click Web .

2.

Click to expand the Session Cookie Management section, and do the following:

Cookie Session Management a.

Enter the Cookie Lifetime in seconds.

b.

If you want to make cookies available to other folders, enter the Cookie Path . To make the cookies available anywhere in the site, enter a forward slash.

c.

To make the cookies available to a subdomain, enter the subdomain name in the

Cookie Domain field. (subdomain.yourdomain.com) To make cookies available to all subdomains, enter the domain name preceded by a period. (.yourdomain.com) d.

To prevent scripting languages such as JavaScript from gaining access to cookies, set Use HTTP Only to “Yes.” e.

Set Cookie Restriction Mode to “Yes.”

Step 2:

Edit the Cookie Restriction Message

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Static Blocks .

2.

Find the Cookie Restriction Notice , and click to open the block. Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 83

Cookie Law Compliance Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance

Editing the Cookie Restriction Notice a.

Select each Store View where the notice should appear.

b.

Set Status to “Enabled.” c.

In the Content box, edit the message as needed.

3.

When complete, click the Save Block button.

Step 3:

Update Your Privacy Policy

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content .

2.

Find your Privacy Policy in the list, and click to open the page.

3.

In the panel on the left, click Content.

If necessary, click the Show/Hide Editor button to work in WYSIWYG mode.

84

Privacy Policy

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance Cookie Law Compliance

4.

Update your privacy policy to describe the information that your company collects, and how it is used. You can include the information from the tables at the end of this topic.

5.

When complete, click the Save Page button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Cookie Lifetime

Cookie Path

Cookie Domain

USE HTTP Only

Description

Determines when the browser can delete Magento cookies.

The default value is 3600, which means that cookies remain in the browser for one hour.To ensure that cookies expire at the end of a browser session, set the lifetime to zero.

Allows you to make Magento cookies available other folders.

If you want to make cookies available anywhere in a site, you should set this value to a single forward slash.

Determines if cookies are visible to subdomains. (http://subdomain.domain.com) To ensure that your coookies are availabl to all subdomains, enter your domain name with a prefix of a period. (.domain.com)

Makes the cookie available only through HTTP protocol, and unavailable to JavaScript or other scripting languages.

Magento Standard Cookie

Cookie Name Cookie Description

Indicates if a customer is allowed to use cookies.

USER_ALLOWED_SAVE_

COOKIE external_no_cache A flag that indicates if caching is disabled.

persistent_shopping_cart The session key.

Stf pollN frontend guest-view

If product links were sent to friends, stores the timestamps in the format: $timeStamp1, $timestamp2, ..., $timestampN

A poll ID that indicates if a vote has occurred.

Session ID

Allows guests to edit their orders.

Google Analytics Cookies

If Google Analytics is enabled and using cookies is allowed by a customer, Magento saves the following Google Analytics cookies. For more information, see Google’s cookie usage documentation.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 85

Cookie Law Compliance

Cookie

_utma

_utmb

_utmc

_utmz

Chapter 8:  Industry Compliance

Description

Distinguishes users and sessions.

Determines new sessions/visits.

Determines if the user was in a new session/visit.

Stores the traffic source or campaign that explains how the user reached your site.

86 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Product Catalog

Chapter 9:

Navigation by Category

The term, navigation refers to the methods shoppers use to move from page to page throughout your store. The main menu, or top navigation of your store is actually a list of category links. The category structure of your catalog is the main way people find products in your catalog. You will also find categories in the breadcrumb trail that runs across the top of most pages, and in the “layered navigation” that appears on the left side of some two- or three-column pages. These are all examples of how categories can be used to navigate throughout your store.

For a product to be visible in your store, it must be assigned to at least one category.

Each category can have a dedicated landing page with an image, static block, a description, and list of products. You can also create special designs for category pages that become active for a specific period of time such as for a holiday season or promotion.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Categories in Main Menu

89

Top Navigation Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

Top Navigation

The main menu of your store displays the selection of categories that are available in your catalog. You can think of the top navigation as different departments in your store.

A top-level category serves as landing page for all the subcategories below. The position and presentation of the top navigation might vary by theme, but the way it works is the same.

Top Navigation

The first level of categories below the root typically appear as options in the main menu.

Below that, you can have as many additional subcategories as needed. The category structure of your catalog can influence how well your site is indexed by search engines.

The deeper a category, the less likely it is to be thoroughly indexed. As a general rule, anywhere between one and three levels is considered to be the best. You can set the maximum number of levels that are available in your top navigation in the system configuration.

To set the depth of the top navigation:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Category Top Navigation section.

Category Top Navigation

4.

In the Maximal Depth field, enter the number of subcategory levels you want to make available for the top navigation.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

90 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Breadcrumb Trail

Breadcrumb Trail

A breadcrumb trail is a set of links that shows where you are in relation to other pages in the store. You can click any link in the breadcrumb trail to return to a previous page.

Here’s an example of a breadcrumb trail from the Magento Demo Store:

HOME/ACCESSORIES/JEWELRY/PEARL STUD EARRINGS

The breadcrumb trail can be configured to appear on CMS content pages, as well as catalog pages. The format and position of the breadcrumb trail varies by theme, but it is usually located in the upper-left, just below the header.

Breadcrumb Trail

To add breadcrumbs to CMS pages:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select Web . Then, do the following: a.

Click to expand the Default Pages section.

b.

Set Show Breadcrumbs for CMS Pages to “Yes.”

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Show Breadcrumbs for CMS Pages

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 91

Layered Navigation Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

Layered Navigation

Layered navigation makes it easy to find products based on category, price range, or any other available attribute. Layered navigation usually appears in the left column of search results and category pages and sometimes on the home page. The standard layered navigation includes a “Shop By” list of categories and price range. You can configure the way layered navigation appears in your store, including the product count and price range.

92

Layered Navigation by Category and Price

To set up layered navigation:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Layered Navigation section. Then, do the following:

Configure Layered Navigation a.

To display the results after each attribute, set Display Product Count to “Yes.” b.

Set Price Navigation Step Calculation to one of the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Layered Navigation l l

Automatic

Manual c.

For a manual calculation, enter a number in the Default Price Navigation Step field to determine how the price ranges are grouped. For example, if you enter 100, the prices will appear in groups of 100.

Manual Price Navigtion Step

Filterable Attributes

Layered navigation can be used to search for products by category or by attribute. For example, when a shopper chooses the Apparel/Shoes category from the top navigation, the initial results include all products in the shoes category. The list can be filtered further by choosing a specific color or size, or both color and size.

Filterable Attributes In Layered Navigation

Step 1:

Set the Attribute Properties

For an attribute to be included in layered navigation, its property settings must be set to make it filterable.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 93

Layered Navigation Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes .

2.

Click to open the attribute in edit mode, and do the following: a.

Scroll down to the Frontend Properties section, and set Use In Layered Navigation to one of the following: l l

Filterable (with results)

Filterable (no results) b.

Set Use In Search Results Layered Navigation to “Yes.”

Step 2:

Make the Category an Anchor

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Categories .

2.

In the Categories panel on the left, click to open the category.

3.

On the Display Settings tab, set Is Anchor to “Yes.”

4.

Click the Save Category button.

To test the setting, go to your store and select the category in the top navigation. The selection of filterable attributes for the products in the category appears in the layered navigation.

Price Navigation

Price navigation can be used to distribute products by price range in layered navigation.

You can also split each range in intervals. There are ways to calculate price navigation: l l l

Automatic (Equalize Price Ranges)

Automatic (Equalize Product Counts)

Manual

With the first two methods, the navigation steps are calculated automatically. The manual method lets you specify a division limit for price intervals. The following example shows the difference between price navigation steps of 10 and 100.

94 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Layered Navigation

Price Navigation Steps of 10 and 100

Iterative Splitting

Iterative splitting provides the best distribution of products among price ranges. With iterative splitting, after a customer chooses to view the $0.00-$99 range, the customer can drill-down through several sub-ranges of prices. Price-range splitting stops when the number of products reaches the threshold set by the Interval Division Limit.

To configure price layered navigation:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

2.

In the upper-left corner, set Current Configuration Scope to the store view to be configured.

3.

Click to expand the Layered Navigation section.

4.

If you want to display the number of products in parentheses after each filtered item, set

Display Product Count to “Yes.”

5.

Set Price Navigation Steps Calculation to one of the following methods:

Method 1:

Automatic (Equalize Price Ranges)

Set Price Navigation Steps Calculation to “Automatic (Equalize Price Ranges.)” This setting uses the existing price layered navigation algorithm, and is similar to the

Automatic option in earlier versions of Magento.

Layered Navigation

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 95

Creating Categories Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

Method 2:

Automatic (Equalize Product Counts)

a.

Set Price Navigation Steps Calculation to “Automatic (Equalize Price Ranges).” b.

Set Display Price Interval as One Price to “Yes” if you want to display a single price when multiple products with the same price.

c.

In the Interval Division Limit field, enter the threshold for a number of products within a price range. The range cannot be further split beyond this limit., The default value is 9.

96

Automatic (Equalize Product Counts)

Method 3:

Manual

a.

Set Price Navigaton Steps Calculation to “Manual.” b.

Enter a value to determine the Default Price Navigation Step .

c.

Enter the Maximum Number of Price Intervals allowed, up to 100.

Manual

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Creating Categories

Every product in your catalog must be assigned to at least one category. Before you add products to your catalog, you must first establish the basic category structure of your catalog. The number of subcategory levels that you can have in the top navigation is set in the system configuration.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Creating Categories

Category Structure

When working in the Admin, the category structure is like an upside-down tree, with the root at the top. Each section of the tree can be expanded and collapsed. Any disabled or hidden categories are grayed out.

Category Tree

Step 1:

Create a Category

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Categories .

2.

Before you begin, set Choose Store View to the store or view. By default, the scope of the category configuration is set to “All Store Views.”

3.

In the category tree, click the category that is to be the parent of the new category. The parent is the level just above the new category.

If you’re starting from the beginning without any data, there might be only two categories in the list: “Default Category,” which is the root, and an “Example Category.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 97

Creating Categories Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

4.

Click the Add Subcategory button.

Step 2:

Complete the General Information

1.

In the General Information section, do the following: a.

(Required) Type the Name of the category.

b.

(Required) To enable the category, set Is Active to “Yes.” c.

You can enter a URL Key for the category, or let the system automatically create one that is based on the category name.

2.

If supported by your theme, you can display a Thumbnail image in the main menu for each category. Click the Choose File button and select the image to upload.

3.

In the Description box, enter a paragraph or two of descriptive text for the category landing page.

4.

To display an Image at the top of the category landing page, click the Choose File button and select the image to upload.

5.

Complete the category meta data: l l l

Page Title

Meta Keywords

Meta Description

6.

(Required) To include the category in the main menu, set Include in Navigation Menu to “Yes.”

7.

Click the Save Category button. Then, take note of the following: l l l

The new category now appears in the tree. If it’s not in the correct position, you can drag it to another location in the tree.

In addition to the category name, it has an ID number shown in parentheses, just after the name at the top of the page.

A URL Key that is based on the category name can be automatically generated for the category.

98

Category URL Key

Step 3:

Complete the Display Settings

You can configure the category landing page to display both a static block and product

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Creating Categories list, or one or the other. A static block can provide additional information, including text, images, and even embedded video.

Display Settings

1.

On the Display Settings tab, do the following: a.

Set Display Mode to one of the following: l l l

Products Only

Static Block Only

Static Block and Products b.

If applicable, set CMS Block to the static block that you want to appear on the category page.

c.

If you want this category page to display the “Filter by Attribute” section of layered navigation, set Is Anchor to “Yes.” d.

Clear the checkbox under Default Product Listing Sort By . Then select one of the available values to sort the list. By default, all available attributes are listed. The default values typically include: l l l

Best Value

Name

Price

2.

When complete, click the Save Category button.

Modifying Categories

After a category is established, it can be edited, moved to another position in the category tree, or deleted from the catalog. However, if your catalog is live, you should consider how the change might impact any existing links to products in the category.

For example, if your product URLs include the category path, and the category name is changed, any existing links to products in the category will be broken. To avoid this

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 99

Creating Categories Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category problem, you can configure your catalog to automatically create a permanent redirect if the URL key changes. You can also use the

URL Rewrite

tool to redirect traffic from an old URL to a new one.

To move a category:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Categories .

2.

To move a category, simply drag-and-drop it to a new location. Category order changes are saved automatically.

To delete a category:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Categories .

2.

Click to select the category you want to delete.

A deleted category cannot be restored, so make sure that you have selected the correct category before proceeding.

3.

Click the Delete Category button to save your changes.

Root Categories

The catalog structure is like an upside-down tree, with the root on top. All categories in your catalog are nested below the root. Because the root category is the highest level of the catalog, your store can have only one root category active at a time. You can, however, create additional root categories for alternate catalog structures, different stores, and views. The root category is not visible to customers in the store, and does not have a URL key.

100

Root Categories

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Creating Categories

Step 1:

Create a New Root Category

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Categories .

2.

In the upper-left of the Manage Categories page, click the Add Root Category button.

Then, complete the following required fields: a.

Enter a Name for the root category.

b.

Set Is Active to “Yes.” c.

If you want this root category to be in the main menu, set Include in Navigation

Menu to “Yes.”

3.

Complete the remaining optional fields as needed: a.

Click the Choose File to upload a Thumbnail Image for the root category.

b.

Enter a Description of the root category.

c.

Click the Choose File button to upload an Image to the root category.

d.

Complete the following meta data: l l l

Page Title

Meta Keywords

Meta Description

4.

Click the Display Settings tab. Then, set Is Anchor to “Yes.”

5.

When complete, click the Save Category button.

Step 2:

Add Subcategories to the New Root

1.

From the Categories page, click the General tab.

2.

In the category tree on the left, click to select the new root category you created in the last step.

3.

Click the Add Subcategory button.

4.

Give the subcategory a Name , and set Is Active to “Yes.”

5.

Click the Save Category button.

6.

Repeat this process to create as many subcategories as you need.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 101

Creating Categories Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

Step 3:

Apply the New Root Category to Your Store

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Manage Stores .

2.

On the Manage Stores page, under Store Name, click the Main Store link.

3.

Change Root Category to the new root category.

4.

Click the Save Store button.

Hidden Categories

There are many ways to use hidden categories. You might want to create additional category levels for your own internal purposes, but show only the higher-level categories to your customers. Or, you might want to link to a category that is not included in the navigation menu.

To create hidden categories:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Categories .

2.

In the Categories panel on the left, select the category you want to exclude from the navigation.

3.

On the General Information tab, do the following: a.

Set Is Active to “No.” b.

Set Include in Navigation Menu to “No.”

4.

On the Display Settings tab, set Is Anchor to “No.”

5.

Although the category is hidden, you can still create additional subcategories beneath it, and make them active. Complete the following settings for each hidden subcategory: a.

On the General Information tab, set Is Active to “Yes.” b.

On the Display Settings tab, set Is Anchor to “Yes.”

As active categories, you can now link to them from other places in your store, but they will not appear in the navigation menu.

6.

When complete, click the Save Category button.

102 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category General Information

General Information

On the General Information tab, complete the basic information about the category you are creating or editing. You can enter keywords to improve the way the category is indexed by search engines, create a URL key for the category, and activate or deactivate the category.

General Information

Field Descriptions

Field

Name

Is Active

URL Key

Description

(Required) The category name appears in the navigation, and also in the URL key of the category page and associated product pages.

(Required) To make this category available, select “Yes.”

Options include: Yes / No

The URL Key is a relative path to the category, and is auto-

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 103

Display Settings Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

Field

Thumbnail Image

Description

Image

Page Title

Meta Keywords

Meta Description

Include in Navigation

Menu

Description matically generated when the category is saved. The URL Key must be all lower-case characters, with no spaces. As a best practice, each word is separated by a hyphen. If you edit the default URL key, a custom redirect is created automatically. A root category does not have a URL key.

If supported by your theme, a thumbnail image can be associated with each category and appear as part of the option in the main menu of the store.

The category description, if used, appears below the category image- and before the product list.

The category image, if used, appears at the top of the category page, before the description and product list.

As an alternative, you can display a CMS static block in place of the description and image. (See

Category Display Settings .)

The category page title appears in the browser tab and title bar. As a best practice, the title should be not more than twelve words in length, and should include a combination of primary and secondary keywords.

Keywords are used by some search engines, and not by others. You can use a keyword search tool to identify high value keywords that relate to your category. A general rule is to use no more than thirty keywords, or 180 characters. Avoid repeats, and empty words such as “a,” “an,” “or” and “that.”

Enter a description of the category, using approximately twenty-five words or 150 characters.

(Required) Determines if the category is included in the main menu. Options include:

Yes Include this category in the top navigation, select

“Yes.”

No Hides the category, although it is active.Hidden categories do not appear in the top navigation, but are included in layered navigation.

Display Settings

The Display Settings determine which content elements appear on a category page and the order that products are listed. You can enable CMS blocks, set the anchor status of the category, and manage sorting options from this page.

104 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Display Settings

Display Settings

Field Descriptions

Field

Display Mode

CMS Block

Scope

Description

Store View Determines the content elements displayed on the category page. Options include:

Products Only

Static Block Only

Static Block and Products

Store View To display a CMS static block at the top of the category page, select the name of the block from the list.

Is Anchor

Available Product Listing

Sort By

Default Product Listing

Sort By

Layered Navigation Price

Step

Global When set to “Yes,” includes the “filter by attribute” section in the layered navigation. Options include: Yes / No

Store View (Required) The default values are set to set to

Value, Name, and Price. To customize the sorting option, clear the Use All Available Attributes checkbox and select the attributes you want to use. You can define and add attributes as needed.

Store View (Required) To define the default “Sort By” option, clear the “Use Config Settings” checkbox and select an attribute.

By default, Magento displays the price range in increments of 10, 100, and 1000, depending on the products in the list. To change the Price Step range, clear the “Use Config Settings” checkbox.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 105

Custom Design Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

Custom Design

The Custom Design tab gives you control over the look and feel of a category and all assigned product pages, including the content blocks and page layout.

You can customize a category page its assigned products for a promotion or to differentiate the category from others and increase sales. For example, you might develop distinctive design for a brand or special line of products.

106

Custom Design

To create a custom category design:

1.

If the parent category of the selected category has already been customized and you want to use same settings, set Use Parent Category Settings to “Yes.”

2.

To apply the custom design to all the products assigned to the category, set Apply to

Products to “Yes.” Otherwise, the customization applies to only the category page.

3.

To apply a different theme to the category, select the theme you want to use from the

Custom Theme list.

4.

To apply the category design to a specific range of time, click the calendar to select both the Active From and Active To dates. Otherwise, the design will take effect when you save the changes to the category.

5.

Click the Save Category button to save your changes.

Field Descriptions

Field

Use Parent Category Settings

Apply to Products

Scope

Description

Store View To inherit the design settings from the parent category set this option to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

Store View To apply the custom settings to all products in

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category Category Products

Field

Custom Theme

Active From

Active To

Page Layout

Custom Layout Update

Scope

Description the category, set to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

Store View Select the custom theme you want to apply from the list of available themes.

Store View If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the beginning date, or select the date from the calendar.

Store View If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the ending date, or select the date from the calendar.

Store View To apply a different layout to the category page, select one of the following:

No layout updates

This option is pre-selected by default and does not apply layout changes to the category page.

Empty

1 column

This option lets you define your own page layout.(Requires an understanding of XML.)

Applies a one-column layout to the category page.

2 columns with left bar

Applies a two-column layout with a left sidebar to the category page.

2 columns with right bar

3 columns

Applies a two-column layout with a right sidebar to the category page.

Applies a three-column layout to the category page.

Store View You can further customize the theme by making layout updates in XML code.

Category Products

The Category Products tab lists the products that are currently assigned to the category.

From the list, you can easily add and remove products from the category.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 107

Category Products Chapter 9:  Navigation by Category

108

Category Products

To assign products to a category:

1.

From the category record, click the Category Products tab. Then, do the following: a.

Use the filters and checkbox control to find the products you want to assign: l l l

To display all products currently assigned to the category, set the checkbox control to “Yes.”

To display all products that are not assigned to the category, set the checkbox control to “No.”

To display all products, set the checkbox control to “Any.” b.

Press the Search button.

c.

To list all products again, click the Reset Filter button.

2.

Select the checkbox of each product you want to assign to the category.

3.

When complete, click the Save Category button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:

Managing Attributes

Attributes are the building blocks of your product catalog, and describe specific characteristics of a product. Here are a few ways you can use attributes to enhance the shopping experience: l l l l l l

Input controls for product options

Provide additional information on product pages

Search parameters

In product comparison reports

As layered navigation “Shop By” parameters

In catalog and shopping cart price rules

Each attribute contains a value that describes a characteristic of a product, such as

“color” or “fabric.” The “color” attribute with the “dropdown” input type might contain many values, although only a few apply to any given product. Because a single attribute can be used with multiple products, your store needs to have only one attribute for color.

You can create as many attributes as you need, and assign the most common value as the default, to make it easy for your customers to select the option.

The attributes that make up a product are combined into an attribute set, which is used as template to create new products. The attribute set determines which fields are included in a product, and how they are grouped in the Product Information panel. Magento has a default attribute set with a standard selection of product attributes such as Name, Price, Description, and so on. If you want to keep it simple, you can use the default attribute set for your entire catalog.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 109

Attribute Input Types Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

Attribute Input Types

When viewed from the Admin, attributes are the fields that you complete when you create a product. The input type that is assigned to an attribute determines the type of data that can be entered and the format of the field or input control.

From the standpoint of the customer, attributes provide information about the product, and are the options and data entry fields that must be completed to purchase a product.

Property

Text Field

Text Area

Date

Yes/No

Dropdown

Multiple Select

Price

Media Image

Fixed Product Tax

Description

A single line input field for text.

A multiple-line input field for entering paragraphs of text such as a product description. You can use the WYSIWYG Editor to format the text with HTML tags, or type the tags directly into the text.

Fields used for entering date values are followed by an icon that displays either a calendar or list of dates when clicked.

Depending on your system configuration,a date can be typed directly into the field, or selected from the calendar or list.

Displays a drop-down list with pre-defined options of “Yes” and “No.”

Displays a drop-down list of values. Only one item can be selected at a time. The Dropdown input type is a key component of configurable products.

Displays a drop-down list of values. To select more than one option, hold the Ctrl key down and click each item.

This input type is used to create price fields that are in addition to the predefined attributes, Price, Special Price, Tier Price and Cost. The currency used is determined by your system configuration.

Gives you the ability to associate an image with a product, that is something other than a product image. For example, you might include the product logo, care instructions, or an image of the ingredients from a food label. When you add a media image attribute to the attribute set of a product, it becomes an additional image type, along with Base, Small, and Thumbnail.

The media image attribute can be excluded from the thumbnail gallery, but is still available to be used.

Lets you define FPT rates based on the requirements of your locale. To learn more, see:

General Tax Settings .

110 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes Creating Attributes

Creating Attributes

The properties of an attribute determine how it can be used in your catalog and how it appears throughout your store. In addition to the basic properties, there are additional properties for drop-down and multiple-select input types, their values, and associated labels. The title, or label, identifies the attribute in the Admin and your storefront. If your store is available in multiple languages, you can enter a different translated label for each language.

Attributes can be created using the Manage Attributes tool, and also from inside a product record.

Manage Attributes

Step 1:

Define the Attribute Properties

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes . Then, click the

Add New Attribute button.

2.

In the Attribute Properties section, complete the following required (*) properties: a.

Enter a unique Attribute Code to identify the attribute internally. The code should be all lowercase characters without spaces.

b.

In the Apply To list, choose each product type that is associated with the attribute.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 111

Creating Attributes Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

Attribute Properties

3.

Complete the remaining

Attribute Properties

as needed.

a.

Set Scope to the indicate where the attribute can be used.

b.

Set Catalog Input Type for Store Owner to the type of

input control

used by the store administrator during data entry.

c.

If you want to prevent duplicate values from being entered in this field, set Unique

Value to “Yes.” d.

To require that a value must be entered in the field before the record can be saved, set Values Required to “Yes.” e.

To run a validity test of data entered into the field, set Input Validation for Store

Owner to the type of data the attribute should contain.

4.

In the

Frontend Properties

section, complete as many of the settings as needed.

112

Frontend Properties

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes Creating Attributes

Step 2

: Define the Label and Values

1.

In the Attribute Information panel on the left, select Manage Label / Options . Then, do the following: a.

In the Manage Titles section, under Admin, enter a descriptive label to identify the field during data entry.

b.

The next column determines how the label appears in your storefront. You can leave the box blank to use the Admin label as the default.

c.

If your store is available in multiple languages, enter a translated label into each box, as needed.

2.

For drop-down or multiple-select input types, do the following: a.

In the Manage Options section, click the Add Option button.

b.

In the new row, under Admin , type the value you want to use in your store's Admin.

c.

Enter the value you want your customers to see. (Leave blank to use the Admin value as the default.) d.

If applicable, enter a translated value for each language supported.

e.

Enter a number to determine the Position of this value in relation to other options in the list.

f.

Select Is Default to automatically select this value.

g.

Repeat these steps for each value you want to add to the list.

Manage Label / Options for Dropdown Input Type

3.

When complete, click the Save Attribute button.

The attribute appears in the Manage Attributes list, sorted in alphabetical order by

Attribute Code. Use the

Page controls

to view each page of the list.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 113

Deleting Attributes Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

Deleting Attributes

If you created sample data while setting up your store, it is possible that you now have some attributes that aren’t needed for your catalog.

When an attribute is deleted, it is removed from any related products and attribute sets.

System attributes are part of the core functionality of your store and cannot be deleted.

To delete an attribute:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes .

2.

In the list, find the attribute and click to open the record.

3.

Click the Delete Attribute button.

4.

When prompted to confirm, click OK .

Creating an Attribute Set

One of the first steps when creating a product is to choose the attribute set that is used as a template for the product record. The attribute set determines the fields that are available during data entry, and the values that appear to the customer.

114

Manage Attribute Sets

Your store comes with an initial attribute set called “default” which contains a set of commonly-used attributes. If you would like to add only a small number of attributes, you can add them to the default attribute set. However, if you sell products that require specific types of information, such as cameras, it might be better to create a dedicated attribute set that includes the special attributes (fields) needed to describe the product.

A single attribute can be used by as many different attribute sets as is necessary. For example, the attribute “color” can be included in an attribute set for clothing, paint, or for any number of different products.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes Creating an Attribute Set

To create an attribute set:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes> Manage Attribute Sets .

2.

Click the Add New Set button. Then, do the following:

Edit Set Name a.

Enter a Name for the attribute set.

b.

In the Based On field, select another attribute set from which this attribute set is to inherit attributes. This option enables you to reuse the attributes already defined in a set to build other attribute sets. The simple option is to leave the Default option that appears in this field.

3.

Click the Save Attribute Set button. The next page displays the following: l l l

The top left of the page shows the name of the attribute set defined earlier. You have the option to edit the name because this value is for internal use.

The center of the page shows a hierarchical tree representing Groups for attributes.

The right side of the page shows a list of defined attributes that are not assigned to this attribute set.

4.

Select the attribute to be assigned to this Group by dragging them from the Unassigned

Attributes area on the right into the relevant Group in the middle of the page.

5.

When the attribute set is complete, click the Save Attribute Set button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Edit Attribute Set

115

Attribute Quick Reference Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

System Attributes are marked with a dot and cannot be removed from the Groups list.

However, you can drag them to another Group in the attribute set.

To create a new attribute group:

1.

In the Groups section of the attribute set, click the Add New button.

2.

Enter a Name for the new group, and click OK .

3.

Do either of the following: l l

Drag Unassigned Attributes to the new group.

Drag attributes from any other group to the new group.

The new group becomes a section in the Product Information panel for any product that is based on this attribute set.

Attribute Quick Reference

Product Type Properties

Property Description

Apply To

Use to Create Configurable Product

Identifies the product types that can use the attribute. Visibility must be set to include the catalog.

Identifies the attribute one that will be used to create a dropdown list of options for a configurable product.

Data Entry Properties

Property Description

Default Value

Unique Value

Displays a common entry as a starting value.

Prevents duplicate values from being entered.

Values Required

Input Validation

Requires a value to be entered before the record can be saved.

Performs a validation check of the data, based on data type, or format.

Search and Navigation Properties

Property Description

Use in Quick Search Lets customers use the Search box to find items based on the

116 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes Attribute Quick Reference

Property Description

Use in Advanced Search Includes the attribute as a field on the Advanced Search form.

Use in Layered Navigation

Use in Search Results

Layered Navigation

Position

Includes the attribute in the layered navigation that is displayed for category lists.

Includes the attribute in the layered navigation that is displayed for search results lists.

Use in Product Listing

Use for Sorting in

Product Listing

Determines the position of the attribute when listed with others in the layered navigation list.

(Depending on theme) Includes the attribute in the product listing.

(Depending on theme) Includes this attribute as an option in the Sort By list, which can be used to sort a product list.

Rules and Comparison Properties

Property Description

Comparable on Frontend

Use for Promo Rule

Conditions

Includes the attribute in the Compare Products report.

Allows the attribute to be used as the basis of a condition that triggers a promotional Price Rule or Shopping Cart rule.

Presentation Properties

Property Description

Visible on Product View

Page

Allow HTML Tags on

Frontend

Includes the attribute on the Additional Information tab of the product view page.

Permits text fields and areas to be manually tagged with

HTML.

Enable WYSIWYG Editor Makes the WYSIWYG Editor available for tagging a text field or text area with HTML.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 117

Attribute Properties Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

Attribute Properties

The Attribute Properties define the individual characteristics that determine how an attribute can be used in the product catalog.

118

Attribute Properties

Property Descriptions

Property Description

Attribute Code

Scope

(Required) A unique identifier for internal use. The Attribute

Code must begin with a letter, but can include a combination of lowercase letters (a-z) and numbers (0-9).The code must be less than thirty characters in length and cannot include any special characters or spaces, although an underscore (_) can be used to indicate a space.

Limits the use of an attribute to a specific store view or website. Options include:

Store View

Website

Global

Catalog Input Type for

Store Owner

Determines the data type and input control that is used to manage the product from the store Admin. Options include:

Text Field

Text Area

A single line input field for text.

A multiple-line input field that can display paragraphs of text formatted with HTML.

Date

Yes/No

Dropdown

An input field for date values. The date can be typed directly into the field, or selected from a list or calendar.

A drop-down list with pre-defined options of “Yes” and “No.”

A drop-down list of configurable options,

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes Attribute Properties

Property

Default Value

Description

Multiple Select

Price

Media Image

Fixed Product

Tax from which only one can be selected.

Displays a drop-down list of configurable options. To select more than one option, hold down the Ctrl key and click each item.

An input type that can be used to create price fields in addition to the predefined attributes: Price, Special Price, Tier Price and Cost.

An additional image that can be included in the attribute set of a product.

An input type that gives you the ability to define FPT rates based on the requirements of your locale.

Assigns a starting value to the attribute to help during data entry. To assign a default value for Multiple Select or Dropdown input types, see:

Creating Attributes

.

A default value cannot be set for Multiple Select,

Dropdown, or Fixed Product Tax input types.

Unique Value

Values Required

To prevent duplicate values in a data entry field, set Unique

Value to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

To require that a value to be entered in this field before the record can be saved, set Values Required to “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

Input Validation for Store

Owner

Apply To

Performs a validation check of the data entered in the field, based on the following options:

None

Decimal Number

Integer Number

Email

URL

Letters

Letters (a-z, A-Z) or Numbers (0-9)

(Required) Identifies the product types to which this attribute applies. Options include:

All Product Types

Selected Product Types

Simple Product

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 119

Attribute Properties Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

Property

Use to Create Configurable Product

Description

Grouped Product

Configurable Product

Virtual Product

Bundle Product

(Dropdown input type only) Select “Yes” if this attribute will be used to create a drop-down list for a configurable product.

Options include: Yes / No

120 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes Attribute Frontend Properties

Attribute Frontend Properties

The Frontend Properties determine how an attribute can be used in your store. You can specify how attributes are used in search, layered navigation, product comparisons, price rules, and sorting. For text attributes, you can enable the WYSIWYG editor and specify if

HTML tags can be used to format the value.

Frontend Properties

Property Descriptions

Property Description

Use in

Quick Search

Select “Yes” if you want people to be able to search the catalog based on the value of this attribute. Options include: Yes / No

Use in

Advanced Search

Gives shoppers the ability to enter their search criteria through a form. Options include: Yes / No

Using too many attributes can slow down search.

Comparable on Frontend

Use In

Layered Navigation

Select “Yes” to include this attribute as a row in the Compare

Products report. Options include: Yes / No

(Dropdown, Multiple Select and Price input types only)

Includes the attribute as a filter in the “Shop By” section of layered navigation. Options include:

No

Filterable (with results)

The attribute is not used in layered navigation.

Lists only products that match the filter value.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 121

Attribute Frontend Properties Chapter 10:  Managing Attributes

Property

Use In Search Results

Layered Navigation

Use for Promo Rule

Conditions

Position

Enable WYSIWYG

Allow HTML Tags on

Frontend

Visible on Product View

Page on Front-end

Used in Product Listing

Used for Sorting in

Product Listing

Description

Filterable (no results)

Lists all attribute values, even those that do not apply to any product in the list.

Layered navigation appears on a category page only if there are filterable attributes available.

To include the attribute in the layered navigation for search results, select “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

To make the attribute available for use in price rules, select

“Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

Determines the position of the attribute in layered navigation in relation to other filterable attributes.

(Text Area input type only) To display the editor when entering or editing the attribute value, select “Yes.” The editor can be used to format field descriptions with HTML tags. Options include: Yes / No

(Text Field and Text Area input types only) To be able to format the attribute value with HTML tags, select “Yes.”

Options include: Yes / No

(Simple and virtual products only) To include the attribute on the Additional Information tab of the product page, select

“Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

Depends on the theme. To include the attribute in product summaries that appear in catalog listings, select “Yes.”

(Depends on theme)

To include this attribute as a “Sort By” option for catalog listings, select “Yes.“

122 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 11:

Flat Catalog

Magento uses the Entity-Attribute-Value (EAV) model for storing customer, product, and category data in its database. Although the EAV model enables you to have completely extensible attributes for those objects, object attributes are stored in multiple tables rather than one very large table.

Because attributes are stored in many tables—and that includes copies of some of the same attributes—SQL queries can be long and complex. The flat catalog feature creates new tables on the fly, where each row contains all necessary data about a product or category.

In earlier versions of Magento, it was necessary to rebuild the flat catalog every time you made changes to product attributes or product-category associations. In this release, the flat catalog is updated for you—either every minute, or according to your

Magento cron job.

Flat catalog options not only enable the flat catalog and flat product indexers but also enable indexing for catalog and shopping cart price rules. If you have a large number of SKUs (500,000 or more), Magento can index catalog and shopping cart price rules quickly if you enable the flat catalog product option.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 123

Flat Catalog Configuration Chapter 11:  Flat Catalog

Flat Catalog Configuration

It is recommended that you first test flat catalog in a development environment before enabling it for a live store.

Step 1:

Enable Flat Catalog

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Frontend section. Then, do the following:

124

Use Flat Catalog a.

Set Use Flat Catalog Category to “Yes.” b.

Set Use Flat Catalog Product to “Yes.”

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

5.

When prompted to refresh the indexes, click the Index Management link in the message at the top of the workspace and follow the instructions to reindex the data.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 11:  Flat Catalog Flat Catalog Configuration

Reindex Required

Step 2:

Verify the Results

Method 1:

Verify the Results for a Single Product

1.

Open one browser tab to the store Admin, and log in as an administrator.

2.

On a second browser tab, navigate to your store’s home page.

3.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Then, do the following: a.

Choose a product to modify. Then, click to open the product in edit mode.

b.

On the General tab, in the Name field, add the text “_DEMO” to the product name.

4.

Click the Save button.

5.

In your store, search for the product you edited, and browse to its assigned category.

If necessary, refresh the page to see the result of the change you made. The change occurs either within the minute or according to your cron job schedule.

Method 2:

Verify the Results for Multiple Products

1.

On a second browser tab, navigate to your store’s home page.

2.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Categories > Manage Categories .

3.

In the upper-left corner, set Current Configuration Scope to one of the following: l l

All Store Views

A specific store view

4.

In the panel on the left, select an existing category. Click the Add Subcategory button, and do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 125

Flat Catalog Configuration a.

In the Name field, enter “Test Category.” b.

Set Is Active to “Yes.” c.

Click the Save Category button.

Chapter 11:  Flat Catalog

New Subcategory d.

Click the Category Products tab. Then, click the Reset Filter button to display all products.

e.

Select the checkbox of several products to add them to the new category. Then, click the Save Category button.

126

Category Products

5.

In your store, search for or brows to the category you created.

If necessary, refresh the page to see the result of the change you made. The change occurs either within the minute or according to your cron job schedule.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:

Creating Products

Choosing a product type is one of the first things you must do to create a new product. In this chapter, you will learn how to create a product of each type. To learn more about all the available options, see

Product Information

.

If you are just starting out, you can create a few sample products, and experiment with each type. Before you build your actual catalog, make sure to read

Navigation by Category

and

Catalog URL Options . This material will give you a good

understanding of the relationship between your store navigation and the categories in your catalog, and how you can help search engines to bring a steady stream of shoppers to your store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Products in Catalog

127

Product Types Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Product Types

Grouped Product

A grouped product presents multiple, standalone products as a group. You can offer variations of a single product, or group them for a promotion. The products can be purchased separately, or as a group.

Simple Product

A simple product is a physical item with a single SKU. Simple products have a variety of pricing and of input controls which makes it possible to sell variations of the product. Simple products can be used in association with grouped, bundle, and configurable products.

Configurable Product

A configurable product appears to be a single product with lists of options for each variation. However, each option represents a separate, simple product with a distinct SKU, which makes it possible to track inventory for each variation.

128 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Product Types

Virtual Product

Virtual products do not have a physical presence, and are typically used for such things as services, warranties, and subscriptions. Virtual products can be used in association with grouped and bundle products.

Downloadable

A digitally downloadable product that consists of one or more files that are downloaded. The files can reside on your server or be provided as URLs to any other server.

Bundle Product

A bundle product let customers “build their own” from an assortment of options. The bundle could be a gift basket, computer, or anything else that can be customized. Each item in the bundle is a separate, standalone product.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 129

Simple Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Simple Product

One of the keys to harnessing the power of product types is learning how and when to use a simple, standalone product. Simple products can be sold individually, or as part of a grouped, configurable, or bundle product. A simple product with

custom options

is sometimes referred to as a composite product.

130

Simple Product

The following instructions take you through the process of creating a simple product with the basic fields. Each required field is marked in the Admin with a red asterisk (*).

After you complete the required settings and save the product, you can add images and complete the remaining

product information

as needed.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Choose the Attribute Set

Step 2: Complete the Basic Information

Step 3: Complete the Remaining Product Information

Step 1:

Choose the Attribute Set

The first step is to choose the attribute set, which is used as a template for the product record. The product in this example is based on the Default attribute set, which includes a standard of set of fields that can be used for most products.

1.

On the Admin menu, go to Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

In the upper-right corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products

3.

In the Create Product Settings section, do the following: a.

Accept the “default” Attribute Set , or select another.

b.

Set Product Type to “Simple,” and click the Continue button.

Simple Product

Create Product Settings

Step 2:

Complete the Basic Information

The basic set of required fields must be completed before the product record can be saved. The Product Information panel groups related fields by topic and the required fields are marked with a red asterisk ( * ).

1.

In the Product Information panel, select General . Then, complete the required fields as follows: a.

Enter the product Name as you want it to appear in all catalog listings.

b.

In the Description box, enter the main description that will appear on the Product

Detail page.

c.

Enter a Short Description of the product.

d.

Assign a unique SKU for the product.

e.

Enter the Weight of the product, which is used to calculate shipping.

f.

Set Status to “Enabled.” g.

Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 131

Simple Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

General

2.

In the Product Information panel, select Prices . Then, complete the required fields as follows: a.

Enter the Price that you will charge for the product.

b.

Set Tax Class to the appropriate tax classification for the product.

132

Prices

3.

In the Product Information panel, select Inventory . Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Simple Product a.

If you do not need to keep track of inventory for the product, set Manage Stock to

“No.”

Depending on the configuration, you might need to clear the Use Config Settings checkbox.

Inventory with No Stock Management b.

If you want to keep track of inventory, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” Then, do the following: l l

In the Qty field, type the quantity of the item that is currently in stock.

Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”

Inventory with Stock Management

4.

To be visible in your catalog, the product must be assigned to a category. To assign the product to a category, do the following: a.

In the Product Information panel, select Categories .

b.

In the category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs.

c.

Select the checkbox of each category where you want the product to appear.

5.

If your Magento installation has multiple websites, the product must be assigned to each one where the product is available for sale. (This option appears only if multiple websites exist in the

store hierarchy .) To configure the scope of the product, do the

following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 133

Simple Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products a.

In the Product Information panel, select Websites .

b.

On the Websites tab, select the checkbox of each website where the product is available for sale.

6.

After completing these steps, click the Save and Continue button.

At this point, the product should be visible on the assigned category page of your catalog. Until the product image is uploaded, a

placeholder

appears in its place.

Step 3:

Complete the Remaining Product Information

Although not required, there is still more product information to complete. At the very least, you will want to upload product

images

and complete the

meta data

. In addition, you can create additional

custom options

.

Things to Remember

A simple product can have custom options with a variety of input controls, which makes it possible to sell many product variations from a single SKU.

Custom options are not tracked as separate inventory items.

A simple product that is included in a configurable, or bundle product type cannot have custom options.

134 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Grouped Product

Grouped Product

A grouped product is made up of multiple, standalone products that are presented as a group. You can offer variations of a single product, or group them by season or theme to create a coordinated set. Each product can be purchased separately, or as part of the group.

Grouped Product

The following instructions take you through the process of creating a grouped product with the basic fields. Each required field is marked in the Admin with a red asterisk (*).

After you complete the required settings and save the product, you can add images and complete the remaining

product information,

as needed.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create the Grouped Product

Step 2: Add the Associated Products

Step 3: Configure the Shopping Cart Thumbnails

Step 1:

Create the Grouped Product

The first step is to choose the attribute set, which is used as a template for the product record. The product in this example is based on the Default attribute set, which includes a standard of set of fields that can be used for most products.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 135

Grouped Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Then, click the Add Product button.

2.

In the Create Product Settings section, do the following: a.

Select the Attribute Set you want to use as a template for the product.

b.

Set Product Type to “Grouped Product,” and click the Continue button.

Create Product Settings

3.

Complete the main configuration settings as you would for a

simple product , with the

following exceptions: l l

A grouped product does not have price options because the price of each item in the group originates from the associated product.

On the Inventory tab, you can set quantity increments and stock availability for the group as a whole, but the inventory of individual items is managed by the individual associated products.

4.

Click the Save and Continue button.

Step 2:

Add the Associated Products

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select Associated Products . Then, do the following:

136

Associated Products a.

To display the complete unfiltered list, click the Reset Filter button.

b.

If you need help finding the products you want, use the

filter controls

at the top of a column.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Grouped Product c.

Select the checkbox of each product that you want to include.

d.

To list only the products you have selected, set the filter control at the top of the checkbox column to “Yes.” Then, click the Search button.

2.

Click the Save button to save your changes.

Step 3:

Configure the Shopping Cart Thumbnails

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout .

3.

Click to expand the Shopping Cart section. Then, set Grouped Product Image to one of the following: l l

Product Thumbnail Itself

Parent Product Thumbnail

Shopping Cart Thumbnails

4.

Click the Save Config button to save the setting.

Things to Remember

A grouped product is essentially a collection of simple associated products.

Simple and virtual products associated with a grouped product cannot have custom options.

Each item purchased appears individually in the shopping cart, rather than as part of the group.

The thumbnail image in the shopping cart can be set to display the image from the grouped product record, or from the associated product.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 137

Configurable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Configurable Product

A configurable product looks like a single product with drop-down lists of options for each variation. Each option is actually a separate simple product with a unique SKU, which makes it possible to track inventory for each product variation. You could achieve a similar effect by using a simple product with custom options, but without the ability to track inventory for each variation. Products with multiple options are sometimes referred to as composite products.

Although a configurable product uses more SKUs, and may initially take a little longer to set up, it can save you time in the long run. If you plan to grow your business, the configurable product type might be a better choice for a product with multiple options.

138

Configurable Product

The following instructions take you through the process of creating a configurable product with the basic fields. Each required field is marked in the Admin with a red asterisk (*). After you complete the required settings and save the product, you can add images and complete the remaining

product information,

as needed.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create Attributes for Drop-down Options

Step 2: Create the Attribute Set

Step 3: Create the Configurable Product

Step 4: Add the Associated Products

Step 5: Make Any Necessary Price Adjustments

Step 6: Configure the Shopping Cart Thumbnails

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Configurable Product

Step 1:

Create Attributes for Drop-Down Options

Create an attribute for each drop-down list of options that you want to include in the configurable product. If the attribute already exists and has the correct properties, you can add it to the attribute set in the next step. To learn more, see: 

Creating Attributes

.

Required Attribute Properties

Property Setting

Scope

Catalog Input Type for

Store Owner

Global

Dropdown

Apply to

Use to Create Configurable Product

Configurable Product or All Product Types

Yes

Step 2:

Create the Attribute Set

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets . Then, click the Add New Set button.

2.

Assign a Name to the attribute set.

3.

In the Based On list, select an existing attribute set, such as “Default,” to use as a template. Then, click the Save Attribute Set button.

4.

Starting from the list of Unassigned Attributes , drag and drop each attribute you want to include in the product to the center column. You can arrange them in any order.

5.

To group the attributes in their own section of the Product Information panel, do the following: a.

In the Groups section, click the Add New button.

If prompted by your browser, select “Temporarily Allow Scripted Windows” to continue. Then, click the Add New button again.

b.

When prompted, enter a Name for the new group. Then, click the OK button.

The new group appears at the bottom of the Groups column.

c.

Drag and drop each attribute that you created for the drop-down options to group where you want them to appear.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 139

Configurable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

140

Attribute Set

6.

Click the Save Attribute Set button.

7.

When prompted to update your cache, click the link in the message and refresh the invalid cache.

Step 3:

Create the Configurable Product

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Then, click the Add Product button.

2.

In the Create Product Settings section, do the following: a.

Select the Attribute Set that you created for the product.

b.

Set Product Type to “Configurable Product,” and click the Continue button.

Create Product Settings

3.

In the Select Configurable Attributes section, select the checkbox of each attribute that you want to include in the product. Then, click the Continue button.

Select Attributes

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Configurable Product

4.

Complete the Product Information as you would for a

simple product

, with the exception of the following fields: l l

On the Prices tab, the Price is a required field, but is used as a default price. The price of each individual associated product can be adjusted accordingly.

On the Inventory tab, Manage Stock is set to “No” by default, because inventory is managed by each associated product.

5.

When complete, click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Step 4:

Add the Associated Products

Process Overview:

Method 1: Quick Simple Product Creation

Method 2: Create Empty

Method 3: Copy from Configurable

1.

In the panel on the left, select the last option, Associated Products .

2.

Then, use one of the following methods to add the associated products.

Method 1:

Quick Simple Product Creation

This method automatically creates the associated products and optionally, assigns a

Name and SKU to each one.

1.

In the Quick Simple Product Creation section, the Name and SKU are set to

Autogenerate, which makes it easy to see which products belong to the configurable product,. However, if you want to change the default value, you can clear the checkbox and enter a different value.

2.

For each associated product that you want to create, do the follwing: a.

Enter the Weight .

b.

Set Status to “Enabled.” c.

To prevent the associated products from being listed individually in the catalog, set

Visibility to “Not Visible Individually.”

3.

To complete the fields for the drop-down lists, do the following: a.

For each of the configurable attributes that you set up, select the values that apply to the first product.

b.

Enter the Qty , and set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 141

Configurable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products c.

Click the Quick Create button to create the associated product record.

Quick Simple Product Creation

4.

To create additional associated products, do the following: a.

Select the value for each configurable attribute.

b.

If there is an extra charge for the selection, enter the adjustment in the Price field.

c.

Click the Quick Create button.

Repeat this step to create as many associated product as you need. As each associated products is created, it appears in the list at the bottom of the page.

142

List of Associated Products

Method 2:

Create Simple Associated Product

This method opens a blank Product Information form, which you can complete for each associated product.

1.

In the Create Simple Associated Product section, click the Create Empty button. A popup window with a blank Product Information form appears.

2.

Complete the required fields as you would for any simple product.

3.

Click the Save button to add the associated product.

Method 3:

Copy from Configurable

This method opens a Product Information form that contains the values already entered

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Configurable Product for the configurable product. The only fields that need to be completed are the Name,

SKU, and values for each drop-down attribute.

1.

In the Create Simple Associated Product section, click the Copy From Configurable button. A pop-up window with the basic Product Information from the configurable product appears.

2.

Complete the following required fields: l l

SKU

Weight

3.

Complete the fields with values for each drop-down list.

4.

Click the Save button to add the associated product to the configurable product record.

Step 5:

Make Any Necessary Price Adjustments

Use the Super Products Attributes Configuration section to make price adjustments to a specific associated product. The adjustment can be entered as a fixed value or percentage, and is made in relation to the price of the configurable product.

Super Products Attributes Configuration

Step 6:

Configure the Shopping Cart Thumbnails

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout .

3.

Click to expand the Shopping Cart section. Then, set Configurable Product Image to one of the following: l l

Product Thumbnail Itself

Parent Product Thumbnail

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 143

Configurable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Shopping Cart Thumbnails

4.

Click the Save Config button to save the setting.

Things to Remember

A configurable product allows the shopper to select options from drop-down lists. Each option is actually a separate, simple product.

The drop-down list values are based on attributes that must be set up in advance with required settings. The attribute Scope must be set to “Global,” and Use to Create Configurable Product must be “True.” The drop-down attributes must be included in an attribute set, which is then used as a template for the configurable product.

The simple products associated with a configurable product cannot include custom variants or options, and must be based on the same attribute set that is used to create the configurable product. The associated products can be generated automatically from inside with configurable product record.

The thumbnail image in the shopping cart can be set to display the image from the configurable product record, or from the associated product.

144 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Virtual Product

Virtual Product

Although virtual products are not physical in nature, they do represent something that can be sold, such as a membership, service, warranty, or subscription. Virtual products can be sold individually, or included as part of the following product types: l l

Grouped Product

Bundle Product

The process of creating a virtual product and a simple product is nearly the same.

However, because a virtual product is not shipped, there is no Weight field or option to include a gift card.

Virtual Product

The following instructions take you through the process of creating a virtual product with the basic fields. Each required field is marked in the Admin panel with a red asterisk (*). After you complete the required settings and save the product, you can complete the remaining

product information

as needed.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Choose the Attribute Set

Step 2: Complete the Required Fields

Step 3: Complete the Remaining Product Information

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 145

Virtual Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Step 1:

Choose the Attribute Set

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

In the upper-right corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product button.

3.

In the Create Product Settings section, do the following: a.

Accept the “default” Attribute Set , or select another.

b.

Set Product Type to “Virtual Product,” and click the Continue button.

Create Product Settings

Step 2:

Complete the Required Fields

Complete the required fields as you would for a

simple product

. The only difference is that a virtual product has no weight. All required fields are marked with a red asterisk

(*).

1.

On the General tab, complete the required fields as follows: a.

Type the product Name as you want it to appear in all catalog listings.

b.

In the Description box, enter the main description that will appear on the product view page.

c.

Enter a Short Description of the product.

d.

Assign a unique SKU to the product.

e.

Set Status to “Enabled.” f.

Set Tax Class to the appropriate setting for your area.

g.

Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”

2.

On the Prices tab, enter the Price you intend to charge for the product or service.

3.

If you’re not going to manage your inventory, you can skip this section. Otherwise, complete the required fields on the Inventory tab as follows: a.

Under Manage Stock, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Manage

Stock to “Yes.” b.

In the Qty field, enter the quantity of the item currently in stock.

c.

Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”

146 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Virtual Product

4.

If applicable, on the Website tab, select the checkbox for the website where the product or service will be available for sale.

5.

On the Categories tab, assign the product to the appropriate categories, as follows: a.

In the Product Category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs.

b.

Select the checkbox to assign the product to each category where you want the product to be listed in the catalog.

6.

When the required fields are complete, click the Save and Continue button.

Step 3:

Complete the Remaining Product Information

You have now completed the required fields. The next step is to complete the rest of the

product information

as needed for this product. The

meta information

and

product images

are a good place to start.

Things to Remember

Virtual products can be used for anything that is not physical in nature, such as services, subscriptions, and warranties.

Virtual products are much like simple products, but without the Weight and

Allow Gift Message fields.

Shipping Options appear during checkout only if there is also a physical product in the cart.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 147

Bundle Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Bundle Product

A bundle is a “build your own,” customizable product. Each item in a bundle can be based on one of the following product types: l l

Simple Product

Virtual Product

148

Bundle Product

The following instructions take you through the process of creating a bundle product with the basic fields. Each required field is marked with a red asterisk (*). After you complete the required settings and save the product, you can complete the remaining

Product Information

as needed.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create the Bundle Product

Step 2: Complete the Product Information

Step 3: Add Bundle Items

Step 1:

Create the Bundle Product

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Then, click the Add Product button.

2.

In the Create Product Settings section, select the Attribute Set for the product.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products

3.

In the Create Product Settings section, do the following: a.

Accept the “default” Attribute Set , or select another.

b.

Set Product Type to “Bundle Product.” Then, click the Continue button.

Bundle Product

Create Product Settings

Step 2:

Complete the Product Information

1.

Complete the Product Information as you would for a simple product, with the exception of the following: a.

On the General tab, set both the SKU and Weight fields to one of the following: l l

Dynamic

Fixed

If using a Fixed value, enter the actual value in the field to the right.

Dynamic SKU and Weight b.

On the Prices tab, set Price to one of the following: l l

Dynamic

Fixed

If using a Fixed value, enter the actual value in the field to the right.

Dynamic Price c.

Then, set Price View to one of the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 149

Bundle Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products l l

As Low as

Price Range

2.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Step 3:

Add Bundle Items

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select the last option, Bundle Items .

2.

Then in the Shipment section, set Ship Bundle Items to one of the following: l l

Together

Separately

Shipment

3.

In the Bundle Items section, click the Add New Option button.

4.

In the Default Title box, enter a label for the bundle item, as you want it to appear on the Customize Product page. Then, do the following:

Bundle Items a.

Set Input Type to one of the following: l l l l

Drop-down

Radio Buttons

Checkbox

Multiple Select b.

Set Is Required as needed.

c.

In the Position field, enter the order that you want this item listed in relation to other items included in the bundle.

5.

Click the Add Selection button. Then, do the following:

150 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Bundle Product

Select Products a.

Click the Reset Filter button to display the unfiltered list of products.

b.

Select the checkbox of each product that you want to include in this item.

c.

In the Qty to Add column, enter the quantity of each item to be included.

6.

Click the Add Selected Product(s) to Option button. When the items appear in the

Bundle Items list, do the following: a.

Set User Defined Qty to one of the following:

Yes

No

Displays an input box so the customer can change the quantity.

Prevents the customer from changing the default quantity.

b.

Enter a number in the Position column of each item to determine its place in relation to other items.

c.

To make an item the default selection, select the Default option of the item to be pre-selected in the form.

Bundle Items

7.

Repeat steps 3-7 for each bundle item you want to include.

8.

When complete, click the Save button to save the bundle product.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 151

Bundle Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Field Descriptions

Field

SKU

Weight

Price View

Ship Bundle Items

Description

Determines if each item is assigned a variable, dynamic SKU, or if a fixed SKU is used for the bundle. Options include:

Fixed / Dynamic.

Specifies the weight is calculated based on the items selected, or is a fixed weight for the entire bundle. Options include:

Fixed / Dynamic.

Determines if the product price is shown as a range, from the least expensive to the most expensive (Price Range), or with the least expensive shown (As Low As). Options include: Price

Range / As Low As.

Specifies if individual items can be shipped separately.

Things to Remember

A bundle is a “Build Your Own” product.

Bundle items can be simple or virtual products without custom options.

The Price View can be set to a price range or “As Low as.”

SKU and Weight can be either “Fixed” or “Dynamic.”

The Quantity can be set to a pre-set or user-defined value.

Items can be shipped together or separately.

152 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Downloadable Product

Downloadable Product

A downloadable product can be anything that you can deliver as a file, such as an eBook, music, video, software application, or an update. You can offer an album for sale, and sell each song individually. You can also use a downloadable product to deliver an electronic version of your product catalog.

Because the actual download doesn’t become available until after the purchase, you can provide samples, such as an excerpt from a book or a clip from an audio file, that the customer can try from the product page.

Download with Sample

Downloadable products can be configured to require that the customer log in to an account to receive the link, or can be sent by email and shared with others. The status of the order before the download becomes available, default values, and other delivery options are set in the

configuration

.

The files for download can be either uploaded to your server, or linked to on a different server on the Internet.

Downloadable product file names can include letters and numbers. You can to use either a dash or underscore character to represent a space between words. Any invalid characters in the file name are replaced with an underscore.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 153

Downloadable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

The following instructions take you through the process of creating a downloadable product with the basic fields. Each required field is marked in the Admin with a red asterisk (*). After you complete the required settings and save the product, you can add images and complete the remaining

product information

as needed.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Choose the Attribute Set

Step 2: Complete the Basic Product Information

Step 3: Complete the Download Information

Step 4: Complete the Remaining Product Information

Step 1:

Choose the Attribute Set

The first step is to choose the attribute set, which is used as a template for the product record. The product in this example is based on the Default attribute set, which includes a standard of set of fields that can be used for most products.

1.

On the Admin menu, go to Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

In the upper-right corner of the Manage Products page, click the Add Product button.

3.

In the Create Product Settings section, do the following: a.

Attribute Set is currently set to “Default.” You can leave it as it is, or select another.

b.

Set Product Type to “Downloadable Product,” and click the Continue button.

Create Product Settings

Step 2:

Complete the Basic Product Information

The basic set of required fields must be completed before the product record can be saved. The Product Information panel groups related fields by topic and the required fields are marked with a red asterisk ( * ).

1.

In the Product Information panel, select General . Then, complete the required fields as follows: a.

Enter the product Name as you want it to appear in all catalog listings.

b.

In the Description box, enter the main description that will appear on the Product

Detail page.

154 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Downloadable Product c.

Enter a Short Description of the product.

d.

Assign a unique SKU for the product.

e.

Set Status to “Enabled.” f.

Set Visibility to “Catalog, Search.”

2.

In the Product Information panel, select Prices . Then, complete the required fields as follows: a.

Enter the Price that you will charge for the product.

The price entered here becomes the base price of the download and is listed in the catalog before the customers selects items for download. Any additional price that is associated with an individual download is added to the base price.

b.

Set Tax Class to the appropriate tax classification for the product.

3.

In the Product Information panel, select Inventory . Then, do the following: a.

If you do not need to keep track of inventory for the product, set Manage Stock to

“No.” b.

If you do need to keep track of inventory, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” Then, do the following: l l l

Set Manage Stock to “Yes.”

In the Qty field, type the quantity of the item that is currently in stock.

Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”

4.

In the Product Information panel, select Categories . Then, do the following: a.

In the category tree, click to expand the section where the item belongs.

b.

Select the checkbox of each additional category where you want the product to appear.

5.

To make the product available on multiple websites, it must be assigned to each one.

(This option appears only if you have multiple websites.) To configure the scope of the product, do the following: a.

In the Product Information panel, select Websites .

b.

Select the checkbox of each website where the product will be available for sale.

6.

After completing these steps, click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 155

Downloadable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Step 3:

Complete the Download Information

1.

In the Product Information panel, select Downloadable Information .

2.

In the Links section, do the following: a.

Enter a Title for the list of downloadable products.

b.

Set Links can be purchased separately to one of the following: l l

If you want to offer multiple download links, such as to sell individual songs on an album, select “Yes.”

To offer a single download of this item, select “No.”

3.

Click the Add New Row button, and do the following: a.

Enter the Title and Price of the download.

b.

To limit the number of downloads a customer can make, enter the number in the

Max number of downloads field. To allow unlimited downloads, select the

Unlimited checkbox.

c.

Set Sharable to your preference.

l l

To require that customers log in to their accounts to access the download link, select “No.”

To send the link by email, which the customer can then share with others, select

“Yes.”

4.

Under Sample , use one of the following methods to deliver a sample of the downloadable product.

l l

Select the File option. Then, click the Browse to upload to the server.

button, and select the sample file

Select the URL option. Then, paste the full URL of the sample file.

5.

Under File , use one of the following methods to deliver the actual downloadable product.

l l

Select the File option. Then, click the Browse upload.

button, and select the file to

Select the URL option. Then, paste the full URL of the file that is available for download.

6.

In the Sort Order field, enter a number to indicate the sequence that this download will be listed with other downloads on the product page.

7.

To add another download, click the Add New Row button, and repeat the process.

156 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Downloadable Product

Links

8.

When complete, if uploading files to the server, click the Upload Files button.

9.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Step 4:

Complete the Samples Information

1.

Click to expand the Samples section.

2.

Enter a Title for the section of samples on the product page.

3.

Click the Add New Row button. Then, do one of the following: l l

Select the File option. Then, click the Browse to upload.

button, and select the sample file

Select the URL option. Then, paste the full URL of the sample file.

Add New Sample

4.

To add a new row, click the Add New Row button, and repeat the process.

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

6.

When prompted to refresh the index and cache, click the links in the message at the top of the workspace, and follow the instructions.

At this point, the product should be visible on the assigned category page of your catalog. Until a product image is uploaded, a placeholder appears in its place.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 157

Downloadable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Step 5:

Complete the Remaining Product Information

Although not required, there is other product information to complete. At the very least, you will want to upload product

images

and complete the

meta data .

Things to Remember

Downloadable products can be uploaded to the server, or linked to from another server on the Internet.

You can determine the number of times a customer can download a product.

Customers purchasing downloadable products can be required to login before going through checkout.

The delivery of a downloadable product can be made when the order is either in either a “Pending” or “Invoiced” state.

158 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 12:  Creating Products Downloadable Product

Downloadable Product Configuration

The configuration settings determine guest checkout, default values, and delivery options for downloadable products.

To configure downloadable products:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configure .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Downloadable Product Option section.

4.

Configure the options as described in the following

field descriptions .

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Order Item Status to

Enable Downloads

Scope

Website

Default Maximum

Number of Downloads

Website

Shareable

Downloadable Product Options

Website

Description

Determines the status that an order must have before downloads become available. Options include: Pending / Invoiced

Determines the default number of downloads available to a customer. Options include: Yes /

No

Determines if customers must log in to their accounts to access the download link. Options include:

Yes

No

Allows the link to be sent by email, which can then be shared with others.

Requires customers to log in to their accounts to access the download link.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 159

Downloadable Product Chapter 12:  Creating Products

Field

Default Sample Title

Scope

Description

Store View The default title for all sample files.

Default Link Title

Opens Links in New

Window

Store View The default link for all downloadable titles.

Website Determines if the download link opens in a new browser window. Options include: Yes / No

Use Content Disposition Store View Determins how the the link to the downloadable content is delivered, as anemail attachment, or as an inline link in a browser window. Options include:

Attachment The download link is delivered as an email attachment.

Inline The download link is delivered as an inline link on a web page.

Disable Guest Checkout if Cart Contains Downloadable Items

Website Determines if guests who are purchasing downloadable products must log in to an account to complete the checkout process. Options

Include:

Yes If the cart contains downloadable products, the guest will have to either register for an account, or login to an existin account to complete the purchase.

No The download link is delivered as an inline link in the body of the email message.

Guest checkout is only available for dowload products if Sharable is set to "Yes."

160 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:

Product Information

The Product Information panel provides access to the full range of settings that make up a product record. The information in this section can be used for reference when creating a product of any type.

The selection of Product Information tabs, and the organization of the fields on each page is determined by the attribute set that was used to create the product.

Product Information

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 161

General Chapter 13:  Product Information

General

Use the General tab to enter information about the product. In addition to providing basic information about the product, this section determines the product's visibility in the catalog and search.

The selection, order, and grouping of the fields is determined by the

attribute set

that was used to create the product. As a result, the product attributes might differ from what is shown in the example.

162

Product Information: General

Field Descriptions

Field

Name

Description

Scope

Description

Store View (Required) The name of the product you want to appear in catalog. The name is also used to auto-generate the URL Key.

Store View (Required) The main product description that appears on the product page.

The text should be plain ASCII text. HTML tags can be used to format the description if permitted by the attribute properties.

Do not paste text directly from a word processor, because the text might include print control codes that will not render correctly. To strip out any control codes, save the file as a .txt

file before copying and pasting te text into the product description.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information General

Field

Short Description

SKU

Weight

Set Product as New from

Date

Scope

Description

Store View (Required) Depending on the theme, the Short

Description might appear on catalog pages.

Because of its length, it is often used for RSS feeds.

Global (Required) The Stock Keeping Unit is a unique identifier for each individual product or service provided.

Global

Website

(Required) The weight of the product is a decimal value used for shipping calculations, and refers to the standard measurement system used by shipping carriers in your locale. In the

United States, weight is measured in pounds and ounces, whereas countries on the metric system measure weight in grams and kilograms.

Sets the beginning date for the range of time the product is featured in the “New Product” block on the Home page. The date can be typed directly into the box, or selected from the calendar.

Set Product as New to

Date

Status

URL Key

Visibility

Website

Website

Sets the ending date for the range of time the product is featured in the “New Product” block on the Home page.

(Required) The Status indicates when the product is ready to be offered for sale in your store. Options include: Enabled / Disabled.

Store View The URL Key determines the online address of the product. It is added to the base URL of the store, and appears in the address bar of a browser.

The URL Key should be all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces. Magento initially creates a default, “search engine friendly”

URL, based on the product name.

Do not type the suffix .html in the URL Key, because use of the suffix is controlled by your store configuration. To learn more, see , SEO

URL Options.

Store View (Required) Determines the level of visibility the product has throughout the store. Options include:

Not Visible Individually

The product may be associated with a one-to-many

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 163

General Chapter 13:  Product Information

Field

Scope

Country of Manufacture Website

Description

Catalog

Search product, but is not listed in the catalog.

The product appears in the catalog listing, but is not included in Search results.

The product appears in search results, but is not listed in the catalog.

Catalog, Search The product is listed in the catalog and search results.

Select the manufacturer of the product. To add new options to the list, see Manage

Label / Options.

Button Descriptions

Field

Create New Attribute

Description

Gives you the ability to create a new attribute while working in product edit mode. Although you can save the new attribute, it is not automatically included in the attribute set that is associated with the current product.

164 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information Meta Information

Meta Information

Meta data is your first level of contact with potential customers who are searching for a product. Your title and description are selling tools that will either help to motivate a visitor to click your link or not. It is wise to use a descriptive title and a description that includes relevant words that a potential customer might search.

The information is read by search engines that index your site. Although Google no longer places a value on meta keywords, other search engines continue to use the information. It’s a good practice to incorporate high-value keywords in your product titles and related content.

Product Information: Meta Information

Field Descriptions

Field

Meta Title

Meta Keywords

Meta Description

Description

The title appears in the title bar and tab of your browser, and is also used as the title on a search engine results page (SERP).

Enter relevant keywords for the product. Consider using keywords that customers may use to find the product.

Write a few sentences to describe the product. Though not visible to the customer, some search engines include the meta description on the search results page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 165

Recurring Profile Chapter 13:  Product Information

Recurring Profile

Recurring Profiles are most often used for subscriptions or products with installment payment plans. When such a product is purchased from your store, the customer is redirected to a third-party payment system. The customer enters into a recurring payment agreement to authorize the payment system to charge the customer account according to the recurring profile settings.

When a customer purchases a product with recurring payments, the profile parameters specified from Magento are transferred to the payment system. Magento supports recurring profiles for items paid with PayPal Express Checkout.

For example, to set up a product with monthly subscription payments, the following parameters are specified in the recurring profile of the product. The customer is charged by the payment system once a month, for a year.

Billing Settings

Billing Period Unit:

Billing Frequency:

Month

1

Maximum Billing Cycles: 12

You can also set up a trial period where the customer pays a special, introductory price for a period of time. Wen the trial ends, the customer is charged the regular amount.

Creating a recurring profile for a product does not create additional sales orders.

In the third-party payment system, a recurring profile is an accounting record that captures payments on a regular basis and according to the payment schedule defined in the recurring profile. A recurring profile submits the information about the frequency of a payment being initiated to the payment system.

The Recurring Profile tab appears by default for simple and virtual products. However you can configure it to become available for other product types by changing the Apply

To property of the recurring_profile attribute. To learn more about recurring profiles, see:

Working with Recurring Profiles in the knowledge base.

To set up a recurring profile:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Find the product in the list, and click to open it in edit mode.

2.

In the panel on the left, select Recurring Profile .

3.

Set Enable Recurring Profile to “Yes.” The section expands to include additional options.

166 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information

Recurring Profile

4.

In the Schedule section, do the following:

Recurring Profile

Schedule a.

To let the customer determine the starting date for the payments, set Customer Can

Define Start Date to “Yes.” b.

In the Schedule Description field, enter a brief description of the recurring payment.

The description is used as the name of the recurring payment on the Review

Information page.

c.

In the Maximum Payment Failures filed, enter the number of times payment can fail before the recurring profile is suspended.

d.

To automatically initiate a payment transactoin at the end of the next billing cycle, set Auto Bill on Next Cycle to “Yes.”

5.

In the Billing section, do the following:

Billing a.

Set Billing Period Unit to the period of time that defines the billing cycle.

b.

Set Billing Frequency to how often a payment transaction is initiated during the billing cycle.

c.

In the Maximum Billing Cycles field, enter the maximum number of payments allowed for the recurring profile. If left blank, the the customer will continue to be charged until the recurring profile is canceled.

6.

In the Trial Period section, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 167

Recurring Profile Chapter 13:  Product Information

Trial Period a.

Set Trial Billing Period Unit to the period of time that defines the billing cycle during the trial period.

b.

Set Trial Billing Period Frequency to how often a payment transaction is initiated during the trial billing cycle.

c.

In the Trial Billing Period Cycles field, enter the maximum number of payments allowed during the trial period.

d.

In the Trial Billing Amount field, enter the product price during the trial period.

The trial billing period parameters are optional, but if specified, make sure that all fields are complete. Otherwise, the payment system will not authorize the payment.

7.

In the Initial Fees section, do the following:

168

Initial Fees a.

In the Initial Fees field, enter the amount that the customer is charged at the time of purchase. The initial fee is paid only once during the life of a subscription.

b.

If you want to cancel the recurring if the initial payment fails, set Allow Initial Fee

Failure to “Yes.” If set to “No,” the initial fee is added to the customer’s outstanding amount and is charged by the payment system as soon as the customer account has a sufficient amount.

8.

When complete, click the Save button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Schedule

Customer Can Define

Scope

Global

Description

Determines if the customer can set the starting

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information Recurring Profile

Field

Start Date

Schedule Description

Maximum Payment Failures

Auto Bill on Next Cycle

Billing

Billing Period Unit

Billing Frequency

Maximum Billing Cycles

Trial Period

Scope

Global

Description date for the payments. Options include:

Yes Displays the Recurring Profile Start

Date as an option on the product page.

No The customer cannot set the start date.

A brief description of the recurring payment.

The description appears as the name of the recurring payment on the review information page of the payment system. If left empty, the name of the selected product appears as the name of the recurring profile.

Determines the number of failed scheduled payments before the recurring profile is automatically be suspended.

Determines if the payment system automatically initiates a payment transaction after the regular billing cycle.

In the event of a number of payment failures and the customer has an outstanding amount, the customer is charged in the next billing cycle.

Options: Yes / No

Determines the period of time included in a subscription billing cycle, and how frequently a payment transaction is initiated. Options include:

Day

Week

Two Weeks

Month

Year

Determines how often within the billing period a payment transaction is initiated for the recurring profile.

Limits the number of payments that can be made during a billing cycle. If you do not specify the maximum of billing cycles, the recurring profile remains permanently active and the customer is charged by the payment system until the recurring profile is suspended or canceled.

Global

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 169

Recurring Profile Chapter 13:  Product Information

Field

Trial Billing Period Unit

Trial Billing Frequency

Scope

Maximum Trial Billing

Cycles

Trial Billing Amount

Initial Fees

Initial Fee

Global

Allow Initial Fee Failure

Description

Determines the period of time included in a trial subscription billing cycle, and how frequently a payment transaction is initiated. Options include:

Day

Week

Two Weeks

Month

Year

Determines how often during the billing period a payment transaction is initiated for the recurring profile.

Limits the number of recurring payments that can be made during a trial billing cycle.

The price of the product during the trial period.

The amount the customer is charged at the time of purchase. The initial fee is paid only once during the life of a subscription.

Determines if the payment profile is suspended if the initial fee payment fails. In case the field is set to No, Options include:

Yes The payment profile is suspended if the initial fee fails.

No The initial fee is added to the customer’s outstanding amount and is charged by the payment system as soon as the customer account has the sufficient amount.

170 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information

Design

The Design page gives you the ability to apply a different theme to the product page, and make updates to the XML code that controls the page layout.

Design

Product Information: Design

Field Descriptions

Field

Custom Theme

Active From

Active To

Custom Layout Update

Page Layout

Description

To apply a custom theme, select the one you want from the list of available themes.

If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the beginning date, or select the date from the Calendar.

If applying a custom theme for a period of time, enter the ending date, or select the date from the Calendar.

You can further customize the theme with XML coding.

To apply a different layout to the product page, select one of the following:

No layout updates This option is preselected by default and does not apply layout changes.

Empty

1 column

This option lets you define your own layout, such as a 4-column page.

Requires an understanding of XML.

Applies the 1-column layout.

2 columns with left bar

2 columns with right bar

Applies the 2 column layout.

Applies the 2-columns with right bar layout.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 171

Gift Options Chapter 13:  Product Information

Field Description

Display product options in

3 columns Applies the 3 column layout.

Options include: Product Info Column / Block after Info

Column

Gift Options

Gift Options determine if customers have the option to add a gift message and to gift wrap the product during checkout. To configure gift options for the store, see: Gift

Options Configuration .

To set up gift options for a product:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Then, click to open the product in edit mode.

2.

In the panel on the left, select Gift Options . Then, do the following:

Gift Options a.

The Allow Gift Message reflects the default configuration. To override the setting, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, change the value as needed.

b.

To charge for gift wrapping, enter the amount in the Price for Gift Wrapping field, as a decimal, without the currency symbol.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

172 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information

Websites

If your Magento installation has multiple websites, stores, or views, you can set the scope of a configuration setting, product, category, or attribute to apply to a specific website, store, or store view. To learn more, see:

Multiple Sites, Stores & Views .

Websites

Product Information: Websites

To assign a product to a store view:

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select Websites .

2.

Select the checkbox for each store view where the product is offered for sale.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 173

Categories Chapter 13:  Product Information

Categories

Every product in your catalog must be assigned to at least one category. Before you can add products to your catalog, you must first establish its basic category structure. A product cannot be saved until after it has been assigned to at least one category.

Product Categories

To set up the product categories:

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select Categories .

2.

In the category tree, select the checkbox of each category to which you want to associate the product. Click the plus [+] icon to show any available subcategories.

A single product can be assigned to more than one category.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

174 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information Related Products

Related Products

Related products are meant to be purchased in addition to the item the customer is viewing. Simply click the checkbox of a product to place it in the shopping cart. The placement of the Related Products block varies according to theme and page layout. In the example below, it appears at the bottom of the Product View page. With a 2 column layout, the Related Product block often appears in the right column.

Related Products

To set up related products:

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, click Related Products .

2.

Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products, or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.

3.

In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to feature as a related product.

Select Related Products

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 175

Up-sells Chapter 13:  Product Information

Up-sells

Up-sell products are items that your customer might prefer instead of the product currently viewed. An item offered as an up-sell might be of a higher quality, more popular, or have better profit margin. Up-sell products appear on the product page, under a heading such as, “You may also be interested in the following product(s).”

Up-Sell on Product Page

To select up-sell products:

1.

In the Product Information panel, select Up-sells .

2.

Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products, or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.

3.

In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to feature as an up-sell.

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

176 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information Cross-sells

Cross-sells

Cross-sell products are similar to impulse purchases positioned next to the cash register in the checkout line of a grocery store. Products offered as a cross-sell appear on the shopping cart page, just before the customer begins the checkout process.

Cross-sell Offered During Checkout

To set up cross-sell products:

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, click Cross-sells .

2.

Click the Reset Filter button in the upper-right to list all the available products, or use the search filters at the top of each column to find specific products.

3.

In the list, select the checkbox in the first column of any product you want to feature as a cross-sell.

Cross-Sell Product

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 177

Custom Options Chapter 13:  Product Information

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

Custom Options

Custom options are an easy way to offer a selection of product variations that do not rely on attributes. The limitations are that you cannot track inventory based on any variation, and that a product with custom options cannot be used with a configurable, grouped, or bundle product. Custom options are a good solution if your inventory needs are simple.

178

Custom Options on Product Page

To create custom options:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

In the list, open the product record in edit mode.

3.

In the panel on the left, select Custom Options .

4.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Option button. Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 13:  Product Information Custom Options

Custom Options a.

In the Title field, enter a name for the property.

b.

Set the Input Type you want to use for data entry.

c.

Set Is Required to “Yes” if the option must be selected before the product can be purchased.

d.

In the Sort Order field, enter a number to indicate the order of this item in the list of options. Enter the number 1 to display this option first.

5.

Click the Add New Row button. Then, complete the following:

Add New Row a.

In the Title field, enter a name for this option.

b.

In the Price field, enter any markup or markdown from the base product price that applies to this option.

c.

Set Price Type to one of the following:

Fixed

Percentage

The price of the variation differs from the price of the base product by a fixed monetary amount, such as $1.

The price of the variation differs from the price of the base product by a percentage, such as 10%.

d.

Enter a SKU to identify the option. The option SKU is added as a suffix to the SKU of the product record.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 179

Custom Options Chapter 13:  Product Information e.

In the Sort Order field, enter a number to indicate the order of this item in the list of options. Enter the number 1 to display this option first.

6.

When complete, click the Save button.

180 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:

Inventory

Inventory settings can be made for the catalog as a whole, and fine tuned for each individual product. In addition to controlling stock levels, the inventory settings determine how backorders and returned items on credit memos are managed.

Inventory Configuration

The Product Stock Items configuration determines the default product inventory settings. The configuration applies to individual products, rather than to the contents of the cart as a whole.

To configure the default inventory settings:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Inventory .

3.

Click to expand the Product Stock Options section.

4.

Enter the default settings for each item, as described in the following

field descriptions

.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Product Stock Options

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 181

Inventory Configuration Chapter 14:  Inventory

Field Descriptions

Field

Manage Stock

Backorders

Maximum Qty Allowed in

Shopping Cart

Qty for Item's Status to

Become Out of Stock

Minimum Qty Allowed in

Shopping Cart

Scope

Global

Global

Global

Global

Notify for Quantity Below Global

Enable Qty Increments

Global

Global

Description

Determines if you use full inventory control to manage the items in your catalog. Options include:

Yes Activates full inventory control to keep track of the number of items currently in stock.

No Does not keep track of the number of items currently in stock.

Determines how your store manages backorders. A backorder does not change the processing status of the order. Funds are still authorized or captured immediately when the order is placed, regardless of whether the product is in stock. When the product becomes available, it will be shipped. Options include:

No Backorders

Allow Qty

Below 0

Does not accept backorders when product is out of stock

Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero.

Allow Qty

Below 0 and

Notify Customer

Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero, but notifies customers that orders can still be placed.

Determines the maximum number of a product that can be purchased in a single order. By default, the maximum quantity is set to 10,000.

Determines the stock level at which a product is considered to be out of stock.

Determines the minimum amount of an item that is available for purchase according to customer group. By default, the minimum quantity is set to 1.

Click the Add Minimum Qty button to enter a different value for a specific customer group.

Determines the stock level at which notification is sent that the inventory has fallen below the threshold.

Determines if items can be sold in quantity increments. Options include: Yes / No

182 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:  Inventory Managing Stock

Field

Qty Increments

Automatically Return

Credit Memo Item to

Stock

Scope

Global

Global

Description

Establishes the number of products that make up a quantity increment.

Determines if items included on credit memos are automatically returned to inventory. Options include: Yes / No

Managing Stock

Each product in your catalog has both a short and long version of the Inventory options, depending on whether you need to manage inventory for the product. The long form appears only when Manage Stock is set to “Yes.” The initial values reflect the default

Product Stock Option configuration.

Product Information: Inventory (Short Form)

To complete the inventory settings:

1.

In the Product Information panel, select Inventory . To complete the required settings, do the following: a.

Clear the checkbox below the Manage Stock field. Then, set Manage Stock to “Yes.” b.

In the Qty field, type the number of units you currently have in stock.

c.

Set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”

2.

Complete the remaining settings as needed, as described in the following

field descriptions

.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 183

Managing Stock Chapter 14:  Inventory

184

Product Information: Inventory (Long Form)

Field Descriptions

Field

Manage Stock

Description

Determines if you use full inventory control to manage the items in your catalog. Options include:

Yes

No

Activates full inventory control to keep track of the number of items currently in stock. (To change the setting, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox and select “Yes.”)

Does not keep track of the number of items currently in stock. (This is the default setting.)

Qty

Qty For Item’s Status to become Out of Stock

Minimum Qty Allowed in

Shopping Cart

(Required) The quantity of the item in stock.

Determines the stock level at which a product is considered to be out of stock.

Determines the minimum amount of this item that is available for purchase. By default, the minimum quantity is set to 1.

Maximum Qty Allowed in

Shopping Cart

Qty Uses Decimals

Determines the maximum number of this item that can be purchased in a single order. By default, the maximum quantity is set to 10,000.

Determines if customers can use a decimal value rather than a whole number when entering the quantity ordered. Options include:

Yes Permits values to be entered as decimals,

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:  Inventory Managing Stock

Field Description

No rather than whole numbers, which is suitable for products sold by weight, volume or length.

Quantity values must be entered as whole numbers.

Can be divided into Multiple Boxes for Shipping

Backorders

Determines if parts of the product can shipped separately.

Options include: Yes / No

Determines how your store manages backorders. A backorder does not change the processing status of the order.

Funds are still authorized or captured immediately when the order is placed, regardless of whether the product is in stock.

When the product becomes available, it will be shipped.

Options include:

No Backorders Does not accept backorders when product is out of stock

Allow Qty Below

0

Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero.

Allow Qty Below

0 and Notify Customer

Accepts backorders when the quantity falls below zero, but notifies customers that orders can still be placed.

Notify for Quantity Below Determines the stock level at which notification is sent that the inventory has fallen below the threshold.

Enable Qty Increments Determines if the product can be sold in quantity increments.

Options include: Yes / No

Qty Increments

Stock Availability

Establishes the number of products that make up a quantity increment.

Determines the current availability of the product. Options include:

In Stock

Out of Stock

Makes the product available for purchase.

Unless Backorders are activated, prevents the product from being available for purchase and removes the listing from the catalog.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 185

Stock Availability Chapter 14:  Inventory

Stock Availability

You can define an inventory level that becomes the threshold to determine when an item needs to be reordered. The out of stock threshold can be set to any number greater than zero.

Another way you can use the stock availability threshold is to manage products that are in high demand. If you want to capture new customers, rather than sell to high-quantity buyers, you can set a maximum quantity to prevent a single buyer from taking out your entire inventory.

Your catalog can be configured to display the availability of each item as “In Stock” or

“Out of Stock” on the product page. The configuration setting applies to the catalog as a whole, and the message changes according to the stock status of the product. There are several display variations possible, including how “out of stock” products are managed in the catalog and search results lists.

186

“In Stock” Message on Product Page

Step 1:

Configure the Inventory Stock Options

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Inventory .

3.

Click to expand the Stock Options section. Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:  Inventory Stock Availability

Stock Options a.

To configure how “out of stock” products are handled in the category and search results lists, set Display Out of Stock Products to one of the following:

Yes

No

Includes “out of stock” products on catalog pages.

Omits “out of stock” products from catalog pages.

b.

To configure the stock availability message on the product page, set Display products availability in stock in the frontend to one of the following:

Yes

No

Displays an availability message indicating the product stock status.

Does not display an availability message.

4.

Click the Save Config button to save the setting.

Step 2:

Set the Product to Manage Stock

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

In the list, click to open the product. Then in the Product Information panel on the left, select Inventory .

3.

If necessary, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox, and set Manage Stock to “Yes.”

Then, complete the inventory settings as needed.

4.

Make sure that Stock Availability is set to “In Stock.”

5.

Click the Save button to save the product settings.

Step 3:

Set the "Out of Stock" Threshold

1.

On the Inventory tab, set the Qty for Item’s Status to Become Out of Stock to a value above zero.

2.

To set the quantity of the product that is allowed in the cart, set the following fields to the appropriate values for your product, store, and strategy: l l

Minimum Quantity Allowed in Shopping Cart

Maximum Quantity Allowed in Shopping Cart

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 187

Stock Availability Message Scenarios Chapter 14:  Inventory

3.

To be notified when stock drops below the threshold, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox. Then, set Notify for Quantity Below to a number to establish the threshold.

The default the value is 1.

If you need time to restock your inventory, you can use this value to indicate when it is time to replenish.

Stock Availability Message Scenarios

You can use a combination of configuration settings to control stock availability messages on product pages and in listings of products on catalog pages.

Product Page Messages

There are several variations of messaging available for the product page, depending on the combination of Manage Stock and Stock Availability settings.

188

Grouped Product with Both Messages

Example 1:

Show Availability Message

Scenario 1: This combination of settings causes the availability message to appear on the product page, according to the stock availability of each product.

Stock Options

Display product availability in stock in the frontend: Yes

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:  Inventory Stock Availability Message Scenarios

Product Inventory

Manage Stock

Stock Availability

Yes

In Stock

Out of Stock

Message

“Availability: In Stock”

“Availability: Out of Stock”

Scenario 2: When stock is not managed for a product, this combination of settings can be used to display the availability message on the product page.

Stock Options

Display product availability in stock in the frontend Yes

Product Inventory

Manage Stock No

Message

“Availability: In Stock”

Example 2:

Hide Availability Message

Scenario 1: This combination of configuration and product settings prevents the availability message from appearing on the product page.

Stock Options

Display product availability in stock in the frontend No

Product Inventory

Manage Stock

Stock Availability

Yes

In Stock

Out of Stock

Message

None

None

Scenario 2: When stock is not managed for a product, this combination of configuration and product settings prevents the availability message from appearing on the product page.

Stock Options

Display product availability in stock in the frontend No

Product Inventory

Manage Stock No

Message

None

Catalog Page Messages

The following display options are possible for the category and search results lists, depending on product availability, configuration settings, and theme.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 189

Out of Stock Threshold Chapter 14:  Inventory

Example 1:

Show Product with “Out of Stock Message”

This combination of configuration settings includes out of stock products in the category and search results lists, and displays an “out of stock” message.

Message Stock Options

Display Out of Stock Products

Display product availability in stock in the frontend

Display Out of Stock Products

Yes

Yes

Yes

“Out of stock”

Display product availability in stock in the frontend No None

Example 2:

Show Product without “Out of Stock Message”

This combination of configuration settings includes out of stock products in the category and search results lists, but does not display a message.

Stock Options

Display Out of Stock Products

Display product availability in stock in the frontend

Yes

No

Message

None

Example 3:

Hide Product Until Back in Stock

This configuration setting omits out of stock products entirely from the category and search results lists, until they are back in stock.

Stock Options

Display Out of Stock Products No

Message

None

Out of Stock Threshold

You can define an inventory level that becomes the threshold to determine when an item needs to be reordered. The out of stock threshold is set to a number above zero.

To set the out of stock threshold:

1.

In the Product Information panel, select Inventory .

2.

Set the Qty for Item’s Status to Become Out of Stock to a value above zero.

To change the quantity allowed in cart:

This option is helpful for products in high demand. If you want to capture a larger number of new customers rather than selling high volumes to high-quantity buyers, you can set a maximum quantity to prevent a high-quantity buyer from taking out your

190 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:  Inventory Product Alert Configuration entire inventory.

1.

In the Product Information panel, select Inventory .

2.

Change the Minimum and Maximum Quantity Allowed in Shopping Cart fields to appropriate values for your product, store, and strategy.

To be notified when stock drops below a certain threshold:

1.

In the Product Information panel, select Inventory .

2.

Clear the Use Config Settings checkbox, and set Notify for Quantity Below to indicate the level when you want to be notified. By default, the value is set to 1.

Product Alert Configuration

You can enable your customers to subscribe to two types of customer alerts by email: price change alerts and in-stock alerts. For each alert type, choose whether to enable users to subscribe to it, and select the email template to use. Also, select a sender display name, which applies to both alert types.

Product Alerts

The price change alert creates a Sign up for price alert link on every product page.

Customers can click the link to subscribe to alerts related to the product. Whenever the price changes, or the product goes on special, the customer receives an email alert.

The in-stock alert creates a link called “Sign up to get notified when this product is back in stock” for every product that is out of stock. Customers can click the link to subscribe to the alert. When the product is back in stock, customers receive email notification that the product is available.

Products that have alerts have a Product Alerts tab in the Product Information panel that lists the customers who have subscribed to either alert.

Product Alerts Run Settings

These settings enable you to select how often Magento checks for changes that require alerts to be sent. Additionally, you can select the recipient, sender, and template for emails that are sent if the sending of alerts fails.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 191

Product Alert Configuration Chapter 14:  Inventory

192

Product Alert Run Settings

Field Descriptions

Field

Frequency

Start Time

Error Email Recipient

Error Email Sender

Error Email Template

Description

Choose how often product alerts are sent out: Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

Choose what time of day the product alert process starts. This time should be after any price or inventory updates are performed.

Identify the email address of the person (normally a store administrator) who should receive an email notification when there is an error in the product alert process.

Select the role that the email will be “from.”

Select the email template to use for product alert error notifications. .

Managing Stock for Configurable Products

By default, Manage Stock is turned off for a configurable product, because the inventory is managed through each associated product. However, at times it may be necessary to apply inventory settings to a configurable product as a whole, such as to set quantity increments and change the stock availability.

To enable quantity increments:

1.

On the Inventory tab of the configurable product, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox, and set Manage Stock to “Yes.” The Enable Qty Increments field appears.

2.

To sell the product in quantity increments, do the following: a.

Below the Enable Qty Increments field, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox.

Then, set Enable Qty Increments to “Yes.” b.

In the Qty Increments field, enter the number of products that you want to sell together as a single batch.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 14:  Inventory Product Alert Configuration

To set product as “Out of Stock:”

1.

On the Inventory tab of the configurable product, clear the Use Config Settings checkbox, and set Manage Stock to “Yes.” The Stock Availability field appears.

2.

To temporarily remove the product from sale, set Stock Availability to “Out of Stock.”

3.

When you are ready to offer the product for sale, set Stock Availability to “In Stock.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 193

Product Alert Configuration

194

Chapter 14:  Inventory

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 15:

Product Images

Using images of consistent quality, size, and proportion gives your product catalog a professional look with commercial appeal. If you have a large catalog with several images per product, you can easily have hundreds, if not thousands of product images to manage. Before you get started, it’s a good idea to establish a naming convention for your image files, and organize them so you can find the originals if you ever need them.

The Images tab in the Product Information panel is used to upload and manage individual images for the current product. You can upload multiple images for each product, with different images for each website or store view. However, if you have a large quantity of images to manage, it is more efficient to import, rather than upload each one individually. To learn more, see:

Importing Product Images .

Product Images

Thumbnail Gallery

The thumbnail gallery on the product page can be used to display multiple images of the product. Although the position of the gallery varies by theme, it is usually just below the main image on the product page. Click each image to browse through the thumbnail gallery.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 195

Thumbnail Gallery Chapter 15:  Product Images

196

Thumbnail Gallery Popup

Light Boxes and Sliders

Some stores use third-party light boxes or sliders to replace the default product image display. You will find a variety of light box and slider extensions available in Magento

Connect .

Image Zoom

Magento displays a magnified portion of the image on mouseover, provided that you have uploaded a larger image that can be used to zoom in for a closer look. When zoom is activated, you can click the main image and move the cursor around to magnify different parts of the image. The magnified selection appears to the right of the image.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 15:  Product Images Image Size and Type

Image Zoom

Image Size and Type

As a best practice, you should standardize the size of your images so they appear at the highest possible resolution. A single product image can be displayed in several different sizes throughout your catalog. In addition to the main image on the product page, there are smaller images and thumbnails.

The following image types determine how images are used in your catalog. If you have only one product image, you can use the same image for each type. If you do not assign an image to each type, a placeholder image will mark the place in the catalog.

Image Type

Image Type

Thumbnail

Small Image

Base Image

Description

Thumbnail images appear in the thumbnail gallery, shopping cart, and in some blocks such as Related Items. Example size:

50 x 50 pixels

The small image is used for the product images in listings on category and search results pages, and to display the product images needed for sections such as for Up-sells, Cross-sells, and the New Products List. Example size:

470 x 470 pixels

The base image is the main image on the product detail page.

Image zoom is activated if you upload an image that is larger image than the image container. Example Size:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 197

Adding Product Images Chapter 15:  Product Images

Image Type

Media Image

Description

470 x 470 pixels (without Zoom)

1100 x 1100 pixels (with Zoom)

(Optional) A media image you the ability to associate additional images with a product, that are other than a product image. For example, you might include the product logo, care instructions, or an image of the ingredients from a food label.

If you add a media image attribute to the attribute set of a product, it is listed as an additional image type, along with

Base, Small, and Thumbnail. You can set it to "Exclude" so it doesn't appear in the gallery.

Adding Product Images

The Images tab is used to upload and manage images for a single product. You can upload multiple images for the product, and maintain different images for each website or store view. However, if you have many images to manage, you might prefer to

import

them, rather than upload product images individually.

198

Adding Product Images

To add product images:

1.

If the images are to be used for only a specific store

view

, set Choose Store View in the upper-left corner to identify the view where the images will be used.

2.

In the panel on the left, click Images .

3.

Click the Browse Files button, and select the product images files you want to upload to your store.

4.

Click the Upload Files button to upload the selected images to your store. Then, for each image, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 15:  Product Images Adding Product Images a.

Enter a descriptive Label for the image. This text appears on mouseover and can improve indexing by search engines.

b.

If using multiple images, enter a numeric value in the Sort Order field to determine the sequence in which they appear in the thumbnail gallery.

c.

To prevent an image from being included in the thumbnail gallery, click the Exclude checkbox. For example, if the product has only one image, there’s no reason to include it in the gallery.

d.

To delete any image, select the Remove checkbox.

5.

When complete, click the Save and Continue Edit button.

To add images to the gallery:

Follow the same process for adding a new product image. For best results, gallery image files should be the same size and proportion as the main product image.

Field Descriptions

Field

Image

Label

Sort Order

Thumbnail

Small Image

Base Image

Media Image

Exclude

Description

On mouseover, a thumbnail of each uploaded image appears.

The label is the descriptive “Alt” text that appears on mouseover. Including a label for each image improves indexing by search engines, and accessibility for people who use screen readers.

Determines the order in which images are displayed in the gallery.

The Thumbnail image is used in the shopping cart and in some blocks, such as Related Items.

The Small Image is used in product listings on the category and search results pages, and to display product images in additional sections such as Up-sells, Cross-sells, and the New

Products List.

The Base Image is the main image on the product page, and is also used to produce the magnified area displayed during image zoom.

(Optional) The Media Image appears only if an attribute of the

Media Image type is included in the attribute set.

Select the Exclude checkbox to prevent the image from being listed in the thumbnail gallery.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 199

Placeholders Chapter 15:  Product Images

Field

Remove

Description

Select the Remove checkbox to delete the image. Selected images are deleted when the product record is saved.

Placeholders

Magento uses a temporary image as a placeholder until permanent product images are available. The initial placeholder image is the Magento logo, which you can replace with placeholder images of your own design.

200

Product Placeholder

To upload placeholder images:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Product Image Placeholders section. Then, do the following: a.

For each image type, click the Browse button to upload the placeholder image you want to use for the Base Image , Small Image , and Thumbnail images. If you like, you can use the same image for each type.

b.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Product Image Placeholder Configuration

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 15:  Product Images Watermarks

Watermarks

If you have gone to the expense of creating your own original product images, there is not much you can do to prevent unscrupulous competitors from stealing them with the click of a mouse. However, you can place a watermark on each image to identify it as your property and make it a less attractive target. A watermark file can be either a .jpg

(jpeg), .gif, or .png image.

To place watermarks on product images:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Design .

3.

Click to expand the Product Image Watermarks section. Then, complete the following steps for the Base, Small, and Thumbnail images: a.

Enter the Watermark Default Size , in pixels. For example: 200 x 300 b.

Enter the Watermark Opacity , as a percentage. For example: .40

c.

Click the Browse button and select the Watermark image file to upload.

d.

Set Watermark Position to your preference.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Base Image Watermark

Default Size

Description

The default size of the watermark for the Base Image. (For example, 470 x 470)

Base Image Watermark

Opacity, Percent

The percentage of opacity applied to the watermark for the

Base Image.

Base Image Watermark The file with the watermark image to be uploaded for the

Base Image. (The image file can be .jpg (jpeg), .gif, and .png.)

Base Image Watermark

Position

The position of the watermark for the Base Image. Options include:

Stretch

Tile

Top/Left

Top/Right

Bottom/Left

Bottom/Right

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 201

Shopping Cart Thumbnails Chapter 15:  Product Images

Field

Small Image

Thumbnail Image

Description

(Repeat the above for the Small Image.)

(Repeat the above for the Thumbnail Image.)

Shopping Cart Thumbnails

The thumbnail images in the shopping cart give customers a quick overview of the items they are about to purchase. However, for products with multiple options, the standard product image may not match the actual item being purchased. If the customer purchased a pair of red shoes, ideally, the thumbnail in the shopping cart should show the product in the same color.

The thumbnail image for both grouped and configurable products can be set to display the image from either the “parent” product record or associated product. The setting applies to all grouped or configurable products in the current store view.

To configure shopping cart thumbnails:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout .

3.

Click to expand the Shopping Cart section, do the following:

Shopping Cart Configuration a.

Set Grouped Product Image to one of the following: l l

Product Thumbnail Itself

Parent Product Thumbnail b.

Set Configurable Product Image to one of the following: l l

Product Thumbnail Itself

Parent Product Thumbnail

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

202 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:

Product Pricing

The Prices tab is used to establish the pricing structure of the product. Options include special and tier pricing, and manufacturer’s suggested retail price.

Product Information - Prices

Field Descriptions

Field

Price

Group Price

Special Price

Special Price To Date

Scope

Global

Global

Website

Special Price From Date Website

Website

Description

The retail price of the product.

Sets up promotional prices for specific customer groups within the selected website.

To offer a Special Price, enter a discounted price and complete the date range fields to establish when the promotion goes into effect.

When available, the retail price is crossed out and the special price appears below in a large, bold font.

Sets the beginning date for the range of time the Special Price is offered.

Sets the ending date for the range of time the

Special Price is offered.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 203

204

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

Field

Tier Price

Apply MAP

Display Actual Price

Manufacturer’s Suggested Retail Price

Tax Class

Scope

Website

Website

Website

Global

Description

Tier pricing is used to offer a quantity discount. The discount can be applied to specific customer groups within the selected website.

When applied, hides the actual product price from the customer. Options include:

Yes / No / Use Config

Determines when the customer can see the actual product price. Options include:

In Cart

Before Order Confirmation

On Gesture

Use Config

Displays the actual product price in the shopping cart.

Displays the actual product price only at the end of the checkout process, just before the order is confirmed.

Displays the actual product price

Displays the actual price according to the configuration setting.

The retail price as suggested by the manufacturer (MSRP).

The tax class associated with the product.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing Special Price

Special Price

To offer a Special Price, enter a discounted price and complete the date range fields to establish when the promotion goes into effect. On both the catalog list and product pages, the regular price is crossed out, and the Special Price appears in bold red.

Special Pricing

To display a special price:

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices .

2.

Enter the amount of the Special Price .

3.

Complete the Special Price From Date and Special Price To Date to define the period of time that the special price is in effect. You can pick the dates from the Calendar to the right of each field.

4.

Click the Save button to save your changes.

5.

When prompted to update the cache and indexes, follow the instructions at the top of the page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 205

Tier Price Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

Tier Price

Tier pricing lets you offer a quantity discount from oth the catalog list and product detail pages. The discount can be applied to a specific store view or customer group.

Tier Price “As Low as” l l

On the catalog page, the product price includes the words, “As Low As,” followed by the lowest tier price.

On the product page, the calculated quantity discount has the message:

Buy 2 for $__._ each and save _%

The prices in the storefront take precedence from the highest to the lowest quantity.

Therefore, if you have a tier for the quantity 5 and one for the quantity 10 and a customer adds 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9 items to the shopping cart, then the customer gets the discounted price that you specified for the quantity 5 tier. As soon as the customer adds the 10th item, the discounted price specified for the quantity 10 tier supersedes the quantity 5 tier and that discounted price (of 10) applies instead.

206 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing Tier Price

Tier Price on Product Page

To display a tier price:

1.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices .

2.

In the Tier Price section, click the Add Tier button. Then, do the following:

Tier Pricing a.

Select the Website to which the tier pricing applies.

b.

Select the Customer Group for whom the tier pricing is available.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 207

Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

To apply a tier to multiple groups, but not all groups, create multiple tiers, each with the same Qty and Price information and select a different customer group for each.

c.

In the Qty field, enter the quantity that must be ordered to receive the discount.

d.

In the Price field, enter the adjusted price of the item.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

4.

When you are prompted to update the cache and indexes, follow the instructions in the message at the top of the workspace.

Minimum Advertised Price (MAP)

Merchants are sometimes prohibited from displaying a price that is lower than the manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP). Magento’s Minimum Advertised Price

(MAP) gives you the ability to remain in compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements while offering your customers a better price. Because requirements differ from one manufacturer to another, you can configure your store to prevent the display of your actual price on pages where it is not allowed to appear according to the terms of the manufacturer.

208

“Click for Price” Gesture with Popup

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing Minimum Advertised Price (MAP)

MAP can be configured at both the global and product levels. There are a variety of configuration options that you can use to remain in compliance with the terms of your agreement with the manufacturer, while still offering your customers a better price. Your store’s MAP settings can be applied to all products in your catalog or configured for only specific products.

If a product added to the shopping cart has MSRP specified, the price will not be crossed-out in the mini shopping cart or in the shopping cart.

For products that allow configuration on the frontend, and whose prices depend on a selected option, (either custom options or simple products with their own SKUs and stock management), the following logic is implemented: l l

MAP is applied to the main price; prices of the options, bundle items, and associated products (which add or subtract from the main price) are displayed normally.

If a product does not have a main price, and its price is derived from the associated products’ prices (such as in a grouped product), the MAP settings of the associated products are applied. Note that the MAP feature is not supported for bundled products with dynamic pricing.

Regarding other price settings, the MAP application logic is the following: l l

If tier pricing is set, the tier price is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting.

If a special price is set, it is considered to be the actual price for MAP.

In the order management and customer management tools, as well as in the reports sections of the Admin, only the actual price appears.

Global Configuration

On the global level, you can enable/disable the functionality, apply it to all products, define how the actual price is displayed, and edit the text of the MAP related messages and information tips that appear in the store. When MAP is enabled globally, productlevel MAP settings become available. For a product you can choose to apply MAP, specify the MSRP, and define how the actual price is displayed. Product-level MAP settings override the global MAP settings.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 209

Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

210

Minimum Advertised Price Configuration

To configure MAP globally:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

If applicable, in the upper-right corner, set Current Configuration Scope to the website where the configuration applies.

3.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales . Then, click to expand the Minimum

Advertised Price section, and do the following:

4.

To activate MAP, set Enable MAP to “Yes.” a.

Set Apply MAP (Default Value) to one of the following: l l

To apply MAP to certain products, select “No.”

To apply MAP by default to all products and hide all prices throughout the site, select “Yes.” b.

To determine when and where you want your actual price to be visible to the customer, set Display Actual Price to one of the following: l l l

In Cart

Before Order Confirmation

On Gesture (on click)

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing Minimum Advertised Price (MAP)

To configure MAP for a specific product:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click to expand the Minimum

Advertised Price section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Enable MAP to “Yes.” b.

Set Apply MAP (Default Value) to “No.” c.

Complete the remaining settings as needed. Then, click the Save Config button.

3.

Select Catalog > Manage Products , and open the product record.

4.

In the Product Information panel on the left, select Prices . Then, do the following: a.

Enter your Price that is lower than the manufacturer’s minimum advertised price.

b.

Set Apply MAP to “Yes.” c.

Set Display Actual Price according to your preference.

d.

Enter the Manufacturer’s Suggested Retail Price.

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

Minimum Advertised Price Configuration

Using MAP with Product Types

Product Type Description

Simple, Virtual The actual price is not shown on the catalog and product pages; it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting. The custom options prices are displayed normally.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 211

Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

Product Type

Grouped

Configurable

Bundle with fixed price

Downloadable

Description

Prices of the associated simple products are not shown on the catalog and product pages; they are displayed according to their Display Actual Price setting.

The actual price is not shown on the catalog and product pages; it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting. The prices of the options are displayed normally.

The actual price is not shown in the catalog; it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting. The prices of the bundle items are displayed normally.

The actual price is not shown on the catalog and product pages; it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting. The prices of the links are displayed normally.

Using MAP with Price Settings

Price Setting Description

Tier Price If tier pricing is set, the tier pricing message is not displayed in the catalog. On the product page a notification is displayed that indicates that the price can be lower when ordering more than a certain quantity, but the discount is displayed in percentages only. For associated products of a grouped product, the discounts are not displayed on the product page.

The tier price is shown according to the Display Actual Price setting.

Special Price If the Special price is specified, the special price is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enable MAP

Apply MAP

Description

Activates Minimum Advertised Price for your store.

Options include: Yes / No

Applies MAP by default to all products in the store. Options include:

Yes Initially hides all prices in the store, and displays them according to the Display

Actual Price setting.

No Does not apply MAP to all products, by

212 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing Product Group Price

Field Description default. If MAP is enabled, it can still be applied to products individually.

Display Actual Price Determines where the actual price of a product is visible to the customer.Options include:

In Cart Displays the actual product price in the shopping cart.

Before Order

Confirmation

On Gesture

Displays the actual product price at the end of the checkout process, just before the order is confirmed.

Displays the actual product price in a popup when the customer clicks the

“Click for price” or “What’s this?” link.

Default Popup Text

Message

The popup text message that appears when the customer selects the “Click for price” link from a category list or product view page.

Default “What’s This” Text

Message

The pop-up text message that appears when the customer clicks the “What’s this?” link from the product view page.

Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price

The retail price as suggested by the manufacturer (MSRP).

Product Group Price

Product Group Price enables you to set promotional prices for different customer groups at the product level. Group price can be used with the following product types: l l l l l

Simple

Configurable

Virtual

Bundle

Downloadable

For bundle products, the group price is specified as a discount percentage. If bundle items have their own group prices set for the same customer group, then the discount specified for the whole bundle product applies to the group prices.

For the Grouped product types, the Group Price functionality is not applied, even if these product types are selected in the Apply To field of the group_price attribute. In this case, the Group Price field does not appear on the Prices page in Product

Information.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 213

Product Group Price Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

Important! When a group price is set for a product, then the catalog price rules for the corresponding customer groups are applied to the group price, not to the regular price.

To set a group price for a product:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products . Then in the list, click to open the product in edit mode.

2.

In the panel on the left, click Prices . Then, do the following: a.

In the Group Price field, click the Add Group Price button.

b.

Select the target Customer Group and enter the product Price for the group. The

Website column defines the scope of the Group Price field.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

214

Group Price

Group Price Examples

The following table illustrates how the minimum promotional price logic is implemented. The table provides several examples, but it is not an exhaustive list of possible combinations.

Admin Price Settings

Price = $4

Special Price = $5

Tier Price = $3

Price = $5

Special Price = $3

Tier Price = $4

Price Displayed in Storefront

For customers from the tier price group(s):

$ 4

As low as: $3

For customers from other groups: $4

For all customers:

Regular Price: $5

Special Price: $3

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 16:  Product Pricing Product Group Price

Admin Price Settings

Price = $5

Special Price = $3

Tier Price = $4

Price after a catalog price rule applied = $2

Price = $5

Special Price = $4

Group Price = $3

Price Displayed in Storefront

For customers from the catalog price rule group:

Regular Price: $5

Special Price: $2

For customers from other groups:

Regular Price: $5

Special Price: $3

For customers from the price group:

Regular Price: $5

Special Price: $3

For customers from other groups:

Regular Price: $5

Special Price: $4

Group Price Attribute

The list of product types for which group price can be specified is defined in the group_ price attribute properties. The product types that can be used with the attribute are configured in the the Apply To property.

Regular price

Promotional price

Group Price Attribute Properties

The value of the price system product attribute, which by default, corresponds to the Price specified on the Prices tab in Product

Information.

A product price that is defined by any of the following system product attributes: special_price, group_price, or tier_price; or the resulting price after a catalog price rule is applied.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 215

Product Group Price Chapter 16:  Product Pricing

The display of group prices in the store follows the general logic used for Magento pricing. If, in addition to the regular price, a product has promotional price(s), the lowest price appears in the storefront. If a product custom option has price set as a percentage, then the lowest promotional price is used as base for the calculation. The same logic applies when the associated products (the options) of a configurable product have prices set as a percentage.

216 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Search & SEO

Chapter 17:

Storefront Search Tools

Research shows that people who use search are more likely to make a purchase than those who rely on navigation alone. In fact, according to some studies, people who use search are nearly twice as likely to make a purchase.

Magento Community Edition has a powerful search engine that you can use as is, or enhance to make even more effective. In this chapter, we will examine the search tools that are available to your customers while shopping in your store.

l l l

Quick Search

Advanced Search

Search Results

In addition, Magento’s

layered navigation

gives your customers the ability to filter product options by price, manufacturer, or any other criteria to reduce the time it takes to make a purchase.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 219

Quick Search Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools

Quick Search

The Quick Search box in the upper-right corner helps visitors find products in your catalog. The search text can be the full or partial product name, or any other word or phrase that describes the product.

To do a quick search:

1.

Type the first few letters of what you are looking for into the search box.

2.

Press either the Enter key or the button to the right of the search box to retrieve a list of matching products from the catalog.

Quick Search

220 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools Advanced Search

Advanced Search

Advanced Search lets shoppers search through your catalog by entering values into a form. Because the form contains multiple fields, a single search can include several parameters. The result of the search is a list of the products that match the search criteria. A link to Advanced Search is in the footer of your store.

Advanced Search

Each field in the form corresponds to an attribute from your product catalog. You can determine which fields to include by setting the attribute frontend properties to “Include in Advanced Search.”

As a best practice, you should include only the fields that your customers are most likely to use to find a product, because too many can slow down the search.

To use advanced search:

1.

In the footer of the store, click the Advanced Search link.

2.

In the Search Settings form, enter any value you want to match in as many fields as necessary. You can find records based on a full or partial match.

3.

Click the Search button at the bottom to display the results.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 221

Advanced Search Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools

Search Settings

4.

If you don’t see what you are looking for in the search results, click Modify your search and try another combination of values.

222

Search Results

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools Search Results

Search Results

The Search Results include all products that match the search parameters entered through the Quick Search box or the Advanced Search form. Any page in the catalog that lists products has essentially the same controls. The only difference is that one is the result of a search query, and the other the result of navigation.

The results can be displayed in either a grid or list format, and the records can be sorted by any number of parameters. Page controls can be used to sort the list, change the format, and to advance from one page to the next. Depending on the page layout, the left column of the page may also include layered navigation under the “Shop By” heading, with the products listed by category and attribute.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Search Results with Page Controls

223

Search Results Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools

Page Controls

Control

View As

Sort By

Show Per Page

Pagination Links

Description

Displays the list in either a Grid or List format.

Changes the sort order of the list.

Determines how many products appear per page.

Navigation links to other pages.

To configure the page settings:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Frontend section. Then, adjust the settings according to your preference.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Catalog Frontend Search Configuration

224 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools Search Results

Field Descriptions

Field

List Mode

Products per Page on

Grid Allowed Values

Products per Page on

Grid Default Value

Products per Page on

List Allowed Values

Products per Page on

List Default Value

Allow All Products per

Page

Product Listing Sort by

Scope

Description

Store View Determines the format of the search results list.

Options include:

Grid Only Formats the list as a grid of rows and columns.Each product appears in a single cell of the grid.

List Only Formats the list with each product on a separate row.

Grid (default / List) By default, products appear in Grid view, but can be toggled to List view.

List (default / Grid) By default, products appear in List View, but can be toggled to Grid view.

Store View Determines the number of products displayed in Grid View. To provide a selection of options, enter multiple values separated by commas.

Store View Determines the number of products displayed per page by default, in Grid View.

Store View Determines the number of products displayed in List View. To provide a selection of options, enter multiple values separated by commas.

Store View Determines the number of products displayed per page by default, in List View.

Store View If set to “Yes,” includes the “ALL” option in the

“Show per Page” control.

Store View Determines the sort order of the search results list. The selection of options is determined by the Display Settings of the category and the available attributes that are set to be “Used for

Sorting in Product Listing.” The default is set to

“Use All Available Attributes,” and typically includes:

Best Value

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 225

Popular Search Terms Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools

Field

Use Flat Catalog Category Global

Use Flat Catalog Product

Scope

Global

Description

Name

Price

Enables the

flat category

structure. Options include: Yes / No

Enables the

flat product

structure. Options include: Yes / No

Allow Dynamic Media

URLs in Products and Categories

Store View Allows dynamic media URLs, rather than static

URLs.

Popular Search Terms

The Search Terms link in the footer of your store displays the search terms that have been used by visitors to your store, and ranks them by popularity. Search terms appear in a “tag cloud” format, where the size of the text indicates the popularity of the term.

By default, Popular Search Terms is enabled as a search engine optimization tool, but has no direct connection to the catalog search process. Because the Search Terms page is indexed by search engines, any terms included on the page will help improve your search engine ranking and the visibility of your store.

226

Popular Search Terms

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools Catalog Search Configuration

To configure Popular Search Terms:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog . Then, do the following: a.

Click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section.

b.

Set Popular Search Terms to “Enable.”

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Search Engine Optimizations

Catalog Search Configuration

By adjusting the Catalog Search configuration, you can control the behavior of the search operations and determine the size of valid query text, and the display of search recommendations.

To configure catalog search:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog . Then, click to expand the Catalog Search section.

Catalog Search

3.

To limit the length and word count of search query text, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 227

Catalog Search Configuration Chapter 17:  Storefront Search Tools a.

Set Minimal Query Length to the minimum number of characters that can be submitted in a query.

b.

Set Maximum Query Length to the maximum number of characters that can be submitted in a query.

c.

Set Maximum Query Words Count to the maximum number of words that can be submitted in a query.

4.

Set Search Type to one of the following:

5.

To limit the number of records that can be used with layered navigation, enter the maximum number allowed in the Apply Layered Navigation if Search Results are Less

Than field. To allow any number of records, enter 0.

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Minimal Query Length

Scope

Description

Store View The minimum number of characters allowed in a catalog search.

Maximum Query Length Store View The maximum number of characters allowed in a catalog search.

Maximum Query Words

Count

Store View The maximum number of words allowed in a query.

Search Type Store View Determines the type of search operation performed by the MySql engine. Options include:

Like Performs a search based on individual keywords.

Fulltext

Combine

(Like and

Fulltext)

Performs a search based on the full text of each attribute and ranks each by relevence.

This combination of Like and

Fulltext matches by keyword, but takes into consideration its relevence.

Apply Layered Navigation if Search Results are Less Than

Store View Sets the maximum number of search results that are displayed as a list. Any results over the number are shown as layered navigation. To apply layered navigation to all search results, enter 0.

Using layered navigation for all search results can impact performance.

228 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 18:

Managing Search Terms

You can learn what your customers are looking for by examining the search terms they use to find products in your store. If enough people are looking for a product that you don’t carry, perhaps it’s time to add it to your catalog. Meanwhile, rather than have them leave them empty handed, why not redirect them to another product in your catalog? Here are a few ways you can leverage your customers’ search terms:

Landing Page

The landing page for a search term can be a content page, a category page, a product detail page, or even a page on a different site.

Synonyms

One way to improve the effectiveness of catalog search is to include different terms that people may use to describe the same item. You don’t want to lose a sale just because someone is looking for a “sofa,” and your product is listed as a “couch.” You can capture a broader range of search terms by entering the words, “sofa”

“davenport,” and “loveseat” as synonyms for “couch,” and direct them to the same landing page.

Misspelled Words

Use search terms to capture common misspellings and redirect them to the appropriate page. For example, if you sell wrought iron patio furniture, you know that many people misspell the term as “rod iron,” or even “rot iron.” You can enter each misspelled word as a search term, and make them synonyms for “wrought iron.” Even though the word is misspelled, the search will be directed to the page for

“wrought iron.”

Adding Search Terms

As you learn new words that people use to search for products in your catalog, you can add them to your search terms list to direct people to the closely matching products in your catalog.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 229

Adding Search Terms Chapter 18:  Managing Search Terms

Search Terms

To add a new search term:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Search Terms .

2.

Click the Add New Search Term button. Then, do the following: a.

In the General Information section, in the Search Query box, type the word or phrase that you want to add as a new search term.

230

General Information b.

Select the Store where the search term will be used. If your store is available in multiple languages, select the applicable store view.

c.

If this term is a synonym for another search term, enter the other term in the

Synonym For field. Any search for the synonym will be automatically redirected to the page for the other term.

d.

To redirect the search results to another page in your store, or to another website, type the full URL of the target page in the Redirect URL field.

e.

If you want this term to be available for use as a suggestion whenever a search returns no results, set Display in Suggested Terms to “Yes.”

3.

When complete, click the Save Search button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 18:  Managing Search Terms

To edit a search term:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Search Terms .

2.

Click the row of any record to open the search term in edit mode.

3.

Make the necessary changes.

4.

When complete, click the Save Search button.

To delete a search term:

1.

In the list, select the checkbox of the term to be deleted.

2.

In the upper-right corner of the list, set the Actions control to “Delete.”

3.

When complete, click the Submit button.

Adding Search Terms

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 231

Adding Search Terms

232

Chapter 18:  Managing Search Terms

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 19:

SEO Best Practices

Search engine optimization is the practice of fine-tuning the content and presentation of a site to improve the way the pages are indexed by search engines.

Magento Community Edition includes a number of features that support your ongoing effort to improve the indexing of your site, such as: l l l l l l

Meta Information

Sitemap

Catalog URL Options

Dynamic Media URLs

Canonical Meta Tag

URL Rewrites

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 233

Meta Information Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices

Meta Information

Your store is loaded with places where you can enter keyword-rich meta data to improve the way search engines index your site. While setting up your store, you might have entered preliminary meta data, with the intention of finishing it later. Over time, you can fine-tune the meta data to target the buying patterns and preferences of your customers.

Meta Title

The meta title appears in the title bar and tab of your browser, and search results listings. The meta title should be unique to the page, and less than 70 characters in length.

Meta Keywords

Although some search engines ignore meta keywords, others continue to use them. The current best practice is to incorporate high-value keywords in the meta title and meta description.

Meta Description

Meta descriptions provide a brief overview of the page for search results listings. Ideally, a meta description should be between 150-160 characters in length, although the field will accept up to 255 characters.

234 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices Sitemap

Sitemap

The default Magento sitemap has links to every product and category in your store, and can help improve the way your products are indexed by some search engines. Like a table of contents, the sitemap also gives visitors a quick overview of the organization of your catalog. To switch between the category and product lists, click the link on the right. By default, the footer of your store includes a link to the sitemap.

Sitemap

The sitemap can be formatted as a nested, tree-like structure, or as a simple list. The number of lines included per page, and the use of indentation is set in your system configuration.

Because the Magento sitemap does not include CMS pages, it is not a complete index to the content on your site. In addition to the default sitemap, it is recommended that you also generate a Google sitemap that can be used for reference when your site is indexed by Google.

To set up the sitemap:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

2.

Click to expand the Sitemap section. Then, set the following options according to your preference: l l

Use Tree Like Category Sitemap

Minimum Lines per Page

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 235

Catalog URL Options Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices

Sitemap Configuration

3.

Scroll down the page and click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section.

Then, set Autogenerated Site Map to “Enable.”

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Catalog URL Options

Although you might not give it much thought at the beginning, the URLs you assign to products and categories play a major role in determining how well your site is indexed by search engines.

Before you start building your catalog is an ideal time to consider the available options.

Magento creates both dynamic and static URLs. In addition, there are several configuration options that determine the format of URLs used for items in your catalog.

Dynamic URL

A dynamic URL is created “on the fly,” and might include a query string with variables for the product ID, sort order, and the page where the request was made. When a customer searches for a product in your store, the resulting URL might look something like this:

Dynamic URL http://mystore.com/catalogsearch/result/?q=tee+shirt

Static URL

A static URL is a fixed address for a specific page. A static URL can be displayed in a search-engine friendly format, or one that references products and categories by ID.

Search-engine friendly URLs include words that people might use to look for a product, and are created by enabling Web Server Rewrites.

Static URL http://mystore.com/accessories/eyewear.html

http://mystore.com/catalog/product/view/id/409/s/chelsea-tee-

409/category/16/

236 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices Catalog URL Options

To configure search-engine friendly URLs:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configure . Then in the panel on the left under

General, select Web .

2.

Click to expand the Search Engine Optimization section.

3.

Set Use Web Server Rewrites to “Yes.”

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

URL Key

The URL key is the part of of a static URL that describes the product or category. When you create a product or category, an initial URL key is automatically generated based on the name. The URL key should consist of lowercase characters with hyphens to separate words. A well-designed, “search engine friendly” URL key might include the product name and key words to improve the way it is indexed by search engines. The URL key can be configured to create an automatic redirect if the URL key is changed.

Store Code

The store code can be included in the URL. However, it might cause problems if thirdparty services, such as PayPal, are configured to work with a URL that does not include the code. By default, the store code is not included in URLs.

To configure the store code for URLs:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configure . Then in the panel on the left under

General, select Web .

2.

Click to expand the URL Options section.

3.

Set Add Store Code to your preference.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

URL Options

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 237

Catalog URL Options Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices

HTML Suffix

Your catalog can be configured to either include or exclude the .html suffix as part of category and product URLs. There are various reasons why people might choose to use or to omit the suffix. Some believe that the suffix no longer serves any useful purpose, and that pages without a suffix are indexed more effectively by search engines. However, your company might have a standardized format for URLs, that requires a suffix.

The most important thing to understand is that the suffix is controlled by your system configuration. Never type the suffix directly into the URL key of a category or product.

(Doing so will result in a double suffix at the end of the URL.)

Whether you decide to use the suffix or not, be consistent and use the same setting for all your product and category pages. Here are examples of a category URL with, and without, the suffix.

URL Suffix Examples http://mystore.com/accessories/eyewear.html

http://mystore.com/accessories/eyewear/retro-chic-eyeglasses

Category Path

You can configure the URL to either include or exclude the category path. By default, the category path is included in all category and product pages. The following examples show the same product URL with, and without, the category path.

Category Path Examples http://mystore.com/accessories/eyewear/retro-chic-eyeglasses http://mystore.com/retro-chic-eyeglasses

To prevent search engines from indexing multiple URLs that lead to the same content, you can exclude the category path from the URL. Another method is to use a

canonical meta tag

to let search engines know which URLs to index and which to ignore.

To configure catalog URLs:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Product URL Suffix to “html” or “htm.” Do not include a period before the suffix.

b.

Set Category URL Suffix to “html” or “htm.” Do not include a period before the suffix.

238 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices Catalog URL Options c.

Set the category path to your preference. To omit the category path from product

URLs, set Use Categories Path for Product URLs to “No.”

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

5.

After the setting is saved, you will be prompted to refresh the cache. Click the

Cache

Management

link in the message at the top of the workspace. Then, follow the instructions to refresh the cache.

Search Engine Optimizations

Field Descriptions 

Field

Scope

Description

Autogenerated Site Map Store View Determines if the Magento

site map

is implemented in the store. When enabled, a link to the site map appears in the footer. Options include:

Enable / Disable.

Popular Search Terms

Product URL Suffix

Category URL Suffix

Store View Determines if

Popular Search Terms

is implemented in the store. Options include: Enable /

Disable.

Store View Determines if a suffix, such as html or htm, is applied to product URLs. If used, do not include a period before the suffix, because it is applied automatically.

Store View Determines if a suffix, such as html or htm, is applied to category URLs. If used, do not include a period before the suffix, because it is applied automatically.

Use Categories Path for

Product URLs

Store View Determines if category paths are included in product URLs. Doing so can cause multiple URLs that lead to the same page. To learn more, see:

Canonical Meta Tag .

Create Permanent RedirStore View Determines if a permanent redirect is created

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 239

Dynamic Media URLs Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices

Field ect for URLs if URL Key

Changed

Page Title Separator

Scope

Description

Use Canonical Link Meta

Tag for Categories

Use Canonical Link Meta

Tag for Products

Store View Identifies the character that separates the category name and subcategory in the page title that appears in the browser.

Store View If there are multiple URLs that point to the same category page, uses a

canonical meta tag

to identify the category URL that search engines should index. Options include: Yes / No.

Store View If there are multiple URLs that point to the same product page, uses a

canonical meta tag

to identify the product URL that search engines should index. Options include: Yes / No.

Dynamic Media URLs

A dynamic media URL is a relative reference to an image or other media asset. When enabled, dynamic media URLs can be used to link directly to assets on your server, or even on a CDN. As with all

markup tags

, the code is enclosed in double curly braces. The format of a dynamic media URL looks like this:

Dynamic Media URL

{{media url="path/to/image.jpg"}}

If you prefer to use a static URL, you can change the configuration setting. If dynamic media URLs are included in your catalog, but later the setting is disabled, each reference in your catalog will appear as a broken link. However, the links can be restored by again enabling dynamic media URLs. Using dynamic media URLs can enhance your catalog, but can also impact the performance of catalog search.

240 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices Dynamic Media URLs

Allow Dynamic Media URLs in Products and Categories

To configure dynamic media URLs:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Frontend section. Then, set Allow Dynamic Media URLs in

Products and Categories to either “Yes” or “No.”

4.

Click the Save Config button to save the setting.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 241

Canonical Meta Tag Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices

To use static URLs by default for media files:

By default, images inserted into the catalog from media storage have relative, dynamic

URLs. If you prefer to use a static URL, you can change the configuration setting.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Content Management .

3.

In the WYSIWYG Options section, set Use Static URLs for Media Content in WYSIWYG for Catalog to “Yes.”

4.

Click the Save Config button to save the setting.

242

Enable WYSIWYG Editor

Canonical Meta Tag

Some search engines penalize websites that have multiple URLs that point to the same content. The canonical meta tag tells search engines which page to index when multiple

URLs have identical or very similar content. Using the canonical meta tag can improve your site ranking and aggregate pageviews.

For example, if your catalog is configured to include the category path in product URLs, your store will generate multiple URLs that point to the same product page.

http://mystore.com/furniture/living-room/microfiber-sofa-sleeper http://mystore.com/microfiber-sofa-sleeper

The canonical meta tag is placed in the <head> block of a product or category page. It provides a link to your preferred URL, so search engines will give it greater weight.

When canonical meta tags for categories are enabled, the category page of your store includes a canonical URL to the full category URL: http://mystore.com/furniture/living-room/microfiber-sofa-sleeper when canonical meta tags for products are enabled, the product page includes a canonical URL to the domain-name/product-url-key because product URL keys are globally unique.

http://mystore.com/microfiber-sofa-sleeper

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices Canonical Meta Tag

If you also include the category path in product URLs, the canonical URL remains domain-name/product-url-key. However, the product can also be accessed using its full

URL, which includes the category. For example, if the product URL key is microfibersofa-sleeper and is assigned to the Furniture > Living-Room category, the product can be accessed using either URL.

You can avoid being penalized by search engines by omitting the category from the URL, or by using the canonical meta tag to direct search engines to index either by product or category. As a best practice, it is recommended that you enable canonial meta tags for both categories and products.

To enable the canonical meta tag:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, select Catalog.

3.

Click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section.

4.

If want search engines to index only pages that have a full category path, do the following: a.

Set Use Canonical Link Meta Tag for Categories to “Yes.” b.

Set Use Canonical Link Meta Tag for Products to “No.”

5.

If you want search engines to index only product pages, do the following: a.

Set Use Canonical Link Meta Tag for Products to “Yes.” b.

Set Use Canonical Link Meta Tag for Categories to “No.”

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 243

Canonical Meta Tag

244

Chapter 19:  SEO Best Practices

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 20:

Managing URL Rewrites

The URL Rewrite tool lets you change any URL that is associated with a product, category, or CMS page. When the rewrite goes into effect, any links that point to the previous URL are redirected to the new address.

The terms rewrite and redirect are often used interchangeably, but refer to slightly different processes. A URL rewrite changes the way a URL appears in the browser. A

URL redirect, on the other hand, updates the URL that is stored on the server. A

URL redirect can be either temporary or permanent. Your store uses URL rewrites and redirects to make it easy for you to create search engine friendly URLs and to preserve existing links.

Create Permanent Redirect for Old URL

Automatic Product Redirects

Your store can be configured to automatically generate a permanent redirect whenever the URL key of a product changes. In the product record, the checkbox

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 245

Automatic Product Redirects Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites below the URL key indicates if permanent redirects are enabled for your catalog. If your store is already configured to automatically redirect catalog URLs, making a redirect is as easy as updating the URL key.

To set up automatic redirects:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Search Engine Optimizations section. Then, set Create Permanent

Redirect for URLs if URL Key Changed to “Yes.”

246

Create Permanent Redirect

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

To automatically redirect catalog URLs:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

Find the product in the list, and click to open the record.

3.

In the URL Key field, do the following: a.

Make sure that the Create Permanent Redirect for old URL checkbox is selected. If not, complete the instructions to enable automatic redirects.

b.

Update the URL Key as needed, using all lowercase characters and hyphens instead of spaces.

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

5.

When prompted to refresh the cache and index, click the links in the messages that appear at the top of the workspace. Follow the instructions.

The permanent redirect is now in effect for the product and any associated category

URLs.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites Creating URL Rewrites

6.

To view the redirect records, select Catalog > URL Rewrite Management . The most recent permanent redirects are at the top of the list.

Creating URL Rewrites

The URL Rewrite tool can be used to create product and category rewrites, and custom rewrites for any page in your store. When the rewrite goes into effect, any existing links that point to the previous URL are seamlessly redirected to the new address.

You can use rewrites to create additional URLs for items, as a temporary seasonal change, or as a permanent change. Rewrites can be created for any valid path, including

CMS content pages. Internally, the system references products and category by ID. No matter how often the URL changes, the ID remains the same. Here are some examples of how you might use URL rewrites:

Original URL

http://www.example.com/peripherals/ergonomic-keyboard.html

Additional Product URL

http://www.example.com/best-keyboard.html

Additional Category URL

http://www.example.com/all-on-sale.html

http://www.example.com/save-now/spring-sale

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 247

Creating URL Rewrites Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites

248

URL Rewrite Management

The following instructions show how to use the URL Rewrite tool to create three different kinds of redirects: l l l

Product Rewrite

Category Rewrite

Custom Rewrite

Creating a Product Rewrite

Step 1:

Request a Product Rewrite

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > URL Rewrite Management .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add URL Rewrite button.

3.

Set Create URL Rewrite to “For product.”

Create URL Rewrite for Product

4.

In the list, find the product that you want to redirect, and click the record.

5.

Scroll down to the bottom of the Select Category tree, and click the Skip Category

Selection button.

6.

In the URL Rewrite Information section, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites Creating URL Rewrites

URL Rewrite Information a.

If you have multiple stores, set Store to the specific view where the rewrite applies.

b.

In the Request Path field, enter the URL key of the page to be redirected.

c.

Set Redirect to one of the following: l l

Temporary (302)

Permanent (301) d.

For your own reference, enter a brief description of the rewrite.

7.

When complete, click the Save button.

Your new product rewrite now appears at the top of the list.

New Product Rewrite

Step 2:

Refresh the Index

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Index Management .

2.

Select the Catalog URL Rewrites checkbox.

3.

Set the Actions control to “Reindex Data,” and click the Submit button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 249

Creating URL Rewrites Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites

Refresh Catalog URL Rewrite Index

Step 3:

Test the Rewrite

Test the rewrite from your store, to make sure that it works correctly.

Creating a Category Rewrite

Step 1:

Request a Category Rewrite

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > URL Rewrite Management .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add URL Rewrite button.

3.

By default, Create URL Rewrite is set to “For category.” In the category tree, click to select the category to be redirected.

250

Select Category

4.

In the URL Rewrite section, do the following: a.

If you have multiple stores, select the Store where the rewrite applies.

b.

In the Request Path field, enter the URL key of the category to be redirected.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites c.

Set Redirect to one of the following: l l

Temporary (302)

Permanent (301) d.

For your own reference, enter a brief description of the rewrite.

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

Creating URL Rewrites

Category URL Rewrite Information

Your new category rewrite now appears at the top of the list of rewrites.

New Category Rewrite

6.

Test the rewrite from your store, to make sure that it works correctly.

Step 2:

Refresh the Index

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Index Management .

2.

Select the Catalog URL Rewrites checkbox.

3.

Set the Actions control to “Reindex Data,” and click the Submit button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 251

Creating URL Rewrites Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites

252

Refresh Catalog URL Rewrite Index

Step 3:

Test the Rewrite

Test the rewrite from your store, to make sure that it works correctly.

Creating a Custom Rewrite

Step 1:

Take Note of the Request Path and Target Path

Before you begin, write down the URL keys of the page to be redirected (Request Path), and the target page where it will be redirected (Target Path).

Step 2:

Request a Custom Rewrite

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > URL Rewrite Management .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add URL Rewrite button.

3.

Set Create URL Rewrite to “Custom.”

Custom URL Rewrite

4.

In the URL Rewrite Information section, do the following: a.

If you have multiple stores, select the Store where the rewrite applies.

b.

In the ID Path field, enter the relative path of the destination page.

l l

To redirect to another CMS page in your store, enter the relative path to the page, without a leading forward slash.

To redirect to a page on a different site, enter the fully qualified URL of the new destination.

new-page

URL key of target page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites Creating URL Rewrites somewhere/new-page http://magento.com

Relative path to target page, without leading forward slash.

Fully qualified URL of target page on external website.

c.

In the Request Path field, enter the relative path of the page to be redirected.

d.

In the Target Path field, enter the valid URL of an existing page that will be the new destination. This refers to the same page as the ID Path.

e.

Set Redirect to one of the following: l l

Temporary (302)

Permanent (301) f.

For your own reference, enter a brief Description of the rewrite.

In the following illustration, the CMS page “about-magento-demo-store” is temporarily redirected to the target, “my-page.”

Custom URL Rewrite Information

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

Your new rewrite now appears at the top of the list.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

New Custom Rewrite

253

Creating URL Rewrites Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites

Step 3:

Refresh the Index

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Index Management .

2.

Select the Catalog URL Rewrites checkbox.

3.

Set the Actions control to “Reindex Data,” and click the Submit button.

254

Refresh Catalog URL Rewrite Index

Step 4:

Test the Rewrite

Test the rewrite from your store, to make sure that it works correctly.

Field Descriptions

Field

Create URL Rewrite

ID Path

Request Path

Description

Indicates the type of rewrite to be made. The type cannot be changed after the rewrite is created. Options include:

For Category

For Product

Custom

The ID of the target page. The ID Path and Target Path refer to the same page.

The URL of the page that is to be redirected. Depending on your configuration, the Request Path might include the .html

suffix and category. For example: brandname brand/brandname catalog/category/view/id/56 private-sale-shoes/prima-pump.html

brand/brandname.html

A Request Path must be unique, and must not have been used previously. If you have made several attempts to redirect the same page, delete any unsuccessful redirects and refresh the cache.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites

Field

Target Path

Redirect

Description

Creating URL Rewrites

Description

The URL that points to the destination page. The Target Path can be a different CMS page, or the result of a search.

To avoid getting a 404 "Page Not Found" error, the path must exactly match what the system expects to find. The following examples are valid target paths: brandname brand/brandname catalog/category/view/id/52 catalogsearch/advanced/result/?brand=brandname http://magentocommerce.com

Indicates whether the rewrite is temporary or permanent.

Options include:

No

Temporary (302) Indicates to search engines that the rewrite is for a limited duration. Search engines do not preserve page rank information for temporary rewrites.

Permanent

(301)

Indicates to search engines that the rewrite is permanent. Search engines generally preserve page rank informaton for permanent rewrites.

Describes the purpose of the rewrite. This field is for reference and is not visible to customers.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 255

Creating URL Rewrites

256

Chapter 20:  Managing URL Rewrites

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Marketing

Chapter 21:

Promotions

In this chapter, you will learn how to set up product relationships, and use price rules to trigger discounts based on a variety of conditions. Here are a few ways you can use price rules to offer incentives to your customers: l l l

Send your best customers a coupon for a discount on a specific product

Offer free shipping for purchases over a certain amount

Schedule a promotion for a period of time

With price rules, you can set up your promotions in advance, so they spring into action whenever the required conditions are met.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 259

Product Relationships Chapter 21:  Promotions

Product Relationships

An easy way to promote products throughout your catalog is to establish relationships between products. The options available are: Up-sell products, Related products, and

Cross-sell products.

Related Products

Related products are meant to be purchased in addition to the item the customer is viewing. They compliment, enhance, or add optional features to the product.

Up-sells

Up-sell products are items that are similar, but are perhaps of a higherquality, more popular, or have a better profit margin than the item the customer is considering.

Cross-sells

Cross-sell products are offered on the shopping cart page as last-minute purchases before the checkout process begins.

260 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Catalog Price Rules

Catalog Price Rules

Catalog price rules can be used to selectively put products on sale under certain conditions. Catalog price rules do not use coupon codes, because they are triggered before a product is placed into the shopping cart.

Catalog Rules

Process Overview:

Step 1: Add a New Rule

Step 2: Define the Conditions

Step 3: Define the Actions

Step 4: Apply the Rule

Step 1:

Add a New Rule

1.

On the Admin menu, select Promotions > Catalog Price Rules .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Rule button.

The options in the panel on the left include Rule Information, Conditions, and Actions.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 261

Catalog Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

262

Rule Information

3.

On the Rule Information page, do the following: a.

Complete the Rule Name and Description fields. These fields are for your internal reference only.

b.

Set Status to “Active.” c.

Select the Websites where the rule will be available.

d.

Select the Customer Groups to which this rule applies.

To select multiple options, hold down the Ctrl key (PC) or Command key (Mac), and click each option.

e.

Set From Date and To Date to define the range of dates when the rule will be in effect. If you leave the dates blank, the rule is enabled as soon as the price rule is saved.

f.

Enter a number to establish the Priority of this rule in relation to other rules.

Step 2:

Define the Conditions

Most of the available conditions are based upon existing attribute values. If you want to apply the rule to all products, leave the conditions blank.

1.

In the panel on the left, select Conditions . The first rule begins:

Condition - Line 1

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Catalog Price Rules

The statement has two underlined links, which when clicked, display the options for that part of the statement. If you save the condition without making additional selections, the rule will apply to all products.

l l l

Click the ALL  link, and select “ALL” or “ANY.”

Click the TRUE link and select “TRUE” or “FALSE.”

Leave the condition unchanged to apply the rule to all products.

You can create different conditions by changing the combination of these values.

If ALL of these conditions are TRUE:

2.

Click the Add button at the beginning of the next line.

a.

In the list under Product Attribute , select the attribute that you want to use as the basis of the condition. For this example, the selected condition is “Attribute Set.”

Condition Line 2, Part 1

For an attribute to appear in the list, it must be configured to be used in promo rule conditions. To learn more, see:

Attribute Frontend Properties .

The selected condition appears in the statement, followed by two more underlined links. The statement now says:

If ALL of these conditions are TRUE:

Attribute Set is … b.

Click the is link, and select the comparison operator that is needed to describe the condition to be met. In this example, the options are “IS” or “IS NOT.” c.

Then, click the ... “more” link, and choose the attribute set upon which the condition is based.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 263

Catalog Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

264

Condition Line 2, Part 3

The selected item appears in the statement to complete the condition.

If ALL of these conditions are TRUE:

Attribute Set is Eyewear

3.

To add another line to the statement, click the Add button, and choose one of the following: l

Conditions Combination l

Product Attribute

Then, repeat the process until the condition is complete.

If at any time you want to delete part of the statement, click the Delete button at the end of the line.

Step 3:

Define the Actions

1.

In the panel on the left, select Actions .

Actions

2.

In the Update Prices Using the Following Conditions section, set Apply to one of the following options:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Catalog Price Rules

By Percentage of the

Original Price

By Fixed Amount

To Percentage of the

Original Price

To Fixed Amount

Discounts item by subtracting a percentage from the original price. For example:

Enter 10 in Discount Amount for an updated price that is

10% less than the original price.

Discounts item by subtracting a fixed amount from original price. For example:

Enter 10 in Discount Amount for an updated price that is

$10 less than the original price.

Discounts item by defining the final price based on percentage. For example:

Enter 10 in Discount Amount for an updated price that is

10% of the original price.

Sets the price to a fixed amount.

Then, do one of the following: l l

Enter the Discount Amount .

To apply the discount amount to associated products, set Enable Discount to

Subproducts to “Yes.” Then, enter the Discount Amount to apply.

3.

If you want to stop the processing of other rules after this rule has been applied, set Stop

Further Rules Processing to “Yes.” This safeguard prevents customers from receiving multiple discounts for the same product.

4.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button to save your changes.

Step 4:

Apply the Rule

As new rules are added, the prices and the priorities are recalculated accordingly.

To apply a new rule immediately, do one of the following: l l

Click the Save and Apply button.

From the Catalog Price Rules list, click the Apply Rules button.

When you create a new price rule, it might take an hour or so for it to become available.

Allow enough time for it to get into the system. Then, test the rule to make sure that it works correctly. Unless otherwise specified, price rules are automatically processed with other system rules each night.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 265

Catalog Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Price Rule with Multiple SKUs

A single price rule can be applied to multiple SKUs, which makes it possible to create a variety of promotions based on a product, brand, or category. In the following illustration, multiple products are selected for a catalog price rule.

Selecting Multiple SKUs for a Price Rule Condition

To apply a price rule to multiple SKUs:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Promotions > Catalog Price Rules .

2.

Do one of the following: l l

Follow the instructions to create a

catalog price rule

.

In the list, click to open the catalog price rule that you want to change.

3.

In the panel on the left, select Conditions . Then, do the following: a.

In the first line, set the first parameter to “ANY.”

If ANY of these conditions are TRUE b.

If the price rule doesn't have a line for SKU, Click the Add button at the beginning of the next line. Then, in the list under Product Attribute, select SKU .

266 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Choose the Condition c.

Click the … “more” link to display more options. Then, click the Chooser to display the list of available products.

button

SKU IS d.

In the list, select the checkbox of each product that you want to include. Then, click the Select button to add the SKUs to the condition.

Multiple SKUs Added to Condition

4.

Complete the rule, including any

Actions

to be taken when the conditions are met.

5.

To apply the rule, click the Save Rule button.

When you create a new price rule, it might take an hour or so for it to become available.

Allow enough time for it to get into the system. Then, test the rule to make sure that it works correctly. Unless otherwise specified, price rules are automatically processed with other system rules each night.

Shopping Cart Price Rules

Shopping cart price rules create discounts for orders at the checkout level, based on a set of conditions. The discount can be applied automatically when the conditions are met, or be applied when the customer enters a valid coupon code. When applied, the discount appears on the shopping cart page under the subtotal.

Once established, the price rule can be used as needed for a season or promotion by changing its status and date range.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 267

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Apply Coupon in Shopping Cart

Process Overview:

Step 1: Add a New Rule

Step 2: Define the Conditions

Step 3: Define the Actions

Step 4: Complete the Labels

Step 6: Apply the Rule

Step 1:

Add a New Rule

1.

On the Admin menu, select Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules . Then, click the

Add New Rule button.

268

Shopping Cart Price Rules

The options in the panel on the left include Rule Information, Conditions, Actions, and

Labels.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Shopping Cart Price Rule General Information

2.

Under General Information, complete the Rule Name and Description . These fields are for internal reference only.

3.

If you want the rule to go into effect immediately, set Status to “Active.”

4.

To establish the

scope

of the rule, do the following: a.

Select the Websites where the promotion is to be available.

b.

Select the Customer Groups to which the promotion applies.

l

To make the promotion available only to registered customers, do not select the

“NOT LOGGED IN” option.

To select multiple options, hold down the Ctrl key (PC) or Command key (Mac), and click each option.

5.

To associate a

coupon

with the price rule, set Coupon to “Specific Coupon.” Then, do the following: a.

Enter a numeric Coupon Code that the customer must enter to receive the discount.

b.

To set a limit on the number of times the coupon can be used, complete the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 269

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Uses per Coupon

Uses per Customer

Determines how many times the coupon code can be used. If there is no limit, leave the field blank.

Determines how many times the coupon code can be used by the same registered customer who belongs to any of the selected customer groups. The setting does not apply to guest shoppers who are members of the

NOT LOGGED IN customer group, or to customers who shop without logging in to their accounts. If there is no limit, leave the field blank.

6.

To define the “good through” date range for the promotion, do the following: a.

Click the Calendar button next to the From Date field, and choose the first date.

The promotion will start at the beginning of that day.

b.

Click the Calendar button next to the To Date field, and choose the last date.

The promotion will stop at the end of that day.

7.

Enter a number to determine the Priority of this price rule in relation to the Action settings of other price rules that might be active at the same time. (Number 1 has the highest priority.)

8.

To apply the rule to published listings in

RSS feeds

, set Public In RSS Feed to “Yes.”

Step 2:

Define the Conditions

In this step, the conditions are described that must be met for an order to qualify for the promotion. The rule goes into action whenever the set of conditions is met.

1.

In the panel on the left, select Conditions . The first rule appears by default, and states:

If ALL of these conditions are TRUE:

The statement has two underlined links which when clicked, display the selection of options for that part of the statement. You can create different conditions by changing the combination of these values. Do any of the following: l l l

Click the ALL link, and select “ALL” or “ANY.”

Click the TRUE link and select “TRUE” or “FALSE.”

Leave the condition unchanged to apply the rule to all products.

Condition - Line 1

270 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

2.

Click the Add button at the beginning of the next line. Then, choose one of the following options from the list to describe the condition that you want to set for the rule.

l l l l

Product attribute combination

Products subselection

Conditions combination

Cart Attribute

Condition - Line 2, Part 1

Example 1: To create a regional price rule, select one of the following cart attributes: l l l l

Shipping Postcode

Shipping Region

Shipping State/Province

Shipping Country

Example 2: To base the condition on shopping cart totals, select one of the following cart attributes: l l l

Subtotal

Total Items Quantity

Total Weight

When you make a selection, the basic structure of the statement appears in the box with additional links to mark where you can select information. Each underlined word is a building block that describes a different aspect of the condition.

3.

In the list under Product Attribute , select the attribute upon which the condition is based. For this example, the selected condition is “Attribute Set.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Condition - Line 2, Part 1

271

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

For an attribute to appear in the list, its

Use for Promo Rules Conditions

property must be set to “Yes.”

The condition appears in the statement, followed by two more underlined links. The statement now says:

Condition - Line 2, Part 2

If ALL of these conditions are TRUE:

If an item is FOUND in the cart with ALL of these conditions true

Attribute Set is …

4.

Click the is link, and select the comparison operator that is needed to describe the condition to be met. In this example, the options are “IS” and “IS NOT.”

5.

Click the ... “more” link, and choose the attribute set upon which the condition is based.

The selected item appears in the statement to complete the condition.

272

Completed Condition

If ALL of these conditions are TRUE:

Attribute Set is Electronics

6.

To add more conditions, click the Add button and again, choose one of the following: l

Conditions Combination l

Product Attribute

Then, repeat the process until the condition is complete.

If at any time you want to delete part of the statement, click the Delete button at the end of the line.

Step 3:

Define the Actions

The shopping cart price rule actions describe how prices are updated when the

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions conditions of the rule are met.

Shopping Cart Price Rules

Shopping Cart Price Rule Actions

1.

In the panel on the left, select Actions .

2.

Set Apply to one of the following discount options:

Percent of product price discount

Discounts item by subtracting a percentage from the original price. The discount applies to each qualifying item in the cart. For example:

Enter 10 in Discount Amount for an updated price that is

10% less than the original price.

Fixed amount discount Discounts item by subtracting a fixed amount from original price. The discount applies to each qualifying item in the cart. For example:

Enter 10 in Discount Amount for an updated price that is

$10 less than the original price.

Fixed amount discount for whole cart

Buy X get Y free

Discounts the entire cart by subtracting a percentage from the cart total. For example:

Enter 10 in Discount Amount to subtract 10% from the cart total.

Defines a quantity that the customer must purchase to receive a quantity for free. (The Discount Amount is Y.)

3.

Enter the Discount Amount as a number, without symbols. For example, depending on the discount option selected, the number 10 might indicate a percentage, a fixed amount, or a quantity of items.

4.

In the Maximum Qty Discount is Applied To field, enter the largest number of the same product that can qualify for the discount.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 273

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

5.

To determine how

free shipping

is applied, set Free Shipping to one of the following:

No Free shipping is not available for the promotion.

For matching items only Free shipping is available only for specific items in the cart that match the rule.

For shipment with matching items

Free shipping is available for the entire cart when a coupon that is based on the rule is used.

6.

Set Stop Further Rules Processing to “Yes” to stop processing other rules as soon as this one is applied. This safeguard prevents customers from receiving multiple discounts for the same purchase.

7.

To define an additional action that applies to specific items in the cart, only when a specific set of conditions is met, click the Add button. Then, choose an item from the following sections in the list: l

Cart item attribute l

Price in cart l l

Quantity in cart

Row total in cart l

Product attribute (from all available in your catalog)

Add as many levels as you need to describe the conditions to be met.

8.

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

Step 4:

Complete the Labels

The label appears on the order below the subtotal to identify the discount. You can enter a default label for all store views, or enter a different label for each view.

1.

In the panel on the left, select Labels.

2.

In the Default Label section, enter the text for the Default Rule Label for All Store

Views .

Default Label

3.

In the Store View Specific Labels section, enter the label text for each store view. For example, if each store view is in a different language, enter the label translation for each view.

274 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Store View Specific Labels

Step 5:

Apply the Rule

1.

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

2.

When you create a new price rule, it might take an hour or so for it to become available.

Allow enough time for it to get into the system. Then, test the rule to make sure that it works correctly. Unless otherwise specified, price rules are automatically processed with other system rules each night. As new rules are added, Magento recalculates the prices and the priorities accordingly.

Field Descriptions

Field

Rule Information

Rule Name

Description

Status

Description

Websites

Customer Groups

Coupon

(Required) The name of the rule is for internal reference.

A description of the rule should include the purpose of the rule, and explain how it is used.

(Required) Determines if the rule is currently active in the store. Options include: Active / Inactive

(Required) Identifies the websites where the rule can be used.

(Required) Identifies the customer groups to which the rule applies.

(Required) Indicates if a coupon is associated with the rule.

Options include:

No Coupon There is no coupon associated with the rule.

Specific Coupon A specific coupon is associated with the rule.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 275

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Field

Uses per Coupon

Uses per Customer

From Date

To Date

Priority

Public in RSS Feed

Actions

Apply

Description

Coupon Code When prompted, enter the Coupon

Code that the customer must enter to take advantage of the promotion.

Use Auto Generation

Select the checkbox to automatically generate multiple coupon codes which can be used with the promotion.

The number of times the coupon code can be used.

Determines how many times the coupon code can be used by the same registered customer who belongs to any of the selected customer groups. The setting does not apply to guest shoppers who are members of the NOT LOGGED IN customer group, or to customers who shop without logging in to their accounts. If there is no limit, leave the field blank.

The first date in the “good through” time period when the coupon can be used.

The last date in the “good through” time period when the coupon can be used.

A number that indicates the priority of this rule in relation to others. The highest priority is number 1.

Determines if the promotion is included in your store’s public

RSS feed. Options include: Yes / No.

Determines the type of calculation that is applied to the purchase. Options include:

276 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Field Description

Percent of product price discount

Fixed amount discount

Discounts item by subtracting a percentage from the original price.

For example: Enter 10 in Discount

Amount for an updated price that is 10% less than the original price.

Discounts item by subtracting a fixed amount from original price.

For example: Enter 10 in Discount

Amount for an updated price that is $10 less than the original price.

Fixed amount discount for whole cart

Discounts the entire cart by subtracting a percentage from the cart total.

For example: Enter 10 in Discount

Amount to subtract 10% from the cart total.

Buy X Get Y Free

(discount amount is Y)

Defines a quantity that the customer must purchase to receive a quantity for free. (The Discount Amount is Y.)

(Required) The amount of discount that is offered.

Discount Amount

Maximum Qty Discount is Applied To

Sets the maximum number of products that the discount can be applied to in the same purchase.

Discount Qty Step (Buy X) Sets the number of products represented by “X” in a “Buy X

Get Y Free” promotion.

Apply to Shipping

Amount

Free Shipping

Determines if the discount can be applied to the cost of shipping. Options include: Yes / No.

Determines if free shipping is included in the promotion, and if so, for which items. Options include:

No Free shipping is not available when a coupon that is based on the rule is used.

For matching items only

Free shipping is available only for specific items in the cart that match the rule.

For shipment with matching items

Free shipping is available for the entire cart when a coupon that is based on the rule is used.

Stop Further Rules Processing

Determines if additional rules can be applied to this purchase.

To prevent multiple discounts from being applied to the same purchase, select “Yes.” Options include: Yes / No

Default Label

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 277

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Field

Default Rule Label for All

Store Views

Store View Specific

Labels

Description

Enter a default label to identify the discount that can be used for all store views.

If applicable, enter a different label to identify the discount for each store view.

Coupon Codes

Coupons codes can be associated with

shopping cart price rules

to apply a discount when a set of conditions is met. For example, a coupon code can be created for a specific customer group, or for anyone who makes a purchase over a certain amount.

278

In-store Coupon for Mobile Users

Here are a few ways that you can use coupons in your store: l l l

Email coupons to customers

Produce printed coupons

Create in-store coupons for mobile users

Coupon codes can be sent by email, or included in newsletters, catalogs, and advertisements. You can even create in-store coupons with a quick response code that shoppers can scan with their smart phones. The QR code links to a page on your site with more information about the promotion.

To apply the coupon to a purchase, the customer enters the coupon code during checkout from the shopping cart page of your site, or possibly at the cash register of your

“brick and mortar” store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Enter Coupon Code in Shopping Cart

To set up a coupon code:

1.

Follow the instructions to create a

shopping cart price rule

.

2.

On the General Information page, do the following: a.

Set Coupon to “Specific Coupon.” b.

Do one of the following: l l

Enter a numeric Coupon Code to be used with the promotion.

Select the Use Auto Generation checkbox.

c.

To limit the number of times the coupon can be used, complete the following: l l

Uses per Coupon

Uses per Customer

If you leave these fields blank, there will be no limit on the number of times the coupon can be used.

d.

To make the coupon valid for a limited period of time, complete the From Date and

To Date fields. To select the date, click the Calendar button next to each field.

If you leave the date range empty, the rule will never expire.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 279

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Price Rule Coupon Code Settings

3.

Follow the standard instructions to complete the

shopping cart price rule

.

Auto-Generating Coupon Codes

Batches of discount coupon codes can be formatted and generated automatically.

To configure auto-generated codes:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left under Customers, select Promotions . Then, click to expand the

Auto Generated Specific Coupon Codes section.

280

Auto Generated Specific Coupon Codes

3.

To create a specific format for your codes, enter the following: l l l l l

Code Length

Code Format

Code Prefix

Code Suffix

Dash Every X Characters

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

These settings can be overridden from the Shopping Cart Price Rule page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Field Descriptions

Field

Code Length

Code Format

Scope

Global

Global

Description

Defines the length of the coupon code, excluding the prefix, suffix and separators.

Defines the coupon code format. Options include:

Alphanumeric Any combination of letters and numbers.

Alphabetical Letters only.

Code Prefix

Code Suffix

Global

Global

Dash Every X Characters Global

Numeric Numbers only.

A value that is appended to the beginning of all coupon codes. If you do not want to use a prefix, leave the field blank.

A value that is appended to the end of all codes.

If you do not want to use a suffix, leave the field blank.

An interval where a dash (-) can be inserted into all coupon codes. If you do not want to use a dash, leave the field blank.

Coupon codes that differ by only a dash are considered to be different codes.

Exporting Auto-Generated Coupon Codes

To generate and export a batch of coupon codes:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules .

2.

Select an existing rule, or create a new one.

3.

Set Coupon to “Specific Coupon.” Then, do the following: a.

Select the Use Auto Generation checkbox.

b.

Complete the other rule settings as needed.

4.

Click the Save and Continue Editing button.

5.

In the panel on the left, select Manage Coupon Codes . Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 281

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions a.

In the Coupon Qty field, enter the number of codes to be generated.

b.

Adjust the code format settings, as needed.

c.

Click the Generate button.

The generated coupon codes appear below. The list shows how many times each coupon code has been used.

282

Generated Coupon Codes

To delete coupon codes:

1.

In the list, select the checkbox of each code that you want to delete.

2.

Set the Actions control to “Delete.”

3.

Click the Submit button. When prompted, click OK to confirm.

To export coupon codes:

1.

In the list of generated codes, use the filter controls at the top of each column to display the codes that you want to export.

2.

Set Export to to the file format that you want to use for the data file.

3.

Click the Export button.

Tracking Coupon Usage

In addition to the information in the list, you can also run a detailed report about the coupon usage for each website, store, or view.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

To generate a coupon report:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Reports > Sales > Coupons .

2.

In the upper-right corner, set Show Report For to define the scope of the report.

3.

Set Shopping Cart Price Rule to “Specified.” Then, select the rules that you want to include in the report.

4.

When complete, click the Show Report button.

Coupon Usage Report

Free Shipping Promotion

Free shipping can be offered as a promotion, either with, or without a

coupon

. A free shipping coupon, or voucher, can also be applied to customer pick-up orders, so the order can be invoiced and “shipped” to complete the

workflow

.

Some shipping carrier configurations give you the ability of offer free shipping based on a minimum order. To expand upon this basic capability, you can use shopping cart price rules to create complex conditions based on multiple product attributes, cart contents, and customer groups.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Enable Free Shipping

Step 2: Create the Shopping Cart Price Rule

Step 3: Test the Rule

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 283

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Step 1:

Enable Free Shipping

1.

Enable the

Free Shipping

method in the configuration of your store.

2.

Complete the free shipping settings for any

carrier service

that you want to use for free shipping.

Step 2:

Create the Shopping Cart Price Rule

1.

On the Admin menu, select Promotions > Shopping Cart Price Rules .

2.

Follow the steps below to set up the free shipping promotion that you want to offer.

3.

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

When you create a new price rule, it might take an hour or so for it to become available.

Allow enough time for it to get into the system. Then, test the rule to make sure that it works correctly. Unless otherwise specified, price rules are automatically processed with other system rules each night.

Free Shipping for Any Order

1.

Complete the General Information settings as follows: a.

Enter a Rule Name for internal reference.

b.

Set Status to “Active.” c.

Set Website to “Main Website.” (Click to make sure the entry is selected.) d.

Select the Customer Groups to which the rule applies.

e.

Do one of the following: l l

To offer a free shipping promotion without a coupon, accept the default, “No

Coupon” setting.

To use a coupon with the price rule, set Coupon to “Specific Coupon.” If necessary, complete the instructions to set up a

coupon

.

2.

In the panel on the left, select Actions . Then, do the following: a.

Set Apply to “Percent of product price discount.” b.

Set Apply to Shipping Amount to “Yes.” c.

Set Free Shipping to “For shipment with matching items.”

284 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Price Rule Action

3.

In the panel on the left, select Labels . Then, do one of the following: l l

Enter a Default Rule Label for All Store Views . This label is visible to the customer.

If your store is available in multiple stores, enter a label for each view, as needed.

4.

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

Free Shipping for Orders Over $Amount

1.

Complete the General Information settings as follows: a.

Enter a Rule Name for internal reference.

b.

Set Status to “Active.” c.

Set Website to “Main Website.” (Click to make sure the entry is selected.) d.

Select the Customer Groups to which the rule applies.

e.

Do one of the following: l l

To offer a free shipping promotion without a coupon, accept the default, “No

Coupon” setting.

To use a coupon with the price rule, set Coupon to “Specific Coupon.” If necessary, follow the instructions to set up a

coupon .

2.

In the panel on the left, select Conditions .

3.

Click the Add button to insert a condition. Then, do the following: a.

In the list under Cart Attribute, click Subtotal .

b.

Click the underlined is link, and select “equals or greater than.” c.

Click the … “more” link, and enter a threshold value for the Subtotal, such as 100, to complete the condition.

4.

In the panel on the left, select Actions . Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 285

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions a.

Set Apply to “Percent of product price discount.” b.

Set Apply to Shipping Amount to “Yes.” c.

Set Free Shipping to “For shipment with matching items.”

5.

In the panel on the left, select Labels . Then, do one of the following: l l

Enter a Default Rule Label for All Store Views . The label is visible to the customer during checkout.

If your store is available in multiple views, enter a label for each view, as needed.

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

Step 3:

Test the Rule

When you create a new price rule, it might take an hour or so for it to become available.

Allow enough time for it to get into the system. Then, test the rule to make sure that it works correctly. Unless otherwise specified, price rules are automatically processed with other system rules each night.

Buy X Get Y Free

This example shows how to set up a

shopping cart price rule

for a “Buy X, Get Y Free” promotion. The format of the discount is as follows:

Buy X quantity of product, get Y quantity for free.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create a Shopping Cart Price Rule

Step 2: Define the Conditions

Step 3: Define the Actions

Step 4: Complete the Label

Step 5: Apply the Rule

Step 1:

Create a Shopping Cart Price Rule

Complete

Step 1

of the shopping cart price rule instructions to create a shopping cart rule with the general information.

Step 2:

Define the Conditions

Complete

Step 2

of the shopping cart instructions to define the conditions for the price rule. The conditions can be triggered by purchasing a specific product, making a

286 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules purchase of a certain amount, or any other scenario.

Step 3:

Define the Actions

1.

In the panel on the left, select Actions . Then, do the following: a.

Set Apply to “Buy X get Y free (discount amount is Y).” b.

Set Discount Amount to 1. This is the quantity the customer will receive for free.

c.

In the Discount Qty Step (Buy X) field, enter the quantity that the customer must purchase to qualify for the discount.

Buy X Get Y Free

2.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button. Then, complete the rest of the rule as needed.

Step 4:

Complete the Label

Complete

Step 4

of the shopping cart price rule instructions to enter the label that appears during checkout.

Step 5:

Apply the Rule

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

When you create a new price rule, it might take an hour or so for it to become available.

Allow enough time for it to get into the system. Then, test the rule to make sure that it works correctly. Unless otherwise specified, price rules are automatically processed with other system rules each night.

Discount with Minimum Purchase

Shopping cart price rules can be used to offer a percentage discount based on a minimum purchase. In the following example, a 25% discount is applied to all purchases over $200.00 in a specific category. The format of the discount is as follows:

X% off all Y (category) over $Z dollars

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 287

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create a Shopping Cart Rule

Step 2: Define the Conditions

Step 3: Define the Actions

Step 1:

Create a Shopping Cart Rule

Follow the basic

instructions

to create a shopping cart rule.

Step 2:

Define the Conditions

1.

In the panel on the left, select Conditions .

2.

Click the Add button at the beginning of the next line, and select Product Attribute

Combination .

Product Attribute Combination

3.

Click the Add button at the beginning of the next line.

If an Item is FOUND

4.

In the list under Product Attribute, click Category .

288 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules

Choose Condition to Add a.

Click the … “more” link to display additional options.

Category IS b.

Click the Chooser button to display the available categories. Then in the category tree, select the checkbox of each category that you want to include.

c.

Click the Select condition.

Category Tree button at the end of the line to add the categories to the

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 289

Shopping Cart Price Rules Chapter 21:  Promotions

Category Condition

5.

Click the Add button at the beginning of the next line, and do the following: a.

In the list under Product Attribute, select Price .

a.

Click the first underlined parameter, IS. Then in the list, select “equals or greater than.”

Price Equals or Greater Than b.

Click the ...

“more” link to display the price field. Then, enter the amount that the price must be to meet the condition. For example, enter 200.00.

Enter the Price to Complete the Condition

6.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Step 3:

Define the Actions

1.

In the panel on the left, select Actions . Then, do the following:

290

Actions

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 21:  Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules a.

Set Apply to “Percent of product price discount.” b.

Enter the Discount Amount . For example, enter 25 for a twenty-five percent discount.

c.

If you want to prevent the purchase from qualifying for additional promotions, set

Stop Further Rules Processing to “Yes.”

2.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button. Then, complete the rule as needed.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 291

Shopping Cart Price Rules

292

Chapter 21:  Promotions

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:

Shopping Tools

Your store includes a set of shopping tools that create opportunities for your customers to interact with your store, and to share the experience with friends.

Wishlist

The Wishlist block displays the items from the customer’s wishlist.

Compare Products

The Compare Products block lets your customers quickly compare the features of one product with another.

Product Reviews

Product reviews help build a sense of community, and are considered to be more credible than any advertising money can buy.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 293

Wishlists Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

Tags

Tags help customers organize and remember the products that they have seen, offer quick navigation, and help search engines index your store.

Polls

The Poll block displays a series of polls or surveys that you can use to learn more about your customers.

Email a Friend

The Email a Friend link makes it easy for your customers to share links to products with their friends.

Wishlists

A wishlist is a list of products that registered customers can share with friends or transfer to their shopping carts at a later date. When wishlists are enabled, the Add to

Wishlist link appears on the category and product pages of your store.

l l l

Wishlists can be set to public or private

Items can be transferred between the wishlist and shopping cart

Wishlists can be shared with friends

294 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Wishlists

Add to Wishlist Links on Category Page

Depending on the theme, the Add to Wishlist might be a text link or a graphic image.

Wishlists increase customer loyalty and bring new people to your store.

Shared wishlists are sent from a store email address, but the body of the message contains a personalized note from the customer. You can customize the email template that is used for the notification message when wishlists are shared, and choose the store contact that appears as the sender.

Each wishlist can be maintained in the customer’s account dashboard, where it can be updated, and used to add products to the shopping cart. When a product with multiple options is added to a wishlist, any options that have been selected by the customer are included in the wishlist item description. For example, if the customer adds the same pair of shoes, but in three different colors, each pair appears as a separate wishlist item.

On the other hand, if the customer adds the same product to the wishlist multiple times, the product appears in the wishlist only once, but with an updated quantity that reflects the number of times the product was added. Customers can update their wishlists from their account dashboard. Merchants can also update a customer’s wishlist from the Admin.

Wishlist Configuration

The configuration enables wishlists, and determines the email template and sender of email messages that are sent when a wishlist is shared.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 295

Compare Products Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

To configure the wishlist:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Customers, select Wishlist .

3.

Click to expand the General Options section, and verify that Enabled is set to “Yes.”

General Options

4.

Click to expand the Share Options section. Then, do the following:

Share Options a.

Set Email Template to the template to be used for the notification that is sent when a customer shares a wishlist.

b.

Set Email Sender to the store contact that appears as the sender of the notification.

5.

Click to expand the My Wishlist Link section. Then, set Display Wishlist Summary to one of the following: l l

Display number of items in wishlist

Display item quantities

6.

When complete, click Save Config .

My Wishlist Link

Compare Products

The Compare Products block usually appears in the far right column, or sidebar of the category page, and can be used to generate a detailed, side-by-side comparison of two or more products. You can customize the report to include additional attributes or remove ones that you don’t want to include. Depending on the theme, the Add to Compare link can be represented by an icon or a link.

296 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Compare Products

Compare Products

To compare products:

1.

From your storefront, find the products that you want to compare, and click the Add to

Compare link for each.

2.

In the Compare Products block in the right sidebar, click the Compare button. The

Compare Products report opens in a new window.

3.

To print the report, click Print This Page .

4.

To clear the Compare Products list, click the Clear All link.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 297

Compare Products Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

298

Compare Products Report

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Recently Viewed/Compared Products

Recently Viewed/Compared Products

The Recently Viewed and Recently Compared blocks usually appear in the right sidebar of a catalog page. The number of products listed in each block can be configured for each website, store, or view.

Recently Viewed

To configure Recently Viewed/Compared Products:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select Catalog .

3.

Click to expand the Recently Viewed/Compared Products section. Then, do the following:

Recently Viewed/Compared Products

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 299

Product Reviews Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools a.

Set Show for Current to the website, store, or view where you want the configuration to apply.

b.

In the Default Recently Viewed Products Count field, enter the number of recently viewed products you want to include.

c.

In the Default Recently Compared Products Count , enter the number of recently compared products you want to include.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Product Reviews

Product reviews help to build a sense of community, and are considered more credible than any advertising money can buy. In fact, some search engines give sites with product reviews a higher ranking than those without. For those who find your site by searching for a specific product, a product review is essentially the landing page of your store. Product reviews help people find your store, keep them engaged, and often lead to sales.

300

Add Your Review

Writing Product Reviews

Customers can write reviews for any product in your catalog. Reviews can be written from the product page by clicking the “Add Your Review” link. For products that haven't been reviewed, the link says, “Be the first to review this product.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Product Reviews

The number of stars indicates the satisfaction rating. Visitors can click the link to read the reviews and write their own. As an incentive, customers can receive reward points for submitting a review.

Write a Product Review

Moderating Reviews

When a review is submitted, it is sent to the Admin for moderation. When approved, the review is published in your store.

To edit and approve customer reviews:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Customer Reviews >

Pending Reviews .

Reviews

2.

In the list, click a pending review to view the details, and edit if necessary.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 301

Product Reviews Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

3.

To approve a pending review, change the Status from “Pending” to “Approved.” To reject a review, select “Not Approved.”

4.

When complete, click the Save Review button.

Custom Ratings

By default, customer can rate the quality, price, and value of a product. In addition, you can add your own custom ratings that relate to your products and customers. The average rating for each product appears in catalog lists and on the product page.

302

Manage Ratings

To create your own ratings:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Reviews and Ratings > Manage Ratings .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Rating button.

3.

In the Rating Title section, enter the Default Value for the new rating. Then, enter the translation for each language supported by your store.

Rating Title

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Tags

4.

In the Rating Visibility section, set Visibility In to the store view where the rating will be used. (Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple options.)

5.

In the Sort Order field, enter a number to determine the sequence that this rating appears in the list of ratings.

Rating Visibility

6.

When complete, click the Save Rating button.

Tags

Tags are one-word descriptors that are used as keywords for your catalog. Tags can be assigned to products by registered customers who are logged in, and also by guests. Tags help customers organize and remember the products that they have seen, offer quick navigation, and help search engines index your store.

Popular Tags

Tags are formatted as a tag cloud, and typically appear in the Popular tags block in the right sidebar of catalog pages. The size of the text indicates the popularity of the tag.

Each product page has an “Tag this Product” section at the bottom of the page, where shoppers can enter their own tags. As an incentive, customers can earn reward points for adding tags to a product.

The tags that customers have given a product are listed on the Customers Tagged

Product tab of the product record. The detail includes the tag, the customer name, and email address.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 303

Tags Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

To add a tag from the store:

1.

From any product page, scroll down to the Tag this Product section at the bottom of the page.

Tag this Product

2.

In the Add a Tag text box, type the tag you want to associate with the product.

l l

To enter multiple tags, separate each with a blank space.

To enter a phrase, enclose the text in single quotes.

3.

Click the Add Tags button.

The tag will be submitted for review and published on the site when approved.

Products Tagged by Administrators

There’s no reason to wait for customers to tag products. The store administrator can apply new tags to products, and reuse existing tags.

Products Tagged by Administrators

To add a new tag:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog >Tags > All Tags .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Tag button. Then, do the following: a.

Enter the Tag Name .

b.

Set Status to “Approved.” c.

In the Base Popularity field, enter a numeric value to assign a weight to the tag.

The number assigns a base value to the tag and increases its size in the tag cloud.

3.

When complete, click the Save Tag button.

304 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

To apply an existing tag to specific products:

1.

In the Manage Tags list, click to open the tag.

2.

Click to expand the Products Tagged by Administrators section. Then, do the following: a.

Click the Reset Filter button to display all product records.

b.

Select the checkbox of each product that you want to tag.

3.

When complete, click the Save Tag button.

The products now appear in the list of Products Tagged by Administrators.

Moderating Tags

After a customer submits a product tag, an administrator must approve the tag before it becomes visible in the store. After a tag has been approved, it can be used for other products without further approval.

Tags

Changing the Status of Pending Tags

To approve multiple tags:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog >Tags > Pending Tags . Then in the list, click to open a pending tag.

2.

In the list, select the checkbox of each tag that you want to approve.

3.

Set the Actions control to “Change Status.” Then, set the Status control to “Approved.”

4.

When complete, click the Submit button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 305

Polls Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

To manage a single tag:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog >Tags > Pending Tags . Then in the list, click to open a pending tag.

306

Editing a Tag

2.

If necessary, you can edit the text as needed. Then, do one of the following: l l

To approve and publish the pending tag, set Status to “Approved.”

To reject the tag, set Status to “Disapproved.”

3.

When complete, click the Save Tag button.

Tag Activity

The remaining sections give you a snapshot of the tag activity, including which customers have used the tag, and products tagged by the store administrator and customers.

Customers Submitted this Tag

You can jump to a specific customer or product by clicking its row in the list.

Products Tagged by Customers

Polls

Polls make it easy to learn about your customers’ opinions and preferences. The poll occupies a small amount of space and is usually placed in the right sidebar of a catalog page. Poll results appear immediately after a response is submitted. If you create multiple polls, a new poll appears each time the page is refreshed.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Polls

Original Poll and Results

To create a poll:

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Polls .

2.

In the upper-right corner of the Poll Manager, click the Add New Poll button.

3.

In the Poll Information section, do the following:

Poll Information a.

Enter the Poll Question .

b.

By default, Status i s set to “Open.” If you later want to remove the poll from your store, set Status to “Closed.” c.

Set Visible In to the store view where you want the poll to appear.

4.

In the panel on the left, select Poll Answers . Then, for each answer, do the following: a.

Click the Add New Answer button. Then, do the following:

Assigned Answers a.

In the Answer Title field, enter the answer as you want it to appear in the poll.

b.

To weight an answer, enter a number in the Votes Count field. The number will increment each time a customer chooses the answer.

5.

Click the Save Poll button to save your poll.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 307

Polls Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

To prevent multiple voting:

You can protect the poll results by preventing people from voting multiple times from the same computer.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Web .

3.

Click to expand the Polls section, and set Disallow Voting in a Poll Multiple Times from Same IP Address to “Yes.”

Disallow Voting Multiple Times

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Editing a Poll

After a poll has been created, click the row in the Poll Manager

To edit a poll:

1.

From the Poll Manager list, click to open the poll in edit mode. Then, make the necessary changes.

l l

To close the poll so that it no longer appears in the store, set Status to “Closed.”

To see the vote count for each answer, click Poll Answers in the panel on the left.

2.

When complete, click the Save Poll button.

308

Poll Answer Count

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Email a Friend

Email a Friend

The Email a Friend link makes it easy for your customers to share links to products with their friends. In the Magento demo store, the Email a Friend link appears as an envelope icon.

The automated message that is sent from your store is referred to as transactional email.

The message template can be customized for your voice and brand. To prevent spamming, customers can send only five messages per hour.

Email a Friend

To send email to a friend:

1.

On a catalog page, click the Email a Friend link. When prompted, either log into your customer account or register to open an account.

2.

Complete the Message and enter the recipient Name and Email Address .

To send the message to more than one person, click the Add Another Recipient link and complete the information for each person.

3.

When ready to send the message, click the Send Email button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 309

Gift Options Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

Email to a Friend Form

Gift Options

At checkout, customers are presented with the available gift options during the Shipping

Method step of the process. If the customer chooses to add gift options, two groups of checkboxes appear: Gift Options for Entire Order and Gift Options for Individual Items. .

310

Gift Options During Checkout

Gift Options Configuration

The Gift Options configuration determines if customers have the option to add a gift message for the complete order, and for individual items. The gift options must be configured first for the website, and can then be overridden at the product level.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools Gift Options

To enable gift options:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales .

2.

Click to expand the Gift Options section. Then, set the following options according to your preference: l l

Allow Gift Messages on Order Level

Allow Gift Messages for Order Items

Gift Options Configuration

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Allow Gift Messages on

Order Level

Allow Gift Messages on

Order Items

Scope

Website

Website

Description

Specify whether a gift message can be added for the entire order.

Specify whether a gift message can be added for an individual order item.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 311

Gift Options

312

Chapter 22:  Shopping Tools

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 23:

Newsletters

Publishing a regular newsletter is considered to be one of the most powerful and affordable marketing tools available. Magento Community Editiongives store administrators the ability to publish and distribute newsletters to customers who have registered to receive them, plus all the tools necessary to:

• Promote your newsletter

• Build and manage your list of subscribers

• Develop content

• Maintain an archive of back issues

• Drive traffic to your store

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 313

Newsletter Configuration Chapter 23:  Newsletters

Newsletter Configuration

The first step in creating newsletters is to configure the newsletter settings for your site.

You can require customers to confirm the registration by clicking a confirmation link sent by email. This technique is called double opt-in, because customers must confirm twice that they want to receive a newsletter. This method reduces the number of customers that might otherwise consider your newsletter as spam.

To configure newsletter settings on your site:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Customers, select Newsletter .

3.

Click to expand the Subscription section. Then, do the following: a.

Confirm the email templates and senders of the following email messages sent to subscribers: l l l

Success email

Confirmation email

Unsubscription email b.

To require people to double-opt in to confirm their subscription, set Need to

Confirm to “Yes.” c.

To allow people who do not have an account with your store to subscribe to the newsletter, set Allow Guest Subscriptions to “Yes.” d.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Subscription Options

314 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 23:  Newsletters Newsletter Templates

Newsletter Templates

Before sending a newsletter, create a newsletter template. You can create and save as many of these as required for any situation, from an annual holiday newsletter to a weekly product update.

Newsletter Template

To create a newsletter template:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Newsletter > Newsletter Templates . The page lists the available newsletter templates. You can edit an existing template or create a new one.

2.

To add a new template, click the Add New Template button. Then, do the following: a.

In the Template Name field, specify a unique and indicative name for this template.

This value is not visible for customers.

b.

In the Template Subject field, specify the subject of the email to be sent to your customers.

c.

In the Sender Name and Sender Email fields, specify the name and email of the sender of the email to be sent to your customers.

d.

In the Template Content field, use the WYSIWYG editor to compose the body of the email. Note that this field is pre-filled with tags showing an unsubscribe link in the email. We recommend that you do not remove this link so that all emails that are sent enable your customers to unsubscribe from the newsletter.

e.

Click Preview Template , to display the content with the formatting as it will be viewed by your subscribers.

3.

When complete, click the Save Template button.

After you have saved a template, a Save As button appears when you edit this template.

You can use the Save As button, so you can make changes and save it as a new template, without affecting the original. This can save you time because you will not

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 315

Newsletter Queue Chapter 23:  Newsletters need to re-enter all the template information in order to create a new template. If you already have an existing template that is similar to the new template, simply edit the fields that you require, and then use the Save As button to create a new template.

Newsletter Queue

A newsletter that has many recipients must be sent in stages. The process of sending the newsletter is managed by a queue. After you start the queue, Magento sends the emails in packs.

To ensure delivery of your newsletters, it is recommended that you integrate your

Magento installation with a third-party newsletter provider. These services are “white listed” by email service providers. Look for newsletter providers in

Magento Connect

.

To send your newsletter using a queue:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Newsletter > Newsletter Templates .

2.

Set the Actions control to the relevant template. Then, select Queue Newsletter .

3.

In the Queue Date Start field, specify when the newsletter will start being sent.

4.

In the Subscribers From field, select one or more store views whose customers this newsletter will be sent to.

5.

Review the template and parameters and then click the Save Newsletter button to schedule sending the newsletter.

316 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 24:

Sales Channels

Publishing your catalog through multiple channels is an effective way to widen your distribution without much effort. You can start by syndicating your content with

RSS feeds, and then expand by sending your catalog data to shopping aggregators.

Social Marketing

There are many social marketing extension s that can be added to your store. To learn more, see:

Magento Connect

.

Social Marketing Extensions

Facebook Open Graph

The Facebook Open Graph 2.0 extension is a tool developers can use to add custom social networking buttons to your store. The extension uses the new Facebook Open

Graph 2.0 protocol.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 317

Social Marketing Chapter 24:  Sales Channels

318

Facebook Open Graph

When the Facebook Open Graph 2.0 extension is successfully installed and all configuration is complete, the Facebook buttons appear on each product page in the store, along with the Facebook blocks that provide information about other Facebook users and friends who have clicked the social buttons. The information provided in the blocks depends on the customer who is logged in to Facebook and whether friends have performed actions with your app, such as clicked a social button.

Process Overview

Step 1: Download and install the extension

Step 2: Create an application on the Facebook Developer site

Step 3: Configure Magento

Step 1:

Download and Install the Extension

The Facebook Open Graph 2.0 extension is free of charge and can be downloaded from

Magento Connect . Copy the Extension Key to the clipboard.

To install the extension:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Magento Connect > Magento Connect Manager .

2.

When prompted, enter your Admin credentials, and click the Log In button.

3.

Paste the Extension Key , and click the Install button.

Step 2:

Create Application on Facebook Developer Site

The current implementation of the Facebook Open Graph 2.0 extension requires an

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 24:  Sales Channels Social Marketing application to be created manually on the Facebook Developers site.

1.

Navigate to: https://developers.facebook.com/

2.

In the main menu, click Apps .

3.

Click Create New Application and perform all of the steps of the app creation wizard.

The App Namespace value that you entered will be used in the Magento configuration.

4.

In the left column, select Settings > Basic . Under the “Select how your app integrates with Facebook” heading, select Website . Then in the Site URL field, enter your store address.

Important! Your website and store should have one domain name.

a.

For Action Types in the Advanced settings in the Graph API URL field enter own, want or other action you want to be associated with a social networking button on your product pages. This title is for internal use.

You cannot set the “dislike” action as it is not supported by Facebook Open Graph

2.0.

b.

The Object Type you create should have the following Object Properties: l l l l l

URL (page URL)

Title (product title)

Image (image URL)

Description (product description)

Price

By default, a new Object Type has only the first four properties. To add the Price property, use the Add Another Property button on the Object Type page.

Step 3: Configure Magento

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Social, select Facebook.

If the extension is installed, the Social tab appears in the Configuration panel.

3.

Set Current Configuration Scope to your website.

4.

In the Facebook Config section, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 319

Social Marketing Chapter 24:  Sales Channels a.

To display Facebook buttons in the store, set Enable Facebook on Frontend to

“Yes.” b.

Enter the App Namespace value of your application. You can find it in the Basic

Settings section of your app on the Facebook Developers site.

c.

Specify the App ID and App Secret values of your application. You can find them in the Basic Settings section of your app on the Facebook Developers site.

d.

Enter the Open Graph Type value of your Object Type . To find it on the Facebook

Developers site, open the settings of your application, navigate to Open Graph >

Dashboard, click your object type, and expand the Advanced settings.

On the page header, the system will display the Apps > %Your Facebook

Application Name% > Open Graph > Object Type: %Object name%.

e.

To add and configure a social networking button, click Add Action Button and complete the setup for each button. The action settings can be different for each store view.

Action

Button Title

Enable Friend Box

Count Friend Box

In the Action column, specify the internal button action title, for example, own or want. This value should correspond to the value you have specified in the Graph

API URL field on the Facebook Developers site. The

Graph API URL field is available in the Advanced section of the Action Type settings.

In the Button Title column, specify the name of the social networking button as you want it to appear in the frontend.

In the Enable FriendBox column decide if you want to display in the frontend the related Facebook block, which contains the count and the pictures of friends.

In the Count in FriendBox column, set the maximum number of friends that can be displayed in the related

Facebook block. By default, it is set to 3. If you set zero value (0) or leave the field empty, then the default value is applied.

5.

When complete, click Save Config button.

The social network buttons you have created and the corresponding Facebook blocks now appear on the product pages of your store.

320 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 24:  Sales Channels Setting Up RSS Feeds

Setting Up RSS Feeds

RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is an XML-based data format that is used to distribute information online. Your customers can subscribe to your RSS feeds and be notified of new products and promotions. RSS Feeds can also be used to publish your product information to shopping aggregation sites, and can also be included in newsletters.

When RSS feeds are enabled, any additions to products, specials, categories, and coupons in your store are automatically sent to the subscribers of each feed. A link to all the RSS feeds that you publish is in the footer of your store.

The software that is used to read an RSS feed is called a feed reader, and allows people to subscribe to headlines, blogs, podcasts, and much more. Google Reader is one of the many feed readers which are available online for free.

To set up RSS feeds for your store:

1.

From the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the upper-right corner, set Current Configuration Scope to the store view where you want the feeds to be available.

3.

In the panel on the left, under Catalog, select RSS Feeds .

RSS Feed Configuration

4.

In the Rss Config section, set Enable RSS to “Enable.” Then, in each section below, set the feeds that you want to activate to “Enable.” a.

In the Wishlist section, set Enable RSS to “Enable.” b.

In the Catalog section, set any, or all, of the following feeds to “Enable.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 321

Setting Up RSS Feeds Chapter 24:  Sales Channels l l l l l l

New Products

Special Products

Coupons/Discounts

Tags Products

Top Level Category

Top Level Category c.

In the Order section, set Customer Order Status Notification to “Enable.”

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Types of RSS Feeds

RSS Feed Description

Wishlist When enabled, an RSS feed link will be available on top of customer wishlist pages. Additionally, the wishlist sharing page will also include a checkbox that lets you add a link to wishlist

RSS feeds on shared wishlists.

New Products The new products RSS feed tracks new products added to the store catalog and will syndicate them.

Special Products

Coupons / Discounts

Tags Products

Top Level Category

Customer Order Status

The special products RSS feed will syndicate products with special pricing.

Any special coupons or discounts generated in your store will be added to this RSS feed.

The tags products RSS feed manages and syndicates newly added product tags.

This RSS feed tracks new top level categories, or root level categories, in your catalog.

Allows customers to track their order status with an RSS feed.

When enabled, an RSS feed link will appear on the order.

322 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:

Mobile Apps

XML Connect is a module that enables you to create and manage Magento mobile apps. It also enables the apps to load content and communicate with a Magento

Community Edition instance on the server after being installed on a mobile phone or other mobile device. You can easily create mobile applications for your stores from the Magento Admin Panel.

Mobile Devices

To enable the XML Connect module:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Advanced, select Advanced .

3.

In the list, confirm that Mage_XmlConnect is set to “Yes.”

Creating a Mobile App

According to the Magento Mobile logic, a mobile app is strictly bound to a certain store and certain mobile device type. The workflow for creating and activating a mobile app is as follows:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 323

Creating a Mobile App

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create a New Mobile App

Step 2:Design the App and Add Content

Step 3: Complete the Configuration

Step 4: Subscribe to a Plan

Step 5: Submit Your App to Magento

Step 1:

Create a New Mobile App

1.

On the Admin menu, select Mobile > Manage Apps .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add App button.

3.

Set Device Type to one of the following: l l l iPad iPhone

Android

Then, click the Continue button.

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps

Select the Device Type

4.

On the General tab, complete the following fields:

324

App Name

Mobile App Information

Specify the name of the app. It is an internal name and it is not displayed to app users.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps Creating a Mobile App

Store View

Catalog Only App

Select the store view where the app will be used.

Decide whether your app shows only the catalog or provides options to buy products or add them to the wishlist.

a.

In the Mailbox title field, enter the title for your mailbox for the More Info tab of the app.

5.

To save the new app, click the Save or Save and Continue Edit button in upper-right corner of the page.

Step 2:

Design the App and Add Content

1.

In the panel on the left, select Design , and do the following:

Design

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 325

Creating a Mobile App Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps a.

In the Images section, you can specify your logo, banners, and background image.

Up to five rotating banners can be used. For each banner, you can choose the action to be performed when it is clicked. To set an action for a banner, click the link next to the Action label.

Images b.

You can choose to redirect customers to product page, CMS page, or category page.

For product and category pages, you will need to type the name of the product or category. A CMS page can be selected from a list.

c.

After you add the images, click either the Save or Save and Continue Edit button in the upper-right corner.

d.

In the Color Themes section, specify the colors you want to use.

326 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps Creating a Mobile App

Color Themes e.

In the Tabs section, set up the selection of tabs that you want to use for navigation.

You can use the arrows below to change the tab order.

Tabs

2.

In the panel on the left, select Content to add CMS pages to your app. To add a new page, click the Add Page button. Then, do the following:

Content

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 327

Creating a Mobile App Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps a.

In the Label field, specify the label for the app page. The label is visible for application users.

b.

Set Get Content from CMS Page to the CMS page you want to use.

Step 3:

Complete the Configuration

1.

In the panel on the left, select Payment Methods . Then, select following payment methods that you want to use.

328

Payment Methods

Enable Standard

Checkout

If you select “Yes,” all payment methods that are supported by Magento Community Edition are available.

Activate PayPal MECL In this field you can activate the PayPal mobile embedded payment method. You can choose to use

MECL (Mobile Express Checkout Library) alongside standard checkout, or use it as your only checkout method for Magento mobile. PayPal MECL requires a

PayPal business account.

2.

(iPhone only) In the panel on the left, select Analytics . You can enable Flurry Analytics after subscribing to a Magento support plan and submitting your application to

Magento. You will be able to see the statistics from your store Admin and at www.flurry.com. The following fields are available:

Analytics

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps Creating a Mobile App

Enable Flurry

Analytics

Flurry API Code

If you select Yes, the Flurry API Code field appears.

Flurry Analytics Site

Specify your Flurry API code. You can request it from

Magento, after submitting your application.

Contains the link to www.flurry.com, where you can view the statistics after it is enabled.

Flurry Analytics is currently available only for iPhone apps.

3.

In the panel on the left, select Submission History to view the records about your app submissions. You need to resubmit the application if you make changes in any submission settings. It refers to the settings on the Submit App page, which opens on

Save and Submit App button click.

Submission History

4.

In the panel on the left, select Cache Management to set the cache lifetime of the app.

To disable the cache, leave the Cache Lifetime field empty.

Cache Management

5.

In the panel on the left, select Social Networking to use API to link your app with your accounts on Twitter, Facebook, or LinkedIn.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 329

Creating a Mobile App Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps

Social Networking

6.

In the panel on the left, select Push Notification to manage the Urban Airship push notification service. Then, do the following:

330

Push Notification

You can find more about the AirMail by Urban Airship at http://urbanairship.com/products/airmail/.

a.

Read and accept the Urban Airship Terms of Service .

b.

Set Enable AirMail Message Push notification to “Yes.” c.

Enter the following Urban Airship account credentials:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps Creating a Mobile App l l l

Application Key

Application Secret

Application Master Secret

You can request them by sending email to [email protected] after submitting your application to Magento.

d.

In the Mailbox title field, enter the title for your mailbox for the More Info tab.

7.

To save the new app, click the Save or Save and Continue Edit button in upper-right corner.

Step 4:

Subscribe to a Plan

To order a subscription for a Magento support plan, visit the Mobile page on the

Magento website. When you purchase a subscription, you will receive the activation key for your application.

Step 5:

Submit Your App to Magento

1.

From the Admin, select Mobile > Manage Apps. Then, select the app you want to submit.

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Save and Submit App button.

3.

On the Submit App page, under Key, enter the Activation Key that you received from

Magento.

4.

Complete the information in the Submission Fields section, which appears in the app store. The following fields are available: a.

In the Title field, specify the name of your application. It is shown to the customers, so we recommend choosing a 10-12 character recognizable title.

b.

In the Description field, specify the description of your store. It appears in the App

Store.

c.

In the Contact Email field, specify the email address to contact for this application and submission issues.

d.

The Price field is currently unavailable for editing, as only free applications are currently allowed in Magento.

e.

In the Country field select the countries where the application will be available.

f.

In the Copyright field enter your copyright text. It appears in the information section of your application.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 331

Managing AirMail Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps g.

In the Keywords fields, enter a comma-separated list of keywords for your application. The field may contain 100 characters maximum. These keywords are matched to users' searches in the application stores.

5.

Under Icons , do the following: a.

In the Large iTunes Icon field (or Large Android Market Logo for Android applications), browse for the image that will appear as a large icon of your image in the applications store. You do not need to gradient or soften edges; this is done automatically by Apple. Required size: 512px by 512px.

b.

In the Loader Splash Screen field, browse for the image that will appear first on the screen, while your application is loading. Required size: 320px by 460px. For iPhone applications you can specify a separate image for iPhone retina screens in the

Loader Splash Screen (iPhone 4 retina) field. Required size: 640px by 920px.

c.

In the Custom App Icon field, browse for the image that will be used as your application icon, after the user installation of your application. Recommended size:

57px by 57px at 72 dpi.

l

For iPhone applications you can specify a separate image for iPhone retina screens in the Custom App Icon (iPhone 4 retina) field. Required size: 114px by

114px.

d.

In the Copyright Page Logo field, browse for your logo image, which is displayed on the copyright page of your application. Recommended size: 100px by 100px.

l

For iPhone applications you can specify a separate image for iPhone retina screens in the Copyright Page Logo (iPhone 4 retina) field. Required size: 114px by 114px.

6.

In the upper-right corner, click the Submit App button.

After you submit your app, you can contact the Magento team, for example by email at [email protected], to request Urban Airship and/or Flurry credentials, and any other information you need. Placing your application in the app store takes from several hours to several days.

Managing AirMail

From the Magento Admin, you can create and send AirMail push notification messages, also called push notifications, and AirMail messages to your mobile application users.

Push notifications, which are plain text messages, appear to the user when the app is launched. AirMail messages are rich-media, and can include HTML, images, video, and audio.

In Magento, message sending is implemented using the cron job scheduler. By default, it checks for new messages to be sent every five minutes.

332 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps Managing AirMail

To send a push notification or AirMail message:

1.

Create a template for the message.

2.

Add the message to the queue.

You select the message type when adding the message to the queue. When you send the

AirMail message, the push notification is sent as well. For example, you can make it something like “You've got a new message from YourStore store.” The push notification appears when the user opens your application. The AirMail message is stored in the

AirMail application inbox.

Creating a Message Template

To create a new message template:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Mobile > Message Templates .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Template button. Then, complete the fields, as described below.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

Field

Application

Template Name

Push Title

Template

Description

Select the application for which the message template is intended.

Specify the template name, maximum 255 characters.

Specify the text of the push notification messages that will be sent using this template, maximum 140 characters. When you send the AirMail message, the push notification is sent as well.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 333

Managing AirMail Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps

Field

Message Title

Template Content

Description

Specify the title for the AirMail messages, sent using this template, maximum 140 characters.

In this field you can create the content of your AirMail message. To add the content you can use the WYSIWIG editor, or hide the editor and write the HTML code in the text window. You can hide and show the editor using the

Show/Hide Editor button.

You can insert variables with the store contact information and widgets to your template.

To insert a variable, click the corresponding icon in the editor, or click the Insert Variable button if the editor is hidden. Then in the list, click the variable you want to insert.

To insert a widget, click the corresponding icon in the editor, or click the Insert Widget button if the editor is hidden. The

Insert Widget pop-up window opens, where you need to take several steps to set the widget. When you are finished, click the Insert Widget button in the upper-right corner of the window.

Message Queue Management

While adding the message to the queue, you have the option of specifying what type of message you will send, a push notification or an AirMail message.

To add messages to the sending queue:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Mobile > Message Templates .

2.

Select the message template that you want to use. Then, in the Action column, select

“Queue Message” and complete the following:

334

Message Type

Queue Message

In the Message Type drop-down menu under Message

Settings, select the type of the message you want to send. It can be Push message or AirMail message.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps Managing AirMail

For Android applications, only push notifications are available.

Start Date In the Start Date field, specify the start date and time for sending the message. You can type it manually or select from the calendar by clicking the calendar button. If you leave Start Date empty, the message will be sent immediately after you finish configuration and click Queue

Message.

3.

Under Template, specify the following:

Push Title

Message Title

Template Content

In the Push Title field, you can edit the text of the push notification message, maximum 140 characters. If you intend to send a push notification, and have selected Push message in the Message Type drop-down menu, proceed to the step 4.

In the Message Title field, you can edit the title of the

AirMail message, maximum 255 characters.

In the Template Content field, you can make changes in your message template. For more information about editing the template, see the last step of the procedure in “Creating a Message Template.”

4.

In the upper-right corner, click the Queue Message button to add the message to the queue. You are redirected to the AirMail Messages Queue page, the message is added to list with In Queue status.

l l

To cancel the message transmission, select the message and in the Actions column, select “Cancel.” Canceled messages are not deleted and can be previewed.

To delete the message from the queue, select the message and in the Actions column, select “Delete.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 335

Managing AirMail

336

Chapter 25:  Mobile Apps

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:

Google Tools

Your store includes a number of tools to help optimize your content, analyze your traffic, and connect your catalog to shopping aggregators. In this chapter, you will learn how to use the following Google tools: l l l

Google Merchant Center

Google Sitemap

Google Analytics

Google Merchant Center

Google Merchant Center helps you manage Google’s shopping tools and services from a single dashboard. In addition to the following services, you can also link

Google Analytics to your Merchant Center account.

Google Shopping

Google Shopping is a commercial service that helps shoppers find products on

Google, compare products, and connect with merchants.

Product Listing Ads

Your product listings can include rich information, such as product image, price, and merchant name. Whenever a user enters a search query on Google.com that is relevant to an item you are trying to sell, Google will automatically show the most relevant products along with the associated image, price, and product name.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 337

Google Merchant Center Chapter 26:  Google Tools

Google Merchant Center Login

Process Overview:

Step 1: Open a Google Merchant Account

Step 2: Verify Your Website URL

Step 3: Claim Your Website URL

Step 1:

Open a Google Merchant Account

1.

Visit the Google Merchant Center , and do one of the following: l l

If you have a Google account, enter your Email address and password , and click the

Sign In button.

Click the Sign Up button, and follow the instructions to create an account.

338

Google Merchant Center Dashboard

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:  Google Tools Google Merchant Center

2.

In the panel on the left, click to expand Settings , and select General .

3.

Enter your Store name and Description .

4.

Enter the full Website URL for your store. Depending on your domain, the URL might be formatted as one of the following: l l http://mystore.com

http://www.mystore.com

At this time, your Website URL is unclaimed and unverified.

Website URL Unverified - Unclaimed

5.

Complete the remaining General settings information, and Save Changes .

Step 2:

Verify Your Website URL

In this step, you will use Google Webmaster Tools to verify that you have the right to upload product listings from your store.

1.

On a new browser tab, go to Google Webmaster Tools . Then, do the following: a.

Click the Add a Site button. When prompted, enter the URL of your store, and click

Continue .

b.

When prompted to verify that you are the owner of the site, click the Alternate methods tab.

c.

Select the HTML tag method, and press Ctrl + C to copy the meta tag code to the clipboard.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 339

Google Merchant Center Chapter 26:  Google Tools

HTML Meta Tag Code

1.

Return to your store's Admin, and select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select Design . Then, do the following: a.

Click to expand the HTML Head section.

b.

Scroll down to the Miscellaneous Scripts box and press Ctrl + V to paste the verification code from the clipboard.

c.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

340 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:  Google Tools Google Merchant Center

Paste Google Site Verification Code

3.

Return to Google Webmaster Tools , and click the Verify button. When prompted, click

Continue . Your site is now verified.

Google Webmaster Tools - Site Verified

Step 3:

Claim Your Website URL

In this final step, you will establish the connection between your site and your Google

Merchant account.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 341

Google Sitemap Chapter 26:  Google Tools

1.

Return to the Google Merchant Center. The General Settings now show that your site is verified, but not claimed.

Google Merchant Center- Claim this URL

2.

Click the Claim this URL link. Your Website URL is now both verified and claimed.

342

Website URL Verified and Claimed

What next? Now that your site is verified, you can submit a

sitemap

to Google. You can also set up a

Google Analytics

account, and link it to your Merchant Center Dashboard.

Google Sitemap

Google Sitemap improves the way your store is indexed by their search engine, and is specifically designed to find pages which might otherwise be overlooked. As with the standard Magento sitemap, Google Sitemap is an index of all the pages on your site.

However, unlike the Magento sitemap, the Google Sitemap is not visible to customers.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:  Google Tools Google Sitemap

Process Overview:

Step 1: Remove any “robots.txt” Restrictions

Step 2: Generate the Sitemap

Step 3: Submit Your Sitemap to Google

Step 4: Restore Previous “robots.txt” Restrictions

Step 1:

Remove any "robots.txt" Restrictions

When first setting up your Google Sitemap, you must provide full access for Google to index your site. If you have a robots.txt file, make sure that it includes the following instruction:

User-agent:*

Disallow:

After your sitemap has been successfully submitted to Google, you can restore any instructions to exclude certain locations of your site. If you have not yet set up a robots.txt file, you can do so after you finish the sitemap.

Step 2:

Generate the Sitemap

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Google Sitemap .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add Sitemap button. Then, do the following: a.

In the Filename field, enter: “sitemap.xml” b.

Enter the path to a writable location on your server for the sitemap.

l l

To put the sitemap in a folder, enter the path to the folder:

/sitemaps

To put the sitemap at the base path of your store, enter a forward slash: / c.

Set Store View to the view where the sitemap will be used.

Configure Google Sitemap

3.

Click the Save & Generate button to create the sitemap.

The sitemap appears in the list, with a link to sitemap.xml file. From here, you can do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 343

Google Sitemap Chapter 26:  Google Tools l l

To view the sitemap, click the hyperlink in the Link for Google column. This is the link that you will later submit to Google.

To update the sitemap, click the Generate link.

Step 3:

Submit Your Sitemap to Google

1.

Go to Google Webmaster Tools and do one of the following: l l

Log in to your existing account.

Create a new account, and log in.

2.

Click the Add a Site button.

344

Add a Site

3.

When prompted to enter your store address, enter the full URL of your store, such as: http://www.mystore.com

Click the Continue button.

4.

To verify that you are the owner of the site, click the Alternate Methods tab. Then, choose one of the following methods: l l

Add a DNS record to your domain’s configuration

Add a meta tag to your site’s home page

To verify your site with a meta tag, do the following: a.

Open two tabs on your browser; one for Google Webmaster Central, and the other that is logged in to the Admin of your store.

b.

Follow the instructions on Webmaster Central to copy the full text of the Google site verification meta tag.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:  Google Tools Google Sitemap c.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, click Design .

d.

In the HTML Head section, scroll down to Miscellaneous Scripts and paste the site verification meta tag. Then, click the Save Config button.

e.

Return to Google Webmaster Central , and click Verify .

Google Site Verification

5.

After your site is verified and appears in your Google dashboard, do the following: a.

Click the name of your store. Then, click the Sitemaps button.

b.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add/Test Sitemap button.

6.

Return to your store Admin, and copy the path to your Google sitemap. If necessary, log back in and do the following: a.

Go to Catalog > Google Sitemap.

b.

In the Link for Google column, right-click the link to your sitemap. Then on the context menu, click Copy Shortcut .

c.

Open a text editor and paste the link. Then, copy the part of the link that comes after the “dot com.” It looks like this:

/media/s4d71280645299/sitemaps/sitemap.xml

7.

Return to Google Webmaster Tools and paste the text into the box to complete the address of your sitemap. Then, click the Submit Sitemap button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 345

Google Analytics Chapter 26:  Google Tools

346

Submit Google Sitemap

8.

Make sure that the link to your sitemap is working correctly, and that your Google dashboard shows the number of pages indexed.

Step 4:

Restore Previous "robots.txt" Restrictions

If you changed your robots.txt file to make it fully accessible, you can now restore the previous instructions to disallow access to certain areas of your site.

Google Analytics

Google Analytics is a free service provided by Google to help website owners find out more about the traffic on their website and about conversions. Magento supports the following Google Analytics options:

Page View Tracking

Ecommerce Tracking

Shows the origin of visitors to your store, and the pages visited.

Shows which visitors to your store make purchases, and what they buy.

Step 1:

Set Up a Google Merchant Account

The first step is to establish a Google merchant account, and then verify and claim your website URL. For detailed instructions, see:

Google Merchant Center

.

When you sign up for an account, a report appears that shows your new Google

Analytics account number in the following format: UA-XXXXXXX-1. Write this number down, because it is required to complete the configuration for your store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:  Google Tools Google Analytics

Step 2:

Turn On Ecommerce Tracking

1.

Sign in to your Google Analytics account.

2.

On the main menu, select Admin .

The options in the Administration section are organized into three columns under

Account, Property, and View. If you have multiple accounts or stores, make sure that the

Account button is set to the correct account, and that the Property button is set to the correct store.

Google Analytics Admin

3.

In the View column, select the View Settings option.

4.

In the panel on the left, select Ecommerce Settings . Then, do the following: a.

Click the Status switch to turn on Ecommerce Tracking. Then, click the Next step button.

b.

Click the Submit button to save the setting. When the Success message appears at the top of the page, you are done.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 347

Google Analytics Chapter 26:  Google Tools

348

Ecommerce Tracking On

Step 3:  Complete the Magento Configuration

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under Sales, select Google API .

2.

Click to expand the Google Analytics section, and do the following:

Google Analytics

3.

Set Enable to “Yes.”

4.

In the Account Number field, enter the Google Analytics account number, or tracking code that you wrote down when you signed up for the service.

5.

To anonymize part of your visitors’ IP address before it is sent to Google, set Enable IP

Anonymization to “Yes.”

According to Google, anonymizing IP addresses can reduce the accuracy of geographic data in the Analytics report.

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 26:  Google Tools Google Shopping

Google Shopping

Google Shopping gives you the ability to upload product feeds from your catalog so your products can be easily found through Google Search. Any Simple product from your catalog can be uploaded to Google Shopping. The product attributes that are mapped to

Google are used as search parameters by customers looking for products. After mapping the product attributes to sync with Google Content attributes, you can create a simple upload from your store to Google Shopping.

Magento Connect has a number of extensions that you can install to establish integration with Google Shopping. Some extensions are free, and others are available for purchase from developers. In addition to Google Shopping, there are many extensions available to integrate your store with shopping sites.

Visit Magento Connect and read the descriptions and reviews, to help you decide which solution is the best for your store. Then, follow the

instructions to install

the extension.

Google Content API for

Shopping

Magento’s Google Content API for

Shopping extension allows developers to migrate their eCommerce stores into the new Google API to ensure that they come up in Google searches.

Google Shopping Feed

“The #1 Google Shopping extension for

Magento. Used by thousands of sites globally, recommended by Google reps.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 349

Google Shopping

350

Chapter 26:  Google Tools

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Content Elements

Chapter 27:

Mastering Magento CMS

The old adage, “content is king” is more true now than ever before. The term, content marketing refers to the art of promoting your products or services by providing valuable information to your customers at no charge. The quality of your content helps distinguish your store from others, increases your visibility to search engines, and provides support to your customers. This soft-sell approach is often more effective than advertising, builds credibility and trust, and can turn your store into a destination.

Your content should reflect the branding of your store, and be delivered with your distinctive visual presentation and voice to convey your message. Use pictures to tell a story. Educate, inspire, and entertain. With quality content, sometimes less is more.

Magento Community Edition includes a powerful content management system

(CMS) that you can use to create rich content for your store. In this chapter, you will learn how to create new content, and incorporate existing content to create a compelling experience that will bring your customers back to your store for more.

CMS Menu

Pages

Create pages with text, images, blocks, variables, and widgets, that can be inforporated into the navigation of your store, and linked to other pages.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 353

CMS Menu Chapter 27:  Mastering Magento CMS

Static Blocks

The CMS makes it easy to create blocks of content without writing any code. Blocks can contain text, images, and even video, and can be assigned to any part of the page layout.

Widgets

Use the Widget tool to display dynamic data and add blocks, links, and interactive elements most anywhere in your store.

Polls

Create polls to learn about your customers’ opinions and preferences.

They're fun to take and see the results!

354 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 28:

Content Pages

All content can be viewed in terms of its shelf life, just as any product in a store. Did you know that the shelf life of social media content is less than twenty-four hours?

The potential shelf life of the content you create can help you decide where to invest your resources.

Content with a long shelf life is sometimes referred to as evergreen content.

Examples of evergreen content include customer success stories, "how to" instructions, and Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ.) Other content is perishable by nature, such as events, industry news, and press releases.

Core Content

The Magento demo store has examples of core content pages that can help you get started. Take a look at the following pages in your store, to make sure that they convey your message and brand.

Home

The demo “Home” page includes a banner, an image carousel, several static blocks with links, and a list of new products.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 355

Core Content Chapter 28:  Content Pages

About Us

The “About Us” page is linked from the footer of your store. You can include images, video, links to press releases and announcements. The sample page has an image on the right, and one of a decorative sort to indicate the end of the page.

Customer Service

The “Customer Service” page is another node in the page hierarchy.

The two headers on the page have content that only becomes visible when the header is clicked.

Privacy Policy

Your store’s “Privacy Policy” page should be updated with your own information. As a best practice, your privacy policy should explain to your customers the type of information that your company collects and how it is used.

Page Not Found

The “404 Page Not Found” page is named for the response code that is returned when a page cannot be found. URL redirects reduce the number of times that this page appears. However, for those times when it is necessary, you might as well take advantage of the opportunity to offer some links to products that the customer might find interesting.

356 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 28:  Content Pages

Enable Cookies

The “Enable Cookies” page appears when visitors to your site do not have cookies enabled in their browsers. The page provides step-by-step, illustrated instructions to enable cookies for the most popular browsers.

Creating a Page

Service Unavailable

The “503 Service Unavailable" page is named for the response code that is returned when the server is unavailable.

Creating a Page

The process of adding a new content page to your store is essentially the same for any type of page you might want to create. You can include text, images, blocks of content, variables, and widgets.

Don’t forget that most content pages are designed to be read by search engines first, and by people second. Keep the needs of each of these two very different audiences in mind when choosing the page title and URL, composing the meta data, and writing the content.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Add a New Page

Step 2: Select the Page Layout

Step 3: Complete the Content

Step 4: Complete the Meta Data

Step 5: Publish the Page

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 357

Creating a Page

Step 1:

Add a New Page

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content .

2.

Click the Add New Page button.

3.

In the Page Information section, do the following:

Chapter 28:  Content Pages

Page Information a.

Enter a Title for the new page.

b.

Enter a URL Key for the page that is based on the Title. It should be all lowercase characters, with hyphens instead of spaces.

The URL Key is added to the base URL for your store, to create the online address for the page.

c.

In the Store View list, select each view where this page will be available.

d.

Set Status to “Disabled.” (This will be changed when the page is ready to publish.)

4.

With the required fields complete, click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Step 2:

Select the Page Layout

1.

In the Page Information panel on the left, select Design .

2.

In the Page Layout section, set Layout to one of the following: l l l l

1 column

2 columns with left bar

2 columns with right bar

3 columns

358 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 28:  Content Pages Creating a Page

Page Layout

Step 3:

Complete the Content

1.

In the Page Information panel on the left, select Content .

2.

In the Content Heading box, type the text you want to appear as the main heading at the top of the page.

Complete the remaining content, as you want it to appear in the main content column, according to the page layout selected. The content can include text, images, variables, and widgets with dynamic data.

3.

Click the Show / Hide Editor button to display the WYSIWYG editor. You can format the text with the toolbar buttons.

WYSIWYG Editor

4.

Click the Show / Hide Editor button again to return to the HTML mode. You can work in either mode that you prefer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 359

Using the Editor Chapter 28:  Content Pages

360

HTML Mode

5.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button.

Step 4:

Complete the Meta Data

1.

In the panel on the left, select Meta Data .

2.

Complete the Keywords and Description for the page. This information is used by search engines to index the page.

Step 5:

Publish the Page

1.

In the panel on the left, select Page Information .

2.

Set Status to “Published.”

3.

Click the Save Page button.

When the page is complete, it can be added to the navigation of your store, linked to other pages, or added as a link in the footer.

Using the Editor

The WYSIWYG editor gives you the ability to enter and format while working in a “What

You See Is What You Get” view of the content. If you prefer to work directly with the underlying HTML code, you can easily change modes. The editor can be used to create content for pages, blocks, and product descriptions. When working in the product catalog, the editor is accessed by clicking the WYSIWYG Editor button.

For a complete list of toolbar buttons, see the

Editor Toolbar

in the appendix of this guide.

Editor Toolbar

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 28:  Content Pages Using the Editor

Inserting a Link

The easiest way to insert a link is to use the Link button in the editor toolbar. It doesn’t require any knowledge of HTML and the result is the same.

To insert a link:

1.

Highlight the text where you want to create the link. Then, in the editor toolbar, click the Link button.

Link Button

2.

In the Link URL field, enter one of the following: l

The URL Key of a page in your store.

l

The full URL  of an external page to be linked.

3.

Set Target to one of the following: l l

Open link in the same window

Open in a new window

4.

In the Title field, enter the tooltip text that appears when someone hovers over the link.

5.

Click the Insert button to create the link.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 361

Using the Editor Chapter 28:  Content Pages

Inserting Images

From the editor, you can insert an online image that resides on another server, or display an image that has been uploaded to your store’s Media Storage library.

Method 1:

Insert an Image from Media Storage

1.

If necessary, click the Show / Hide Editor button to display the code.

2.

Position the cursor where you want the code to be inserted. Then, click the Insert Image button.

3.

Select the image that you want to use, and click the Insert File button.

362

Media Storage

4.

To view the image in WYSIWYG mode, click the Show / Hide Editor button.

Method 2

: Insert an Image from Another Server

Use this method to insert an image that is available online, but resides on another server. You must have the full URL of the image to complete the process.

1.

Click the Show / Hide Editor button to work in WYSIWYG mode.

2.

Position your cursor where you want the image to appear.

3.

On the Editor toolbar, click the Insert Image button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 28:  Content Pages Adding a Widget

Insert Image Button

4.

Then, do the following: a.

In the Image URL field, paste the full Web address to the image.

b.

In the Image Description field, write a brief description of the image.

c.

In the Title field, write a relevant title for the image.

5.

Click the Insert button to complete the process.

Adding a Widget

The

Widget

tool can be used to add a variety of content elements to the page, including links to any content page or node, product, or category. Links can be positioned on the page by block reference or incorporated directly into CMS content and email templates.

You can create links to the following four types of content: l l l

CMS Pages

Catalog Categories

Catalog Products

Links can be displayed as a block, or used inline and incorporated into existing text. By default, a link inherits its style from the location (

block reference ) according to the style

sheet (styles.css) of the theme.

To add a widget to a page:

1.

Open the CMS page to be edited. Then, in the panel on the left, select Content .

2.

Position the cursor in the HTML code where you want to place the link.

3.

Click the Insert Widget button. Then, do the following: a.

When prompted, select the Widget Type . In this example, we insert a link to a product.

b.

You can leave the Anchor Custom Text field empty to use the product name.

c.

Enter a Anchor Custom Title for best SEO practice. (The title isn't visible on the page.) d.

Set Template to one of the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 363

Adding a Widget Chapter 28:  Content Pages l l

To incorporate the link into text, select “Product Link Inline Template.”

To place the link on a separate line, select “Product Link Block Template.”

4.

Click the Select Product button, and do the following: a.

In the tree, navigate to the category you want.

b.

In the list, click the product that you want to include in the link.

Select the Product c.

Click the Insert Widget button to place the link on the page. The link

markup tag

is enclosed in double curly braces.

364

Widget Link Code

5.

Click the Show / Hide Editor button to see the link in WYSIWYG mode.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 28:  Content Pages Adding a Widget

Now you can continue editing the page, and incorporate the links into the rest of the content.

Widget Links on CMS Page

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 365

Adding a Widget

366

Chapter 28:  Content Pages

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 29:

Static Blocks

A block is a modular unit of content that can be positioned most anywhere on the page. CMS Static blocks are used to create modular chunks of content that can be incorporated into other blocks and pages.

CMS Static Blocks

Magento Community Edition’s content management system (CMS) makes it easy to create blocks of content without writing any code. Blocks can contain text, images, and even video, and can be assigned to any part of the page layout.

Positioning Blocks

Blocks can also be defined and positioned by entering XML code in the Layout

Update box on the target page. Custom CMS blocks can also be referenced and positioned without writing any code by using the Widget tool.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 367

Creating a Static Block Chapter 29:  Static Blocks

Creating a Static Block

Custom, static blocks of content can be added to any page, group of pages, or even to another block. The carousel image slider on the home page of the demo store is generated by code that is placed in a static block. The three smaller blocks below are also static blocks that link to other pages. Although they look like graphic images, they are actually defined using HTML and CSS.

368

Static Blocks on Home Page

To create a block:

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Static Blocks .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Block button. Then, do the following: a.

Assign a descriptive Block Title .

b.

Assign a unique Identifier to the block. Use all lowercase characters, with underscores instead of spaces. The identifier is used for internal reference.

c.

Select the Store View(s) where this content block will be visible.

d.

Set Status to “Enabled” to make the block visible in the store.

e.

Complete the Content for the block. You can use the Editor to format text, create links and tables, add images, video, and audio.

3.

When complete, click the Save Block button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 29:  Static Blocks Positioning Blocks

General Information

Positioning Blocks

The code that controls the page layout and placement of blocks is written in XML. You may have noticed references to XML Page Layout Updates throughout the Admin of your store. Every product, category, and piece of content—whether it’s a page, block, banner, or app—has a section where you can update the XML code that controls the positioning of the item.

Block References

The selection of available block references that is available varies by page type, and whether the customer is logged in, or is visiting the as a guest.

Widgets make it easy to position a block at a specific place on the page, and even for a specific product or category. You can select each option from a list, rather than trying to remember all of the possible combinations.

Category and CMS Pages

Block Reference Position

Breadcrumbs The navigation aid at the top of many pages that shows your current location as a link. Any additional content placed in the

Breadcrumbs reference floats to the right of the breadcrumbs, if displayed.

Left Column

Main Content Area

My Cart Extra Actions

Content is added to the left column.

Content is added to the main content area.

Content appears below the Cart Subtotal in the My Cart

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 369

Positioning Blocks

Block Reference

Navigation Bar

Page Bottom

Page Footer

Page Header

Page Top

Right Column

Store Language

Chapter 29:  Static Blocks

Position popup located within the top link.

Content appears below the main navigation bar.

Content appears at the bottom of the page.

Content appears above the footer of the page.

Content appears below the header of the page.

Content appears at the top of the page.

Content appears in the right column.

Content appears in the upper-left corner of the header.

Product Page

Block Reference

Alert URLs

Bottom Block Options

Wrapper

Breadcrumbs

Info Column Options

Wrapper

Left Column

Main Content Area

My Cart Extra Actions

Position

Content appears below the title of the product on the product detail page.

If custom options are added, content appears below the Add to Cart button.

Content appears to the right of breadcrumbs—the navigation aid that provides links as a path—that’s showcased below the navigation bar.

If a custom options are added, content appears to the right.

The same location applies to configurable options.

Content appears below the left column blocks.

Content appears below the main content area.

Content appears below the Cart Subtotal in the My Cart popup located within the top link.

Navigation Bar

Page Bottom

Page Footer

Page Header

Content appears below the main navigation bar.

Content appears at the bottom of the page.

Content appears above the footer of the page.

Content appears below the header of the page.

Page Top Content appears at the top of the page.

PayPal Express Checkout If the PayPal payment method is enabled, content appears

370 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 29:  Static Blocks Positioning Blocks

Block Reference

(Payflow Edition) Shortcut Wrapper

Position below the PayPal buy button.

PayPal Express Checkout

Shortcut Wrapper

If the PayPal payment method is enabled, content appears below the PayPal buy button.

Product Tags List Content appears below the products tag bar.

Product View Extra Hint Content appears below the main top price of the product.

Right Column

Store Language

Tags List Before

Content appears below the right column blocks.

Content appears to the right of the language chooser.

Content appears above the Add Your Tags field.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 371

Positioning Blocks

372

Chapter 29:  Static Blocks

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 30:

Widgets

A widget is a snippet of code that makes it possible to display a wide range of content and place it at specific block references in your store. Many widgets display real-time, dynamic data and create opportunities for your customers to interact with your store. The Widget tool makes it easy to place existing content such as blocks, banners, and interactive elements most anywhere in your store.

In addition, the widget code that you generate can be easily incorporated into other content directly from the editor. Here are a few ways you can use widgets: l l l l l l

Create landing pages for marketing campaigns

Dynamically update information such as recently viewed items

Display promotional images at specific locations in your store

Add interactive elements and action blocks, such as external review systems, video chats, voting, and subscription forms

Provide navigation elements such as tag clouds, rotating banners, and catalog image sliders

Create dynamic elements that can be easily configured and embedded with content

Widget Types

CMS Page Link

Displays a link to a selected page. Allows you to specify custom text and title. When the link is complete, it can be used in content pages and blocks.

CMS Static Block

Displays a block of content at a specific location on a page.

Catalog Category Link

Displays a link to a selected catalog category. Allows you to specify custom text and a title. Two templates are available: inline and block. When the link is complete, it can be used in content pages and blocks.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 373

Creating a Widget Chapter 30:  Widgets

Catalog New Products List

Displays a block of products which have been designated as new, for the duration of time specified in the product record.

Catalog Product Link

Displays a link to a selected catalog product. Allows you to specify custom text and a title. Two templates are available: inline and block. When the link is complete, it can be used in content pages and blocks.

Orders and Returns

The Orders and Returns widget gives customers the ability to submit their own requests for return merchandise authorization.

Recently Compared Products

Displays the built-in block of recently compared products. You can specify the number of products included, and format them as a list or product grid.

Recently Viewed Products

Displays the built-in block of recently viewed products. You can specify the number of products included, and format them as a list or product grid.

Mini Shopping Cart

If the store has a

responsive theme

, the Mini Shopping Cart widget can be used to display additional information, such as a banner or contact information, in the mini shopping cart.

Creating a Widget

The process of creating a widget is nearly the same for each type. You can follow the first part of the instructions, which is the same for all types, and then complete the last part that is specific to the type of widget you want to create.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Choose the Widget Type

Step 2: Specify Where It Goes

Step 3: Complete the Widget Options

Step 4: Check It Out!

374 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 30:  Widgets

Step 1:

Choose the Widget Type

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Widgets .

2.

Click the Add New Widget Instance button. Then, do the following; a.

In the Settings section, select the Type of widget you want to create.

b.

Select the Design Package/Theme that will be used with the widget.

3.

Click the Continue button.

Creating a Widget

Widget Settings

4.

In the Frontend Properties section, do the following:

Frontend Properties a.

In the Widget Instance Title field, enter a descriptive title for the widget. This title is for internal use only, and won’t be visible to your customers.

b.

Set Assign to Store Views to “All Store Views,” or to the view where the widget to be available. To select more than one, hold the Ctrl key down, and select each option.

c.

Enter a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order of the block when listed with others in the column. The top position is zero.

Step 2:

Specify Where It Goes

1.

In the Layout Updates section, click the Add Layout Update button.

2.

Set Display On to the type of category or product page where you want the widget to appear.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 375

Creating a Widget Chapter 30:  Widgets

3.

In the Block Reference list, select the block or section of your page layout where you want the widget to appear.

Layout Updates

If the widget is a link, set Template to one of the following:

Block Template

Inline Template

Formats the content so it can be placed as standalone unit on the page.

Formats the content so it can be placed inside other content. For example, a link that goes inside a paragraph of text.

4.

Click Save and Continue Edit to save your changes and continue editing.

Step 3:

Complete the Widget Options

The options for each type vary slightly, but the process is essentially the same. The following instuctions show how to place a CMS Static Block.

1.

In the panel on the left, select Widget Options .

2.

Click the Select Block button.

3.

In the list, click to select the block you want to place.

376

Select Block

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

The widget appears in the Manage Widget Instances list.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 30:  Widgets CMS Static Block Widget

5.

When prompted, follow the instructions at the top of the workspace to update the cache, as needed.

Step 4:

Check It Out!

Return to your storefront to verify that the block is in the correct location. To move the block to a different location, you can reopen the widget and try a different page or block reference.

CMS Static Block Widget

The CMS Static Block widget gives you the ability to place an existing

CMS block

most anywhere in your store.

Step 1:

Choose the Widget Type

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Widgets .

2.

Click the Add New Widget Instance button.

3.

In the Settings section, set Type to “CMS Static Block.” Then, click the Continue button.

4.

In the Frontend Properties section, do the following: a.

In the Widget Instance Title field, enter a descriptive title for the widget. This title is for internal use only, and is not visible to your customers.

b.

Enter a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order of the block when listed with others in the column. The top position is zero.

c.

Set Assign to Store Views to “All Store Views,” or to the view where the app will be available. To select more than one, hold the Ctrl key down, and select each option.

Step 2:

Complete the Layout Updates

1.

In the Layout Updates section,set Display On to the category, product, or page where you want the block to appear.

2.

To complete the Layout Updates, do the following: a.

Select the Page where you want the block to appear.

b.

Select the Block Reference to identify the place on the page where the block will appear c.

Accept the default setting for Template , which is set to "CMS Static Block Default

Template." d.

Click Save and Continue Edit .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 377

New Products List Chapter 30:  Widgets

Step 3:

Place the Block

1.

In the panel on the left, select Widget Options .

2.

Click the Select Block button.

Then in the list, click to select the block you want to place.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

The app appears in the Manage Widget Instances list.

4.

When prompted, follow the instructions at the top of the workspace to update the index and page cache.

5.

Return to your storefront to verify that the block is in the correct location. To move the block to a different location, you can reopen the widget and try a different page or block reference.

New Products List

The list of new products is an example of dynamic content, and consists of live data that is pulled from your product catalog. By default, the “New Products” list includes the first eight of the most recently added products. However, it can also be configured to include only products within a specified date range.

378

New Products List on Home Page

Process Overview:

Step 1: Set the Date Range for Each Product

Step 2: Create a Working Copy of the Widget

Step 3: Select the Location for the List

Step 4: Configure the List

Step 5: Preview Your Work

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 30:  Widgets New Products List

Step 1:

Set the Date Range for Each Product

To make a product appear in the list by date range, the dates must be specified in the product record. The product then appears in the New Products list during the date range specified.

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

Find the product you want to feature, and open the record. Then, do the following: a.

In the Set Product as New From Date field, click the calendar button and select the first date that you want the product to be featured.

b.

In the Set Product as New To Date field, click the calendar button and select the last date that you want the product to be featured.

"Set Product As New " Date Range

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

4.

When you are prompted to reindex and refresh the page cache, click the links at the top of the workspace, and follow the instructions.

The product will now appear in the New Products list during this date range. Repeat this step for each product that you want to feature.

Step 2

: Create a Working Copy of the Widget

The code that determines the content of the list and its placement in your store is generated by the Widget tool. To create your own working copy of the New Products list, simply save a copy of the existing widget. Your working copy is a new “instance” of the widget, and any changes you make will not affect the original.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 379

New Products List

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Widgets .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Widget Instance button.

3.

In the Settings section, do the following: a.

Set Type to “Catalog New Products List.” b.

Select the Design Package/Theme that is used by the store.

4.

Then, click the Continue button.

Chapter 30:  Widgets

Widget Type

5.

In the Frontend Properties section, complete the following fields:

Widget Instance Title

Assign to Store Views

Sort Order

Enter a descriptive title for your widget. This title is visible only from the Admin.

Select the store views where the widget will be visible. You can select a specific store view, or "All Store Views."

(Optional) Enter a number to determine the order this items appears with others in the same part of the page. (0 = first,

1 = second, 3= third, and so on.)

380

Widget Frontend Properties

Step 3:

Select the Location for the List

1.

In the Layout Updates section, click the Add Layout Update button. Then, do the following: a.

Set Display On to “Specified Page.” b.

Set Page to “CMS Home Page.” c.

Set Block Reference to “Main Content Area.”

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 30:  Widgets d.

Set Template to one of the following: l l

New Product Lists Templates

New Products Grid Template

New Products List

Layout Updates

2.

Click the Save and Continue Edit button to save your changes.

Step 4:

Configure the List

1.

In the panel on the left, select Widget Options . Then, do the following:

2.

Set Display Products to one of the following:

All Products

New Products

Lists products in sequence, starting with those most recently added.

Lists only the products which are identified as “New.” A product is considered to be new during the date range specified in the “Set Product As New From” date and “Set

Product As New To” date. fields of the product. The list will be blank if the date range expires and no additional products have been set as "New."

3.

Complete the remaining information as follows: a.

To provide navigation control for lists with multiple pages, set Display Page

Control to “Yes.” Then, in the Number of Products per Page field, enter the number of products you want to appear on each page.

b.

Set Number of Products to Display to the number of new products you want to include in the list. The default setting is 10.

c.

In the Cache Lifetime (Seconds) field, select how often you want to refresh the list of new products. By default, the cache is set to 86400 seconds, or 24 hours.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 381

Mini Shopping Cart Widget Chapter 30:  Widgets

Widget Options

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

5.

When prompted to refresh the cache, click the link in the message at the top of the workspace, and follow the instructions.

Step 5:

Preview Your Work

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content .

2.

Find the published page in the list, where you placed the New Products list. Then, in the

Action column, click the Preview link.

Mini Shopping Cart Widget

You can use a widget to show relevant information to your customers when the mini shopping cart is displayed in your store. For example, you might want to display a promotional message, or you could provide a phone number or other contact information.

You can use the mini shopping cart widget only with responsive web design themes.

382

Widget in Mini Shopping Cart

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 30:  Widgets Mini Shopping Cart Widget

Step 1:

Choose the Widget Type

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Widgets .

2.

Click the Add New Widget Instance button.

3.

In the Settings section, do the following: a.

Set Type to “CMS Static Block.” b.

Set Design Package/Theme to any responsive web design (RWD) theme. You must select a responsive package/theme to use the mini cart widget.

c.

Click the Continue button.

Widget Settings

4.

In the Frontend Properties section, do the following: a.

In the Widget Instance Title field, enter a descriptive title for the widget. This title is for internal use only, and is not visible to your customers.

b.

Enter a number in the Sort Order field to determine the order of the block when listed with others in the column. The top position is zero.

c.

Set Assign to Store Views to “All Store Views,” or to the view where the block will be available. To select more than one, hold the Ctrl key down and select each option.

Frontend Properties

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 383

Mini Shopping Cart Widget Chapter 30:  Widgets

Step 2:

Complete the Layout Updates

1.

In the Layout Updates section, set Display On to the category, product, or page where you want the block to appear.

2.

To complete the Layout Updates, do the following: a.

Select the Page where you want the block to appear.

b.

Set Block Reference to “Mini-cart promotion block.” c.

Accept the default setting for Template , which is set to “CMS Static Block Default

Template.” d.

Click Save and Continue Edit .

Step 3:

Place the Block

1.

In the panel on the left, select Widget Options .

2.

Click the Select Block button. Then in the list, click to select the block you want to place.

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

The block appears in the Manage Widget Instances list.

4.

When prompted, follow the instructions at the top of the workspace to update the index and page cache.

5.

Return to your storefront to verify that the block is in the correct location.

384 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 31:

Variables

Variables are reusable pieces of information that can be created once and used in multiple places, such as email templates, blocks, and content pages. Your Magento store includes a large number of predefined attributes, and also gives you the ability to create your own custom variables.

Predefined Variables

Predefined variables are easy to add to content pages, blocks, and email templates.

To add a variable to a page:

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content . Then, click to open the page.

2.

In the Page Information panel on the left, select Content . Then from the editor, do one of the following: l

Click the Insert Variable button.

l

If you prefer to work with the code, click the Show / Hide Editor button.

3.

Position the insertion point in the text where you want the variable to appear. Then, click the Insert Variable button.

4.

In the list of available store contact variables, click the one you want to use.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 385

Predefined Variables Chapter 31:  Variables

386

Insert Variable

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

To add a variable to a block:

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Static Block . Then, click to and open the block.

2.

From the editor, do one of the following: l

Click the Insert Variable button.

l

If you prefer to work with the code, click the Show / Hide Editor button.

3.

Position the insertion point in the text where you want the variable to appear. Then, click the Insert Variable button.

4.

In the list of available variables,click to select the one you want to use.

5.

When complete, click the Save Block button.

To add a variable to an email template:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Transactional Emails .

2.

Do one of the following: l

Click to edit a predefined template.

l

Click the Add New Template button to create a new one.

3.

In the Template Content box, position the insertion point where you want the variable to appear. Then, click the Insert Variable button.

4.

In the list of available variables, click to select the one you want to use.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 31:  Variables Custom Variables

5.

When complete, click the Save Template button.

Predefined Variables

Store Contact Variables

Store Contact Information

Base Unsecure URL

Base Secure URL

General Contact Name

General Contact Email

Sales Representative Contact Name

Sale Representative Contact Email

Custom 1 Contact Name

Custom 1 Contact Email

Custom 2 Contact Name

Custom 2 Contact Email

Store Name

Store Contact Telephone

Store Contact Address

Custom Variables

If you know a little basic HTML, you can create custom variables and incorporate them into pages, blocks, banners, and email templates. When a variable is inserted into

HTML, it is formatted as a markup-tag, and enclosed in double curly braces.

{{CustomVar code= "store_hours"}}

To create a custom variable:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Custom Variable .

2.

Click the Add New Variable button.

3.

Enter an identifier in the Variable Code field. Use all lowercase characters, without spaces.

4.

Enter a Variable Name , which is used for internal reference. Then, do one of the following: l l

In the Variable HTML Value text field, enter any content you want to include, using basic HTML tags. This option allows you to format the value.

In the Variable Plain Value field, enter the variable value as plain text.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 387

Custom Variables

New Custom Variable

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

Chapter 31:  Variables

388 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 32:

Layout Updates

Before you begin working with custom layout updates, it is important to understand how the pages of your store are constructed, and the difference between the terms

layout and layout update. The term layout refers to the visual and structural composition of the page. However, the term layout update refers to a specific set of

XML instructions that determines how the page is constructed.

The XML layout of your Magento Community Edition store is a hierarchical tree of blocks. Some elements appear on every page, and others appear only on specific pages. You can see how blocks are referenced by examining the layout update code for your home page. To do so, simply open your CMS home page in edit mode, and select the Design tab to view the Page Layout section. Depending on the theme, it might contain instructions to remove blocks, unset blocks, and add blocks by referencing specific areas of the page layout.

In many cases, the same result can be achieved with a widget. To place a block of content with a widget, you must identify the page, and location on the page, where you want the block to appear. You can use a widget to place a block on any generic page of your store, including the home page and all CMS pages. However, to place a block in the sidebar of a specific CMS page, you must make a layout update.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 389

Placing a Block with a Layout Update Chapter 32:  Layout Updates

Placing a Block with a Layout Update

Blocks can be placed in the left or right column of a specific page by making a layout update to the XML code. With a few simple changes to the code, you can position the block in either column, and control its position in relation to other blocks.

As you work with the underlying code, you will encounter slightly different terminology.

For example, the term callout is sometimes used to refer to a block that is defined as a layout update with XML code. The term sidebar refers to the left or right columns of the page layout. For our general discussion, we use the terms block and column. However, when entering layout update code, make sure to follow the syntax exactly as shown in the example.

To place a block in a side column:

1.

On the Admin menu, select CMS > Pages > Manage Content .

2.

Click to open the CMS page. Then, in the panel on the left, select Design .

3.

In the Layout Update XML box, enter the code for the right or left sidebar, as shown in example. Then, do the following: a.

Change the reference name to identify either the “right” or “left” column.

b.

Change the block_id to the identifier of the block to be placed.

Code for CMS Block in Side Column

<reference name="right">

<block type="cms/block" name="right.permanent.callout">

<action method="setBlockId"><block_id>your-block-id</block_ id></action>

</block>

</reference>

4.

When complete, click the Save Page button.

390 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 32:  Layout Updates Controlling Block Order

Controlling Block Order

To control the order of blocks in an XML layout update, include a “before” or “after” positioning property in the code. To place a block—either before, or after a specific block—replace the hyphen with the block identifier, as shown in the following examples: before="-" after="-"

Places the block at the top of the sidebar, before other blocks.

Places the block at the bottom of the sidebar, after other blocks.

Code to Position CMS Blocks

<block type="cms/block" before="-" name="left.permanent.callout">

<block type="cms/block" before="some-other-block" name="left.permanent.callout">

<block type="cms/block" after="-" name="left.permanent.callout">

<block type="cms/block" after="some-other-block" name="left.permanent.callout">

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 391

Standard Block Layout Chapter 32:  Layout Updates

Standard Block Layout

In the following diagram, the block names that can be used to refer to a block in the layout are black, and the block types, or block class paths, are blue.

392

Standard Block Layout

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 32:  Layout Updates Standard Block Layout

Block Descriptions

Block Type page/html page/html_head page/html_notices page/html_header page/html_wrapper page/html_ breadcrumbs page/html_footer page/template_links page/switch

Description

There can be only one block of this type per page. The block name is "root," and, it is one of the few root blocks in the layout.You can also create your own block and name it "root," which is the standard name for blocks of this type.

There can be only one block of this type per page. The block name is "head," and it is a child of the root block. This block must not be removed from layout.

There can be only one block of this type per page. The block name is "global_notices," and it is a child of the root block. If this block is removed from the layout, the global notices will not appear on the page.

There can be only one block of that type per page. The block name is "header," and it is a child of the root block. This block corresponds to the visual header at the top of the page, and contains several standard blocks. This block must not be removed.

Although included in the default layout, this block is deprecated, and only is included to ensure backward compatibility.

Do not use blocks of this type.

There can be only one block of this type per page. The name of this block is "breadcrumbs," and it is a child of the header block. This block displays breadcrumbs for the current page.

There can be only one block of this type per page. The block name is "footer," and it is a child of the root block. The footer block corresponds to the visual footer at the bottom of the page, and contains several standard blocks. This block must not be removed.

There are two blocks of this type in the standard layout. The

"top.links" block is a child of the header block, and corresponds to the top navigation menu. The "footer_links" block is a child of the footer block, and corresponds to the bottom navigation menu. It is possible to manipulate the template links, as shown in the examples.

There are two blocks of this type in a standard layout. The

"store_language" block is a child of the header block, and corresponds to the top language switcher. The "store_switcher" block is a child of the footer block, and corresponds to the bottom store switcher.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 393

Layout Update Syntax Chapter 32:  Layout Updates

Block Type core/messages core/text_list core/profiler

Description

There are two blocks of this type in a standard layout. The

"global_messages" block displays global messages. The "messages" block is used to display all other messages. If you remove these blocks, the customer won't be able to see any messages.

This type of block is widely used throughout Magento, and is used as a placeholder for rendering children blocks.

There is only one instance of this type of block per page. It is used for the internal Magento profiler, and should not be used for other purposes.

Layout Update Syntax

Custom layout updates can be applied to product category pages, product pages, and

CMS page to achieve a variety of results, such as: l l l l

Create new block (<block>)

Update existing content (<reference>)

Assign actions to blocks (<action>)

Remove blocks (<remove>)

Any change made to the layout is applied when the associated entity—which can be either a product, category, or CMS page—becomes active in the frontend of the store.

Custom layout update instructions consist of well-formed XML tags, without the <?xml

...> declaration and root tag. As with normal XML, every tag must either be empty or properly closed, as shown in the following examples:

<tag attribute="value" />

<tag attribute="value"> ... </tag>

<block>

Creates a new block within the current context. Layout block nesting defines the ordering of block initialization location of the blocks on the page.

Name Value type * block class path

An identifier of the block class path that corresponds to the class of the block. See the list of the available block types

394 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 32:  Layout Updates Layout Update Syntax

Name name before after

*

Value below.

block name identifier

A name that can be used to address the block in which this attribute is assigned. If you create a new block with the name that is the same as one of the existing blocks, your newly created block substitutes the previously existing block. See the list of names of existing blocks below.

block name | '-'

Is used to position the block before a block with the name specified in the value. If "-" value used the block is positioned before all other sibling blocks.

block name | '-'

Is used to position the block after a block with the name specified in the value. If "-" value used the block is positioned after all other sibling blocks.

template as template filename

A template filename used for the specific block type. As you have no way to see the list of template files, use whatever template value is demanded for every block type listed below.

Block alias

An alias name by which a template calls the block in which this attribute is assigned. Sometimes it's necessary to specify the alias for a specific block type.

<reference>

Changes the context for all included instructions to a previously defined block. An empty <reference> tag if of no use, because it affects only the instructions which are children.

Name name

Value

* block name

A name of a block to reference.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 395

Layout Update Syntax Chapter 32:  Layout Updates

<action>

Is used to access block API, in other words, call block's public methods. It is used to set up the execution of a certain method of the block during the block generation. Action child tags are translated into block method arguments. The list of all available methods depends on the block implementation (e.g. public method of the block class).

Name method

Value

* Block method name

A name of the public method of the block class this instruction is located in that is called during the block generation.

<remove>

Removes an existing block from the layout.

Name name

Value

* Block name

The name of the block to be removed.

<extend>

This instruction performs final modifications to blocks which are already part of the layout. Every attribute in the <block> instruction—except for the block name—is subject for change. In addition,the special attribute parent can be used to change the parent of the block. Simply put the name of the new parent block into the <extend> instruction, and the parent of the block that is referenced will be changed in the layout.

Name name

*

*

Value

Block name

The name of any block to be extended.

Any other

Any other attribute specific for the <block> instruction.

parent Block name

The name of the block that should become a new parent for the referenced block.

* Indicates a required value

396 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 32:  Layout Updates Layout Update Examples

Layout Update Examples

The following blocks types can be manipulated with custom layout instructions. Each action must be specified using the full syntax of the instruction. In the following examples, a simplified notation is used to refer to each action,.which corresponds to the full syntax of the instruction.

Full Syntax

?

<!-- Action can be specified inside either a <block> or <reference> instruction. -->

<action method="someActionName">

<arg1>Value 1</arg1>

<arg2>Value 2</arg2>

<!--->

<argN>Value N</argN>

</action>

<!--->

 Simplified Syntax

?

someActionName($arg1, $arg2, ..., $argN)

page/template_links

Action addLink($label, $url, $title, $prepare

Description

Adds another link to the end of the list of existing links. Just specify the $label (link caption), $url (link URL) and $title (link tooltip), and you'll see a new link in the corresponding place. The $prepare parameter must be "true" if you want the URL to be prepared, or converted to the full URL from the shortened URL. For example, the newpage becomes BASE_URL/newpage if

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 397

Layout Update Examples Chapter 32:  Layout Updates

Action removeLinkByUrl($url)

Description prepared.

Removes a link from the block by its URL.

Note that the URL must be properly specified and exactly match corresponding

URL of the link you want to remove.

cms/block

Action setBlockId($blockId)

Description

Specifies the ID of a CMS block, so its content can be fetched and displayed when the page is rendered.

Example

?

<!--...-->

<reference name="content">

<block type="cms/block" name="additional.info" as="additionalInfo">

<action method="setBlockId"><id>additional_info</id></action>

</block>

</reference>

<!--->

core/text

A core/text block can be used to enter freeform text directly into the template.

Action addText($textContent)

Description

Specifies text to be rendered as the block's content. After the text is specified, the layout update instructions must continue to be a valid XML statement. If you use

HTML tags as part of the text, it is recommended to use:

<![CDATA[...]]>

398 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 32:  Layout Updates XML Load Sequence

Example

?

<!--...-->

<reference name="content">

<block type="core/text" name="test.block">

<action method="addText">

<txt><![CDATA[<h2>ATTENTION!</h2><p>Check your options carefully before you submit.</p>]]></txt>

</action>

</block>

</reference>

<!--->

page/html_welcome

This block can be used to duplicate the “Welcome, <USERNAME>!” message that appears in the header block. When the user is not logged in, the welcome message specified in the configuration appears. See: System > Configuration > General > Design

> Header.

XML Load Sequence

For developers, it is important to understand that blocks and layout updates must be loaded in the correct order, in keeping with the rules of precedence and load sequence which determine how the page is rendered. Magento supports the following page layout scenarios:

Default Layout

The default layout consists of the visual elements that are visible from every page of the store. Whether it is a menu item, or a shopping cart block, each item has a handle in the default section of the layout definition.

Changes to Specific Pages

The second case allows you to create a different layout for a specific page. The

XML layout for specific pages is constructed in the same sequence that Magento loads modules, and is determined by the system configuration.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 399

XML Load Sequence Chapter 32:  Layout Updates

In addition to the instructions in the layout update files which are specific to each module, you can make a custom layout update that applies to a special case in the backend, and is merged each time the special case occurs.

400 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 33:

Markup Tags

A markup tag is a snippet of code that contains a relative reference to an object in your store, such as a page, block, or image. Markup tags can be incorporated into the HTML content of CMS pages, blocks, images, and email templates.

Markup tags are enclosed in double, curly braces, and can be generated by the

Widget tool, or typed directly into HTML content. For example, rather than hardcoding the full path to a page, you can use a markup tag to represent the store URL.

The markup tags featured in the following examples include:

Store URL

The Store URL markup tag represents the base URL of your website, and is used as a substitute for the first part of a full URL, including the domain name. There are two versions of this markup tag: One that goes directly to your store, and the other with a forward slash at the end that is used when a path is added.

Store URL

{{store url='apparel/shoes/womens'}}

Media URL

The Media URL markup tag represents the location and filename of an image that is stored on a content delivery network (CDN), and can be used to place an image on a page, block, banner, or email template.

Media URL

{{media url='shoe-sale.jpg'}}

Block ID

The Block ID markup tag is one of the easiest to use, and lets you place a block directly on a CMS page, and even place a block inside another block. You can use this technique if you want to use the same image with text for different promotions, or languages. The Block ID markup tag references a block by its identifier.

Block ID

{{block id='block-id'}}

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 401

402

Chapter 33:  Markup Tags

Template Tag

A template tag references a PHTML template file, and can be used to display the block on a CMS page or static block.

The code in the following example can be added to a page or block to display the

Contact Us form.

“Contact Us” Template Tag

{{block type="core/template" name="contactForm" template="contacts/form.phtml"}}

The code in the next example can be added to a page or block to display the a list of products in a specific category, by category ID.

“Category Product List” Template Tag

{{block type="catalog/product_list" category_id="22" template="catalog/product/list.phtml"}}

Widget Code

The Widget tool can be used to display lists of products, or to insert complex links, such as one that goes to a specific product page, based on product ID. The code that is generated includes the block reference, location of the code module, and corresponding

PHTML template. After the code is generated, you can copy and paste it from one place to another.

The code in the following example can be added to a page or block to display the list of new products.

“New Products Grid” Code

{{widget type="catalog/product_widget_new" display_type="new_products" products_count="10" template="catalog/product/widget/new/content/new_grid.phtml"}}

The code in the next example can be added to a page or block to display a link to a specific product, by product ID.

“Link to Product” Code

{{widget type="catalog/product_widget_link" anchor_text="My Product

Link" title="My Product Link"template="catalog/product/widget/link/link_ block.phtml" id_path="product/31"}}

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 33:  Markup Tags Using Markup Tags in Links

Using Markup Tags in Links

You can use markup tags with HTML anchor tags, and link directly to any page in your store. The link can be incorporated into CMS content, such as a page, static block, banner, or email template. You can also use this technique to link an image to a specific page.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Identify the Destination URL

Step 2: Add the Markup to the URL

Step 3: Complete the Anchor Tag

Step 1:

Identify the Destination URL

If possible, navigate to the page that you want to link to, and copy the full URL from the address bar of your browser. The part of the URL that you need comes after the “dot com forward slash.” Otherwise, copy the URL Key from the CMS page that you want to use as the link destination.

Full URL to Category Page http://mystore.com/apparel/shoes/womens http://mystore.com/apparel/shoes/womens.html

Full URL to Product Page http://mystore.com/apparel/shoes/womens/nine-west-pump http://mystore.com/apparel/shoes/womens/nine-west-pump.html

Full URL to CMS Page http://mystore.com/about-us

Step 2:

Add the Markup to the URL

The Store URL tag represents the base URL of your website, and is used as a substitute for the “http address” part of the store URL, including the domain name and “dot com.”

There are two versions of the tag, which you can use, depending on the results you want to achieve.

Markup Tag store direct_url

Description

Links directly to a page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 403

Using Markup Tags in Links Chapter 33:  Markup Tags

Markup Tag store url

Description

Places a forward slash at the end, so additional references can be appended as a path.

In the following examples, the URL Key is enclosed in single quotes, and the entire markup tag is enclosed in double curly braces. When used with an anchor tag, the markup tag is placed inside the double quotes of the anchor. To avoid confusion, you can alternate using single-and double quotes for each nested set of quotes.

1.

If you are starting with a full URL, delete the “http address” part of the URL, up through and including the “dot.com forward slash.” In its place, type the Store URL markup tag, up through the opening single quote.

Store URL Markup Tag http://mystore.com/apparel/shoes/womens

{{store url='apparel/shoes/womens'}}

Otherwise, type the first part of the Store URL markup tag, and paste the URL key or path that you copied earlier.

Store URL Markup Tag with URL Key

{{store url='

{{store url='apparel/shoes/womens'}}

2.

To complete the markup tag, type the closing double quotes and double braces.

Step 3:

Complete the Anchor Tag

1.

Wrap the completed markup tag inside an anchor tag, using the markup tag instead of the target URL. Then, add the link text, and closing anchor tag.

Markup in Anchor Tag

<a href="{{markup tag goes here}}">Link Text</a>

2.

Paste the completed anchor tag into the code of any CMS page, block, banner, or email template, where you want the link to appear.

Complete Link with Markup

<a href="{{store url='apparel/shoes'}}">Shoe Sale</a>

404 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Design & Theme

Chapter 34:

Your Store Design

Magento provides a variety of easy-to-use design options that you can use to apply your own customized look-and-feel to your store. To learn more advanced techniques, such as how to use themes, skins, layouts, and blocks, see the Magento

Design Guide .

Magento is an object-oriented environment with pages that are assembled from separate components. For some, this approach requires a slightly different way of thinking, because there isn’t a single HTML page that corresponds to any given page. After you understand the basics, you’ll appreciate working in such a flexible and fluid environment!

Your Store Logo

The size of the logo in the header is determined by your theme. If your theme has a sample logo, you can right-click and download the logo to make sure the replacement logo is the same size.

Logo In Header

The logo image path points to its location on the server. What is actually a long path is entered as a short path that is relative to the theme. For example:

Actual path: skin/frontend/base/default/images/logo.gif

Relative path: images/logo.gif

The header image filename is hard-coded into some of the theme files. Therefore, if you change the file name of the logo file, you will also have to make some simple updates to some source files. For non-programmers, the easiest approach is to use the default filename, “logo.gif,” and write over the existing file.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 407

Changing the Welcome Message Chapter 34:  Your Store Design

To change the logo:

1.

On the server, copy your new logo file to the images folder of your theme. For example: skin/frontend/base/default/images/logo.gif

2.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under General, select Design .

3.

If you have multiple stores or views, set the Current Configuration Scope in the upperleft corner to the store or view where the configuration applies. Then, clear the checkbox after each field so new values can be entered.

4.

Click to expand the Header section. Then, do the following: a.

If the path or filename has changed, enter it in the Logo Image Src field.

Logo Image Path b.

In the Logo Image Alt field, enter the alt text for the image. If the configuration is for a different language view, enter the alt text in the appropriate language.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Changing the Welcome Message

The "Welcome" message in the upper-left corner expands to include the name of customers who are logged in. You can change the text for each store or store view.

Welcome Message

To change the welcome message:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under General, select Design .

2.

If you have multiple stores or views, set the Current Configuration Scope in the upperleft corner to the store or view where the configuration applies. Then, clear the checkbox after each field so new values can be entered.

3.

Click to expand the Header section.

4.

In the Welcome text box, enter the text that you want to appear in the header,

408 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 34:  Your Store Design Store Demo Notice

Welcome Text

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

6.

When prompted to update the Page Cache, click the Cache Management link at the top of the workspace. Then, follow the instructions to refresh the cache.

Store Demo Notice

If you are using a store as a demo, or if it is online but still “under construction,” you can display a store demo notice at the top of the page. When you are ready to “go live” with the store, simply remove the message.

To set the store demo notice:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under General, select Design .

2.

Click to expand the HTML Head section.

3.

Scroll down and set the Display Store Demo Notice to your preference.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Store Demo Notice

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 409

Store Demo Notice

410

Chapter 34:  Your Store Design

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 35:

Page Layout

The layout of each page in your store consists of distinct sections, or containers, that define the header, footer, and content areas of the page. Depending on the layout, each page might have one, two, three columns, or more. You can think of the layout as the “floor plan” of the page.

Content blocks float to fill the available space, according to the section of the

page layout

where they are assigned to appear. You will discover that if you change the layout from a three-column to a two-column layout, the content of the main area expands to fill the available space, and any blocks that are associated with the unused side bar seem to disappear. However, if you restore the three-column layout, the blocks reappear. This fluid approach, or liquid layout, makes it possible to change the page layout without having to rework the content. If you are used to working with individual HTML pages, you will discover that this modular, “building block” approach requires a different way of thinking.

Page Layout Variations

1 Column

The “1 Column” layout can be used to create a dramatic home page with a large image or focal point. It’s also a good choice for a landing page, or any other page that has a combination of text, images, and video.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 411

Page Layout Variations

2 Columns with Left Bar

The “2 Columns with Left Bar” layout is often used for pages with navigation on the left, such as a catalog or search results pages with layered navigation.

It is also an excellent choice for home pages that need additional navigation or blocks of supporting content on the left.

Chapter 35:  Page Layout

2 Columns with Right Bar

With a “2 Columns with Right Bar” layout, the main content area is large enough for an eye-catching image or banner. This layout is also often used for Product pages that have blocks of supporting content on the right.

412 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 35:  Page Layout

3 Columns

The “3 Column” layout has a center column that is wide enough for the main text of the page, with room on each side for additional navigation and blocks of supporting content.

Page Layout Examples

Empty

The “Empty” layout can be used to define custom page layouts. To learn more, see the Magento Design Guide .

Page Layout Examples

The column dimensions are determined by style sheet of the theme. Some themes apply a fixed pixel width to the page layout, while others use percentages to make the page respond to the width of the window or device.

Most desktop themes have a fixed width for the main column, and all activity takes place within this enclosed area. Depending on your screen resolution, there is empty space on each side of the main column.

1 Column Layout

The content area of a “1 Column” layout spans the full-width of the main column. This layout is often used for a home page with a large banner or slider, or pages that require no navigation, such as a login page, splash page, video, or full-page advertisement.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 413

Page Layout Examples Chapter 35:  Page Layout

1 Column Layout

2 Columns with Left Bar

The content area of this layout is divided into two columns. The main content column floats to the right, and the side bar floats to the left.

414

2 Columns Left Bar

2 Columns with Right Bar

This layout is a mirror image of the other two-column layout. This time, the side bar floats to the right, and the main content column floats to the left.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 35:  Page Layout Page Layout Examples

2 Columns Right Bar

3 Columns

A 3-column layout has a main content area with two side columns. The left side bar and main content column are wrapped together, and float as a unit to the left. The other side bar floats to the right.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 415

Uploading a Favicon Chapter 35:  Page Layout

416

3 Columns

Uploading a Favicon

Favicon is short for “favorite icon,” and refers to the little icon on the tab of each browser page. Depending on the browser, the favicon also appears in address bar, just before the

URL.

Favicons are generally 16 x 16 pixels or 32 x 32 pixels in size. Although Magento accepts

.ico, .png, .jpg, .jpeg, .apng, and .svg file types, not all browsers support these formats.

The most widely-supported file format to use for a favicon is .ico. There are many free tools available online that you can use to generate an .ico image or convert an exiting image to the .ico format.

Favicon in Address Bar

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create a Favicon

Step 2: Upload the Favicon to Your Store

Step 3: Refresh the Cache

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 35:  Page Layout Uploading a Favicon

Step 1:

Create a Favicon

1.

Create a 16x16 or 32x32 graphic image of your logo, using the image editor of your choice.

2.

(Optional) Use one of the available online tools to convert the file to the .ico format.

Then, save the file to your computer.

Step 2:

Upload the Favicon to Your Store

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select Design . Then, click to expand the HTML

Head section.

3.

To upload a favicon, click the Choose File button. Then, select the favicon file that you prepared.

Uploading a Favicon

4.

To delete the current favicon, select the Delete Image checkbox.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Step 3:

Refresh the Cache

1.

As soon as the favicon is uploaded, you are prompted to refresh the cache. Click the

Cache Management link in the message at the top of the workspace.

2.

In the list, select the Page Cache checkbox that is marked “Invalidated.”

3.

In the upper-right corner, set Actions to “Refresh” and click the Submit button.

4.

To view the new favicon, return to your storefront and press F5 to refresh the browser.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 417

Uploading a Favicon

418

Chapter 35:  Page Layout

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 36:

Page Configuration

The page configuration settings correspond to the different sections of the page. The settings include: l l l

HTML Head

Header

Footer

HTML Head

The settings in the HTML Head section correspond to the <head> tag of an

HTML page and can be configured for each store view. In addition to meta data for the page title, description, and keywords, the section includes a link to the favicon, and miscellaneous scripts. Instructions for search engine robots and the display of the store demo notice are also configured in this section.

To configure the HTML Head:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under General, select Design .

2.

If you have multiple stores or views, set the Current Configuration Scope in the upper-left corner to the store or view where the configuration applies. Then, clear the checkbox after each field so new values can be entered.

3.

Update the fields as needed.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 419

HTML Head Chapter 36:  Page Configuration

420

HTML Head

Field Descriptions

Favicon Icon

Default Title

Title Prefix

Title Suffix

Default Description

Default Keywords

Uploads the small graphic image that appears in the address bar and tab of the browser.

The title that appears at the title bar of each page when viewed in a browser. The default title is used for all pages, unless another title is specified for individual pages.

A prefix can be added before the title to create a two- or three-part title. A vertical bar or colon can be used as a separator at the end of the prefix to differentiate it from the text of the main title.

A suffix can be added after the title to crete a two-or three part title. A vertical bar or colon can be used as a separator at the end of the prefix to differentiate it from the text of the main title.

The description provides a summary of your site for search engine listings and should not be more than 160 characters in length.

A series of keywords that describe your store, each separated

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 36:  Page Configuration Header

Default Robots

Miscellaneous Scripts

Display Demo Store

Notice by a comma.

Instructions that tell search engines how to index your site.

Options include:

INDEX, FOLLOW

NOINDEX, FOLLOW

INDEX, NOFOLLOW

NOINDEX, NOFOLLOW

An input box that where you can upload miscellaneous scripts to the server. For example, any third-party JavaScript that must be placed before the <body> tag, can be entered here.

Controls the display of the demo store notice at the top of the page. Options include: Yes / No

Header

The Header section identifies the path to the

logo

file, and specifies the logo alt text and

welcome

message.

Header

To configure the Header:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select Design .

3.

Click to expand the Header section. Then, make any changes necessary.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 421

Page Footer Chapter 36:  Page Configuration

Page Footer

The Page Footer configuration section is where you can update the copyright statement that appears at the bottom of the page, and enter miscellaneous scripts.

Field

Copyright

Miscellaneous HTML

Footer Configuration

Description

The copyright statement that appears at the bottom of each page. To include the copyright symbol, use the

HTML character entity: &copy;

An input box where you can upload miscellaneous scripts to the server. For example, third-party JavaScript— such as an analytics tracking code—that must be placed after the <body> tag, can be entered here.

422 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 37:

Your Store’s Theme

A theme is a collection of files that determines the visual presentation of your store.

You might think of a theme as the “window dressing” of your store. When you first install Magento, the design elements of the store are based on the “Default” Theme.

In addition to the initial default theme that comes with your Magento installation, there is a wide variety of themes that are available “off the shelf” on Magento

Connect.

Magento themes include layout files, template files, translation files, and skins. A skin is a collection of supporting CSS, images, and JavaScript files that together, create the visual presentation and interactions that your customers experience when they visit your store. Themes and skins can be modified and customized by a developer or designer who has knowledge of Magento theme design and access to your server. To learn more, see the Designer’s Guide to Magento .

Responsive Web Design

Responsive design is an approach to web page creation that flows the page layout to fit the visitor’s screen size and orientation, and changes the layout accordingly. The

Magento default responsive theme features stylesheets that support flexibility for layouts and images, and helps provide a pleasing experience for site visitors using mobile devices. By comparison, non-responsive sites or sites not optimized for smaller screens or mobile devices are often slow or difficult to read, and offer a clunky mobile eCommerce experience.

Benefits of using the Magento default responsive theme include: l l

You can get a tablet and smart phone friendly responsive site in about half the time as before, speeding time to market and freeing up resources for other projects.

Your responsive site makes you better able to participate in the fast growing mobile commerce space, and gives you the ability to create a website that is more easily adapted to new opportunities and less expensive to maintain. A responsive site also offers potential search engine optimization (SEO) benefits from using

Google’s preferred approach to mobile-optimizing sites.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 423

Using the Default Theme Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme l

You no longer need to develop separate content per device. The default theme is easy to customize for simple sites, and provides a powerful starting point for developing themes for more complex sites.

To learn more about creating custom responsive themes, see the Responsive Theme

Developer's Guide .

Using the Default Theme

The default Magento Community Edition theme uses Responsive Web Design (RWD) principles.

Responsive web design enables you to use a single theme to present your storefront to your customers regardless of which device they use to access it. The theme is built using modern technologies and incorporate best practices for mobile sites and experiences.

424

Responsive Theme on Tablet and Smartphone

To view the default theme:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select Design .

3.

Click to expand the Package section. The new responsive theme is enabled by default.

The default package name is “rwd.”

Default RWD Theme Package

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme Using the Default Theme

Click to expand the Themes section. The Default theme name is “default” (although the field appears blank).

Default RWD Theme

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Exceptions

Responsive design is not currently implemented for the following: l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Multiple address checkout

Popular search terms page

Popular search terms cloud

Site map

My Account—Billing Agreements

My Account—Recurring Profiles

Gift registry

Multiple wishlists

Add to cart by SKU

Email templates

Tags

Polls

Captcha

Technical Information

The responsive theme uses the following modern technologies:

Sass/Compass

A CSS pre-compiler that provides organizable, reusable CSS.

jQuery

jQuery is used for all custom JavaScript in the responsive theme. jQuery operates in noConflict() mode so it doesn't conflict with Magento's existing JavaScript library.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 425

Using the Default Theme Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme

JavaScript Libraries

Additional JavaScript libraries discussed in more detail in the Responsive Theme

Developer’s Guide .

Code Location

The new responsive theme code is contained in the following directories (relative to your

Magento installation directory): app/design/frontend/rwd skin/frontend/rwd

426 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme Installing a New Theme

Installing a New Theme

When you first install Magento, the design elements of the store are based on the

“Default” Theme. You can modify the theme, add themes created by others, or create new ones. To learn more, see the Designer’s Guide to Magento .

Magento Connect

contains hundreds of extensions, which are add-ons to Magento that can extend the functionality or enhance the appearance of your store. The following example shows how to add a mobile theme from Magento Connect.

Magento Connect

To install a new theme:

1.

Go to Magento Connect .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click to extend the All Platforms list, and choose Enterprise

3.

You can browse through the available themes based on price or popularity, or do a keyword search. For more information, click the thumbnail of any theme.

4.

To get the registration key, you must be a registered Magento Community Edition owner and be logged into your account. Then, click the Install Now button to get the license key.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 427

Installing a New Theme Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme

Install Now

5.

To complete the process, follow the

instructions

to install an extension from Magento

Connect.

To activate the theme for your store:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . In the panel on the left, under

General, select Design .

2.

Click to expand the Themes section. Then, do the following:

428

Themes

3.

In the Default field, enter the name of the theme. The name of the Magento demo store theme is “mds.”

4.

If you want to use an alternate them for different browsers or devices, do the following: a.

Click the Add Exception button.

The Add Exception button is used to use a different theme for specific browsers. For example, a theme that is optimized for mobile can be used whenever a mobile device is detected.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme Installing a New Theme

Add Exception a.

In the Matched Expression field, enter the name of the browser or device that triggers the use of the alternate theme. If there are multiple browsers, separate the name of each with a vertical bar. For example, because the mobile theme can be used with multiple devices, you can enter them all in the Match Expression field, as follows:

Android|Blackberry|Googlebot-Mobile|iPhone|iPod|mobi|Palm|Opera

Mini|Windows Mobile b.

In the Value field, enter the name of the theme. In this example, the value is

“Mobile.”

5.

Click the Save Config button on the top right of the page.

6.

Test the new theme from your store. If you installed an exception for different browsers, view the store with each browser or device.

If the new theme uses a different page layout than your current home page, you might need to change its

page layout setting

to match the theme.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 429

Installing a New Theme

430

Chapter 37:  Your Store’s Theme

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Customers

Chapter 38:

Customer Accounts

The header of every page in your store extends an invitation for shoppers to “Log in or register” for an account with your store. You have the option to require that customers register before making a purchase, or to allow them to make purchases as guests.

Customers who open an account with your store enjoy a range of benefits, including:

Faster Checkout

Registered customers move through checkout faster because much of the information is already in their accounts.

Ability to Self-Serve

Registered customers can update their information, check the status of orders, and even reorder from their account dashboard.

Account Dashboard

Customers can access their account dashboard by clicking the “My Account” link in the header of the store. They can use their account dashboard to view and modify their information, including past and current addresses, billing and shipping preferences, newsletter subscriptions, wishlist, and more.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 433

Account Dashboard Chapter 38:  Customer Accounts

434

Account Dashboard

Account Information

Customers can update their account information and change their password, as needed.

Address Book

The customer address book includes the default billing and shipping address, and additional address entries.

My Orders

Displays a list of all customer orders, with a link to each. Any order can be reordered by simply clicking the Reorder link.

Billing Agreements

Displays a list of any customer billing agreements.

Recurring Profiles

Displays a list of any products that are purchased on a recurring basis, as a subscription.

My Product Reviews

Displays a list of all product reviews submitted by the customer, with a link to each.

My Wishlist

Displays the customer's wishist. Products from the wishlist can be added to the cart.

My Applications

This section is a placeholder for API applications that link the customer account to other applications or extensions.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 38:  Customer Accounts Account Dashboard

Newsletter Subscriptions

Lists all available newsletters,. Those to which the customer is currently subscribed have a checkmark .

My Downloadable Products

Lists all downloadable products the customer has purchased, with a link to each.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 435

Account Dashboard

436

Chapter 38:  Customer Accounts

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 39:

Customer Groups

The customer group determines which discounts are given to a customer, as defined by price rules, and the tax class that is associated with the group. The default customer groups include: l l l

General

Not Logged In

Wholesale

To create a customer group:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Customer Groups .

Customer Groups

2.

To create a new group, click the Add New Customer Group button. Then, do the following: a.

Enter a unique Group Name to identify the group from the Admin. The name must be less than 32 characters.

b.

Select the Tax Class that applies to the group.

Group Information

3.

When complete, click the Save Customer Group button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 437

To edit a customer group:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Customer Groups .

2.

In the list, click to open the record.

3.

Make the necessary changes.

4.

When complete, click the Save Customer Group button.

Chapter 39:  Customer Groups

438 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Sales & Orders

Chapter 40:

Managing Orders

In this chapter, we will explore what happens after a customers places an order, and the time the order is delivered. You will learn how to offer shopping cart assistance, fulfill orders, print invoices, collect payment, process credit memos, manage returns, and more.

Sales Order

When an order is created, either from the storefront or in the Admin, a sales order is created as a temporary record of the transaction. Sales orders can be seen from the

Admin by selecting the Orders option from the Sales menu. Payment has not yet been processed and the order can still be canceled.

Invoice

An invoice is a record of the receipt of payment for an order. Creating an invoice converts the temporary sales order into a permanent record of an Order, which can no longer be canceled. Multiple invoices can be created for a single order, each containing as much or as few of the purchased products that you specify. Depending on the payment action, payment can be automatically captured when the invoice is generated.

Shipment

A shipment is a record of the products in an order that have been shipped. As with invoices, multiple shipments can be associated with a single order, until all of the products in the order are shipped.

Credit Memo

A credit memo is a record of a refund. A product cannot be refunded until it has been paid (which means that it has been invoiced). This means that you are not able to create a credit memo before an invoice has been created. The credit memo serves as a record of a refund, but it is not a record of the actual return of funds to the customer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 441

Order Process Overview Chapter 40:  Managing Orders

Order Process Overview

Order Submitted

During checkout, the customer reviews the order, agrees to the Terms and Conditions, and clicks the Place Order button. Customers receive a confirmation of their orders, with a link to their customer account.

Order “Pending"

Before payment is processed the status of a sales order is “Pending.” At this point, the order can still be canceled.

Payment Received

Depending on the payment method, you, may be notified when the transaction is authorized and in some cases, processed. The status of the invoice is now “Processing.”

Order Invoiced

Sometimes an order is invoiced before payment is received. In this example, the invoice is generated and submitted after the credit card payment has been authorized and processed. After the invoice is generated and submitted, a copy is sent by email to the customer.

Order “Processing”

When the customer logs into his account to check on the order, the status is still

"Processing."

Order Shipped

The shipment is submitted, and packing slips printed. You ship the package, and the customer is notified by email. Congratulations! You’re in business.

442 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:

Assisted Shopping

Customers sometimes need assistance to complete a purchase. Some customers like to shop online, but would rather the order by phone. While you’re on the phone, the customer might decides to take advantage of a coupon. To complete the sale, you must know how to edit the contents of the shopping cart, apply the discount from the coupon, and complete the order from the Admin—all while the customer is on the phone. No problem!

You can offer immediate shopping cart assistance to any customer who has registered for an account with your store. The Manage Shopping Cart tool gives you the ability to edit the contents of the customer’s shopping cart in real time, from the

Admin of your store. Here are a few of the services you can offer: l l l l l l

Create a new order

Create a customer account

Update the contents of the customer’s cart

Apply a coupon code

Transfer items from a wishlist

Add gift wrap

Customer Service reps can see the contents of a customer’s shopping cart while the customer is on the phone, and the changes can be seen by the customer immediately after the page is refreshed.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 443

Online Customers Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

Online Customers

You can see who’s online in your store at any given time, and examine the contents of the customer’s shopping cart, past purchases, and recent activity.

Online Customers

To see who's online:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Online Customers .

2.

In the list, click the customer record to view the customer information.

3.

To see what's currently in the customer's shopping cart, click to expand the Shopping

Cart section.

Customer's Shopping Cart

444 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Create an Order

Create an Order

For registered customers who need assistance, you can create an entire order directly from the Admin. The Create New Order form includes all the information that is needed to complete the normal checkout process, with activity summaries from the customer’s account dashboard.

For existing customers, new orders can be created both from the Manage Customer page and from the Sales Order page.The Sales Order page can also be used to open accounts for new customers.

Create Order

Step 1:

Initiate the Order

Method 1:

Create New Order from Existing Account

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Manage Customers .

2.

Find the customer in the list and click to open the record.

3.

Click the Create Order button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 445

Create an Order Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

New Order Detail

4.

To complete the order, do the following: a.

To add products from the Current Activities section, find the product in the list and select the Add to Order checkbox. Then, click the Update Changes button.

446

New Order Detail b.

To add products from the catalog, click the Add Products link. Then, select the checkbox of each product to be added to the cart, and the Qty to be purchased.

Add Products

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Create an Order l

If the product has multiple options, click the Configure button. Complete the options as needed, and click the OK button. Then, click the Add Selected

Product(s) to Order link to update the cart.

Configure c.

To override the price of an item, select the Custom Price checkbox. Then, enter the new price in the box below. Click the Update Items and Qty’s button to update the cart totals.

Custom Price d.

Complete the following sections, as needed for the order: l l l

Apply Coupon Codes

Payment Method

Shipping Method e.

In the Order Comments section, enter any comments that you want to accompany the order. To include the comments in the email notification that is sent to the customer, click the Order Comments button.

Order Comments and Email Confirmation

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 447

Create an Order Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping f.

The Email Order Confirmation checkbox is selected by default. If you don’t want to send an email confirmation to the customer, clear the checkbox.

4. When complete, click the Submit Order button.

Method 2:

Create New Order from Sales

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Click the Create New Order button.

448

Create New Order

3.

Do one of the following: l l

For registered customers, find the customer in the list and click to open the record.

For unregistered customers, click the Create New Customer button.

4.

Complete the order information as you would if going through the checkout process .For

a new customer account, complete the following sections: l l l

Account Information

Billing Address

Shipping Address

Step 2:

Add Products to the Order

Products can be added to the order by selecting each item from the catalog, or by transferring the information from a previous order, the customer’s wishlist, recently viewed products, or other activities.

1.

To add products to the order, do the following: a.

Click to the Add Products button.

b.

Click the Reset Filter button to list all products. Then, use the filter controls as needed to find the products to be added. Then, click the Search button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Update an Order c.

Select the checkbox of each product to be added to the cart and if applicable, enter the Qty to be purchased.

If the product has multiple options, click the Configure link. Complete the options as needed and click the OK  button.

2.

Click the Add Selected Product(s) to Shopping Cart button to update the cart. The current content of the cart appear in the Items Ordered section.

3.

To override the price of an item, select the Custom Price checkbox. Then, enter the new price in the box below. Click the Update Items and Qty’s button to update the cart totals.

4.

Complete the following sections, as applicable to the order: l l l

Apply Coupon Codes

Payment Method

Shipping Method

5.

When complete, click the Submit Order button.

Update an Order

After a customer has placed an order, it is sometimes necessary to edit the order, place it on hold, or cancel the order entirely.

When you make changes to an order, the original order is canceled and a new order is generated. You can, however, make changes to the billing or shipping address without generating a new order.

To edit an order:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Select the pending order that you want to edit.

3.

Click the Edit button at the top of the screen. When prompted to confirm, click OK to continue.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 449

Update an Order Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

Edit Order

4.

Make the necessary changes to the order.

5.

When complete, do one of the following: l l

Click Save to save changes made to the billing or shipping address.

Click Submit Order to save changes made to line items, and reprocess the order.

To place an order on hold:

If the customer’s preferred method of payment is not available, or if the item is temporarily out of stock, you can put the order on hold.

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

In the list, find the pending order that you want to place on hold. Then, click to open the order.

3.

Click Hold to place the order on hold.

450

Hold Order

To return the order to an active state, repeat the process and click Unhold .

To cancel an order:

Canceling an order removes it from the list of pending orders.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Create a Customer Account

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Find the pending order that you want to cancel, and click to open the order.

3.

In the upper-right corner, click the Cancel button to remove this order.

Cancel Order

4.

The status of the order is now “Canceled.”

Canceled Order

Create a Customer Account

Customers usually create their own accounts from your store. However, you can also create customer accounts directly from the Admin, which is useful when customers order by phone.

Add New Customer

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 451

Create a Customer Account Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

To create a new customer account:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Manage Customers .

2.

Click the Add New button.

3.

In the Associate to Website list, select one of the following: l l

Admin

Main Website

You can associate a customer with the Admin website to require that orders are placed only from the store Admin. Customers associated with the Admin website cannot log in to their accounts from the store.

4.

Assign the customer to a Customer Group .

5.

Complete the remaining customer information.

452

Customer Information

6.

In the Password Management section, do one of the following l

Manually assign a password.

l

Select the Send auto-generated password checkbox. The new password is generated after the customer information is saved.

7.

When complete, click the Save Customer button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Create a Customer Account

To add a new address to a customer account:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Manage Customers . Then, click to open the customer record.

2.

In the panel on the left, select Addresses . Then, do the following: a.

To add a new address, click the Add New Address and complete the information.

b.

To assign a Default Address check either the Default Billing Address or Default

Shipping Address as needed.

Customer Addresses

3.

When complete, click the Save Customer button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Account Information

Associate to Website

Group

Prefix

First Name

Middle Name / Initial

Last Name

Suffix

Description

Identifies the website associated with the customer account.

Identifies the customer group to which the customer belongs.

Select the checkbox to disable automatic group change based on VAT.

If used, the prefix that is associated with the customers name.

For example: Mr, Mrs. or Dr.

The customer's first name.

The customer's middle name or middle initial.

The customer's last name.

If used, the suffix that is associated with the customer's name.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 453

Create a Customer Account Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

Field

Email

Date of Birth

Tax / VAT Number

Gender

Send Welcome Email

Send From

Description

For example: Jr.,Sr., or III.

The customer's email address.

The customer's date of birth.

The customer's Tax or Value Added Tax number, if applicable.

Identifies the customer's gender as Male or Female.

Select the checkbox if you want the system to send the customer a welcome email message.

If you have multiple stores, select the store from which the welcome message will be sent.

Update a Customer Account

The panel on the left of the Customer Information page includes information about customer activity, such as when the customer last logged in and out, addresses, order statistics, recent orders, shopping cart contents, product reviews, newsletter subscriptions, and so on.

454

Customer Account

To view customer information:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Customers > Manage Customers .

The Manage Customers page lists all customers who have opened an account with your store or were added by the administrator .

2.

Click to open a customer record.

3.

In the panel on the left, select the type of information you need to edit. Then, make the necessary changes.

4.

When complete, click the Save Customer button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Persistent Shopping Cart

Persistent Shopping Cart

A persistent shopping cart keeps track of unpurchased items which are left in the cart, and saves the information for the customer’s next visit. Customers who are

“remembered” can have the contents of their shopping carts restored the next time they visit your store.

Using a persistent shopping cart can help reduce the number of abandoned shopping carts and increase sales. It is important to understand that the persistent shopping cart does not expose sensitive account information at any time. While the persistent shopping cart is use, both registered customers and guest shoppers are required to either log in to an existing account, or create a new account before going through checkout. For guest shoppers, a persistent shopping cart is the only way to retrieve information from a previous session.

Types of Cookies

To use the persistent shopping cart, the customer’s browser must be set to allow cookies.

During operation, the following cookies are used:

Session Cookie

A short-term session cookie exists for the duration of a single visit to your site, and expires when the customer leaves, or after a set period of time.

Persistent Cookie

A long-term persistent cookie continues in existence after the end of the session, and saves a record of the customers’ shopping contents for future reference.

A persistent shopping cart is controlled by a combination of factors, which can include whether or not the customer wants to be “remembered,” the lifetime of the cookies, and the point at which the persistent cookie is cleared. The system retains a record of the shopping cart contents, even if the customer later uses different devices to shop in your store. For example, a customer can add an item to the shopping cart from a laptop, edit the cart contents from a desktop computer, add more items from a mobile device, and complete the checkout process from a tablet.

There is a separate independent persistent cookie for each browser. If the customer uses multiple browsers while visiting your store during a single, persistent session, any changes made in one browser will be reflected in any other browser when the page is refreshed. While the persistent shopping cart is enabled, your store creates and maintains a separate persistent cookie for each browser that is used by a customer to log in or create an account.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 455

Persistent Shopping Cart Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

When a persistent cookie is applied, a Not %Jane Smith%? link appears in the page header, to give the customer the ability to terminate the persistent session and start working as a guest, or log in as a different customer.

If Persist Shopping Cart is set to “Yes,” the following situation is possible: l l l

Customer A in the persistent session adds products to the cart, and goes away to make a cup of coffee.

Customer B takes his place, and does not click the Not %Customer A% link. The B is actually working with the A’s shopping cart. If he or she goes to checkout and logs in as Customer B, the shopping cart content of the A (modified by B or not) is added to the B’s shopping cart.

After B submits the order, the ordered products are removed from the A’s shopping cart.

Cookie Scenarios

Remember Me

The “Remember Me” checkbox on the Login page lets customers choose to save the contents of their shopping carts.

Yes: If “Remember Me” is selected, a persistent cookie is created, and the contents of the shopping cart is saved for the customer’s next logged-in session.

No: If “Remember Me” is not selected or cleared, a persistent cookie is not created, and the shopping cart information is not saved for the next customer’s logged-in session.

Continue Persistence After Logout (No)

When Clear Persistence on Log Out is set to “No,” the following scenarios apply:

When the customer logs in, the persistent cookie is invoked, in addition to the session cookie which is already in use.

When the customer logs out, the session cookie is deleted, but the persistent cookie remains in effect.

The next time the customer logs in, the cart items will be restored, or added to any new items which have been placed in the cart.

456 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Persistent Shopping Cart

If the customer does not log out, but the session cookie expires, the persistent cookie remains in effect.

When the customer logs in, the persistent cookie is invoked, in addition to the session cookie which is already in use.

Clear Persistence on Logout (Yes)

When Clear Persistence on Log Out is set to “Yes,” the following scenarios apply:

When the customer logs in, the persistent cookie is invoked, in addition to the session cookie which is already in use.

When the customer logs out, both cookies are deleted.

If the customer does not log out, but the session cookie expires, the persistent cookie remains in effect.

Cookie Workflow

When Persistent Shopping Cart is enabled, the general workflow of applying the persistent cookie depends on the values of the Enable Remember Me and Clear

Persistence on Log Out settings in the Admin , and the store customer decision to select or clear the Remember Me checkbox when logging in or registering. The following variants are possible:

Settings

Enable Remember Me = “No”

Clear Persistence on Log Out = any value

Effect

The Remember me checkbox is not available on the login and registration page. The persistent cookie is not used.

The session cookie is applied as usual; the persistent cookie is not used.

Enable Remember Me = “Yes”

Clear Persistence on Log Out = any value

Remember Me (not selected)

Enable Remember Me = “Yes”

Clear Persistence on Log Out = “Yes”

When a customer logs in, both cookies are

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 457

Persistent Shopping Cart Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

Settings

Remember Me = “Yes”

Enable Remember Me = “Yes”

Clear Persistence on Log Out = “No”

Remember Me = “Yes”

Effect applied. When a customer logs out, both cookies are deleted. If a customer does not log in, but the session cookie expires, the persistent cookie is still used. Apart from logging out, the persistent cookie is deleted when its lifetime runs out or when the customer clicks the Not %Jane Smith% link.

When a customer logs in, both cookies are applied. When a customer logs out, the session cookie is deleted, the persistent session continues. The persistent cookie is deleted when its lifetime runs out or when the customer clicks the Not %Jane Smith% link.

To set up a persistent shopping cart:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Customers, select Persistent Shopping Cart . Then, click to expand the General Options section.

3.

To enable the persistent shopping cart and to display additional configuration options, set Enable Persistence to “Yes.”

458

Persistent Shopping Cart

4.

Do the following: a.

Set Persistence Lifetime (seconds) to the length of time that you want the persistent cookie to last. The default value 31,536,000 seconds is equal to one year, and is the maximum time allowed.

b.

Set Enable “Remember Me” to one of the following:

Yes

No

Displays the “Remember Me” checkbox on the Login page of your store, so customers can choose to save their shopping cart information.

Persistence can still be enabled, but customers are not given the option to choose if they want to save their information.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Persistent Shopping Cart c.

To preselect the “Remember Me” checkbox, set Remember Me Default Value to

“Yes.” d.

Set Clear Persistence on Log Out to one of the following:

Yes

No

The shopping cart is cleared when a registered customer logs out.

The shopping cart is saved when a registered customer logs out.

If the session cookie expires while the customer is still logged in, the persistent cookie remains in use.

e.

Set Persist Shopping Cart to one of the following:

Yes

No

If the session cookie expires, the persistent cookie is preserved. If a guest shopper later logs in or creates a new account, the shopping cart is restored.

The shopping cart is not preserved for guests after the session cookie expires.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enable Persistence

Persistence Lifetime (seconds)

Scope

Website

Website

Enable “Remember Me”

“Remember Me” Default Value

Clear Persistence on Log Out

Website

Website

Website

Description

Determines if the persistence is enabled.

Defines the lifetime of the persistent cookie in seconds. Maximum allowed value is 3153600000 seconds (100 years).

Defines whether the Remember Me checkbox appears on the login and registration pages of the store. Options include:

Yes Displays the Remember

Me checkbox.

No Does not display the

Remember Me checkbox, and the persistent cookie is used only for customers who already have it.

Defines the default state for the Remember Me checkbox.

Defines whether the persistent cookie is

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 459

Terms and Conditions Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping

Field

Persist Shopping Cart

Scope

Website

Description deleted when a store customer logs out.

No matter how Clear Persistence on Log

Out is configured, if a customer does not log out, but the session cookie expires, the persistent cookie is still used.

Defines whether using the persistent cookie gives access to the shopping cart data of the correspondent account.

Options include:

Yes The shopping cart contents are saved after the session ends.

No The shopping cart contents are not saved after the session ends.

Terms and Conditions

When Terms and Conditions is enabled, customers must select a checkbox to verify that they agree to the terms and conditions of the sale. The Terms and Conditions message and checkbox appear during Order Review between the Totals section and the Place

Order button. The transaction cannot be finalized until the customer selects the checkbox to agree to the terms and conditions of the sale.

460

Terms and Conditions at Checkout

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping Terms and Conditions

Step 1:

Enable Terms and Conditions

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Checkout . Then, click to expand the

Checkout Options section.

3.

Make sure that Enable Onepage Checkout is set to “Yes.” Otherwise, the Terms and

Conditions checkbox will not appear during checkout.

4.

To display the terms and conditions checkbox during checkout, set Enable Terms and

Conditions to “Yes.”

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Checkout Options

Step 2:

Add Your Terms and Conditions

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Terms and conditions .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Condition button.

3.

In the Terms and Conditions Information section, complete the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Terms and Conditions Information

461

Terms and Conditions Chapter 41:  Assisted Shopping a.

Enter the Condition Name . The name is for internal reference only.

b.

Set Status to “Enabled.” c.

Set Show Content as to one of the following:

Text

HTML

Displays the terms and conditions content as unformatted text.

Displays the terms and conditions content as HTML, which can be tagged and formatted.

4.

Identify the Store View where the Terms and Conditions will appear.

5.

Enter the Checkbox Text that you want to appear as a label with the checkbox. For example, you could use “I understand and accept these terms and conditions of the sale.”

6.

In the Content field, either type or paste enter the full text of the terms and conditions of the sale.

7.

(Optional) Enter the Content Height (css) , in pixels, to determine the height of the text box in which the terms and conditions statement appears during checkout. For example, if you want the text box to be one inch high, enter 96, which is the equivalent value in pixels.

8.

When complete, click the Save Condition button.

462 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:

Order Fulfillment

When the order is placed, a sales order is created as a temporary record of the transaction. In the Orders list, sales orders are shown with a status of "Pending," and can be canceled at any time until the payment is processed. After payment confirmed, the order can be invoiced and shipped.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Place Order

463

Order Workflow

Order Workflow

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

464 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Order Status

Order Status

All orders have an order status that is associated with a stage in the order processing

workflow . You can see the status of an order by clicking the control at the top of the

Status column.

Order Status

Your store has a set of predefined order status and order state settings. The state describes the position of an order in the workflow.

Order Status

Canceled

Canceled Ogone

Closed

Complete

Declined Ogone

Suspected Fraud

On Hold

Payment Review

PayPal Canceled Reversal

PayPal Reversed

Pending

Pending Ogone

Pending Payment

Pending PayPal

Processed Ogone Payment

Processing

Processing Ogone Payment

Waiting Authorization

Order State

New

Pending Payment

Processing

Complete

Closed

Canceled

On Hold

Payment Review

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 465

Custom Order Status Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Custom Order Status

In addition to the preset order status values, you can create custom order status values of your own, assign order statuses to order states, and set a default order status for order states. For example, you might need a custom order status for orders, such as

“packaging” or “backordered,” or for a status that is specific to your needs. You can create a descriptive name for the custom status, and then assign it to the associated order state in the order processing workflow.

Currently only default custom order status values are applied in the order management workflow. The custom status values that are not set as default are available only in the comments section in the order view in the Admin .

466

Order Statuses

To create a custom order status:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Order Statuses .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Create New Status button.

3.

In the Order Status Information section, do the following: a.

Enter a Status Code . This value is for internal use only. The first character must be a letter (a-z), and the rest can be any combination of letters and numbers (0-9). You can use the underscore character instead of a space.

b.

Enter a Status Label to identify the status setting in both the Admin and store.

Order Status Information

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Custom Order Status

4.

In the Store View Specific Labels section, enter any labels that you need for different store views and languages.

5.

When complete, click the Save Status button.

The new order status now appears in the Order Statuses list.

To assign an order status to a state:

1.

Front the Order Statuses list, click the Assign Status to State button.

2.

In the Assignment Information section, do the following: a.

Select the Order Status that you want to assign. They are listed by status label.

b.

Select the Order State that represents where the order status belongs in the workflow.

c.

To make this status the default for the order state, select the Use Order Status as

Default checkbox.

Assign Status to State

3.

When complete, click the Save Status Assignment button.

To edit an existing order status:

1.

On the Order Statuses page, click to open the status record in edit mode.

2.

Update the status labels as needed.

3.

When complete, click the Save Status button.

To remove an order status from an assigned state:

1.

On the Order Statuses page, find the order status record that you want to unassign.

2.

In the Action column on the far right of the row, click the Unassign link.

A message appears at the top of the workspace that the order status has been unassigned. Although the order status label still appears in the list, it is no longer assigned to a state. Order statuses cannot be deleted.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 467

Invoice an Order Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Invoice an Order

An invoice is a record of the receipt of payment for an order. Creating an invoice for an order converts the temporary sales order into a permanent record of the order, which cannot be canceled. Multiple invoices can be created for a single order, each containing as much or as few of the purchased products that you specify.

The invoice for a single order, or for a batch of orders, can be generated from the Admin.

However, some payment methods generate the invoice automatically when payment is authorized and captured. The payment method determines which invoicing options can be used for the order.

For orders with online payment methods where you have chosen “Authorize and

Capture,” this button does not appear. A new invoice page looks very similar to a completed order page, with some additional fields that can be edited.

468

Invoice Order

To invoice an order:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

In the list, find the “Pending” order, and click to open the record.

3.

If the items are ready to ship, you can create a packing slip for the shipment with the invoice. To create a packing slip, do the following: a.

In the Shipping Information section, select the Create Shipment checkbox.

b.

To include a tracking number, click the Add Tracking Number button and enter the

Carrier , Title , and Number .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Invoice an Order

Shipping Information

4.

To make a partial invoice scroll down to the Items to Invoice section, and enter the Qty to Invoice for each item.

5.

Under the Invoice History menu, in the Invoice Comments section, complete the comments as needed. Then, in the Invoice Totals section, select the Append Comments checkbox to add the comments to the invoice.

Every activity related to the order is noted in the Comments section.

6.

Select the Email Copy of Invoice checkbox to send a copy of the invoice to your customer.

7.

Click the Submit Invoice button to process the invoice and capture the sale.

If your store requires that you ship before invoicing, click the Ship button, complete the shipping information and submit your shipment. When that is complete, finish the invoicing steps.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 469

Invoice an Order Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

470

Invoice

Payment Actions

Payment Action

Capture Online

Capture Offline

Not Capture

Description

Upon invoice submission, the system captures the payment from the third-party payment gateway. You have the ability to create a credit memo and void the invoice.

Upon invoice submission, the system does not capture the payment. It is assumed that the payment is captured directly through the gateway, and you no longer have the option to capture this payment through Magento. You have the ability to create a credit memo, but you do not have the option to void the invoice. (Even though the order used an online payment, the invoice is essentially an offline invoice.)

When the invoice is submitted, the system does not capture the payment. It is assumed that you will capture the payment through Magento at a later date. There is a Capture button in the completed invoice. Before capturing, you are able to cancel the invoice. After capturing you are able to create a

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Print Invoices

Payment Action Description credit memo and void the invoice.

Do not select Not Capture unless you are certain that you are going to capture the payment through Magento at a later date. You will not be able to create a credit memo until the payment has been captured using the Capture button.

Print Invoices

You can print an invoice for a single order, or for multiple invoices as a batch, or group.

However, before an invoice can be printed, the invoice must first be generated for the order.

To view or print the PDF, you must have a PDF reader. You can download Adobe

Reader at no charge.

To print invoices:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Invoices.

2.

In the Invoices list, select the checkbox of each invoice that you want to print.

3.

Set the Actions control to “Print Invoices.”

Print Invoices

4.

Click the Submit button to generate the PDF and display the document in a new window.

5.

After the file has been downloaded and saved to your computer, you can open and print the document with Adobe Reader .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 471

Ship an Order Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Ship an Order

An order that has been paid, but is awaiting shipment has the “Processing” status.

To ship an order:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

In the Orders list, click to open the order to be shipped.

3.

In the upper-right corner, click the Ship button.

472

Ship an Order

4.

If you need to update the billing or shipping address, click the Edit link in the upperright corner of the section. Make the necessary changes, and click the Save Order

Address button.

5.

To have the carrier generate a shipping label, select the Create Shipping Label checkbox.

6.

To add a tracking number, scroll down to the Shipping Information section, and click the Add Tracking Number button. Then, do one of the following: l l

Select the Carrier . and enter the tracking Number .

Set Carrier to “Custom Value.” Enter a Title for the custom carrier, and enter the tracking Number .

Shipping Information

7.

To make a partial shipment, scroll down to the Items to Ship section, and enter the Qty to Ship for each item.

8.

To notify customers by email of the shipment, do the following: a.

Enter any comments you would like to include in the Shipment Comments box.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Packing Slips b.

To include the comments in the notification email that is sent to the customer, select the Append Comments checkbox.

c.

To send a copy of the shipment email to yourself, select the Email Copy of

Shipment checkbox. The status of an invoice email appears next to the invoice number of the completed invoice as either sent or not sent.

9.

When complete, click the Submit Shipment button. The status of the order changes from

“Processing” to “Complete.”

View Shipment Detail

The shipment record contains a detailed history of the fulfillment process associated with the order. Partial shipments can be made until the order is fulfilled.

To view the shipment detail:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Shipments .

2.

Find the shipment in the list, and click to open the record.

3.

If you want to add a comment to the order, scroll down to the Comments History section, and enter the comment in the box.

l l

To send the comment to the customer by email, select the Notify Customer by Email checkbox.

To post the comment in the customer’s account, select the Visible on Frontend checkbox.

4.

Click the Submit Comment button.

Packing Slips

A packing slip is a sales document that accompanies shipments sent from your store, and lists each item included in the package. You can print a packing slip for a single order, or print multiple packing slips as a batch, or group. However, before a packing slip can be printed, it must first be created for the order.

To view or print the PDF, you must have a PDF reader. You can download Adobe

Reader at no charge.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 473

Packing Slips Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

To print packing slips:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Shipments .

Method 1:

Print Single Packing Slip from Shipment

a.

In the Shipments list, open the record that needs a packing slip.

b.

In the upper-right corner of the shipment page, click the Print button. Look for the download indicator in the lower-left corner of your browser window.

Packing Slip

Method 2:

Print Multiple Packing Slips

a.

In the Shipments list, select the checkbox of each shipment record that needs a packing slip.

b.

In the upper-right corner, set the Actions control to “PDFpackingslips” and click the

Submit button.

474

2.

Do one of the following:

Printing Multiple Packing Slips

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Shipping Labels l l

To save the document, click the Save button. Then, follow the prompts to save the file to your computer.When the download is complete, open the PDF in Adobe

Reader, and print the document.

To view the document in Adobe Reader, click the Open button. From here, you can either print the packing slip or save it to your computer.

Shipping Labels

You can easily create shipping labels for new and existing orders from the Admin of your store. To create shipping labels, you must first set up your shipping carrier account to support labels. Then, follow the prompts to enter a description of the package and its contents. Magento contacts the shipping carrier, creates an order in the carrier’s system, and receives a shipping label and tracking number for the shipment.

An individual order is created for each package shipped. A single shipment with multiple packages receives multiple shipping labels.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Contact Your Shipping Carriers

Step 2: Update the Configuration for Each Carrier

Step 3: Create Shipping Labels

Step 4: Print Shipping Labels

Step 1:

Contact Your Shipping Carriers

Before you begin, make sure that your shipping accounts are set up to process labels.

Some carriers might charge an additional fee to add shipping labels to your account.

1.

Contact each carrier that you use to activate shipping labels for your store.

2.

Follow the instructions provided by each carrier to add shipping label support to your account.

FedEx

USPS

UPS

DHL

Contact FedEx Web Services regarding their label evaluation process.

Contact [email protected]

to request that API Signature

Confirmation V3 be enabled for your live USPS API Access account.

Contact UPS to confirm your account type supports shipping labels. To generate shipping labels, you must use the UPS XML option.

Contact the DHL Resource Center to learn more about their services or send an inquiry through their Contact Center .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 475

Shipping Labels Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Step 2:

Update the Configuration for Each Carrier

1.

Make sure that your

Store Information

is complete.

2.

Follow the instructions below for each carrier account that has been activated for label printing.

UPS

United Parcel Service ships both domestically and internationally. However, shipping labels can be generated only for shipments that originate within the United States.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods .

3.

Click to expand the UPS section. Then, verify that your UPS Shipper Number is correct.

Your Shipper Number appears only when United Parcel Service XML is enabled.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

USPS

The United States Postal Service ships both domestically and internationally.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods .

3.

Click to expand the USPS section. Then, do the following: a.

Verify that the Secure Gateway URL is entered. The correct URL should be entered automatically.

b.

Enter the Password provided to you by USPS.

c.

Set Size to “Large.” Then, enter the following dimensions: l l l l

Length

Width

Height

Girth

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

FedEx

FedEx ships domestically and internationally. Stores located outside the United States

476 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Shipping Labels can create FedEx labels for international shipments only.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under sales, select Shipping Methods .

3.

Click to expand the FedEx section. Then, make sure that the following FedEx credentials are correct: l l l

Meter Number

Key

Password

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

DHL

DHL provides international shipping services.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under sales, select Shipping Methods .

3.

Click to expand the DHL section. Then, do the following: a.

Verify that the Gateway URL is entered. The correct URL should be entered automatically.

b.

Make sure that the following credentials are complete: l l l

Access ID

Password

Account Number

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Step 3:

Create Shipping Labels

Process Overview:

Method 1: Create Label for New Shipment

Method 2: Create Label for Existing Shipment

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 477

Shipping Labels Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Method 1:

Create Label for New Shipment

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Find the order in the list, and click to open the record. The status of the order must be either “Pending” or “Processing.”

3.

In the upper-right corner, click the Ship button. Then, confirm the shipping information according to carrier requirements.

4.

In the lower-right corner, select the Create Shipping Label checkbox. Click the Submit

Shipment button, and do the following: a.

To add products from the order to the package, click the Add Products button. The

Quantity column shows the maximum number of products that are available for the package.

b.

Select the check box of each product to be added to the package and enter the

Quantity of each. Then, click the Add Selected Product(s) to Package button.

l l

To add a new package, click the Add Package button.

To delete a package, click the Delete Package button.

If you use a package type other than the default, or require a signature, the cost of shipping might differ from what you have charged the customer. Any difference in the cost of shipping is not reflected in your store.

5.

When complete, click OK .

l

If you need to cancel an order, click the Cancel button. A shipping label will not be created, and the Create Shipping Label checkbox is cleared.

6.

Magento now connects to the shipping carrier system, submits the order, and receives a shipping label and tracking number for each package.

l l

If the label is successfully created, the shipment is submitted, the tracking number appears in the form, and the label is ready to print.

If the carrier cannot create the label due to the problems with connection, or for any other reason, the shipment is not processed.

Method 2:

Create Label for Existing Shipment

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Find the order in the list and click to open the Shipping form. Then, do the following:

478 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Shipping Labels a.

In the Shipping and Tracking Information section, click the Create Shipping Label button.

b.

Distribute the ordered product(s) to the appropriate package(s), and click OK .

c.

To review the package information, click the Show Packages button.

Magento connects to the shipping carrier system, submits an order, and receives a shipping label and a tracking number.

l

If a shipping label for this shipment already exists in the system, it is replaced with a new one. However, existing tracking numbers are not replaced. Any new tracking number is added to the existing one.

Step 4:

Print Shipping Labels

Shipping labels are generated in PDF format, and can be printed from the Admin panel.

Each label includes the order number and package number.

Process Overview:

Method 1: Print Label from Shipment Form

Method 2: Print Labels for Multiple Orders

Method 1:

Print Label from Shipment Form

1.

On the Admin menu, do one of the following: l l

Select Sales > Orders . Find the order in the list, and click to open the record. In the

Order View panel on the left, select Shipments . Then, click to open the shipment record.

Select Sales > Shipments . Find the order in the list, and click to open the record.

2.

To download the PDF file, go to the Shipping and Tracking section of the form and click the Print Shipping Label button. Depending on your browser settings, the shipping labels can be viewed and printed directly from the PDF file.

The Print Shipping Label button appears only after the carrier has generated labels for the shipment. If the button is missing, click the Create Shipping Label button. The button will appear after Magento receives the label from the carrier.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 479

Shipping Labels Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Method 2:

Print Labels for Multiple Orders

1.

On the Admin menu, do one of the following: l l

Select Sales > Orders .

Select Sales > Shipments .

2.

In the list, select the checkbox of each order that has shipping labels to be printed.

3.

In the upper-right corner, set the Actions control to "Print Shipping Labels."

4.

Click the Submit button.

A complete set of shipping labels is printed for each shipment that is related to the selected orders.

Required Carrier Configuration Settings

Field Description

Type

Customs Value

Package types differ by carrier and method. The default package type for each carrier is initially selected.

USPS does not require the package type for domestic shipments.

(International shipments only) The declared value or sales price of the contents of an international shipment.

Total Weight

Length, Width, Height

The total weight of all products added to the package is calculated automatically. The value can also be changed manually, and entered as pounds or kilograms.

(Optional) The package dimensions are used for custom packages only. You can specify the measurements units as inches or centimeters.

Signature Confirmation Indicates if a signature is required to confirm receipt of the package. Although the options vary by carrier and shipping method, possible values include:

Not Required No confirmation of delivery is sent to the store by the shipping carrier.

No Signature

Signature

Required

A delivery confirmation without the signature of the recipient is sent to the store by the shipping carrier.

The shipping carrier obtains the signature of the recipient and provides the store with a printed copy.

480 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Field

Shipping Labels

Description

Direct

Indirect

(FedEx Only) FedEx obtains a signature from someone at the delivery address. If no one is available to sign for the package, the carrier tries to deliver the package at another time.

(FedEx Residential Deliveries Only) FedEx obtains the signature of someone, possibly a neighbor or building manager, at the delivery address. The recipient can leave a signed FedEx door tag to authorize the package to be left without anyone present to sign for it.

Contents (USPS Only) Select one of the following descriptions of the package:

Gift

Documents

Commercial Sample

Returned Goods

Merchandise

Other

Explanation (USPS Only) A detailed description of the package contents.

Adult Required The shipping carrier obtains the signature of an adult recipient and provides the store with a printed copy.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 481

PDF Printouts Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

PDF Printouts

The Order ID can be included in the sales documents that accompany an order. Follow the instructions below to include the Order ID in the header of invoices, packing slips, and credit memos.

To configure PDF printouts:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select PDF Print-outs .

3.

Click to expand each section.

4.

To include the order ID in the header of each document, Set Display Order ID in

Header to “Yes.”

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

PDF Print-outs

Customer Address Formats

The store administrator can modify address templates to control the format of the following customer billing and shipping addresses: l l l

Customer’s billing and shipping addresses in the customer’s address

Shipping and billing addresses from customer’s address book (available during the shopping cart checkout)

Addresses in invoices, shipments, and refunds (printed in PDF files)

482 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment Customer Address Formats

Address Templates

To change the order of address fields:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer Configuration .

The section includes a separate set of formatting instructions for each of the following: l l l l l

Text

Text One Line

HTML

PDF

JavaScript Template

3.

Edit each template as needed, using the examples below for reference.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 483

Customer Address Formats Chapter 42:  Order Fulfillment

Examples

For Text, Text One Line, HTML and PDF Address Templates

{{depend address attribute code}} a space, a character, or UI label

{{/depend}};

{{if address attribute code}}{{var address attribute code}} a space, a character, or UI label

{{/if}}

For JavaScript Address Template

#{address attribute code} or User Interface label #{address attribute code}

Template Types

Template

Text

Text One Line

HTML

PDF

JavaScript Template

Description

The template is used for all addresses that are printed.

This template defines the order of address entities in the customer’s shopping cart address book list. Progress during checkout.

This template defines the order of address fields located under the Customer Addresses area in the Admin panel (Customers > Manage Customers) and those located on the Add

New Address page when a customer creates a new billing or shipping address on his or her account page.

The template defines the display of billing and shipping addresses in the printed invoices, shipments, and credit memos.

In the templates, you will see the following code blocks: depend

For processing inner elements.

if var

An attribute is defined.

The code attribute is printed.

484 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 43:

Store Credit and Refunds

Store credit is an amount to be restored to a customer account. Store credit can be used by customers to pay for purchases, and by administrators as cash refunds. Gift card balances can be credited to the customer’s account, instead of using the gift card code for future purchases.

After an order has been paid for and invoiced, all of the order, or a portion of it, can be refunded by issuing a credit memo. A credit memo differs from a refund because the amount of the credit is restored to the customer’s account where it can be applied to future purchases, rather than returned to the customer as cash. In some cases, a refund can be given at the same time that a credit memo is issued, just as payment can be made at the time of invoicing. The amount of store credit in a customer’s account can be managed from Admin.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 485

Product Return Workflow

Product Return Workflow

Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds

486

Product Return Workflow

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds Create a Credit Memo

Create a Credit Memo

A credit memo is a document that lists the amount that is owed to the customer. The amount can be applied toward a purchase, or refunded to the customer. You can print a credit memo for a single order, or for multiple orders as a batch, or group. Before a credit memo can be printed, it must first be generated for the order.

Credit Memo

To create a credit memo:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Find the order in the list, click to open the order.

3.

In the upper right corner, click the Credit Memo button. (The button appears only if an invoice has been generated for the order.)

The New Credit Memo page looks similar to the completed order page, with an Items to

Refund section that lists each item from the invoice.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 487

Create a Credit Memo Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds

488

New Credit Memo

If an online payment method was used, you will not be able to edit these fields.

4.

Do one of the following: l l

If the product is to be returned to inventory, check the Return to Stock checkbox.

If the product will not be returned to inventory, leave the checkbox blank.

The Return to Stock checkbox appears only if you have set the inventory

Stock

Options

to “Decrease Stock When Order Is Placed.”

Return to Stock

5.

Complete the following: a.

In the Qty to Refund box, type the number of items to be returned and press the

Enter key to record the change. The Update Qty’s button appears.

b.

Set the Qty to Refund of any items not to be refunded to 0.

c.

Click the Update Qty’s button to recalculate the total. (The amount to be credited cannot exceed the maximum quantity that is available for refund.)

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds Create a Credit Memo

Update Quantities

6.

In the Refund Totals section, do the following, as applicable: a.

In the Refund Shipping field, enter the amount that is to be refunded from the shipping fee. This field initially displays the total shipping amount from the order that is available for refund. It is equal to the full shipping amount from the order, less any shipping amount that has already been refunded. Like the quantity, the amount can be reduced, but not increased.

b.

In the Adjustment Refund field, enter a value to be added to the total amount refunded as an additional refund that does not apply to any particular part of the order (shipping, items, or tax). The amount entered cannot raise the total refund higher than the paid amount.

c.

In the Adjustment Fee field, enter a value to be subtracted from the total amount refunded. This amount is not subtracted from a specific section of the order such as shipping, items, or tax.

Update Quantities d.

If the purchase was made using store credit, select the Refund to Store Credit checkbox, to credit the amount back to the customer’s account balance.

e.

To add a comment, type the text in the Credit Memo Comments box.

f.

To send an email notification to the customer, select the Email Copy of Credit

Memo checkbox.

g.

If you want to include the comments you have entered, check the Append

Comments checkbox.

The status of a credit memo notification appears in the completed credit memo next to the credit memo number.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 489

Create a Credit Memo Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds

Refund Totals

7.

To complete the process and generate the credit memo, select one of the following refund option buttons, depending on the payment type: l l

Refund Offline

Refund Online

8.

To add a comment to the completed credit memo, scroll down to the Comments History section, and enter the comment in the box.

l l

To send the comment to the customer by email, select the Notify Customer by Email checkbox.

To post the comment in the customer’s account, select the Visible on Frontend checkbox.

Below the credit memo is a complete list of all activity related to the order.

9.

Click the Submit Comment button.

490

Credit Memo Submit Comment

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds Print a Credit Memo

Print a Credit Memo

To print or view the completed credit memo, you must have a PDF reader installed on your computer. You can download Adobe Reader at no charge.

Credit Memos

To print a credit memo:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Credit Memos .

Selected Credit Memo with Action

2.

Use one of the following methods to print the credit memo:

Method 1: Open the Credit Memo

1.

In the list, click to open the credit memo.

2.

Click the Print button to print the PDF document.

Method 2: Use the Action Control

1.

In the list, select the checkbox of each credit memo that you want to print.

2.

Set the Actions control to “PDF Credit Memos,” and click the Submit button.

3.

When prompted, do one of the following: l

To save the document, click Save . Then, follow the prompts to save the file to your computer.When the download is complete, open the PDF in Adobe Reader, and print the document.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 491

Print a Credit Memo Chapter 43:  Store Credit and Refunds l

To view the document, click Open . The printed-ready PDF credit memo opens in

Adobe Reader. From here, you can either print the credit memo or save it to your hard disk.

PDF Credit Memo

492 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Payments

Chapter 44:

Basic Payment Methods

Magento Community Editionsupports a wide variety of payment methods, services, and gateways that you can offer for your customers’ convenience. In addition to the payment methods in this guide, other solutions can be downloaded from

Magento

Connect

. This chapter explains how to enable and configure the following basic payment methods: l l l l l l

Bank Transfer Payment

Cash On Delivery

Check / Money Order

Purchase Order

Zero Subtotal Checkout

Saved Credit Card

Test Credit Card Numbers

Visa

MasterCard

American Express

Expiration Date

CVV/CVC

4111111111111111

5555555555554444

378282246310005

Any future date

123 or 000

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 495

Merchant Location Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods

Definitions

Term

Payment Method

Payment Gateway

Definition

A way for the customer to pay for the merchandise in your store. Payment methods can be internal or external.

The Payment Methods section of the System Configuration includes all basic payment methods and gateways.

A third-party service provider that processes transactions for external payment methods.

Merchant Location

Setting the merchant location is the first step to configure any payment method.

To set the merchant location country:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

In the upper-right corner, set Current Configuration Scope to either your website or leave it set to “Default Config.”

4.

In the Merchant Location section, set Merchant Country to your country.

Merchant Location

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Bank Transfer Payment

Magento Community Edition lets you accept payments transferred directly from customers’ bank accounts to your merchant bank account.

496 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods Bank Transfer Payment

Bank Transfer Payment

To set up bank transfer payments:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods . Click to expand the Bank

Transfer Payment section. Then, do the following: a.

To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Enter a Title to identify this payment method during checkout.

c.

Set New Order Status to “Pending” until payment is authorized.

d.

Set Payment from Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this payment method.

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the Payment from Specific

Countries list appears. Select each country in the list where customers can make purchases from your store.

e.

Enter the Instructions your customers must follow to set up a bank transfer.

Depending on the country where your bank is located and your bank’s requirements, you might need to include the following information: l l l

Bank account name

Bank account number

Bank routing code

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 497

Cash On Delivery Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods l l

Bank name

Bank address f.

Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the amounts required to qualify to use this payment method.

An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values.

3.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the position of Bank Transfer in the list of payment methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

4.

When finished, click the Save Config button.

Cash On Delivery

Magento Community Edition allows you to accept COD payments from your customers.

With a cash on delivery payment, the customer pays at the time of delivery. The customer pays the order amount to the shipping carrier, who sends a check to you.

Shipping carriers typically charge an extra fee for COD service. You can account for this fee in your shipping and handling charges.

498

Cash On Delivery Payments

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods Check / Money Order

To set up cash on delivery payments:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods . Click to expand the Cash on Delivery Payments section. Then, do the following: a.

To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Enter a Title to identify this payment method during checkout.

c.

Set New Order Status to “Pending” until receipt of payment is confirmed.

d.

Set Payment from Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this payment method.

Specific Countries Select each country in the list where customers can make purchases from your store.

e.

Enter Instructions for making a Cash On Delivery payment.

f.

Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the order amounts which are required to qualify for this payment method.

An order qualifies if the total is between, or matches, the minimum or maximum order total.

g.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the sequence in which Cash On Delivery is listed with other payment methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Check / Money Order

Magento Community Edition allows you to accept payments by either check or money order. The Check / Money Order payment method is enabled for your story by default.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 499

Check / Money Order Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods

500

Check / Money Order

To set up payment by check or money order:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods . Click to expand Check /

Money Order , and do the following: a.

To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Enter a Title to identify this payment method during checkout.

c.

Set New Order Status to "Pending” until receipt of payment is confirmed.

d.

Set Payment from Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this payment method.

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the Payment from Specific

Countries list appears. Select each country in the list where customers can make purchases from your store.

e.

In the Make Check Payable To field, enter the name of the party to whom the check must be payable.

f.

In the Send Check To field, enter the street address where the checks are mailed.

g.

Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the order amounts required to qualify for this payment method.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods Purchase Order

An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values.

h.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the position of Check / Money Order in the list of payment methods that is shown during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

3.

When finished, click the Save Config button.

Purchase Order

A purchase order (PO) allows commercial customers to pay for purchases with prior authorization by referencing the PO number. During checkout, the customer is prompted to enter the purchase order number as the method of payment.

Customers who are representatives of other companies can use the Purchase Order payment method to buy products and assign a corresponding purchase order number generated in their accounting system to the sales order generated in Magento.

For example, your customer represents the company that sells computers and needs to buy some monitors from your store. In their accounting system, the customer creates a purchase order that is assigned a unique PO number. The customer places an order in your store using the Purchase Order payment method and references the PO number from their accounting system. All order-related documents, including the order confirmation email, invoice, shipment, and credit memo, will have the PO number on them. The company accounting department can now reference the PO number entered on the Magento sales order so that they can track the order.

When the customer receives your invoice, they process the payment in their accounts payable system. You should always establish the credit worthiness of a customer before accepting payment by purchase order.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Purchase Order

501

Zero Subtotal Checkout Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods

To set up payment by purchase order:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods . Click to expand the

Purchase Order section. Then, do the following: a.

To activate this payment method, set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Enter a Title to identify this payment method during checkout.

c.

Set New Order Status to “Pending” until payment is authorized.

d.

Set Payment from Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this payment method.

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the Payment from Specific

Countries list appears. Select each country in the list where customers can make purchases from your store.

e.

Set Minimum Order Total and Maximum Order Total to the amounts required to qualify for this payment method.

An order qualifies if the total falls between, or exactly matches, the minimum or maximum total values.

f.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the position of Purchase Order in the list of payment methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

3.

When finished, click the Save Config button.

Zero Subtotal Checkout

Zero Subtotal Checkout is only available for orders created from the Admin, and can be used for orders with a subtotal of zero. This situation might occur when a discount covers the entire price of the purchase, and there is no additional charge for shipping. To save time, these orders can be set to invoice automatically.

Unlike other payment methods for which you can set order amount filters, this method contains an intrinsic order amount filter, so that the method appears only when the subtotal equals zero.

Zero Subtotal Checkout can be used in cases such as: l l

The product that the customer adds to the shopping cart is of the Downloadable or the Virtual product type and its price equals zero.

The price of a simple product is zero and the Free Shipping method is available.

502 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods Zero Subtotal Checkout l l

A coupon code that covers the full price of products and shipping is applied in the shopping cart.

A gift card is applied to the shopping cart and it fully covers the order amount including shipping. During the checkout of an order covered by a gift card, the customer will still have to select the "No Information Required" payment method in the Payment Information section of the Checkout page.

The payment method is available if taxes are configured so that they are applied to the products in the shopping cart after the discount is applied.

To set up Zero Subtotal Checkout:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods . Click to expand the Zero

Subtotal Checkout section. Then, do the following:

Zero Subtotal Checkout a.

Enter a Title to identify this payment method during checkout.

b.

Set Enabled to “Yes” to activate this payment method.

c.

Set New Order Status to “Pending” until payment is authorized.

Pending

Processing

The order is waiting for authorization.

Payment has been authorized, and the transaction is being processed.

d.

Set Automatically Invoice All Items to “Yes” if you want to automatically invoice all items with a zero balance.

e.

Set Payment from Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this payment method

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 503

Saved Credit Cards Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the Payment from Specific

Countries list appears. Select each country in the list where customers can make purchases from your store.

f.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the position of Zero Subtotal Checkout in the list of payment methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

3.

When finished, click the Save Config button.

Saved Credit Cards

This option enables you to take credit cards and to process them offline. This method is useful when you have a card terminal in a “brick and mortar” store or have access to a virtual terminal.

Important! Saving customer card data is discouraged unless absolutely necessary.

Even though the data is encrypted it still poses a security risk to hold this information.

The Saved Credit Cards payment method is not PCI compliant.

When using the Credit Cards payment method, it is highly recommended to configure an SSL certificate for your store.

504

Saved CC

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods Saved Credit Cards

To set up the Saved Credit Cards:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

In the upper-right corner, set Current Configuration Scope to the applicable website or store view for the configuration.

4.

Click to expand the Saved CC section.

5.

Complete each field in this section, using the following field descriptions for reference.

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enabled

Title

New Order Status

Credit Card Types

Request Card Security

Code

3D Secure Card Validation

Payment from Applicable

Countries

Website

Payment from Specific

Countries

Minimum Order Total

Scope

Description

Website Determines if payment by a saved credit card is available to customers. Options include: Yes /

No.

Store View The name of this payment method that appears to the customer during checkout.

Website

Website

Website

Website

Determines the initial status of orders paid by a saved credit card. Option: Pending

Determines the credit cards that can be used with this method. Select each card in the list that you support with this method.

Determines whether the payment method requires the customer to enter the security code on the back of the card. If your credit card terminal requires the security code, set this option to “Yes.”

Determines if credit card validation is carried out using the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation system. You must subscribe to 3D Secure and have it configured for your Magento installation.

Website

Website

Select the range of countries from which you accept payment by saved credit card. Options include: All Allowed Countries / Specific Countries.

To accept payment by saved credit card from only specific countries, select each supported country in the list.

Determines the minimum order total of orders that can be paid by saved credit card.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 505

Saved Credit Cards Chapter 44:  Basic Payment Methods

Field

Maximum Order Total

Scope

Website

Sort Order Website

Description

Determines the maximum order total of orders that can be paid by saved credit card.

A number that determines the sequence in which this payment method is listed with others during checkout.

506 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:

PayPal Payment Solutions

PayPal is a global leader in online payments and a fast and secure way for your customers to pay online. With PayPal and Magento Community Edition, you can accept payments from all major debit and credit cards, and PayPal account holders.

Since customers don’t even need a PayPal account to pay with PayPal, both you and your customers can get extra convenience without extra effort.

The PayPal payment methods that are available in Magento, and the method names, are different depending on merchant location. For country-specific PayPal methods, see the list at the end of this chapter. The two PayPal payment methods that can be used all over the world are Express Checkout and PayPal Payments Standard.

PayPal payment methods are mutually exclusive, with the exception of PayPal

Express Checkout. You cannot have more than one method enabled at a time.

PayPal Express Checkout can be used with other PayPal payment methods except

PayPal Payments Standard. PayPal Payments Standard cannot be enabled simultaneously with any other method, including Express Checkout.

PayPal Express Checkout

With PayPal Express Checkout enabled, customers can click the “Checkout with PayPal” button to make a secure payment from the PayPal site. You can use

Express Checkout as a standalone solution, or in combination with one of the other solutions.

Getting Started with PayPal Express Checkout

Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout

All-In-One Solutions

PayPal offers a variety of PCI-compliant solutions to meet the needs of your growing business.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 507

Payment Gateways Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

PayPal Payments Advanced

(Includes Express Checkout) PayPal Payments Advanced offers your customers a secure checkout experience without leaving your site. Flexible templates and a low monthly fee make this an ideal choice for merchants who want to create a more customized checkout experience.

PayPal Payments Pro

PayPal Payments Pro brings you all the benefits of a merchant account and payment gateway in one, plus the ability to create your own, fully customized checkout experience.

l l

PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solution (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Payments Pro Payflow Edition (Includes Express Checkout) (UK only)

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Payments Standard is the easiest way to accept payments online. You can offer your customers the convenience of payment by credit card and PayPal by simply adding a checkout button to your site. During checkout, customers are redirected to PayPal to complete the payment part of the checkout process. There are no lengthy applications to complete, or monthly charges to set up in advance. When you make your first sale,

PayPal will guide you through the process of setting up your account.

Payment Gateways

PayPal offers a choice of two payment gateway solutions for your business. You can let

PayPal host your checkout on its secure payment site, or you can take control of the entire payment experience with a completely customizable solution.

PayPal Payflow Pro

PayPal Payflow Pro is a fully customizable payment gateway that can be used with any

Internet merchant account to process credit card transactions online. Payflow Pro can also be used to process PayPal Express Checkout transactions.

PayPal Payflow Link

PayPal Payflow Link is a hosted payment gateway with an embedded checkout that keeps customers on your site. It’s the fast and easy way to add transaction processing to your site.

PayPal Business Accounts

PayPal payment methods that are integrated with Magento require the merchant to have a PayPal business account and/or a PayPal Payflow account. The type of PayPal account that is required is specified in the description of each method.

508 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Payments Advanced

Customers who make purchases using Express Checkout and the Express Checkout for

Payflow Pro must have buyer accounts with PayPal to pay for their purchases. PayPal

Payments Standard (and Website Payments Standard) can work either directly or through a buyer account, if the PayPal Account Optional parameter is enabled in the

Premier or Business account of the merchant. By default, this parameter is enabled and customers can choose to enter their credit card information and the billing and shipping addresses and pay the order amount, or to create a buyer account with PayPal and then pay the order amount. When the parameter is disabled, the customer must create a buyer account with PayPal before paying for the order.

Website Payments Pro, Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition, Payflow Pro Gateway, and Payflow Link require the customer to enter credit card information during checkout.

PayPal Payments Advanced

PayPal Payments Advanced lets your customers pay by debit or credit card without leaving your site, and includes an embedded checkout page that can be customized to create a seamless and secure checkout experience.

Merchant Requirements

l l

PayPal Business Account

If you manage multiple Magento websites, you must have a separate PayPal merchant account for each.

Configuration

To get started, see Setting Up PayPal Payments Advanced in the Knowledge Base.

Checkout Workflow

With PayPal Payments Advanced, your customer stays on your site during the checkout process.

The customer selects the PayPal Payments Advanced payment method on the Payment

Information checkout step and clicks Continue.

The Order Review step appears, with the Pay Now button, instead of the Place Order button. After the customer clicks the Pay Now button, a PayPal-hosted form opens in the customer’s browser. The customer specifies the card information and clicks Verify Card.

If the transaction is successful, the customer is redirected to the order confirmation page.

The form also includes the Pay with PayPal button, which redirects the customer to the

PayPal site, where payment can be made with PayPal Express Checkout.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 509

PayPal Payments Pro Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

If the transaction fails for any reason, an error message appears on the checkout page and the customer is directed to repeat the checkout process. These issue are managed by

PayPal.

Order Processing Workflow

Processing orders with PayPal Payments Advanced is the same as processing any regular order with PayPal. An invoice, shipment, and credit memo (online/offline refund) can be created. Multiple online refunds are not available for the PayPal Payments Advanced payment method.

With PayPal Payments Advanced, an order is created in the Admin when a customer clicks the Place Order button. The order status can be any of the following, depending on the response from PayPal:

Processing

Pending Payment

Canceled

Suspected Fraud

The transaction was successful.

The system did not receive any response from PayPal.

The transaction was not successful for some reason.

The transaction did not pass some of the PayPal fraud filters; the system receives the response from PayPal that the transaction is under review by Fraud Service.

You can manage your fraud filters in your PayPal merchant account .

PayPal Payments Pro

PayPal Payments Pro brings you all the benefits of a merchant account and payment gateway in one, plus the ability to create your own, fully customized checkout experience. PayPal Express Checkout is automatically enabled with PayPal Payments

Pro, so you can tap into more than 110 million active PayPal users.

Requirements

l

PayPal Business Account (with Direct Payments Activated)

Configuration

To get started, see Setting Up PayPal Payments Pro in the Knowledge Base.

Checkout Workflow

After customers add products to their shopping carts, they can go to checkout by clicking the Proceed to Checkout button. In the Payment Information checkout section, they select the PayPal Direct Payment option, and enter the credit card information.

510 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Payments Standard l l

PayPal Payments Pro lets your customer stay on your site during the checkout process.

PayPal Express Checkout redirects your customer to the PayPal site to complete the transaction.

Order Processing Workflow

If the payment action selected in the configuration is set to “Authorize,” only a sales order of the Processing status is created in Magento. In this case, the amount of money to be authorized is pending approval. With PayPal Payments Pro, you can process the payment online from either the Admin of your store, or from your PayPal merchant account.

When checking out products from the shopping cart to multiple addresses simultaneously, customers can choose to pay with Website Payments Pro.

At the customer’s request, the store administrator can also create an order from the

Admin, and place it through the Website Payments Pro payment method.

An order can be voided online at any time until the order amount is fully invoiced. If required, the order can be online partially invoiced for a specified quantity of products.

For each partial invoice submitted through the PayPal payment system, a separate transaction record with a unique ID and of the Capture transaction type will become available on the Transaction tab, and a separate invoice document will be created on the

Invoices tab. The payment transaction of the type “Authorization” is closed only after the full order amount is captured.

When capturing the payment transaction, PayPal transfers the order amount from the buyer’s balance, bank account or credit card to the merchant’s account. If for any reason the customer returns the purchased products and claims a refund, as with order amount capturing and invoice creation, you can create an online refund either from the Admin or from your PayPal merchant account.

Make sure that instant payment notifications are enabled in your PayPal merchant account. An invoice is created in Magento only after an instant payment notification message is delivered to Magento from PayPal. Based on these notifications, you can receive detailed payment information on each transaction from PayPal after you click the Fetch button on the Transaction page of an order.

If the payment method has been set to “Sale,” both a sales order and an invoice are created in Magento under Sales > Orders.

PayPal Payments Standard

For merchants outside the US, this method is called PayPal Website Payments Standard.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 511

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

PayPal Payments Standard is the easiest way to accept payments online. You can offer your customers the convenience of payment both by credit card and PayPal by simply adding a checkout button to your store.

With PayPal Payments Standard, you can swipe credit cards on mobile devices. There is no monthly fee, and you can get paid on eBay. Supported credit cards include Visa,

MasterCard, Discover, and American Express. In addition, customers can pay directly from their personal PayPal accounts. PayPal Payments Standard is available in all countries on the PayPal worldwide reference list.

Merchant Requirements

l

PayPal Business Account

Configuration

To get started, see Setting Up PayPal Payments Standard in the Knowledge Base.

Checkout Workflow

During checkout, the customer is redirected to the PayPal site to complete the transaction. PayPal Payments Standard is a one-step process for customers whose credit card information is up-to-date in their personal PayPal accounts. All the customer needs to do is click the “Pay Now” button to complete the purchase.

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Express Checkout helps boost sales by giving your customers the ability to pay by credit card or from the security of their personal PayPal accounts. During checkout, the customer is redirected to the secure PayPal site to complete the payment information. The customer is then returned to your store to complete the remainder of the checkout process. Choosing Express Checkout adds the familiar PayPal button to your store, which has been reported to increase sales.*

Check out with PayPal

Customers with current PayPal accounts can make a purchase in a single step, by clicking the “Check out with PayPal” button. Express Checkout can be added as a standalone, or added to an existing PayPal solution. If you already accept credit cards online, you can offer Express Checkout as an additional option to attract new customers who prefer to pay with PayPal. PayPal Express Checkout can be used as a standalone, or in combination with one of PayPal’s All-In-One solutions.

512 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Express Checkout

Requirements

For Merchant:

For Customer:

PayPal Business Account

Personal PayPal Account

Configuration

To get started, see the following articles in the knowledge base:

Getting Started with PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Express Checkout Workflow

Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout

Checkout Workflow

With Express Checkout, the customer is redirected to the PayPal site to complete the transaction. Unlike other payment methods, PayPal Express Checkout allows the customer to check out at the beginning of the usual checkout flow. With the PayPal

Express Checkout enabled, the “Check out with PayPal” button is available on the product page, in the shopping cart, and mini shopping cart. Clicking the button redirects the customer to the PayPal website to review the purchase information.

Customers must log in to their PayPal accounts to complete the transaction. The payment system uses the customer’s billing and shipping information from the customer’s PayPal account. The customer is then redirected back to the Magento Review

Order page. After the customer places the order in Magento, the payment information is submitted to PayPal and the payment transaction is settled.

If the customer uses the one-page checkout and selects the Express Checkout payment method, the customer is redirected to PayPal during the Payment Review process, just before the sales order is submitted.

Express Checkout method of payment is unavailable if the customer chooses to check out the products from the shopping cart to multiple addresses. The store administrator cannot place an order using the Express Checkout method of payment, because it is also unavailable from the Admin.

Aside from the configuration details, here are some aspects of PayPal Express Checkout to be aware of: l l l l

Saving Customer Billing Address

Managing Order Transactions

Billing Agreements

Settlement Reports

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 513

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

Save Customer Billing Address

The complete billing address of the customer can be saved when the customer pays with

PayPal Express Checkout. The billing address can be received from PayPal, and can be edited by the customer.

To save the customer billing address:

Make sure that the functionality is enabled in your PayPal merchant account. Contact

PayPal technical support for more information.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

Under PayPal Express Checkout, click the Configure link, and do the following: a.

Set Require Customer’s Billing Address to “Yes.” b.

To request the customer’s billing address only for orders with downloadable and/or virtual products, set Require Customer’s Billing Address to “For Virtual Quotes

Only.”

4.

Click the Save Config button.

When customers choose to pay using PayPal Express Checkout, they are redirected to

PayPal. Having logged in to PayPal and reviewed the payment information, they are redirected back to the Order Review page of your store, where they can choose the shipping method, edit the billing and shipping addresses, and place the order.

Alternatively, if you have set up your PayPal Express Checkout Advanced settings to skip the order review step, the customer can pay for the order on the PayPal site by clicking the Pay Now button.

If a billing address cannot be received from PayPal because of your configuration or due to any other reasons, the billing address fields on the Order Review page are prepopulated with the shipping address values. A customer can edit them if necessary.

If a customer leaves the billing and shipping addresses without changes, the Place Order button is enabled when the customer selects the shipping method in the Shipping

Method field.

If the customer edits the billing or shipping address, the Place Order button is disabled.

The customer needs to click the Update Order Data button first. The system will update the information, including the available shipping methods, and the Place Order button will be enabled.

After the customer clicks Place Order, the order is created in Magento, and PayPal performs the related transaction(s). The complete billing and shipping addresses are saved in the order record in Magento.

514 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Express Checkout

Manage Order Transactions

Magento includes the option of using the Order payment action for the PayPal Express

Checkout payment method. When a store customer submits an order, having paid using the PayPal Express Checkout payment method, for which the Order payment action is set, the funds on the customer’s card are authorized. If the authorization times out before you capture all payment, the authorization is voided, and a new authorization and capture are conducted when you create an invoice. Only the amount equal to the invoice total is authorized and captured. The maximum number of these authorizations for one order, and the periods for which the first authorization and the order in general stay valid, depend on your PayPal merchant account settings. These parameters need to be specified in the Magento Admin Panel as well. Capturing can be done only from the

Magento Admin Panel, by creating one or more invoices.

Situations in which using the Order transaction may be appropriate include the following: l l l

Back orders, in which available items are sent immediately, and the remaining part of the order is sent when available; this may include more than two shipments

Split orders, in which ordered items are sent in more than one shipment, perhaps to different addresses, and you want to collect a payment for each shipment

Drop shipments, which are shipments from other vendors for which you accept the payment

Using the Order payment action does not influence the checkout process for store customers.

Payment Action Set to “Order”

When the store customer submits the order, having paid using the PayPal Express

Checkout payment method, for which the Order payment action is set, the order (with

Processing status) is created in the Admin. Two transactions are created for this order: one with type Order and one with type Authorization.

The funds on the customer’s account are put on hold, and you can capture the payment only from the Admin. To capture, you need to create an online invoice. When you choose to create an online invoice, Magento determines whether the number of days passed from the first authorization exceeds the Order Valid Period value. If more days have passed, you cannot create an online invoice for this order.

If the order is valid, Magento determines whether the first authorization is valid, comparing the number of days passed with the Authorization Honor Period value. If the authorization is valid, the necessary sum is captured; the rest is left on hold, and the number of captures is not limited. If the authorization is not valid anymore, it is voided.

A new authorization and capture are created, but for the invoice total (not the order total). From this moment, each time you create an online invoice for this order, a new authorization and capture will be conducted only for invoice totals.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 515

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

Also, Magento will determine whether the number of the conducted captures is equal to the Number of Child Authorizations value each time. If the number specified there is already reached, creating online invoices for the order will not be possible.

Bill Me Later

For US merchants, the PayPal service Bill Me Later is now a payment option in checkout. Bill Me Later offers your customers access to financing, so they can buy now and pay later, at no additional cost to you. You are not charged when customers choose

Bill Me Later, and only pay your normal PayPal transaction fee.

You can also use free, ready-made banner ads and a prominent Bill Me Later button in checkout, to tell your customers while they shop that financing is available.

516

PayPal Bill Me Later Button

We estimate that offering Bill Me Later results in up to 18% more sales, about one-third of which results from the six months same-as-cash payment option (according to an

August 2013 Forrester Consulting study commissioned by PayPal). You can also visit the

PayPal website for more information about Bill Me Later.

Before you configure Bill Me Later in your store, make sure it is enabled in your PayPal account .

To enable Bill Me Later:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

Under PayPal Express Checkout, click the Configure link, and do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions a.

Click to expand Required PayPal Settings .

b.

Set Enable Bill Me Later to “Yes.”

4.

Click the Save Config button.

PayPal Express Checkout

Bill Me Later Information Link

To enable Bill Me Later banners:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

Under PayPal Express Checkout, click the Configure link.

4.

Click to expand Required PayPal Settings section. Then, click to expand Advertise Bill

Me Later section.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Advertise Bill Me Later

517

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

5.

Click the Get Publisher ID from PayPal button and follow the directions to get your account information. Then, enter your Publisher ID .

6.

Click to expand the Home Page section. Then, do the following: a.

To place a banner on the page, set Display to “Yes.” b.

Set Position to one of the following: l l

Header (center)

Sidebar (right) c.

Set Size to one of the following: l l l l l l

190 x 100

234 x 60

300 x 50

468 x 60

728 x 90

800 x 66

7.

Repeat the previous step for each of the following sections: l l l

Catalog Category Page

Catalog Product Page

Checkout Cart Page

8.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

518

Bill Me Later Banner Sizes

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Express Checkout

Billing Agreements

The Billing Agreement functionality enables customers to sign an agreement with the payment system and eases the process of checkout because customers do not need to specify payment information again and again. During the shopping cart checkout, the customer can simply choose a billing agreement as a payment method and based on its number; the payment system will charge the customer's account.

To enable billing agreements:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

Click the Configure button for one of the following PayPal solutions: l

PayPal Express Checkout l

PayPal Payments Advanced (includes Express Checkout) l

PayPal Payments Pro (includes Express Checkout)

4.

Scroll down to the PayPal Billing Agreement Settings section, and do the following: a.

Set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Complete the remaining information according to your business requirements.

For more detailed configuration instructions, see the knowledge base article for your

PayPal solution.

Setting Up PayPal Express Checkout

Setting Up PayPal Payments Pro

Setting Up PayPal Payments Advanced c.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

PayPal Billing Agreement Settings

519

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

Workflow

Billing agreements make it possible for individual customers to make purchases on a regular basis through an external payment system without entering their credit card information again and again. They can simply grant the authorization to the payment system once. With Billing Agreements, customers do not need to enter credit card information in Magento and they are not redirected to the external payment system, although the actual payment is performed there.

After the customer signs a billing agreement with the store on the PayPal side, PayPal provides the store and the customer with the reference ID for the signed billing agreement. The reference ID is a unique number assigned to a billing agreement by the payment system. During subsequent purchases, the customer selects the billing agreement as the payment method and uses the billing agreement reference ID. No other payment information is required for placing an order. The payment system verifies billing agreement information and whether the payment can be fulfilled by the reference

ID specified by the customer. After the payment system performs the payment transaction, the reference ID is returned to the Magento system and an order is placed.

Currently Magento Community Edition supports only PayPal Express Checkout payment method for Billing Agreements. Before enabling billing agreements, contact

PayPal Merchant Technical Services to enable billing agreements (reference transactions) for your PayPal merchant account.

After a billing agreement is signed with PayPal, the store owner can charge the customer’s PayPal account directly. When billing agreements are enabled, they can be created in the following ways: l l

Creating a billing agreement from the customer account in the frontend: The customer uses the Billing Agreement wizard which redirects him or her to the PayPal website, where a billing agreement is signed.

Submitting a billing agreement with an order: After choosing the corresponding payment method, the customer is redirected to the PayPal website, where a billing agreement is signed.

A billing agreement can be created from a customer account only if Allow in Billing

Agreement is enabled in the Admin configuration.

Create Billing Agreement from Customer Account

A customer can create a billing agreement by signing in to her or his customer account on your website, selecting the billing agreement payment method, and starting the

Billing Agreement wizard located on the Billing Agreements tab. When a billing agreement is created, it is submitted to the PayPal payment system and is recorded to the customer account with its reference information. The number of billing agreements

520 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Express Checkout that a customer can create in the customer account is not limited and depends only on the customer’s needs. The customer can also cancel some or all of the billing agreements on the Billing Agreement page of the customer account.

Billing agreements available in the customer account can be either Active or Canceled.

Canceled billing agreements cannot be reactivated. .

When checking out products from the shopping cart, a customer who has already signed a billing agreement with PayPal can choose the PayPal Billing Agreement payment method in the Payment Information section of the checkout page and select the necessary billing agreement reference ID from the list. When the customer clicks the

Place Order button, the billing agreement reference ID and sales order payment details are transferred to the PayPal payment system. After the payment system confirms the payment, a sales order is created in Magento.

If the payment action selected for the PayPal Billing Agreement payment method is set to “Sale,” as soon as the customer places an order, the PayPal payment system transfers the order amount from the customer’s account to the merchant, and both a sales order and an invoice are created in Magento. With the Authorization payment action selected, only a sales order is created.

Create Billing Agreement with Order

If the customer purchasing items from the web store does not yet have a billing agreement with PayPal, she or he can choose the PayPal Express Checkout method of payment, select the Sign a billing agreement to streamline further purchases with PayPal checkbox, and be redirected to the PayPal payment system where the customer payment information is available and the billing agreement can be signed. After a billing agreement with the store is signed, the customer is redirected back to the Magento frontend, where an order is placed. A corresponding record appears in the billing agreements list.

Additionally, the customer who has no billing agreements in the customer account can also sign a billing agreement from the mini shopping cart or from a product view page by clicking the Check out with PayPal button, that is, by using the PayPal Express

Checkout payment method. This opens a dialog box that gives the customer the option to sign a billing agreement with the PayPal payment system. If the customer cancels creating a billing agreement, the order is created through the normal PayPal payment process.

If the customer has one or more billing agreements, the customer can still create a new billing agreement from the customer's account, but will not be able to sign a new billing agreement using the PayPal Express Checkout payment method.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 521

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

When the customer signs a billing agreement during the order checkout, PayPal creates a payment transaction through the PayPal Express Checkout payment method selected by the customer (that is, a sales order is created in Magento), and a billing agreement reference ID which is sent to the customer and the store. The currently created order is not related to the billing agreement that is signed. Related billing agreement-order records are created in Magento the next time that the customer selects this billing agreement as a payment method and places an order.

Managing Billing Agreements

The store administrator can take a number of actions to manage customer’s billing agreements both in the Customer and Sales sections.

Sales Management

The list of all billing agreements for all customers is available under Sales > Billing

Agreements. Here, the store administrator can filter the records by the customer or billing agreement information including billing agreement reference ID, status, and creation date. A specific record provides general information about the selected billing agreement and about all sales orders that relate to it. The store administrator can view, cancel, or delete a customer’s billing agreements in the Sales Management area. Billing agreements can be canceled or deleted by clicking the corresponding buttons located in the upper right part of the Billing Agreement page. An already canceled billing agreement can only be deleted by the store administrator.

Customer Management

Billing agreements created by a single customer can be seen on the Billing Agreements tab of the customer account page in the Admin (Customers > Manage Customers). From here, the store administrator can open a required billing agreement to view its general information and sales orders relating to it, cancel a billing agreement, or delete it.

Create Sales Order with Billing Agreement

On a customer’s request, the store administrator can create a sales order and after filling in all required information for order currency, items, billing and shipping addresses, she or he needs to select the PayPal Billing Agreement payment method and specify the reference number for a specific billing agreement. When the order is submitted, the billing agreement reference ID is transferred to the PayPal payment system and, if the payment is authorized, an order is created in Magento.

Settlement Reports

The PayPal Settlement report provides the store administrator with the information about each transaction that affects the settlement of funds.

522 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Express Checkout

Before generating settlement reports, the store administrator must contact PayPal

Merchant Technical Services to create an SFTP user account, and enable settlement reports and SFTP for the PayPal business account.

After configuring and enabling settlement reports in the PayPal merchant account,

Magento will start generating reports within twenty-four hours.

To enable settlement reports:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

Click the Configure button for one of the following PayPal solutions: l

PayPal Express Checkout l

PayPal Payments Advanced (includes Express Checkout) l

PayPal Payments Pro (includes Express Checkout)

4.

Scroll down to the Settlement Report Settings section, and do the following: a.

Enter your SFTP Credentials .

b.

Complete the remaining information according to your business requirements.

For detailed configuration instructions, see the knowledge base article for your

PayPal solution.

c.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Settlement Report Settings

523

PayPal Express Checkout Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

View a Settlement Report

The list of available settlement reports can be viewed from the Admin. Each report contains information as described below.

To view the settlement reports:

On the Admin menu, select Reports > Sales > PayPal Settlement Reports.

Field Descriptions

Field

Report Date

Merchant Account

Transaction ID

Invoice ID

PayPal Reference ID

Event Code

Initiation Date

Completion Date

Gross Amount

Fee Amount

Description

The date when the settlement report was generated.

The encrypted merchant account number generated by

PayPal.

The identification of a transaction of the money moving event.

Transaction ID is generated by PayPal and cannot be changed by the merchant.

The identification of an invoice generated within Magento. The field can be populated with either an invoice ID sent with the capture request or with the value of the invoice ID (if any) from the authorizing transaction.

The identification of a related, pre-existing transaction or event.

The code assigned to the transaction according to the event that has initiated it. Among these can be website payments standard payment, express or direct checkout API, preapproved payment, subscription payment, and so on.

The date and time the transaction was initiated.

The date and time the transaction was completed.

The amount of the payment between the two parties and before fees.

The amount of fee associated with the settlement. All transaction fees are included in this amount. Fees are never amortized across several transactions.

The store administrator can fetch the most recent settlement reports by clicking the

Fetch Updates button located in the upper right part of the page. After clicking it, a dialog box appears, stating that the system will connect to the PayPal SFTP server to fetch the reports. When all recent reports are added to the list, the Infolog message appears, stating the number of reports fetched. The report includes the following additional information for each transaction:

524 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Payflow Pro

Field Descriptions

Field Description

PayPal Reference ID Type One of the following reference codes:

Order ID

Transaction ID

Subscription ID

Preapproved Payment ID Options include:

Custom The text entered by the merchant on the transaction in PayPal.

Transaction

Debit or Credit

Fee Debit or

Credit

The direction of money movement of gross amount.

The direction of money movement for fee.

PayPal Payflow Pro

PayPal Payflow Pro gateway, formerly known as Verisign, is a payment method available for customers of the USA, Canada, Australia, and New Zealand. Similar to other PayPal payment methods that are provided in Magento, PayPal Payflow Pro Gateway requires that the store owner have a merchant account at PayPal. The PayPal Payflow Pro gateway links the merchant account at PayPal and the merchant’s website, and acts both as a gateway and a merchant account. With PayPal Payflow Pro Gateway, payments are processed directly on the merchant websites and customers are not redirected to PayPal. Unlike other PayPal payment methods, the pricing for using the

Payflow Pro Gateway method of payment is fixed no matter how many transactions are submitted. That is, merchants pay a fixed monthly fee plus a fixed fee for each transaction regardless of their number.

PayPal Payflow Pro does not require customers to have buyer accounts at PayPal; but depending on the merchant country, customers may use their PayPal buyer accounts for paying through the gateway.

PayPal Payflow Pro allows customers to enter their credit card information during checkout, without leaving the store checkout page and without using PayPal hosted forms. Additionally, payments are accepted through PayPal Payflow Pro at the time an order is placed.

Customer Workflow

After customers add products to their shopping carts and proceed to the checkout, they specify their billing and/or shipping addresses and the shipping method. Then, in the

Payment Information section of the Checkout page, they can select the Payflow Pro payment method, enter the type of credit card, its number, expiration date, and the card

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 525

PayPal Payflow Link Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions verification number. Customers are not redirected to the PayPal website when they choose to pay with Payflow Pro Gateway. Depending on the payment action selected in the configuration of the payment method, either a sales order or a sales order and an invoice is created.

Order Processing Workflow

Orders paid with Payflow Pro Gateway can be processed online only from Magento.

Here, you can submit an online invoice and as a result a corresponding transaction and an invoice will be created. Regarding order amount refunds, you can also submit them online from the created invoice.

Partial invoices are not available when using the Payflow Pro Gateway payment method.

The Qty to Invoice field is unavailable for editing. The partial refund is unavailable as well.

You can view all Payflow Pro Gateway transactions in your PayPal business account .

PayPal Payflow Link

PayPal PayFlow Link is available for merchants in the United States and Canada only; this method requires a Payflow merchant account. PayFlow Link cannot be used for orders created from the Admin.

PayPal Payflow Link passes the information about the card, entered by the customer, directly to PayPal; it is never stored in Magento system. A customer does not need to have a PayPal account to use this method.

Customer Workflow

The store customer selects the PayFlow Link payment method on the Payment

Information checkout step and clicks Continue. The Order Review step appears, where the Pay Now button is available instead of the usual Place Order button. After the customer clicks Pay Now, the PayPal-hosted form, where the credit card information can be entered, loads in the checkout page. The customer specifies the card information and clicks Pay Now. If the transaction is successful, the customer is redirected to the order confirmation page.

The form also contains the Cancel Payment link. Clicking it redirects the customer to the

Payment Information step of the checkout, where the payment method is selected. If the transaction fails on any reason, an error message appears on the checkout page and the customer is directed to repeat the checkout process. These situations are handled on the

PayPal side.

526 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions PayPal Payflow Link

Order Workflow

When a customer clicks the Pay Now button on the last checkout step, the order is created in the Panel with a “Pending Payment” status. After the customer enters the card information and clicks the Pay Now button in the form, which exists on the PayPal site, the status of the order changes, depending on the response the system receives from

PayPal:

Processing

Pending Payment

Canceled

Suspected Fraud

The transaction was successful.

The system did not receive any response from PayPal.

The transaction was not successful for some reason.

The transaction did not pass some of the PayPal fraud filters; the system receives the response from PayPal that the transaction is under review by Fraud Service.

You can manage your fraud filters in your PayPal merchant account .

If the customer clicks the Cancel Payment link in the form, the order status changes to

Canceled. The new order is created when a customer proceeds with the checkout.

In general, processing of orders that are paid using the PayFlow Link payment method is the same as regular processing of orders that are paid with PayPal. An invoice, shipment, and credit memo (online/offline refund) can be created. Multiple online refunds are not available for the PayFlow Link payment method.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 527

PayPal Payment Solutions by Country Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

PayPal Payment Solutions by Country

Country PayPal Payment Solution

United States PayPal Payments Advanced (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Payments Pro (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Payments Standard+

PayPal Payflow Pro (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Payflow Link (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Express Checkout

Canada

Australia

United Kingdom

Japan

France

Italy

Spain

PayPal Payments Pro (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Payflow Pro

PayPal Payflow Link (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Payflow Pro

PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solution

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Payments Pro Payflow Edition (Includes Express Checkout)

PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solution

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Website Payments Plus (PayPal Payments Pro Hosted

Solution)

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Integral Evolution (PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solution)

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Pro (PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solution)

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Pasarela integral (PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solu-

528 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

Country

Hong Kong

New Zealand

Others

PayPal Payment Solutions by Country

PayPal Payment Solution tion)

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Payments Pro Hosted Solution

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

PayPal Payflow Pro

PayPal Express Checkout

PayPal Payments Standard

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 529

PayPal Payment Solutions by Country

530

Chapter 45:  PayPal Payment Solutions

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 46:

Payment Solutions & Gateways

Magento Community Edition supports a wide range of payment solutions and gateways that offer merchant services in all parts of the world. Unlike some payment solutions that transfer control to complete the transaction on another site, a payment gateway makes it possible for you to accept credit card payments directly from your store.

Worldwide

Amazon Simple Pay

Amazon offers easy payment and checkout solutions for physical goods retailers that allow customers to use their Amazon.com accounts as a payment method. Magento

Community Edition supports the following payment solutions from Amazon: l l

Amazon Simple Pay

Checkout by Amazon

PayPal

With PayPal’s deep integration with Magento, you can easily accept credit cards and

PayPal payments using PayPal, all while keeping customers on your site. Already have a merchant account? Add PayPal Express checkout to increase conversion.

Authorize.Net

Authorize.Net includes free fraud tools, free customer support, a free website seal, and the ability to accept multi-channel payments: online, mail order/telephone order, retail and mobile. Trusted by 300,000 customers.

ChronoPay

Established in Amsterdam in 2003, ChronoPay offers payment solutions for the global market. The company has a large presence in the Russian market. Magento

Community Edition supports the following ChronoPay payment solutions: l l

ChronoPay Standard

ChronoPay Gateway

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 531

532

Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways

CyberSource

CyberSource, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Visa Inc., is a payment management company. Over 330,000 businesses worldwide use CyberSource to process online payments, streamline fraud management, and simplify payment security.

First Data

Fast, convenient, and secure. With over forty years of industry leading experience

Express Merchant Processing Solutions (EMPS) powered by First Data helps millions of businesses like yours bring safe, easy, cost-effective payments to their customers with affordable support, regardless of size.

Europe

CyberMut Payment

CyberMut is a secure payment service operated by the French Bank, Crédit Mutuel. To use CyberMut, you must open a business account with the bank.

iDEAL

iDEAL is a collection of technical agreements between banks and transaction processors

(a protocol) and not a centralized electronic payment system. The iDEAL protocol provides an immediate online transfer from the buyer’s bank account to the bank account of the online store. Magento Community Edition support the following iDEAL payment solutions: l l iDEAL Basic iDEAL Advanced

Ogone

Ogone Payment Services delivers non-face-to-face businesses the payment solutions platform, added value opportunities and technology advancements that become essential for the way payments are performed, managed and secured today.

Paybox

Paybox Services provides merchant accounts and eCommerce payment services for merchants in Europe. Magento Community Edition supports the following Paybox payment methods: l l

Paybox Direct

Paybox System

Protx Standard

Protx is one of the largest payment processors in the United Kingdom. In 2006, Protx was aquired by Sage Pay.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways Authorize.Net

Oceania

eWAY Direct

Focusing on high-level standards in technology, innovations and customer care, eWay has become Australia’s award-winning payment gateway. eWAY specializes in delivering successful eCommerce payment gateway services to thousands of merchants. Magento

Community Edition supports the following eWAY payment methods: l l l eWAY Direct eWAY Shared eWAY 3D Secure

Flo2Cash Payment Web Service

New Zealand-based Flo2Cash provides and approves Credit Card and Direct Debit facilities and is a leading provider of payment processing services and solutions, which enables businesses of all sizes to streamline their payment processes; this in turn improves cash flow and reduces operating expense.

Authorize.Net

Authorize.Net gives merchants the ability to accept credit card and payments through the Authorize.Net payment gateway. It processes the credit card information entered during checkout, and creates a transaction either for the payment authorization or for the payment authorization and a capture of the funds, depending on the configuration.

Authorize.Net can be used to pay for purchases made from the storefront or for orders placed from the Admin. Orders that use the Authorize.Net payment method can be processed from your store's Admin and also from the Authorize.Net merchant account.Based on the response that Magento receives from Authorize.Net, an order is created in Magento with an assigned Authorize.Net transaction number.

To find an order:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

In the list, click to open the order.

3.

On the order detail page, click the Invoice button.

The Amount field of the order has the following payment actions:

Payment Actions

Payment Action

Capture Online

Description

When an invoice is submitted, the system captures the payment amount through the external payment gateway. In this case, an invoice and a transaction of the “Capture” type

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 533

Direct Post Method Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways

Payment Action Description

Capture Offline

Not Capture

A payment capture transaction can be voided only from your Authorize.Net merchant account.

When an invoice is submitted using this option, the does not capture the payment, and only an offline invoice is created in

Magento. It is assumed that the payment will be captured directly through the payment gateway, and you do not have the option to capture the payment online through Magento.

If the invoice is captured online, you cannot create an online refund from Magento.

When an invoice is submitted using this option, Magento does not capture the payment, and no corresponding transaction is created in the Authorize.Net merchant account. However, it is assumed that you will capture the payment online through

Magento at a later date. Therefore, the Capture button is available in the completed invoice, which has a status temporarily set to “Pending.”

The order can be canceled at any time before the payment is captured. After the payment has been captured, a credit memo must be generated to cancel the order.

Authorize.Net does not allow partial invoices to be created from Magento. The Qty to

Invoice field cannot be edited on the New Invoice for Order page. When an invoice is captured online, a corresponding document with status of “Paid” is created and appears in the list of Invoices. In addition, a Capture transaction is added to the list of

Transactions.

You can partially capture the order amount from the Authorize.Net merchant account.

However, Authorize.Net does not allow for the remaining amount to be captured. In the case of a partial capture from Authorize.Net, no invoice or transaction is created in

Magento for the order.

Direct Post Method

Magento incorporates the Direct Post method for payments made through

Authorize.Net. When payments are made using the Direct Post Method, the

Authorize.Net gateway handles all steps in the transaction process, such as payment data collection, data submission, and response to the customer, while the customer remains in your store.

534 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways Direct Post Method

To enable and configure the Direct Post Method:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

Set Current Configuration Scope to the website where the configuration is to be applied.

To apply the configuration globally, accept the “Default Config” setting.

4.

Click to expand the Authorize.Net Direct Post section.

5.

Complete the settings as described in the following

field descriptions .

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enabled

Payment Action

Title

API Login ID

Transaction Key

Scope

Website

Website

Description

Activates Authorize Direct Post Method within the

Current Configuration Scope setting. Options include: Yes / No.

Determines how payments are authorized in the

Authorize.Net payment system and the entities that are created after the successful transaction.

Options include:

Authorize

Only

Funds on the customer's card are only authorized at the side of the Authorize.Net system and only an order is created in the backend of your store. You can later create an invoice and conduct the capturing.

Authorize and Capture unds on the customer's card are authorized and captured at

Authorize.Net side, and as a result an order and an invoice are created in the backend of your store.

Store View A label that identifies the payment method to customers during checkout.

Website

Website

Your Authorize.Net credentials.

Your Authorize.Net credentials.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 535

Direct Post Method Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways

Field

Merchant MD5

New Order Status

Test Mode

Gateway URL

Accepted Currency

Debug

Email Customer

Scope

Website

Website

Website

Website

Website

Website

Website

Description

The MD5 Hash value enables Magento to verify that transaction responses are securely received from Authorize.Net.

The MD5 Hash value is used by the payment gateway to encrypt responses for transactions, submitted for your account.You can set your

MD5 Hash Value on the Authorize.Net website at

Account > Settings > Security Settings > MD5-

Hash.

The status assigned to all new orders that are created using this payment method.

Determines if the Direct Post Method is working in a test environment, or processing live transactions. Options include:

Yes Sends a notification to Authorize.Net that orders should be sent to their test site.

No Orders are sent to Authorize.Net

as live transactions.

After testing transations, don't forget to set Test

Mode to "No," so you can process live transactions.

The URL to which order information is sent. the default URL is: https://secure.authorize.net/gateway/transact.dll.

If you have a special test URL from

Authorize.Net, you can set Test Mode to “No,” and specify the testing link in the Gateway

URL field. However, the URL of the live site must be re-entered before going live.

Make sure that the Accepted Currency field is set to “US Dollar,” because this is the only currency that Authorize.Net accepts.

Determines if all communication with the payment system is recorded in a log file.

Specify whether you want Authorize.Net to send emails to your customers on the completion of

536 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways Direct Post Method

Field

Merchant’s Email

Credit Card Types

Scope

Website

Website

Credit Card Verification Website

Payment from Applicable Countries

Payment from Specific

Countries

Minimum Order Total

Maximum Order Total

Sort Order

Website

Website

Website

Website

Website

Description the checkout.

This is in addition to the order confirmation email and other transactional email sent from

Magento.

If you want to receive email notifications of orders placed with the Direct Post Method, from

Authorize.Net, enter the email address that is associated with your account. If left blank, no email will be sent to you by Authorize.Net.

Select the options that will appear in the Credit

Card Type list during checkout. Options include:

American Express

Visa

MasterCard

Discover

Other

Determines if customers are required to enter the Credit Card Verification number during checkout. Options include: Yes / No.

Determines the countries from which you accept payment. Options include: All Allowed Countries

/ Specific Countries

Determines each country from which you accept payment. Only customers with a billing address in one of the selected countries can use this payment method.

Determines the minimum order total for orders processed with the Direct Post Method. The option appears only for orders that fall within the minimum and maximum range.

Determines the maximum order total for orders processed with the Direct Post Method. The option only for orders that fall within the minimum and maximum range.

Determines the sequence in which the Direct

Post Method is listed with other payment methods during checkout.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 537

Direct Post Method Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways

Admin Workflow

The Authorize.Net Direct Post Method can be used with orders created from the Admin as well as from the store. When creating an order, you can select it in the Payment

Method section. After selecting the option, the credit card data entry fields appear. If the transaction fails, an error message appears, and you can select another payment method or try again with another card.

The order process is similar to the standard

order workflow

. As with other orders, and invoice, shipment, and credit memo can be created.

Customer Workflow

If you enable this method, the customer can select it in the Payment Information section of the checkout process. After the customer clicks the corresponding option button and clicks Continue, the Order Review section of the checkout appears, with fields to enter the credit card information. The customer then specifies the card information and clicks the Place Order button.

If the transaction is successful, the customer is redirected to the order confirmation page. If the transaction fails on some reason, an error message is displayed in a dialog box and the customer may then select another payment method or try Authorize.Net

Direct Post with another card.

538

Checkout Using Authorize.Net Direct Post

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways Direct Post Method

Partial Authorization with Authorize.Net

Authorize.Net gives you the ability to accept multiple credit cards as payment for a single order. If there isn’t enough remaining balance on a single card to cover the purchase, the amount can be distributed across multiple cards. Up to five credit cards can be used to pay for a single order. Partial authorization can be activated in the

Authorize.Net configuration at either the global, or website level.

To enable partial authorization:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the upper-left, set Current Configuration Scope as needed. To use partial authorization at the global level, accept the “Default Config” setting.

3.

In the panel on the left under Sales, select Payment Methods . Then, click to expand the

Authorize.Net

section.

4.

Set Allow Partial Authorization to “Yes.”

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Customer Workflow

During the checkout process, the customer selects Authorize.Net, enters the card information, and proceeds to Order Review. When the customer clicks the Place Order button, the request is sent to Authorize.Net. If the amount available on the card is not enough to cover the order total, the following message appears:

The amount on your credit card is insufficient to complete your purchase. The available amount has been put on hold. To complete your purchase, click Continue and specify additional credit card number. To cancel the purchase and release the amount on hold, click Cancel.

If the customer chooses to continue, the Payment Information checkout step reappears, and the customer is prompted to enter another credit card. The information about the previously used credit cards appears as well.

If the customer clicks the Cancel button, all authorizations are reversed. The customer can then choose another payment method to complete the purchase. If the customer closes the browser window, the authorizations remain active until they expire. The term of each authorization depends on the bank that issued the credit card. An order is created only after the total amount of the order is captured.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 539

Direct Post Method Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways

540

Partial Authorization During Checkout

If the customer reaches the limit of five cards that can be used for one order, the following message appears during Order Review:

You have reached the maximum number of credit cards that can be used for the payment.

When the customer clicks the OK button, the Payment Information checkout step reappears, with the following message:

You have reached the maximum number of credit cards that can be used for one payment. The available amounts on all used cards were insufficient to complete payment. The payment has been canceled and amounts on hold have been released.

The system sends a request to Authorize.Net to void all authorizations of this payment.

The customer can now choose another payment method, or try a different credit card.

During partial authorization, the bank might reject the transaction, For example, the daily limit for the card might be exceeded. In this case, Authorize.Net sends the appropriate response to Magento and the following message appears:

Your credit card has been declined. Click Continue to specify another credit card to complete your purchase. Click Cancel to release the amount on hold and select another payment method.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways Direct Post Method

If the customer decides to reverse the payment and clicks Cancel, the payment is reversed, and a request is sent to Authorize.Net to release the amounts on hold from the previously entered cards. The customer can then select another payment method. If the customer chooses to continue, the Payment Information checkout step reappears, and the customer is prompted to enter another credit card.

Before the order is placed, the customer can click the Cancel button from the Payment

Information step to reverse all authorizations and release all amounts.

If the customer changes any order information after having started the partial authorization process, an error will occur when the order is submitted. In such a case, all authorizations are released, and the customer is redirected to the Payment Information checkout step.

Admin Workflow

Partial authorization can be applied to new orders and recorders from the Admin. After you choose the Authorize.Net payment method, enter the card information, and click the

Submit Order button, the request is sent to Authorize.Net. If the amount on the card is not enough to cover the order, the available funds are put on hold, and the partial authorization is triggered. A message appears on the Create New Order page, asking if you want to continue. If you choose to continue, the system displays the information about the previously used credit cards, and prompts you to enter another credit card. If you click the Cancel button, all authorizations are reversed.

If you close the browser window during the partial authorization process, the authorizations remain active until they expire. The term of authorization depends on the bank that issued the credit card.

If payment is not complete, you can click the Cancel button in the upper-right corner.

Magento then sends a request to Authorize.Net to void the authorization for all cards that were entered during the process, and the amounts on hold are released. If the payment gateway is not able to void authorization for some transactions, the order is canceled by the system only.

Do not change any order information after the partial authorization process begins.

Otherwise, an error occur when you submit the order, and all authorizations are released automatically.

Partial Authorization Refunds

When processing a refund for an order that was paid with partial authorizations,

Magento refunds the correct captured amount to each card. The process is managed by the system, and requires no action on your part.

When initiating an online invoice or refund, and some authorizations fail, the system proceeds with the remaining authorizations, but does not generate the invoice or refund.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 541

Direct Post Method Chapter 46:  Payment Solutions & Gateways

After all authorizations have been processed, information about the successful authorizations, as well as any that failed, appears in the header of the order. The same information is added to the order comments section of the order.

The administrator is then prompted to process the failed authorizations manually, by creating an offline invoice or offline refund in Magento.

For a partial refund, the amounts are refunded to the cards from which they originated, in the order of authorization. The amount captured from the first card is the first to be refunded. In this order, it is possible for the amount reversed on the last card to be less than what was captured during the partial authorization process. In this case the transaction for the card remains open, and can be closed in the next partial refund.

Magento stores only the last four digits of the credit card number. For a period of 120 days after the payment, Authorize.Net allows merchant systems to submit a refund using the last four digits of the credit card. After 120 days have passed, you cannot process an online refund for an order that was paid with Authorize.Net.

Because American Express does not support authorization reversals, it is not possible to create an online refund for any purchases paid for with this method. In such a case, you can create an offline refund, and settle the situation by releasing the customer’s funds through the appropriate merchant account, outside of the Magento system.

542 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 47:

Payment Services

Your Magento Community Edition includes support for the following service to provide an additional layer of protection against fraudulent charges and chargebacks for sales.

3D Secure Credit Card Validation

Magento Community Edition includes the option to use 3D Secure authentication for payment transactions made with Authorize.Net. Cardinal Centinel® is the company that provides the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation service.

During checkout, the customer is prompted to enter a secret code that is assigned to the card, which is then used to confirm the identity of the cardholder. The bank also provides additional data elements to confirm the cardholder’s identity. The service provider arranges the communication between the banks and payment systems. 3D

Secure authentication can be used for orders placed from the store, or from the

Admin.

To learn more information about the 3D Secure protocol, search by “Verified by Visa,”

“MasterCard SecureCode,” and “J/Secure.”

Process Overview:

Step 1: Complete the 3D Secure Configuration

Step 2: Enable 3D Secure for Authorize.Net

Step 1:

Complete the 3D Secure Configuration

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Services .

3.

To apply the configuration at the website level, set Current Configuration Scope in the upper-left corner, as needed. To apply the configuration at the global level, accept the “Default Config” setting.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 543

3D Secure Credit Card Validation Chapter 47:  Payment Services

4.

Click to expand the 3D Secure Credit Card Validation section. Then, do the following:

3D Secure Credit Card Validation a.

Enter the following credentials that are required to connect to the Cardinal Centinel system: l l l

Processor ID

Merchant ID

Pasword b.

To test 3D Secure Validation before going live in the store, set Test Mode to “Yes.” c.

To save a log file of all interactions between your server and the Cardinal Centinel system, set Debug Mode to “Yes.”

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Processor ID

Scope

Website

Merchant ID

Password

Test Mode

Debug Mode

Website

Website

Website

Website

Description

Specify the merchant processor identification code. This value is assigned to you by Cardinal

Centinel.

Specify the merchant identification code. This value is also assigned to you by Cardinal

Centinel.

Specify the password to connect to the Cardinal

Centinel system.

Choose whether the connection with the Cardinal Centinel system is tested prior to start the real life 3D Secure validation of payment transactions.

Saves a log file of all interaction between your server and the Cardinal Centinel system.

Options include: Yes / No.

544 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 47:  Payment Services 3D Secure Credit Card Validation

Step 2:

Enable 3D Secure for Authorize.Net

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Payment Methods .

3.

To apply the configuration at the website level, set Current Configuration Scope in the upper-left corner as needed. To apply the configuration at the global level, accept the

“Default Config” setting.

4.

Click to expand the Authorize.Net

section. Then, scroll down to the 3D Secure section.

Then, do the following:

Enable 3D Secure Card for Authorize.Net

a.

Set Enable 3D Secure Card Validation on Frontend to “Yes.”

If you are use Magento Secure Payment Bridge, you can ignore the additional settings.

b.

In the Severe 3D Secure Card Validation field, specify if you want severe validation to be applied to credit card purchases made through the Centinel system. Severe validation removes merchant liability for any chargebacks that may occur.

c.

In the Centinel API URL field, enter the URL that was provided by Cardinal Centinel to establish the connection with their system.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enable 3D Secure Card

Validation on Frontend

Severe 3D Secure Card

Validation

Centinel API URL

Scope

Website

Website

Website

Description

Activates 3D Secure for use with Authorize.Net.

Options Include: Yes / No.

Severe Validation removes chargeback liability from the merchant. Options include: Yes / No.

Enter the URL provided in your 3D Secure agreement.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 545

3D Secure Credit Card Validation Chapter 47:  Payment Services

3D Secure Customer Workflow

During the checkout process, the customer selects the Authorize.Net payment method, enters the credit card information, and clicks the Continue button. During Order Review, the bank that issued the credit card displays a form to verify the customer’s identity.

Depending on the bank’s requirements, the customer might be required to enter a secret code, log in to an account, or complete another activity.

546

3D Secure Authentication for the Customer

After submitting the form, the customer is returned to Order Review. The customer clicks the Place Order button. If the authentication succeeds, the customer proceeds to the order confirmation page. If the authentication fails for any reason, an error message appears and the customer can select another payment method or try again with

Authorize.Net.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Shipping

Chapter 48:

Basic Shipping Methods

Magento Community Edition supports a wide range of shipping methods and carriers. This section shows how to configure the following basic shipping methods: l l l l l

Shipping Settings

Flat Rate

Free Shipping

Table Rates

Online Rates

The setup instructions in this chapter take place in the Configuration section of your store’s Admin. The Shipping Methods tab manages the configuration for the various shipping methods and services that are available to your customers during checkout.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 549

Shipping Settings Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods

Shipping Settings

The Shipping Settings establish the point of origin for all shipments made from your store or warehouse, and determine if you support shipments to multiple addresses. The point of origin also determines the store tax rate for products sold.

550

Origin

To establish the point of origin:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, click Shipping Settings .

3.

Click to expand the Origin section, and complete the following: l l l l l

Country

Region / State

ZIP / Postal Code

City

Street Address (and line 2, if needed)

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

To support shipments to multiple addresses:

1.

Click to expand the Options section, and complete the following:

2.

Set Allow Shipping to Multiple Addresses to “Yes.”

3.

To limit the number of address you accept per shipment, enter the number in the

Maximum Qty Allowed for Shipping to Multiple Addresses field.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Options

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods Flat Rate

Flat Rate

Flat rate is a fixed, predefined charge that can be applied per item, or per shipment. Flat rate is a simple solution, especially when used with the flat-rate packaging that is available from some carriers.

Flat Rate

To set up flat rate shipping:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . In the panel on the left, under

Sales, select Shipping Methods .

2.

Click to expand the Flat Rate section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Enabled to “Yes.”

Flat Rate appears as an option in the Estimate Shipping and Tax section of the shopping cart, and also in the Shipping section during checkout.

b.

Enter a descriptive Title for this shipping method. The default is “Flat Rate.” c.

Enter a Method Name that appears next to the calculated rate in the shopping cart.

The default method name is “Fixed.” If you charge a handling fee, you can change the Method Name to “Plus Handling” or something else that is suitable.

d.

To describe how flat rate shipping can be used, set Type to one of the following:

None Disables the payment type. The Flat Rate option is listed

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 551

Free Shipping Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods

Per Order

Per Item in the cart, but with a rate of zero—which is the same as free shipping.

Charges a single flat rate for the entire order.

Charges a single flat rate for each item. The rate is multiplied by the number of items in the cart, regardless of whether there are multiple quantities of the same, or of different items.

e.

Enter the Price to be charged for the flat rate fee.

f.

If charging a handling fee, set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: l l

Fixed

Percent

Then, enter the Handling Fee rate according to the method used to calculate the fee.

For example, if the fee is calculating based on a percentage, enter 0.06 for 6 percent.

If using a fixed amount calculation, enter the fee as a decimal.

g.

In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message that appears if this method becomes unavailable.

h.

Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this shipping method.

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the Ship to Specific Countries list appears. Select each country in the list where this shipping method can be used.

i.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the position of Flat Rate in the list of shipping methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Free Shipping

Free shipping is one of the most effective promotions you can offer. It can be based on a minimum purchase, or set up as a shopping cart

price rule

that applies when a set of conditions is met. If both apply to the same order, the configuration setting will take precedence over the shopping cart rule.

Check your shipping carrier configuration for any additional settings that may be required for free shipping.

552 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods Free Shipping

Free Shipping

To set up free shipping:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . In the panel on the left, under

Sales, select Shipping Methods .

2.

Click to expand the Free Shipping section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Enter a Title for this shipping method that will be displayed during checkout.

c.

Enter a descriptive Method Name to identify this shipping method.

d.

Enter the Minimum Order Amount to qualify for free shipping.

To use Free Shipping with

Table Rates

, you must enter a Minimum Order Amount so high that it is never met. This prevents Free Shipping from going into effect, unless triggered by a price rule.

e.

In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message to appear if this method becomes unavailable.

f.

Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from all

countries

specified in your store configuration can use this shipping method.

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the Ship to Specific Countries list appears.Select each country in the list where this shipping method can be used.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 553

Table Rates Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods g.

Set Show Method if Not Applicable to one of the following:

Yes

No

Always shows the Free Shipping method, even when not applicable.

Shows the Free Shipping method only when applicable.

h.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine the position of Free Shipping in the list of shipping methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

4.

Make sure that you complete any configuration that is required for each carrier you plan to use with free shipping. For example, assuming that your UPS configuration is otherwise complete, make the following settings to enable and configure free shipping: a.

From the Shipping Methods configuration, click to expand the UPS section.

b.

In the UPS section, set Free Method to “Ground.” c.

To require a minimum order for free shipping, set Free Shipping with Minimum

Order Amount to “Enable.” d.

Enter the required amount in the Minimum Order Amount for Free Shipping field.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Table Rates

The table rate shipping method lets you set up a table to calculate shipping rates for a combination of conditions. The shipping rate can be based on the following: l l l

Weight v. Destination

Price v. Destination

# of Items v. Destination

For example, if your warehouse is located in Los Angeles, it costs less to ship to San

Diego than to Vermont. You can use table rate shipping to pass the savings on to your customer.

Only one set of table rate data can be active at a time.

The data that is used to calculate the rate is prepared in a spreadsheet and imported into your store. When the customer requests a quote, the results appear in the shipping estimate section of the shopping cart.

554 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods Table Rates

Table Rate in Shopping Cart

Process Overview:

Step 1: Complete the Default Settings

Step 2: Prepare the Table Rate Data

Step 3: Import the Table Rate Data

Step 1:

Complete the Default Settings

The first step is to complete the default settings for table rates. You can complete this step without changing the scope of the configuration.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Methods .

3.

Click to expand the Table Rates section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Enabled to “Yes.” b.

Enter a Title for the section of table rates that appears during checkout. (The default title is “Best Way.”) c.

Enter the Method Name that appears next to the calculated rate in the shopping cart.

d.

Set Condition to one of the following calculation methods: l l l

Weight v. Destination

Price v. Destination

# of Items v. Destination

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 555

Table Rates Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods e.

For orders that include virtual products, set Include Virtual Products in Price

Calculation to “Yes” if you want to be able to include the virtual product(s) in the calculation.

Because virtual products—such as services—have no weight, they cannot change the result of a calculation that is based on the Weight v. Destination condition.

However, virtual products can change the result of a calculation that is based on either the Price v. Destination or # of Items vs Destination condition.

f.

If charging a handling fee, set Calculate Handling Fee to one of the following: l l

Fixed

Percent

Then, enter the Handling Fee rate according to the method used to calculate the fee.

If the handling fee is based on a percent, enter the whole number without the percent sign.

g.

In the Displayed Error Message box, type the message that appears when this method is not available.

h.

Set Ship to Applicable Countries to one of the following:

All Allowed Countries Customers from any

country

specified in your store configuration can use table rate shipping.

Specific Countries After choosing this option, the “Ship to Specific

Countries” list appears. Select each country where customers can use table rate shipping.

i.

Enter a Sort Order number to determine where table rates appear in the list of shipping methods during checkout. (0 = first, 1 = second, 2 = third, and so on.)

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

556 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods Table Rates

Table Rates

Step 2:

Prepare the Table Rate Data

1.

In the upper-left corner, set Current Configuration Scope to the “Main Website,” or any other website where you want the configuration to apply.

Export and Import options appear in the Table Rates section, with “Use Default” checkboxes to the right of each option.

To change any of the current settings, you must first clear the “Use Default” checkbox next to the field.

2.

If you want to change the Condition , clear the Use Default checkbox. Then, select another option.

3.

Click the Export CSV button. Then, save the tablerates.csv

file to your computer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 557

Table Rates Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods

Export CSV

4.

Open the file in Excel, or any other spreadsheet program.

5.

Complete the table with appropriate values for the shipping calculation condition being used.

l

You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to represent all possible values in any category.

l

The Country column must contain a valid three-character code for each row.

558

Weight vs. Destination

6.

When complete, save the tablerates.csv

file.

Step 3:

Import the Table Rate Data

1.

Return to the Table Rates section of your store configuration.

2.

In the upper-left corner, set Current Configuration Scope to the website where this method will be used.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods

3.

Next to the Import field, click the Choose File button. Select your completed tablerates.csv

file, and import the rates.

Table Rates

Import Table Rates

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button. Then, go through the payment process with different addresses to make sure the shipping and handling rates are correct.

Price v. Destination Example

This example uses the Price v. Destination condition to create a set of three different shipping rates based on the amount of the order subtotal for the continental United

States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The asterisk (*) is a wildcard that represents all values.

Country

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

Region / State

AK

AK

HI

HI

HI

*

*

*

AK

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

ZIP / Postal

Code

*

*

100

0

50

100

Order Subtotal

(and above)

0

50

0

50

100

Shipping Price

15

10

20

15

10

15

10

5

20

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 559

Online Rates Chapter 48:  Basic Shipping Methods

Online Rates

Magento offers dynamic retrieval of rates from various shipping providers.

Most shipping providers require that you open an account with them. Consult your shipping provider for details on how to obtain API credentials.

To enable and configure these shipping methods, expand the appropriate tabs (UPS,

USPS, FedEx, or DHL) and configure the settings. The configuration of this method is similar to the configuration of Flat Rate. Because the options differ for each service, contact the carrier for more information.

560 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 49:

Shipping Carriers

If you have a commercial account with a supported carrier, you can offer your customers the convenience of choosing that carrier during checkout. The rates are automatically downloaded, so you do not need to look up the information.

Before you can offer your customers a selection of shipping carriers, you must first complete the

shipping settings

to establish the point of origin for your store. Then, complete the configuration for each carrier service that you want to offer. The configuration options vary for each carrier. However, all require that you first open a shipping account with the carrier, and enter your account number or user ID, and the gateway URL to their system into the configuration of your store.

See

Magento Connect

for additional shipping services for your Magento Community

Edition installation.

UPS

United Parcel Service offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air to more than 220 countries.

USPS

The United States Postal Service is the independent postal service of United States government. USPS offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air.

FedEx

Offers domestic and international shipping services by land and air to more than

220 countries.

DHL

Offers integrated international services and tailored, customer-focused solutions for managing and transporting letters, goods and information.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 561

Package Type by Carrier Chapter 49:  Shipping Carriers

Package Type by Carrier

The following tables list the shipping methods and supported package types for U.S. and international shipments, by carrier.

l l l

Custom packaging has been added to each shipping method of each shipping carrier.

Shipping methods are divided into U.S. and International. Those that are marked as

“U.S.” are for US domestic shipments only. Those that are marked as "International" can be those shipped from the U.S. to other countries, from other countries to the

U.S. and within countries other than the U.S. FedEx does not offer domestic shipments for countries other than the U.S. at this time. USPS offers shipments from the U.S. only for both domestic and international.

For international shipping, available package types sometimes depend on the country of origin (U.S. or other). If a shipment originates outside of the U.S., the available package types are filtered according to the types that are acceptable. For shipments that originate in countries other than the U.S., the full list of package types available for the selected shipping carrier is provided.

FedEx

FedEx (U.S.)

Shipping Method

FedEx First Overnight

FedEx Priority Overnight

FedEx Standard Overnight

FedEx 2Day

FedEx Express Saver

FedEx Ground

FedEx Home Delivery

FedEx SmartPost

Package Type

FedEx Envelope

FedEx Pak

FedEx Box

FedEx Tube

Your Packaging

(same as above)

(same as above)

(same as above)

FedEx Envelope

FedEx Pak

Your Packaging

Your Packaging

562 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 49:  Shipping Carriers

FedEx (International)

Shipping Method

FedEx International First

FedEx International Priority

FedEx International Ground

FedEx Europe First Priority

UPS

UPS (U.S.)

Shipping Method

UPS Next Day Air Early AM

UPS 2nd Day Air

UPS Next Day Air

UPS 2nd Day Air AM

UPS 3 Day Select

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Package Type

FedEx Envelope

FedEx Pak

FedEx Box

FedEx Tube

Your Packaging

FedEx Envelope

FedEx Pak

FedEx Box

FedEx 10 kg Box

FedEx 25 kg Box

FedEx Tube

Your Packaging

Your Packaging

FedEx Envelope

FedEx Pak

FedEx 10 kg Box

FedEx 25 kg Box

Your Packaging

Package Type

Small Express Box

Medium Express Box

Large Express Box

UPS Express Tube

UPS Pak

UPS Letter

Your Packaging

(same as above)

(same as above)

(same as above)

Your Packaging

Package Type by Carrier

563

Package Type by Carrier Chapter 49:  Shipping Carriers

Shipping Method

UPS Ground

Package Type

Your Packaging

UPS (International)

Shipping Method

UPS Worldwide Express

UPS Worldwide Express Plus

UPS Worldwide Saver

UPS Worldwide Expedited

UPS Worldwide Expedited

Package Type

Small Express Box

Medium Express Box

Large Express Tube

UPS Express Tube

UPS 10 kg Box

UPS 25 kg Box

UPS Pak

UPS Letter

Customer Packaging

(same as above)

(same as above)

(same as above)

Small Express Box

Medium Express Box

Large Express Tube

UPS Express Tube

UPS 10 kg Box

UPS 25 kg Box

UPS Pak

Customer Packaging

USPS

USPS (International)

Shipping Method

Express Mail® International Flat Rate Envelope

Package Type

Express Mail International Flat Rate Envelope

Express Mail Flat Rate Envelop Hold for

Pickup

Priority Mail International Large Flat Rate

Box

Priority Mail International Small Flat Rate

Box

Express Mail International Flat Rate Envelope

Priority Mail International Medium Flat Rate

Box

Priority Mail International Small Flat Rate

Box

564 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 49:  Shipping Carriers Package Type by Carrier

Shipping Method

Priority Mail International Flat Rate Envelope

Global Express Guaranteed (GXG)

USPS GXG Envelopes

Package Type

Priority Mail International Flat Rate Envelope

Large Package/Non-Rectangular (Regular and Medium)

Variable

Large Package/Rectangular (Regular and

Medium)

Large Package/Non-Rectangular (Regular and Medium)

Variable

(same as above)

(same as above)

(same as above)

Express Mail International

Priority Mail International

First-Class Mail International Package

DHL

DHL (International)

Shipping Method

Express

Express International

Package Type

Package

Letter

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 565

Package Type by Carrier

566

Chapter 49:  Shipping Carriers

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 50:

Shipping Labels

Magento Community Edition includes a high level of integration with major shipping carriers, which gives you access to carrier shipping systems to track orders, create shipping labels, and more. Shipping labels can be created for regular shipments and products with return merchandise authorization.

In this chapter, the following terminology used in reference to shipping label requirements:

International shipments Shipments where the sender and recipient are in different countries; international borders are crossed.

Domestic shipments Shipments where the sender and recipient are in the same country; no international borders are crossed.

Shipping labels are supported by the following carriers, with the following constraints:

USPS

UPS

FedEx

DHL

Requires a USPS account.

Requires a UPS account. Shipping labels are available only for shipments that originate in the U.S. Specific credentials are required for stores outside the US.

Requires a FedEx account. For stores outside of the U.S., shipping labels are supported for international shipments only. FedEx does not allow domestic shipments that originate outside of the U.S

Requires a DHL account. Shipping labels are supported only for shipments that originate in the U.S.

Workflow

When you create a shipping label, Magento prompts you for information about packaging you want to use (type, size, etc.) and which products go with which package. When you finish, Magento connects to the shipping carrier web-services,

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 567

Shipping Label Configuration Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels creates an order in its system, and receives the shipping label for the shipment. The tracking number(s) are also received and added in the Admin.

An individual shipment order for each package is created, as a result multiple shipping labels can be received for one shipment in Magento.

Shipping Label Configuration

The following settings must be made at the product level, as well as in the configuration of each carrier. It is recommended that you complete the configuration for each carrier that you intend to use to produce shipping labels.

To configure shipping labels:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

The Country of Manufacture field is required for each product that is shipped internationally by USPS and FedEx, Update the field for each product record, as needed.

568

Country of Manufacture

3.

When complete, click the Save button.

If you have many products that need to be updated with the same information, do the following: a.

In the Manage Products list, select the checkbox of each product that needs to be updated. For example, all products that are manufactured in China.

b.

Set the Actions control to “Update Attributes,” and click the Submit button.

c.

In the Update Attributes form, find the Country of Manufacture field and select the

Change checkbox. Then, select the country from the list and click the Save button.

4.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then, do the following: a.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Shipping Settings . Click to expand the

Origin section, and verify that the following fields are complete:

Street Address The street address of the place from which shipments are sent. For example, the location of your company or warehouse. This field is required for shipping labels.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels Shipping Label Configuration

Street Address Line 2 Any additional address information, such as the floor, entrance and so on. We strongly recommend that you use this field.

Origin b.

In the Configuration panel under Sales, select Shipping Methods . Click to expand the USPS section, and verify that the following fields are complete:

Secure Gateway URL

Password

You do not need to configure this field, it is prepopulated by Magento.

The password is provided by USPS, and gives you access to their system through Web Services.

The default dimensions of the package. To make these fields appear, set Size to “Large,”

Length, Width

Height, Girth c.

Click to expand the FedEx section, and verify that the following fields are complete: l l l

Meter Number

Key

Password

This information is provided by the carrier, and is required to gain access to their system through Web Services.

d.

In the Configuration panel under General, select Store Information . Verify that the fields in this section are complete. If you have multiple stores, and the contact information differs from the default, set Current Configuration Scope to the store view and verify that the information is complete. If any of this information is missing, an error message will appear when you try to print shipping labels.

Store Name

Store Contact

Telephone

Country

The name of the store or store view.

The telephone number of the primary contact for the store or store view.

The country where your store is based.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 569

Generate Shipping Labels Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels

VAT Number If applicable the Value Added Tax number of your store.

(Not required for stores based in the U.S.)

Store Contact Address The street address of the primary contact for the store or store view.

Store Information e.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Generate Shipping Labels

You can decide to create a shipping label while creating the shipment in the Admin, or later, when the shipment already exists.

To create a shipping label at the shipment creation stage:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

Open the order for editing.

3.

Click the Ship button in the upper right corner of the order view.

4.

On the New Shipment page, configure the shipment, select the Create Shipping Label checkbox above the Submit Shipment button, and click the Submit Shipment button.

570

Create Shipping Label

5.

In the

Create Packages

pop-up, add the packages, distribute all shipped products among the packages, and click OK .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels Generate Shipping Labels

Create Package

This is a required step for creating a shipping label. If you click Cancel, the shipping label will not be created and the Create Shipping Label checkbox will be cleared.

Magento connects to the shipping carrier, creates the order in its system, and receives a shipping label and tracking number for each package. If a shipping label is successfully created, the new shipment is saved and the shipping label is available for printing. A tracking number appears in the Shipping and Tracking Information section. If the shipping label cannot be created due to problems with connection or any other reason, the shipment is not created.

To create a shipping label for an existing shipment:

1.

Open a shipment for editing.

2.

Click the Create Shipping Label button in the Shipping and Tracking Information section.

3.

In the Create Packages pop-up add packages, distribute all shipped products to the correct package, and click OK .

This is a required step for creating the shipping label. If you click Cancel, the shipping label is not created.

Magento connects to the shipping carrier, creates the order in its system, and receives a shipping label and a tracking number. If a shipping label for this shipment already existed in the system, it is replaced with a new one. Existing tracking numbers are not replaced. The new received tracking numbers are added to the existing ones. The information about the packages created and their contents is saved in the system.

4.

To view the information, click the Show Packages button located next to the Print

Shipping Label button.

If you create shipping labels multiple times, the Show Packages window reflects the most recent package configuration.

To print a shipping label:

Shipping labels are stored in PDF format. When you click the Print Shipping Label button, the PDF file is downloaded. If your browser settings allow it, you can open the file at once, and print the shipping labels. Each shipping label is placed on a separate page in the PDF file.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 571

Create Packages Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels

In addition to the usual information each shipping carrier adds to a shipping label, it includes the Magento order number, number of the package, and the total quantity of packages for the Magento shipment.

For all shipping labels created for DHL, FedEx, and UPS shipments, the “Type of Goods” field of the shipping is “Merchandise.” For USPS, it reflects the value specified in the

Contents field of the Create Packages pop-up window.

1.

Open the shipment in edit mode.

2.

In the Shipping and Tracking Information section of the shipment, click the Print

Shipping Label button.

If the Print Shipping Label button does not appear, a shipping label has not been created for this shipment. Click the Create Shipping Label button first. When Magento receives the shipping label from the carrier, the Print Shipping Label button appears.

Create Packages

The Create Packages pop-up window appears if you choose to create a shipping label.

You can start configuring the first package at once.

Create Package

To configure a package:

1.

Complete the fields as described below.

If you select the non-default value in the Type field or choose to require a signature confirmation, the price of a shipment may differ from the one you charged to the customer.

2.

To view a list of shipped products and add them to the package, click the Add Products button.

The Qty column is pre-populated with the maximum available quantity to add (for the

Package 1 this number is equal to the total shipped quantity of the product).

3.

Specify the products and quantities. To add the products to the package, click the Add

Selected Product(s) to Package button in the header of the grid. The products are added to the package.

572 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels Create Packages l l

To add a new package, click the Add Package button in the window header. You can add several packages, and edit them simultaneously.

To delete a package, click the Delete Package button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Type

Total Weight

Length

Width

Height

Signature

Description

The type of a package. Select one of the predefined values.

Available package types are different for each shipping carrier, and also depend on the shipping method selected during order creation. To see the complete list of shipping methods and their supported packages implemented in Magento.

When the Create Packages pop-up window opens, the default package for the shipping carrier set in system configuration is selected in the Type field.

If you select a package, which is not designed by a shipping carrier, you will need to specify the dimensions of the package.

This field is unavailable for USPS domestic shipments, because specifying package types is not necessary for these shipments.

The total weight of a package. The field is pre-populated with the total weight of products in a package, after you add them, but can be edited manually. The measurement units can be specified using the drop-down menu next to the field; select between pounds and kilograms.

The length of a package, integer and floating point numbers.

The field is enabled if the custom package type is used. The measurement units can be specified using the drop-down menu next to the Height field; select between inches and centimeters.

The width of a package, integer and floating point numbers.

The field is enabled if the custom package type is used. The measurement units can be specified using the drop-down menu next to the Height field; select between inches and centimeters.

The height of a package, integer and floating point numbers.

The field is enabled if the custom package type is used. The measurement units can be specified using the drop-down menu next to the Height field; select between inches and centimeters.

Confirmation Defines delivery confirmation. Options include:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 573

Create Packages

Field

Contents

Explanation

Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels

Description

Not Required No delivery confirmation letter is sent.

No Signature

Signature

Required

A delivery confirmation letter without a recipient’s signature is sent to you.

The shipping carrier obtains the recipient’s signature and provides you with its printed copy.

Adult Required The shipping carrier obtains the adult recipient’s signature and provides you with its printed copy.

Direct (FedEx only)

Indirect (FedEx only)

FedEx obtains a signature from someone at the delivery address and reattempts delivery if no one is available to sign for the package.

FedEx obtains a signature in one of three ways: (1) from someone at the delivery address; (2) from a neighbor, building manager or other person at a neighboring address; or (3) the recipient can leave a signed FedEx Door Tag authorizing release of the package without anyone present. Available for residential deliveries only.

The field availability and options may vary slightly for different shipping methods.

For the most up to date information please refer to shipping carrier’s resources.

(Available for USPS shipments only) Description of the package contents. Select from the following:

Gift

Documents

Commercial Sample

Returned Goods

Merchandise

Other

(Available for USPS shipments only) Detailed description of the package content.

574 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels Print Labels for Multiple Orders

Change Product Quantities in Package

After the products are added to the package, their quantity cannot be edited directly. To increase the quantity of the product in the package, click the Add Selection button, and specify the additional quantity. This number will be added to the previous quantity of the product in the package. To decrease the quantity, delete the product from the package, click Add Selection, and specify the new, smaller value.

After you distribute all products, the total number of the packages you are going to use is equal to the number of the last package in the list.

The OK button is disabled until all shipped items are distributed between packages and all necessary information is specified. After you finish creating packages and distributing the products, click OK. Magento starts the shipping label generation process.

If you click Cancel, your packages are not saved and shipping label creation is canceled.

Print Labels for Multiple Orders

Printing shipping labels is available as mass action on the Orders and the Shipments pages.

To print shipping labels for the shipments of multiple orders:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Orders .

2.

In the list, select the checkhox of each order that needs shipping labels.

3.

Set the Actions control to “Print Shipping Labels.”

4.

Click the Submit button.

Shipping labels will be printed for all shipments that are related to the selected orders, for which shipping labels have already been created.

Similarly, multiple shipping labels can be printed on the Shipments. page.

To open the Shipments page:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Shipments .

2.

Follow the same process described above.

Tracking Numbers

Together with shipping labels, Magento receives the tracking numbers related to the shipment. The tracking numbers are inserted in the Shipping and Tracking Information section of the shipment. When you create shipping labels multiple times, previous tracking numbers are not deleted.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 575

Tracking Numbers

576

Chapter 50:  Shipping Labels

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Taxes

Chapter 51:

Managing Taxes

Magento provides a variety of options for defining taxes that can be accessed by selecting the Sales menu and then the Tax option. Tax classes are used to define “tax rules.” Tax rules are defined as a combination of a Product Class, a Customer Class and a Tax Zone and Rate, as described in this chapter.

Each type of customer can be assigned a customer class when you define them, and each product is assigned a tax class. Magento analyzes the shopping cart of each customer and calculates the appropriate tax according to the class of the customer, the class of the products in the shopping cart, and the region (as defined by the customer’s shipping address, billing address or shipping origin).

Magento also supports the calculation of Value-Added Tax (VAT) for business-tobusiness transactions in the European Union.

To learn more, see the Knowledge Base article: Recommended Tax Configurations and Best Practices .

Important! No guarantee is made regarding any information in this guide. Please contact an expert before making decisions about tax matters.

Tax Resource Permissions

Admin

permissions

can be set to restrict access to tax resources, based on the business “need to know.” To create an Admin

role

with access to tax settings, select both the Sales/Tax and System/Tax resources. If setting up a website for a region that differs from your default shipping point of origin, you must also allow access to the System/Shipping resources for the role, because the

shipping settings

determine the store tax rate used for catalog prices.

General Tax Configuration

Before setting up your taxes, make sure that you are familiar with the tax requirements of your locale. Then, complete the tax configuration as needed for your store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 579

General Tax Configuration Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

Process Overview:

Step 1: Set Up Tax Classes

Step 2: Complete the Calculation Settings

Step 3:Set Up the Default Tax Destination

Step 4: Complete the Display Settings

Step 5: Complete the Fixed Product Tax Settings

Step 1:

Set Up Tax Classes

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Tax .

3.

If you have multiple websites, set Current Configuration Scope to the website where the tax configuration applies.

4.

Click to expand the Tax Classes section.

Tax Classes

5.

Set Tax Class for Shipping to the appropriate class. The default classes are: l l l

Taxable Goods

Shipping

Tax Exempt

580 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes General Tax Configuration

Step 2:

Complete the Calculation Settings

1.

Click to expand the Calculation Settings section. Then, do the following:

Tax Calculation Settings a.

In the Tax Calculation Method Based On field, select whether the tax is based on the price of each unit, or on the “row total” (that is, the total for a line item in the order, accounting for any discounts).

b.

In the Tax Calculation Based On field, select whether the tax is calculated based on the customer’s shipping address, billing address, or your store’s shipping origin.

c.

In the Catalog Prices field, specify whether the catalog prices of items include tax or exclude tax.

d.

In the Shipping Prices field, select whether the shipping amounts include tax or exclude tax.

e.

In the Apply Customer Tax field, select whether tax is applied to the original or discounted price.

f.

In the Apply Discount on Prices field, select whether any discounts applied include the tax or exclude it.

g.

In the Apply Tax On field, select whether tax is applied to custom prices or to original prices.

h.

In the Enable Cross Border Trade field, select “Yes” to use consistent pricing across different tax rates, or select “No” to vary the price by tax rate.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 581

General Tax Configuration Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

Important! If you enable cross-border trade your profit margin changes by tax rate. In other words, your profit is determined by the formula (Revenue -

CustomerVAT - CostOfGoodsSold) . To enable cross-border trade you must set prices to display including tax.

Step 3:

Set Up the Default Tax Destination

1.

Click to expand the Default Tax Destination Calculation section.

2.

Select the Default Country to be used for tax calculations.

3.

Select the Default State to be used for tax calculations.

4.

Select the Default Post Code to be used for tax calculations.

An asterisk can be used as a wildcard to represent all State and Post Code values.

Default Tax Calculation Settings

Step 4:

Complete the Price Display Settings

1.

Click to expand the Price Display Settings section Then, do the following:

Price Display Settings a.

Set Display Product Prices in Catalog to one of the following: l l l

Excluding Tax

Including Tax

Including and Excluding Tax

If you set the Display Product Prices field to “Including Tax,” the tax appears only if there is a tax rule that matches the tax origin, or if Magento detects that the customer address matches the tax rule. This can happen after a customer creates an account, logs in, or uses the Tax and Shipping estimation tool in the cart.

b.

Set Display Shipping Prices to one of the following:

582 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes General Tax Configuration l l l

Excluding Tax

Including Tax

Including and Excluding Tax

2.

Click to expand the Shopping Cart Display Settings section.

For each section listed, chose how you want taxes and prices to be shown for products in a shopping cart, according to the requirements of your store and locale.

Shopping Cart Display Settings

3.

Click to expand the Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos Display Settings section. Then, select how prices and taxes are displayed in orders, invoices, and credit memos.

Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos Display Settings

Step 5:

Complete the Fixed Product Tax Settings

4.

Click to expand the Fixed Product Taxes section. Then, specify the behavior of fixed per product taxes, such as the European DEEE/WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic

Equipment) tax, according to the requirements for your store and products.

Fixed Product Taxes

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 583

Tax Classes Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

To assign a fixed tax to a product, create an attribute with the Catalog Input Type for

Store Owner set to “Fixed Product Tax.” Then, add the attribute to the attribute set for the product.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Tax Classes

Every product and customer is assigned to a tax class. Tax classes, in turn, are used to define tax rules. Tax rules are a combination of a customer tax class, product tax class, and tax rates. The two basic types of tax classes are: l l

Product Tax Classes

Customer Tax Classes

Product Tax Classes

Product tax classes can be created and assigned according to the tax requirements of the product. For example, food might not be taxed (or might be taxed at a different rate). If your store charges an additional tax on shipping, you should designate a separate product tax class for shipping.

584

Product Tax Classes

To define a product tax class:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Product Tax Class .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New button.

Product Tax Class Information

3.

Enter a Class Name for this tax class.

The new tax class now appears as a Tax Class option for product prices.

4.

When complete, click the Save Class button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes Tax Zones & Rates

Customer Tax Classes

You create customer tax classes and assign customers to them depending on the type of customer. For example, in some jurisdictions, wholesale transactions are not taxed but retail transactions are.

Customer Tax Classes

To define a customer tax class:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Customer Tax Classes .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New button.

Customer Tax Class Information

3.

Enter a Class Name for this tax class.

You can link a customer tax class to a customer group by editing the customer group.

You can then assign this customer group when creating or editing a customer.

4.

When complete, click the Save Class button.

Tax Zones & Rates

Tax rates generally apply to transactions that take place within a specific geographical area. The Tax Zones and Rates tool enables you to specify the tax rate for each geographical area for which you collect and remit taxes. Because you give each tax zone and rate specification a unique identifier, you can have multiple tax rates for a given geographic area (for example, for places that do not tax food or medicine but tax other products).

Store tax is calculated based on the store’s address. The actual customer tax for an order is calculated after the customer completes the order information. Magento then calculates the actual tax based upon the tax configuration of the store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 585

Tax Zones & Rates Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

Manage Tax Zones & Rates

To define tax zones and rates:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Zones & Rates .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Tax Rate button.

586

Tax Rate Information

3.

In the Tax Rate Information section, do the following: a.

In the Tax Identifier field, enter a unique name for this tax. Do not use spaces. This identifier is not shown in the store if the Tax Titles section is completed, as described below.

b.

Select the location of the Country and State . (Starting in EE 1.13.1, you can use the wildcard character * for State.) c.

Do one of the following: l l

If you want the ZIP or postal code represented as an individual code, set Zip/Post is Range , to “No.” Then, enter the Zip/Post Code .

If you want the ZIP or postal code represented as a range, set Zip/Post is Range to “Yes.” Then, enter the Range From and Range To values.

The wildcard character * can be used to represent all values. For example, 90* means all ZIP codes from 90000 through 90999.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes d.

In the Rate Percent field, enter the percentage of tax.

4.

In the Tax Titles section, enter a name of this tax for each store view.

Tax Rules

Tax Titles

5.

When complete, click the Save Rate button.

Tax Rules

Tax management rules put all the taxation elements together: product tax classes, customer tax classes, and tax zones and rates. Each tax rule consists of a customer tax class, a product tax class, and a tax rate.

When numerous taxes must be defined, you can simplify the process by importing them from a spreadsheet. Select Sales > Tax > Import/Export Tax Rates.

Manage Tax Rules

To define tax rules:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Rules .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Tax Rule button. Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 587

Tax Rules Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

588

Tax Rule Information a.

Enter a Name for the rule.

b.

Select a Customer Tax Class . To select multiple options, hold the Ctrl key down and click each item.

c.

Select a Product Tax Class .

d.

Select the Tax Rate .

This rule applies the tax rate to customers in the selected customer tax class and to products in the selected product tax class.

e.

In the Priority field, enter a number to indicate the priority of this tax, when more than one tax applies. If two tax rules with the same priority apply, then the taxes are added together. If two taxes with different priority settings apply, then the taxes are compounded.

3.

In the Sort Order field, enter a number to indicate the order in which tax rules are displayed on the Manage Tax Rules page.

4.

If you want taxes to be based on the order subtotal, select the Calculate off Subtotal

Only checkbox.

5.

When complete, click the Save Rule button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Name

Customer Tax Class

Product Tax Class

Tax Rate

Description

Enter a name for this tax rule to make it easy to identify.

Select the customer tax class associated with this rule.

Select the product tax class associated with this rule.

Select the tax rate that applis to this rule.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes Cross-Border Price Consistency

Field

Priority

Calculate off Subtotal

Only

Sort Order

Description

Enter a number to indicate the priority of this tax, when more than one tax applies. Lower numbers have higher priority. If two tax rules with the same priority apply then the taxes are added together. If two taxes with a different priority apply then the taxes are compounded. When taxes are compounded, the first priority tax is calculated on the subtotal amount, and then the second priority tax is calculated on the subtotal plus the first priority tax amount.

Select this checkbox for taxes to be calculated based on the subtotal of the order. This means that for this tax rule, tax applies only to the subtotal of the order.

Specify the order in which tax rules are displayed on the

Manage Tax Rules page. Lower numbers have higher sort order in the list.

Cross-Border Price Consistency

Cross-border trade (also referred to as price consistency) supports European Union (EU) and other merchants who want to maintain consistent prices for customers whose tax rates are different than the store tax rate.

Merchants operating across regions and geographies can show their customers a single price. Pricing is clean and uncluttered regardless of tax structures and rates that vary from country to country.

To use this feature, your store must display prices including tax. (Configure this setting in the Admin panel at System > Configuration > Sales > Tax > Calculation Settings,

Catalog Prices set to Including Tax.)

To enable cross-border price consistency:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Tax .

3.

Click to expand the Calculation Settings section. To enable cross-border price consistency, set Enable Cross Border Trade to “Yes.”

Important! If you enable cross-border trade your profit margin changes by tax rate.

Profit is determined by the formula: (Revenue - CustomerVAT -

CostOfGoodsSold) .

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 589

Fixed Product Tax Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

590

Enable Cross Border Trade Setting

Fixed Product Tax

Some tax jurisdictions have a fixed tax that must be added to certain types of products.

Magento lets you set up a fixed product tax (FPT) for use in your store's tax calculations. For example, in some countries FPT can be used to set up a Waste

Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE) tax, also known as "ecological tax" or "eco tax," that is collected on certain types of electronics to offset the cost of recycling. This tax is a fixed amount, rather than a percentage of the product price.

Your tax jurisdiction might also have rules about how you display the price of products to your customers, either with or without tax. Be sure you understand those rules so that you can set your FPT display options accordingly.

Fixed Product Tax Calculations

Fixed product taxes are applicable at an item level based on the product. In some jurisdictions this tax is subject to an additional % tax calculation.

FPT

Not Taxed

Display Setting and Associated Calculation

Excluding FPT

Including FPT

Treat FPT as a separate row in the cart and include the value of FPT in the appropriate tax calculations.

FPT is added to the base price of an item but is not included in tax- rule-based calculations.

Excluding FPT, FPT

Description, Final

Price

Item prices are shown without FPT, FPT amount, and with FPT included. FPT is not included in tax-rule-based calculations.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

FPT

Taxed

Fixed Product Tax

Display Setting and Associated Calculation

Excluding FPT

Including FPT

Treat FPT as a separate row in the cart and include the value of FPT in the appropriate tax calculations.

FPT is included in the price of an item, and no change to tax calculations is required.

Excluding FPT, FPT

Description, Final

Price

Item prices are shown without FPT, FPT amount, and with FPT included. FPT is included in tax-rule-based calculations.

Fixed Product Tax Setup

The following instructions show how to set up a fixed product tax for your store. An “eco tax” is an example of how you might used FPT. After setting the scope for the tax and the countries and states where the tax applies, and depending on the options you choose, the input fields can change to accommodate the local requirements.

Process Overview:

Step 1: Enable the FPT Tax

Step 2: Create an FPT Attribute

Step 3: Add the FPT to an Attribute Set

Step 4: Apply the FPT to Products

Step 1:

Enable the FPT Tax

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Tax .

3.

Click to expand the Fixed Product Taxes section. Then, complete the fields as needed, using the

Field Description

section at the end of this section for reference.

Fixed Product Tax

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 591

Fixed Product Tax Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Step 2:

Create an FPT Attribute

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes .

2.

In the upper-right corner, click the Add New Attribute button. Then, do the following:

592

Fixed Product Tax a.

In the Attribute Code field, specify a unique identifier for this attribute. Do not use spaces or special characters. However, you can use hyphens or underscores. The maximum length is 30 characters.

b.

Set Scope to indicate where in your Magento installation the attribute will be available.

c.

Set Catalog Input Type for Store Owner to “Fixed Product Tax.” d.

Set Apply To to one of the following:

All Product Types Makes the FPT attribute available for all product types.

Selected Product Types If you select this option, select each product type in the list that will use the attribute.

3.

In the panel on the left, select Manage Label / Options . Then, enter a label to identify the field. If you enter one label for the Admin, it will be used for the other views.

Manage Label / Options

4.

When complete, click the Save Attribute button.

To learn more, see:

Creating Attributes

.

Step 3:

Add the FPT Attribute to an Attribute Set

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attribute Sets .

2.

Open the attribute set that needs the FPT attribute.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes Fixed Product Tax

3.

Drag the FPT attribute from the list of Unassigned Attributes on the right to the Groups list. The group folders correspond to sections in the Product Information panel. You can place the attribute wherever you want it to appear.

Edit Attribute Set

4.

When complete, click the Save Attribute Set button.

To learn more, see:

Creating Attribute Sets .

Step 4:

Apply the FPT to Products

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

Find the product that needs the FPT and open it in edit mode.

3.

In the product information, find the FPT field that you added to the attribute set. Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Product Information with FPT Field

593

Fixed Product Tax Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

4.

Click the Add Tax button. Then, do the following: a.

Select the Country/State where the FPT applies.

b.

Enter the amount in the Tax field.

c.

To add more FPT taxes, click the Add Tax button and repeat the process.

5.

When complete, click the Save button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enable FPT

Scope

Website

Display Prices in Product

Lists

Website

Display Price On Product view Page

Website

Display Prices in Sales

Modules

Display Prices in Emails Website

Apply Discounts to FPT Website

FPT Tax Configuration

Website

Website

Description

Determines if FPT is available. Options include:

Yes / No

Controls the display of FPT in product lists.

Options include:

Including FPT only

Including FPT and FPT description

Excluding FPT, FPT description, final price

Excluding FPT

Controls the display of FPT on the product page.

Options include:

Including FPT only

Including FPT and FPT description

Excluding FPT, FPT description, final price

Excluding FPT

Controls the display of FPT in the shopping cart and during checkout. Options include:

Including FPT only

Including FPT and FPT description

Excluding FPT, FPT description, final price

Excluding FPT

Controls the display of FPT in email. Options include:

Including FPT only

Including FPT and FPT description

Excluding FPT, FPT description, final price

Excluding FPT

Determines if discounts can be applied to the

FPT amount. Options include: Yes / No

(Available in EE 1.13.1 and later) Determines how

FPT tax is calculated. Options include:

594 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes Compound Taxes

Field

Scope

Include FPT in Subtotal Website

Description

Not Taxed

Taxed

Select this option if your taxing jurisdiction does not tax FPT.

(For example,California.)

Select this option if your taxing jurisdiction does tax FPT. (For example, Canada.)

Loaded and

Displayed with Tax

Click this option if FPT is added to the order total before applying tax. (For example, EU countries.)

Determines if FPT is included in the shopping cart subtotal. Options include:

Yes

No

Includes FPT in the shopping cart subtotal.

FPT is not included in the subtotal, and is placed after the subtotal in the shopping cart.

Be Careful Disclosing FPT Prices in Email

The manner in which you set the Display Prices in Sales Modules and Display Prices in

Email options can affect customer confidence in their orders. For example, if you choose to display Order Review prices without showing FPT, customers who buy items with associated FPT will see a total that includes the FPT tax amount, but they will not see an itemized entry for the amount.

This might cause abandoned carts if your customers see an order total that does not match what they expect, based on an itemized list of products in the order.

Compound Taxes

For compound taxes, the total cost of a product or service is taxed at one rate, and then the total of that amount, including the first tax amount, is taxed a second time.

Compound tax is also known as stacked tax.

For example, in a regular tax calculation involving two tax rules, each rule is applied separately to the product subtotal, and the taxes are added together to calculate the total tax, which is then added to the product subtotal to calculate the grand total:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 595

Compound Taxes Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

Regular Two-Tax Calculation

$50.00

+   $50.00

$100.00

Product Price

Product Price

Subtotal

$5.00

+    $10.00

$15.00

Subtotal x 1st tax rate 5%

Subtotal x 2nd tax rate 20%

Total Taxes

$100.00

+   $15.00

$115.00

Subtotal

Total Taxes

Grand Total

With compound taxes, the first tax is added to the product subtotal, and the second tax is applied to that total:

Compound Tax Calculation

$50.00

+   $50.00

$100.00

Product Price

Product Price

Subtotal

$5.00

+    $10.50

$15.50

Subtotal x 1st tax rate 5%

[Subtotal + (Subtotal x 1st rate)] x 2nd tax rate: $105 x 10%

Total Taxes

$100.00

+   $15.50

$115.50

Subtotal

Total Taxes

Grand Total

Setting Up Compound Taxes

Price rules with different priorities are used to set up a compound tax. If two tax rules with the same priority apply then the taxes are added together. If two taxes with a different priority apply then the taxes are compounded. When taxes are compounded, the first priority tax is calculated on the subtotal amount, and then the second priority tax is calculated on the subtotal plus the first priority tax amount. Lower numbers have higher priority.

Important: In order for compound taxes to work correctly do not select the Calculate off subtotal only check box when you set up your tax rules that apply to compound taxes.

This check box overrides the compounding calculation and cannot be used in conjunction with compound taxes.

596 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes Compound Taxes

To set up compound taxes:

1.

Complete the setup of all tax rates to be used in the compound tax rule. See:

Tax Zones

& Rates .

2.

Set up the first tax rule for compounding. For the first tax rule, be sure that you set a higher priority than you will set for the next tax rule, which will be compounded on top of this first tax rule. Lower numbers are used for higher priority. Use 0 for the highest priority. See:

Tax Rules

.

3.

Set up the second tax rule for compounding. For the second rule, be sure that you set a lower priority (use a higher number) than you set for the first tax rule.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 597

Compound Taxes

598

Chapter 51:  Managing Taxes

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:

Value Added Tax (VAT)

Some countries charge a value added tax, or VAT, on goods and services. There can be different VAT rates depending on which stage you as a merchant are at in the manufacture or distribution of the products, materials, or services that you sell to your customers. In this case you may need to use more than one VAT rate in your store for tax calculation purposes.

This section provides a sample procedure for setting up a 20% VAT in the U.K. for sales to retail customers. For other tax rates and countries, follow the general procedure but enter specific information that corresponds to your country, VAT rate, customer types, and so on.

Before proceeding, make sure to find out which rules and regulations apply to VAT in your area.

In certain business-to-business transactions, VAT is not assessed. Magento can validate a customer’s VAT ID to ensure that VAT is assessed (or not assessed) properly. To learn more, see:

VAT Validation .

Process Overview:

Step 1: Set Up Customer Tax Classes

Step 2: Set Up Product Tax Classes

Step 3: Set Up Tax Zones and Rates

Step 4: Set Up Tax Rules

Step 5: Apply Tax Classes to Products

Step 1:

Set Up Customer Tax Classes

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Customer Tax Classes .

2.

Ensure that there is a customer tax class that is appropriate to use with the VAT.

For this example, ensure that there is a customer tax class named Retail Customer.

If Retail Customer does not exist, click the Add New button and add it.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 599

600

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

Step 2:

Set Up Product Tax Classes

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Product Tax Classes .

2.

Click the Add New button and create three new classes: l l l

VAT Standard

VAT Reduced

VAT Zero

3.

Click the Save Class button for each new class that you add.

Step 3:

Set Up Tax Zones and Rates

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Zones & Rates .

For this example you can remove the U.S. tax rates, or leave them as they are.

2.

Click the Add New Tax Rate button. Add new rates as follows:

New Tax Rate

VAT Standard

Settings

Tax Identifier: VAT Standard

Country and State:

Rate Percent:

United Kingdom

20.00

VAT Reduced

Tax Identifier:

Country and State:

Rate Percent:

VAT Reduced

United Kingdom

5.00

3.

Click the Save Rate button for each rate.

Step 4:

Set Up Tax Rules

A tax rule is a combination of a customer tax class, a product tax class, and a tax rate.

1.

On the Admin menu, select Sales > Tax > Manage Tax Rules .

2.

Add new tax rules as follows:

New Tax Rule

VAT Standard

Settings

Name: VAT Standard

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation

New Tax Rule Settings

Customer Tax Class:

Product Tax Class:

Tax Rate:

VAT Reduced

Name:

Customer Tax Class:

Product Tax Class:

Tax Rate:

3.

Click the Save Rule button for each rate.

Retail Customer

VAT Standard

VAT Standard Rate

VAT Reduced

Retail Customer

VAT Reduced

VAT Reduced Rate

Step 5:

Apply Tax Classes to Products

1.

On the Admin menu, select Catalog > Manage Products .

2.

Open a product from your catalog in edit mode.

3.

On the General page, find the Tax Class field. Then, select the VAT Class that applies to the product.

4.

When complete, click the Save button.

VAT ID Validation

All editions of Magento include value-added tax (VAT) ID validation. VAT ID Validation is intended for B2B merchants from the European Union (EU), where VAT is charged if a merchant and a customer are in the same country, and VAT is not charged if a merchant and a customer are in different countries within EU and both parties are EU-registered business entities. If enabled, you can override it for a certain customer by selecting the correspondent checkbox on the Customer Information page.

VAT identification number (VAT ID) Validation enables store administrators to create more than one default customer group, which will be automatically assigned to each customer during account creation, address creation or update, and checkout according to the customer’s VAT ID, and the customer’s and merchant’s location countries. This feature enables merchants to create different tax rules for intra-country (domestic) and intra-EU sales, and to apply the corresponding VAT amount automatically.

VAT-related tax rules do not influence other tax rules and do not prevent applying other tax rules where applicable. Only one tax rule can be applied at a given time.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 601

VAT ID Validation Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

Magento performs VAT ID validation using the web-services of the European

Commission server.

Setting Up VAT ID Validation

Process Overview:

Step 1: Create the VAT-Related Customer Groups

Step 2: Create the VAT-Related Classes, Rates and Rules

Step 3: Enable and Configure VAT ID Validation

Step 4: Set your VAT ID and Location Country

Step 5: Verify the List of EU Member Countries

Step 1:

Create the VAT-Related Customer Groups

VAT ID Validation automatically assigns one of the four default customer groups to customers according to VAT ID validation results: l l l l

Domestic

Intra-EU

Invalid VAT ID

Validation error.

You can create new customer groups to be used in the VAT ID Validation functionality or use existing groups, if they comply with your business logic. Customer groups are created under Customers > Customer Groups.

When configuring the VAT ID Validation functionality, you will need to assign each of the created customer groups as a default for customers with appropriate VAT ID validation results. For details see the Enabling and Configuring the VAT ID Validation

Functionality section further.

Step 2:

Create the VAT-Related Classes, Rates, and Rules

The VAT ID Validation functionality was implemented to facilitate the VAT applying for

EU B2B merchants. In Magento, taxes are applied using the tax rules mechanism. Each tax rule is defined be three entities: l l l

Customer Tax Classes

Product Tax Classes

Tax Rates

To use the VAT ID Validation functionality effectively, you need to create the appropriate tax rules.

602 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation l l

All tax rule related entities, including tax rules, tax rates, product tax classes and customer tax classes, are managed under Sales > Tax.

Tax classes are assigned to customer groups under Customers > Customer Groups >

%customer group%.

Important! According to the EU taxation policy , the supply of services between businesses (B2B services) is in principle taxed at the customer’s place of establishment.

If you sell downloadable or virtual products, which do not require shipping, the VAT rate of a customer’s location country should be applied for both, intra-union and domestic sales. This means that you additionally must create individual tax rules for a product tax class that corresponds to the downloadable and virtual product types.

Minimal Tax Rules Required for VAT ID Validation

Tax Rule #1

Customer Tax Class n

A class for domestic customers

Product Tax Class n

A class for customers with invalid VAT ID n

A class for customers, for whom VAT ID validation failed

A class for products of all types, except bundle and virtual.

Tax Rate VAT rate of the merchant’s country.

Tax Rule #2

Customer Tax Class

Product Tax Class

Tax Rate

A class for intra-union customers.

A class for products of all types, except downloadable and virtual.

VAT rates for all EU countries, except merchant’s country. Currently this rate is 0%.

Tax Rule #3

(Required only if you sell bundle or virtual products.)

Customer Tax Class n

A class for domestic customers n

A class for customers with invalid VAT ID n

A class for customers, for whom VAT ID validation failed

Product Tax Class

Tax Rate

A class for downloadable and virtual products.

VAT rate of the merchant’s country.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 603

VAT ID Validation Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

Tax Rule #4

(Required only if you sell bundle or virtual products.)

Customer Tax Class A class for intra-union customers.

Product Tax Class

Tax Rate

A class for downloadable and virtual products.

VAT rates for all EU countries, except merchant’s country. Currently this rate is 0%.

It is recommended that you apply the merchant’s VAT rate for customers with invalid

VAT IDs, and those for whom validation fails. You can create other tax rules and apply other tax rates according to your business logic.

Step 3:

Enable and Configure VAT ID Validation

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer Configuration .

3.

Set Current Configuration Scope to “Default Config,” or the applicable store view.

4.

Click to expand the Create New Account Options section.

5.

Set Enable Automatic Assignment to Customer Group to “Yes.” Then complete the fields as described below.

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

604

Create New Account Options

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation

Field Descriptions

Field

Scope

Description

Enable Automatic Assignment to Customer Group

Store View Determines if customers are automatically assigned to the default customer group. To show VAT number in the store, set Show VAT

Number in the storefront, select “Yes.” Options include:

Yes The system does not automatically validate customer VAT

IDs nor does it change customer groups.

No The system behavior is as usual, and the default customer group can be set in the Default

Group field.

Tax Calculation Based

On

Store View Choose whether VAT calculation will be based on customer's shipping or billing address. If the customer does not have a shipping address

(that is, the customer has only now registered and the system does not yet take into account the customer's shipping address), the Default

Tax Destination Calculation address is used for tax calculations that appear to the customer.

Options include:

Billing

Address

Calculates VAT based on the customer billing address.

Shipping

Address

Calculates VAT based on the cusotmer shipping address.

Important! If the Tax Calculation Based On shipping address, and a customer purchases only downloadable or virtual products, Magento will use the billing address for VAT calculation.

Default Group

Group for Valid VAT ID -

Domestic

Group for Valid VAT ID -

Intra-Union

Store View Identifies the default customer group.

Store View Determines the customer group that is automatically assigned to customers from your country who have a valid VAT ID.

Store View Determines the customer group that is automatically assigned to customers from other

EU countries who have a valid VAT ID.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 605

VAT ID Validation Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

Field

Scope

Description

Group for Invalid VAT ID Store View Determines the customer group that is automatically assigned to customers who have an invalid VAT ID.

Validation Error Group Store View Determines the customer group that is automatically assigned to customers who failed VAT

ID validation.

Validate on Each Transaction

Store View Choose whether VAT ID validation will be performed each time during order creation even if a previously saved customer address with validated VAT ID is used. The option applies to onepage checkout in the storefront, only. If a new customer address is used (including guest checkout or if a customer has no address assigned to their account), then the validation is performed irrespective of this setting. During order creation in the Admin, no automatic validations are performed. Options include: Yes / No

Default Value for Disable

Automatic Group

Changes Based on

VAT ID

Global (Available only if Current Configuration Scope is set to “Default Group.”) Choose whether the automatic change of customer group based on

VAT ID will be enabled or disabled by default.

The setting can be overridden on the product level. The setting influences the system behavior in the following situations: n

The VAT ID of the customer’s default address or the whole default address changes.

n

Customer group change was emulated during the checkout for a registered customer who had no previously saved address or for a customer, who registered during the checkout.

Show VAT Number on Website

If the automatic group change is enabled, then in the first case the customer group changes automatically, and in the second case the temporarily emulated customer group is assigned to customer.

If the automatic group change is disabled, the customer group that is assigned never changes, unless an administrator changes it manually.

Determines if the VAT number is visible to cus-

606 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation

Field

Frontend

Default Email Domain

Default Welcome Email

Email Sender

Scope

Description tomers in the store. Options include: Yes / No

Store View Identifies the default email domain.

Store View Identifies the email template used for the default Welcome email.

Store View Identifies the store identity that appears as the sender of the Welcome email.

Require Emails Confirmation

Website Determines if email messages require confirmation. Options include: Yes / No

Confirmation Link Email Store View Identifies the email template used for the confirmation email.

Welcome Email

Generate Human-

Friendly Customer ID

Store View Identifies the template used for the Welcome email that is sent after the account is confirmed.

Global Choose whether the field for entering and storing the VAT ID number will be visible in the frontend. Options include: Yes / No

Step 4:

Set Your VAT ID and Location Country

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select General .

3.

Set Current Configuration Scope to the applicable store view.

4.

Click to expand the Store Information section. Then, do the following:

Store Information

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 607

VAT ID Validation Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) a.

Select your Country .

b.

Enter your VAT Number . Then, click the Validate VAT Number button. The result appears immediately.

If your VAT number is valid, then apart from validation result for each customer’s

VAT ID validation, the validation server will send to Magento the following additional information: VAT request identifier and VAT request date. If a customer’s VAT validation is performed during checkout, then the VAT request identifier and VAT request date are saved in the Comments History section of the Order View page under Sales > Orders > (select appropriate order).

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Step 5:

Verify the List of EU Member Countries

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

Set Current Configuration Scope to the applicable store view.

3.

Click to expand the Countries Options section.

608

Countries Options

4.

In the European Union Countries list, verify that each member country of the EU is selected.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation

VAT Validation Customer Workflow

During Registration

If VAT ID Validation is enabled, after registration each customer is proposed to enter the

VAT ID number. However only those who are registered VAT customers are expected to fill this field.

After a customer specifies the VAT number and other address fields, and chooses to save, the system saves the address and sends the VAT ID validation request to the European

Commission server. According to the results of the validation, one of the default groups is assigned to a customer. This group can be changed if a customer or an administrator changes the VAT ID of the default address or changes the whole default address. And the group can be temporarily changed (group change will be emulated) in some cases during one-page checkout.

During Checkout

The system behavior concerned with the VAT ID validation and the customer group change during the checkout depends on how the Validate on Each Transaction and the

Disable Automatic Group Change settings are configured. This section describes the implementation of the VAT ID Validation functionality for the checkout on the frontend.

In case a customer uses Google Express Checkout, PayPal Express Checkout or another external checkout method, when the checkout is performed completely on the side of the external payment gateway, the Validate on Each Transaction setting cannot be applied.

Thus the customer group cannot change during checkout. The following inllustration shows the flow of VAT ID validation and customer group change during one-page checkout.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 609

VAT ID Validation Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

610

One-Page Checkout with VAT ID Validation

Managing VAT Validation

VAT Number Customer Address Attribute

Customer VAT ID value is stored in the vat_id customer address attribute. The default label of this attribute is VAT number. Customer address attributes are managed under

Customers > Attributes > Manage Customer Address Attributes.

The VAT number field is always present in all shipping and billing customer addresses in the backend. It is not mandatory. Displaying the field in the frontend is configured in the Show VAT Number in Frontend field under System > Configuration > Customers >

Customer Configuration > Create New Account Options.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation

For customers not from the EU countries, consider storing the VAT number (if any), in the existing Tax/VAT Number customer attribute to avoid any possibility of customer group change (whether persistent or emulation during checkout). It is recommended that you rename the Tax/VAT Number customer attribute to avoid confusion with the new VAT Number customer address attribute that is used for the VAT ID Validation functionality.

Disable Automatic Customer Group Change

When the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled, the group of a customer can only be changed manually in the Admin Panel, no automatic changes of customer group can take place.

When the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled, the system will automatically, permanently change a customer group in the following situations: l l

The VAT ID of the customer’s default address or the whole default address changes.

The customer group change was emulated during the checkout for a registered customer who had no previously saved address, or a customer who registered during the checkout.

The automatic customer group change can be disabled by selecting the Disable automatic group change checkbox on the customer’s page under Customers > Manage

Customers > %customer% > Account Information.

Disabling Automatic Group Change on Customer Level

Important! The setting does not influence the emulation of the customer group change during checkout.

The default value of the Disable automatic group change checkbox is set in the Default

Value for Disable Automatic Group Changes Based on VAT ID field under System >

Configuration > CUSTOMERS > Customer Configuration > Create New Account

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 611

VAT ID Validation Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

Options. The configuration setting is made on the global level. The default value applies to new customers and to customers whose records are available in the system when the

VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled for the first time.

VAT ID Validation in Customer Accounts

When an administrator adds a new default address with a VAT ID to the account of a new or existing customer or changes the VAT ID of the existing default address, the system validates the VAT ID and assigns the appropriate customer group to the customer. The validation is performed after the Save or Save and Continue button is clicked.

The system behavior is as described when the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled and configured.

If you want to disable the automatic change of a customer group, select the Disable automatic group change check box on the Account Information tab of the Customer

Information page.

VAT ID Validation When Creating an Order

During order creation in the Admin Panel no VAT ID validation is performed automatically. To validate the VAT ID of the customer address, an administrator needs to click the Validate VAT Number button in the Billing Address or Shipping Address section of the Create New Order page.

612

Validating Customer VAT ID at Order Creation

After the validation, the administrator receives a notification about the validation results in the form of a pop-up message.

A customer group, which should be assigned to a customer according to the validation results, can differ from the customer group that is currently assigned to the customer. In this case the system displays a dialog box suggesting that the administrator confirm or

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT) VAT ID Validation reject the group change emulation for the customer’s current order. If the administrator confirms, then the group change is emulated for the current order and the corresponding

VAT rate is applied (if the corresponding tax rule is configured in the system). The actual customer group of a customer is not changed.

If a new customer account is added when an order is created, and an administrator confirms the customer group that corresponds to the VAT ID validation results, after the order is created, the customer account is saved in the system, and the customer group that was used to create the order is assigned to the customer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 613

VAT ID Validation

614

Chapter 52:  Value Added Tax (VAT)

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Store Operations

Chapter 53:

Managing Email Templates

Magento includes a set of default email templates that are associated with a variety of events that take place during the operation of your store, such as: l l l l l

Invoiced order

Account change

Newsletter subscription

Abandoned shopping cart

Product back in stock

These messages are referred to as “transactional emails” because they are triggered by an event and sent automatically. Each message is based on an HTML template that can be edited as needed, using the Transactional Emails tool.

Transactional Emails

Uploading Your Email Logo

The email logo appears at the top of automated email messages that are sent to customers. These are referred to as “transactional emails” and are based on templates that can be customized to suit your needs.

Transactional Emails

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 617

Customizing Email Templates Chapter 53:  Managing Email Templates

To upload your email logo:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Design, select Transactional Emails .

3.

Click the Choose File button and select the Logo Image from your computer.

The size of the logo image file cannot exceed 2 MB.

4.

In the Logo Image Alt field, type the alt text you want to use for the image.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button to upload the image. Any previous logo image file is overwritten.

Field Descriptions

Field

Logo Image

Logo Image Alt

Description

Choose a file to use as the logo. Allowed file types are jpg, gif, png. File size cannot exceed 2 MB.

Enter alternative text to appear if the logo image is not available.

Customizing Email Templates

Email templates are formatted with HTML and CSS, and can be easily edited. In addition, you can further customize the template by adding variables and widgets.

Many of the default email templates contain placeholder information that should be changed before any transactional email messages are sent to customers. When the template is ready to be used, make sure to update your system configuration, so the updated template will be used instead of the previous version.

Step 1:

Choose a Default Template

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Transactional Emails .

2.

Click the Add New Template button.

3.

In the Template list, select a default template from the list of predefined templates.

Load Default Template

4.

If necessary, set the Locale to the store language.

618 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 53:  Managing Email Templates

5.

Click the Load Template button.

Customizing Email Templates

Template Information

The path to the configuration settings for each default template appears at the top of the Template Information section. Make note of this “Used as Default for” path, because you will later need to update the configuration with the name of the new template.

Step 2:

Customize the Content

1.

In the Template Information section, do the following: a.

Enter a Template Name for the new email template.

b.

In the Template Subject field, type the text to appear in the Subject header of the message.

c.

Complete the Template Content as needed.

2.

(Optional) To insert a

variable , do the following:

a.

Position the cursor in the text where you want the variable to appear.

b.

Click the Insert Variable button.

c.

In the list of available

predefined variables

, click the variable you want to insert into the template.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 619

Customizing Email Templates Chapter 53:  Managing Email Templates

620

Insert Variable

3.

When complete, click the Save Template button.

4.

Make sure to Preview the template before associating it with a transactional email message that is sent to customers.

Step 3:

Update Your Configuration

Before the template can be used, the configuration must be updated with the name of the new template. Refer to the path that you recorded in Step 1 when updating your configuration with the name of the new template.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales Emails .

To learn more, see:

Configuring Email Templates .

Email Template Variables

Predefined Variables

Store Contact Information

Base Unsecure URL

Base Secure URL

General Contact Name

General Contact Email

Sales Representative Contact Name

Sale Representative Contact Email

Custom 1 Contact Name

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 53:  Managing Email Templates Email Template Configuration

Predefined Variables

Custom 1 Contact Email

Custom 2 Contact Name

Custom 2 Contact Email

Store Name

Store Contact Telephone

Store Contact Address

Template Variables

Store Url

Emali Logo Image Url

Customer Name

Customer Account Url

Customer Email

Customer Password

Email Template Configuration

Email templates contain the content and formatting for automated messages that area sent from your store. These messages are called transactional emails because each one is associated with a specific type of transaction or event.

Your store has a set of default templates that you can customize. After creating a customized version of a template, remember to update your system configuration so the correct template is used for the message.

Sales Email Configuration

To configure sales email templates:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales Emails . Then, select the appropriate templates for each of the following sections:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 621

Email Template Configuration l l l l

Order and Order Comments

Invoice and Invoice Comments

Shipment and Shipment Comments

Credit Memo and Credit Memo Comments

Chapter 53:  Managing Email Templates

Order Email Configuration

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

To configure customer email templates:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration.

2.

In the panel on the left, under Customer, select Customer Configuration . Then, select the appropriate templates for the following sections: l l

Create New Account Options

Password Options

Password Options

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

622 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 54:

Managing Data Transfer

The Import/Export tool gives you the ability to manage multiple customer and product records in a single operation. If you have a large catalog of products, you will find it much easier to export the data, edit the data in a spreadsheet, and then import the data back into your store.

The CSV file format separates each data element by a comma, and is used as the standard for data exchange operations. All spreadsheet and database applications support the CSV file format. If you are working with a Mac, you should save the data in the CSV (Windows) format.

Working with CSV Files

In order to import a CSV file into Magento, it must have certain characteristics.

Specifically, each column heading must exactly match the Attribute Code for the attribute in that column.

To ensure that a CSV file’s column headings can be read by Magento, first export a product CSV file. You can then edit the file (by adding or updating rows) and reimport it.

For the Category column, specify product category as text, based on a category’s path, with a slash (/) between each category level. For example: Furniture/Living

Room. Do not include the Root Category in the path.

Product CSV Structure

The imported or exported catalog products CSV file contains information about products and relations between them. The table has the following structure:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 623

Working with CSV Files Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer

Exported Product CSV in Excel

The first row of the table contains the names of the columns, there are two types of the names, as shown in the following table. Other rows contain attributes values, service data, and complex data. If a row contains the value in the SKU column, then this row the rows below it describe the product. Each new SKU value begins the description of the next product.

In the import procedure, if a row that contains the SKU value is invalid, then this row, and all other rows with data for that product cannot be imported.

The minimal valid table contains only the SKU column. It can be used to delete entries from the database. There is no limit to the number of the columns in the table. Columns that do not contain data will be ignored.

624

Exported Product CSV in Notepad

CSV Product Structure

Column Name Description

_<name> The names of the service columns and complex data columns. Service columns contain entity properties, which are not attributes. For example, columns with website or product type information are service columns. The underscore as first

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer Working with CSV Files

Column Name

<attribute name>

Description character is used to distinguish these columns from the attribute column names.

The names of the columns with values of both system-created attributes and attributes created by the store administrator.

Customer CSV Structure

The imported or exported customers CSV file contains the table with information about customers. The table has the following structure:

Exported Customer CSV in Excel

The first row of the table contains the names of the attribute columns (which are the same as attribute codes). There are two types of column names, as shown in the following table. Other rows contain attribute values, service data, and complex data.

Each row with non-empty values in the “email” and “_website” columns starts the description of the subsequent customer. Each row can represent customer data with or without address data, or the address data only. In case a row contains only the address data, values in the columns, related to the customer profile, will be ignored and may be empty.

To add or replace more than one address for a customer, in the import file add a row for each new address with empty customer data and the new or updated address data below the customer data row.

Exported Customer CSV in Notepad

CSV Customer Structure

Column Name Description

_<name> The names of the service columns, and complex data columns. Service columns contain entity properties, which are not attributes. For example, columns with website or store information are service columns. The underscore as first character is used to distinguish these columns from the other attributes names.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 625

Importing Data Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer

Column Name

<attribute name>

Description

The “_address_default_billing” and the “_address_default_shipping” columns are the default billing and shipping addresses flags. If the address in the row is the default billing and/or shipping address of the client, the “_address_default_billing” and/or “_address_default_shipping” columns in this row will have the “1” value.

The names of the columns with values of both system-created attributes, and attributes created by the store administrator.

Importing Data

Importing is available for all product types, except bundle and downloadable products.

You can import customer data, product data, and product images.

To import customer or product data:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Import/Export > Import . Then, do the following:

Import Settings a.

Set Entity Type to one of the following: l l

Products

Customers b.

Set Import Behavior to the way you want complex data to be managed if imported records already exist in the database.

l l

Complex data for products includes categories, websites, custom options, tier prices, related products, up-sells, cross-sells, and associated products data.

Complex data for customers includes addresses.

Choose one of the following options:

Append Complex Data The new complex data will be added to the existing complex data for the existing entries in the database.

Replace Existing

Complex Data

Delete Entities

The existing complex data for the existing entities will be replaced.

If entities that are imported already exist in the database, they will be deleted from the database.

626 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer Importing Data c.

At the Select File to Import field, click the Choose File button. Then, select the CSV file that you have prepared for import.

2.

Click the Check Data button in the upper-right corner of the page. The system validates the file. If the file is valid, the corresponding message and the Import button appear. If some of the rows in the imported file are not valid and cannot be imported, the corresponding information is included to the message, but you can proceed with importing. The invalid rows will be skipped.

3.

If needed, make corrections to the CSV file.

4.

Click the Import button to import the data into the database.

File Validation

File validation includes the following:

1.

All attribute values are checked for conformance with the required data type (decimal, integer, varchar, text, datetime).

2.

The complex data, service data. and attributes whose values must be from a defined set

(such as a drop-down or multiple select input type), are checked to ensure their values exist in the defined sets.

3.

For new entities, the presence of the required attributes values in the file is checked. For existing entities, the presence of the required attributes values is not checked, but if a required value is specified, it is validated by the attribute type.

The “Required” option of the attributes is set in the Magento Admin Panel. To access the attribute management section, select Catalog > Attributes > Manage Attributes.

Importing Product Images

Multiple product images of each type can be imported into Magento, and associated with the correct product. Review the steps below, and run through the process with a few products. After you understand how it works, you’ll feel confident to import large quantities of images.

To import product images:

1.

Place the image files that you need to import in the subfolders in the %path_to_your

Magento_instance%/media/import folder. Subfolders for the files should be created according to the following logic: Name the first folder using the first symbol of the file name, and then create a subfolder and name it using the second symbol of the file name.

For example: for importing filename.jpg the path to the file will be the following:

%path_to_your_Magento_instance%/media/import/f/i/filename.jpg

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 627

Importing Data Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer

Set the RE0777 permissions for the folders, and at least 0666 permissions for the image files.

2.

In the import CSV file, specify the relative path to the image file (For example,

/f/i/filename.jpg). The following columns correspond to product images: l l l image small_image media_image

3.

Perform the import in the same manner as you would import product data.

Important! Do not use upper-case characters in the file names of image files to be imported.

Import Guidelines

For entities that are new and do not exist in the database: l l l l

The entities are added with the attribute values specified in the CSV file.

If there is no value, or there is a non-valid value, for a required attribute with no default value set, then the entity (the corresponding row or rows) cannot be imported.

If there is no value, or there is a non-valid value, for a required attribute with the default value set, then the entity (the corresponding row or rows) is imported, and the default value is set for the attribute.

If the complex data is not valid, then the entity (the corresponding row or rows) cannot be imported.

For entities that already exist in the database: l l l

For attributes that are not complex data, the values from the import file, including the empty values for the non-required attributes, replace the existing values.

If there is no value, or there is a non-valid value, for a required attribute, then the existing value is not replaced.

If the complex data for the entity is invalid, the entity (the corresponding row or rows) cannot be imported, except the case, when Delete Entities was selected in the

Import Behavior drop-down menu.

The way complex data is handled depends on the Import Behavior.

l

For both new and existing entities, if an attribute, specified in the import file, exists in the system, and its values are taken from the defined set of values, but the value, specified in the import file does not exist in the defined set, the row is imported and the default value, if it is defined, is set for this attribute. Otherwise the corresponding

628 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer Exporting Data l row cannot be imported.

If an attribute name is specified in the import file but has not been defined in the system, it is not created in the system, and its values are not imported.

The file is invalid and cannot be imported if: l l

All rows in the file are invalid

A non-existing service data or complex data name is specified in the import file (that is, there is a column with a “_<non-existing name>” heading)

Exporting Data

The best way to become familiar with the structure of your database is to export the data and open it in a spreadsheet. Once you become familiar with the process, you’ll find that it is an efficient way to manage large amounts of information.

All product types can be exported except gift cards.

To export customer or product data:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Import/Export > Export .

2.

In the Export Settings section, specify the following:

Export Settings a.

Set Entity Type to one of the following: l l

Customers

Products b.

Accept the default Export File Format of “CSV.”

3.

In the Entity Attributes section, you can include or exclude data to be exported according to the entity attribute values.

l l

To include records with specific attribute values, set the required values of the attributes in the Filter column.

To omit an attribute from the export, select the Skip checkbox at the beginning of the row.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 629

Exporting Data Chapter 54:  Managing Data Transfer

Export Customers Based on Attribute Value

4.

Scroll down and click the Continue button in the lower-right corner of the page. Look for the download prompt in the lower-right corner of your browser.

The CSV file that is generated can be edited and imported back into your store. Or, it can be used for mailing or other application.

630 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 55:

Reports

Magento Community Edition provides a wide selection of reports to keep you current on everything from the contents of your customers’ shopping carts to the tags they use. Report data can be viewed online or downloaded as a CSV or XML data file. The main types of reports are: l l l l l l l

Sales

Shopping Cart

Products

Customers

Tags

Reviews

Search Terms

Dashboard

The dashboard is usually the first page that appears when you log in to the Admin, and gives an overview of sales and customer activity.

The blocks on the left provide a snapshot of lifetime sales, average order amount, the last five orders, and search terms. The graph depicts the orders and amounts for the selected date range. You can use the tabs above the graph to toggle between the two views.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 631

Dashboard Chapter 55:  Reports

632

Dashboard

Snapshot Reports

The tabs at the bottom provide quick reports about your best-selling and most viewed products, new customers and those who have purchased the most.

Bestsellers

Lists your best-selling products, showing the price and quantity ordered.

Most Viewed Products

Lists the most recently viewed products and the number of times viewed.

New Customers

Lists recently registered customers.

Customers

Lists the customers who have ordered the most during the specified range of time.

To set the date range:

Set Select Range to one of the following: l l

Last 24 Hours

Last 7 Days

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 55:  Reports Dashboard l l l

Current Month

YTD

2YTD

Dashboard Configuration

By default, the dashboard is the startup page for the Admin. However, if you prefer, you can change the configuration to display a different page when you log in. You can also set the starting dates used in dashboard reports, and disable the display of the charts section.

To set the starting dates:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under General, select Reports .

3.

Click to expand the Dashboard section, do the following: a.

Set Year-To-Date Starts to the month and year that the current year began.

b.

Set Current Month Starts to the current month.

Dashboard

To change the Admin startup page:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin .

2.

In the Admin UI section, set Startup Page to the page you want to first appear when you log in to the Admin.

3.

Click the Save Config button to save the setting.

Startup Page

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 633

Running Reports Chapter 55:  Reports

To turn off real-time data:

If you have a lot of data to process, the performance of the Dashboard can be improved by turning off the display of real time data.

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the Configuration panel on the left, under Sales, select Sales .

2.

Click to expand the Dashboard section. Then, set Use Aggregated Data (beta) to “Yes.”

To disable charts:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration . Then in the Configuration panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin .

Turn Off Dashboard Charts

2.

In the Dashboard section, set Enable Charts to “No.”

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

A message on the Dashboard indicates that the chart is now disabled.

Running Reports

Magento provides a variety of reports that you can access at any time. To see the reports that you can generate in Magento, from the Reports menu, select a type of report and then select a specific report of that type. Some report pages have filter controls that enable you to narrow the scope of the report.

When you are finished making filter selections, click Show Report (or Refresh, in some reports) to generate the report.

634

Reports Menu

Orders Report

The Orders report includes real-time data, and can include orders of any status during a specific period of time.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 55:  Reports Running Reports

To run the Orders report:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Reports > Sales > Orders . Then, do the following: a.

A message indicates the last time the report statistics were refreshed. If necessary, click the link to refresh the statistics.

b.

Set Show Report for to the website, store, or store view that you want to include in the report.

c.

Set Match Period To to one of the following: l l

Order Created Date

Order Updated Date d.

To determine how the report data is aggregated by row, set Period to one of the following: l l l

Day

Month

Year e.

To include activity during a specfic period, click the calendar icon

From and To dates.

f.

Do one of the following: and select the l l

To include all orders, set Order Status to “Any.”

To include only orders with a specific status, set Order Status to “Specified.”

Then, select each

order status

that you want to include in the report.

g.

To omit any empty rows from the report, set Empty Rows to “No.” h.

To show actual, rather than projected values, set Show Actual Values to “Yes.”

2.

When ready to run the report, click the Show Report button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 635

Running Reports Chapter 55:  Reports

636

Orders Report by Month

To export report data:

1.

Set the Export to control to one of the following: l l

CSV

Excel XML

2.

Click the Export button. Then, look for the download file in the lower-left corner of your browser window.

Field Descriptions

Filter Control

Show Report For

Match Period To

Period

From and To

Order Status

Empty Rows

Description

The Show Report For drop-down menu enables you to select the store view or website (or all websites) to report on.

The Match Period To drop-down menu enables you to select which records to report on, based on either the order creation date or the order modified date.

The Period drop-down menu enables you to aggregate the report data into rows for each day, month, or year within your report From and To dates.

Use the From and To calendar controls to determine the start and end dates that will be covered by the report.

For Order Status, select Any to include all orders, or select Specified to select one or more order status values from a list.

The Empty Rows drop-down menu enables you to select

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 55:  Reports Refreshing Sales Report Statistics

Filter Control

Show Actual Values

Description whether to include date period rows that have no data.

The Show Actual Values drop-down menu enables you to select whether to display actual (Yes) or projected (No) values.

Projected values are based on estimates of amounts to be paid.

Refreshing Sales Report Statistics

To reduce the performance impact of generating sales reports, Magento calculates and stores the required statistics for each report. When you generate a report, the report uses the stored statistics, rather than recalculating the statistics each time you generate a report.

To include the most recent data, the sales report statistics must be refreshed. Refreshing the sales report statistics is a manual process.

Report Statistics

To refresh sales report statistics:

1.

On the Admin menu, select Reports > Refresh Statistics .

2.

In the list, select the checkbox of each report that needs to be refreshed.

3.

Set the Actions control to one of the following: l l

Refresh Lifetime Statistics

Refresh Statistics for the Last Day

4.

When complete, click the Submit button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 637

Available Reports Chapter 55:  Reports

Available Reports

Report Description

Sales Reports

Total Ordered

Order Taxes

Total Invoiced vs. Paid

Total Shipped

Total Refunded

Coupons Usage

PayPal Settlement

Reports > Sales > Orders

Shows orders for the specified time period.

Reports > Sales > Tax

Shows taxes charged for orders in the specified time period; grouped by tax rate.

Reports > Sales > Invoiced

Shows amounts paid and unpaid for invoiced orders in the specified time period.

Reports > Sales > Shipping

Shows orders shipped in the specified time period, grouped by carrier/method; includes shipping charge amounts.

Reports > Sales > Refunds

Shows refunds applied to orders in the specified time period.

Reports > Sales > Coupons

Shows coupons used for orders in the specified time period, grouped by coupon code.

Reports > Sales > PayPal Settlement Reports

Shows PayPal settlements for the specified time period. Click

Fetch Updates to retrieve data from PayPal.

Shopping Cart Reports

Products in Carts Reports > Shopping Cart > Products in carts

Shows products that are currently in shopping carts.

Abandoned Carts Reports > Shopping Cart > Abandoned Carts

Shows shopping carts that were started but then abandoned.

Enables you to contact customers to offer incentives to turn an abandoned cart into a conversion.

Product Reports

Products Bestsellers

Products Ordered

Reports > Products > Bestsellers

Shows the products that were sold in the highest quantity in the specified time period.

Reports > Products > Products Ordered

638 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 55:  Reports Available Reports

Report

Most Viewed

Low Stock

Downloads

Customer Reports

New Accounts

Customers by Orders

Total

Customers by Number of Orders

Reports > Customers > New Accounts

Shows the new accounts that were created during the specified time period.

Reports > Customers > Customers by orders total

Shows the customers listed in descending order of total order amount.

Reports > Customers > Customers by number of orders

Shows the customers listed in descending order of number of orders placed.

Tag Reports

Customers Tags

Description

Shows all products that were ordered in the specified time period.

Reports > Products > Most Viewed

Shows the products that were viewed the most times in the specified time period.

Reports > Products > Low Stock

Shows the products whose stock levels are low.

Reports > Products > Downloads

Shows the number of purchases and downloads for each downloadable product.

Products Tags

Popular Tags

Reports > Tags > Customers

Shows the customers listed with the number of tags each one has created.

Reports > Tags > Products

Shows the number of unique tags and total number of tags created for each product.

Reports > Tags > Popular

Shows the number of times each tag has been applied.

Review Reports

Customers Reviews

Products Reviews

Reports > Reviews > Customers Reviews

Shows the customers listed in descending order of number of reviews contributed.

Reports > Reviews > Products Reviews

Shows the products listed in descending order of number of reviews.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 639

Available Reports Chapter 55:  Reports

Report

Search Term Report

Search Terms

Description

Reports > Search Terms

Shows terms submitted with the search tool.If Hits are high, but the Results are low, you should review product names and descriptions so you can promote products related to the term.

640 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 56:

Admin Permissions

Magento uses roles and permissions to create different levels of access to the Admin.

When your store is first set up, you receive a set of login credentials for the

Administrator role, with full permissions. However, you can restrict the level of permissions on a “need to know” basis for other people who work on your site. For example, a designer can be given access to only the Design tools, but not to areas with customer and order information.

Creating New Users

When your store is first installed, your login credentials have with full administrative access. As a best practice, one of the first things you should do is to create another user account with full Administrator permissions. That way, you can use one account for your everyday Administrative activities, and reserve the other as a “Super Admin” account in case you forget your regular credentials or they somehow become otherwise unusable.

If there are others on your team, or service providers who need access, you can create a separate user account for each, and assign a restricted role. To limit the websites or stores that admin users can access when they log in, you must first create a role with limited scope and resources. Then, you can assign the role to a specific user account. Admin users assigned to a restricted role can see and change data only for websites or stores that are associated with the role. They cannot change any global settings or data.

Step 1:

Create a New User

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Permissions > Users .

2.

Click the Add New User button.

3.

In the Account Information section, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 641

Creating New Users Chapter 56:  Admin Permissions

Account Information a.

Enter the User Name for account.

The User Name should be easy to remember. It is not case-sensitive. For example, if your user name is “John,” you can also log in as “john.” b.

Complete the following information: l l l

First Name

Last Name

Email address

This email address must be different from the one that is associated with your original Admin account.

c.

Assign a Password to the account.

The password should be seven or more characters long, and include both letters and numbers.

d.

In the Password Confirmation box, repeat the password to make sure it was entered correctly.

4.

Set This Account is to “Active.”

Step 2:

Define the Role

1.

In the User Information panel on the left, click User Role . Then, in the list of Roles, select Administrators . (Initially, it will be the only role available.)

642

Add New User Role

2.

When complete, click the Save User button.

You now have two accounts with Administrator access.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 56:  Admin Permissions Creating Custom Roles

Creating Custom Roles

To give someone restricted access, the first step is to create a role with the appropriate level of permissions. After the role is created, you will add the new user, set up the login credentials, and assign the role to the user account. After the role is established, you can create new Administrator users at any time, and assign the restricted role to grant limited access to the user.

Role Resources

Step 1:

Define the Role

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Permissions > Roles . Then in the upper-left corner, click the Add New Role button.

2.

In the Role Information section, enter a descriptive Role Name .

Role Name

3.

In the panel on the left, select Role Resources .

4.

In the Roles Resources section, select the checkbox of each Admin Resource that you want to grant those with the role permission to access.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 643

Creating Custom Roles Chapter 56:  Admin Permissions

Important! Be sure to disable access to the Permissions tool if you are limiting access for a given role. Otherwise, users with this role will be able to modify their own restrictions.

Role Resources, Collapsed View

5.

(Optional) In the panel on the left, select Role Users . Then, assign additional

Administrator user accounts to the new role.

6.

When complete, click the Save Role button. The role now appears in the list of available roles

Step 2:

Add the New User

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Permissions > Users .

2.

Click the Add New User button.

3.

In the Account Information section, do the following:

644

Account Information a.

Assign a User Name to the account.

The User Name should be easy to remember. It is not case-sensitive. For example, if your user name is “john,” you can also log in as “John.” b.

Complete the following information: l l l

First Name

Last Name

Email address

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 56:  Admin Permissions Creating Custom Roles c.

Assign a Password to the account.

The password should be at least seven characters long, and include letters and numbers.

d.

In the Password Confirmation field, type the password again to make sure it was entered correctly.

e.

Set This Account is to “Active.”

4.

In the User Information panel on the left, click User Role . Then, in the list of Roles, select the option for the role you want to assign to the new user.

New User Role

5.

When complete, click the Save User button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 645

Creating Custom Roles

646

Chapter 56:  Admin Permissions

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 57:

Security

In this chapter, you will learn how to manage Admin sessions and credentials, implement CAPTCHA, and manage website restrictions.

Security Configuration

The security settings give you the ability to control the lifetime of user sessions, and whether to allow your Magento store to run in a frame. (This setting can prevent clickjacking .) In addition you can add a secret key to URLs, and determine the case sensitivity of login credentials.

For security reasons Magento strongly recommends against running your store in a frame.

Security

To configure Admin security:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin .

3.

Click to expand the Security section, and complete the settings as needed.

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 647

CAPTCHA Chapter 57:  Security

Field Descriptions

Field

Login Is Case Sensitive

Add Secret Key to URLs

Session Lifetime

(seconds)

Allow Magento Backend to run in frame

Scope

Global

Global

Global

Global

Allow Magento Frontend to run in frame

Global

Description

Options include: Yes / No

Options include: Yes / No

Determines the length of a user session in seconds.

This option prevents “clickjacking” if you run your store in an iframe. Enabling the option causes the X-Frame-Options response header to be sent. Options include: Enabled/Only from same domain.

For security reasons, it is recommended that this setting not be enabled.

This option prevents “clickjacking” if you run your store in an iframe. Enabling the option causes the X-Frame-Options response header to be sent. Options include: Enabled/Only from same domain.

For security reasons, it is recommended that this setting not be enabled.

CAPTCHA

CAPTCHA is an acronym for “Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell

Computers and Humans Apart.” A CAPTCHA is a visual device that ensures that a human being, rather than a computer, is interacting with the site. CAPTCHA can be used for both the Admin and customers.

l l

Admin CAPTCHA

Customer CAPTCHA

Users can reload the displayed CAPTCHA by clicking the Reload icon in the upper right corner of the image. The number of reloads is not limited.

The Magento CAPTCHA was implemented using a Zend Framework module, and is fully configurable.

648 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 57:  Security CAPTCHA

CAPTCHA in Customer Login

Admin CAPTCHA Configuration

For an extra level of security, you can add a CAPTCHA to the Admin Login page.

Administrator users can reload the displayed CAPTCHA by clicking the Reload icon in the upper- right corner of the image. The number of reloads is not limited.

Admin CAPTCHA

To configure CAPTCHA for the Admin:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Advanced, select Admin .

3.

In the upper-right corner, set Current Configuration Scope to “Default.”

4.

Click to expand the CAPTCHA section, and complete the settings as described below.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 649

CAPTCHA Chapter 57:  Security

650

CAPTCHA Configuration

Field Descriptions

Field

Enable CAPTCHA in

Admin

Font

Scope

Global

Global

Forms

Displaying Mode

Global

Global

Description

Enables CAPTCHA for the Admin login page.

Options include: Yes / No

Determines the font used to dipslay the

CAPTCHA. To add your own font, put the font file in the same directory as your Magento instance and specify it in the config.xml file at: app/code/core/Mage/Captcha/etc/

Determines the form where the CAPTCHA is used. Available options: Admin Login / Admin

Forgot Password.

Defines preconditions for displaying CAPTCHA.

Available options:

Always CAPTCHA is always required to log in the

Admin.

After number of attempts to login

When selected displays the

Number of Unsuccessful

Attempts to Login field.

Enter the number of login attempts allowed. A value of 0 (zero) is similar to

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 57:  Security CAPTCHA

Field

Scope

Description setting Displaying Mode to

Always. This option does not cover the Forgot Password form. If CAPTCHA is enabled and set to be appear on this form, then it is always included on the form.

CAPTCHA Timeout

(minutes)

Number of Symbols

Symbols Used in

CAPTCHA

Case Sensitive

Global

Global

Global

Global

To track the number of unsuccessful login attempts, the attempts to log in under one email address from one IP address are counted. The maximum allowed number of attempts to log in from one IP address is

1,000. This limitation is applied only when the CAPTCHA functionality is enabled.

Determines the lifetime of the current CAPTCHA.

After the CAPTCHA expires, the user must reload the page.

Determines the number of symbols that are used for creating CAPTCHA. Maximum allowed value is 8. You can also specify a range, for example, 5-8; each generated CAPTCHA can contain different number of symbols.

Determines the symbols used in the CAPTCHA.

Only letters (a-z and A-Z) and numbers (0-9) are allowed. The default set of symbols suggested in the field excludes similar looking symbols like “i”,

“l”, “1”. Displaying these symbols in CAPTCHA decreases the chances that a user will recognize

CAPTCHA correctly.

Detremines if the letters used in the CAPTCHA are case sensitive.

Customer CAPTCHA Configuration

CAPTCHA can be required to log in to a customer account, or be configured to appear after several unsuccessful attempts.. It can also be used for other forms in the storefront.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 651

CAPTCHA Chapter 57:  Security

652

Customer CAPTCHA Configuration

To configure CAPTCHA for customers:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Customers, select Customer Configuration .

3.

Set Current Configuration Scope to the website where you want the configuration to apply.

4.

Click to expand the CAPTCHA section, and complete the fields as described below.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Field Descriptions

Field

Enable CAPTCHA on

Frontend

Font

Forms

Scope

Website

Website

Website

Description

Enables the CAPTCHA in the storefront. Options include: Yes / No

Determines the font that is used to display the

CAPTCHA. To add your own font, put the font file in the same directory as your Magento instance and specify it in the config.xml stored at: app/code/core/Mage/Captcha/etc/

Determines the form(s) where CAPTCHA is used.

Options include:

Create User

Login

Forgot Password

Checkout as Guest

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 57:  Security CAPTCHA

Field

Displaying Mode

CAPTCHA Timeout

(minutes)

Number of Symbols

Symbols Used in

CAPTCHA

Scope

Website

Website

Website

Website

Description

Register during Checkout.

Determines when the CAPTCHA appears.

Options include:

Always CAPTCHA is always required to log in.

After number of attempts to login

When selected displays the

Number of Unsuccessful

Attempts to Login field.

Enter the number of login attempts allowed. A value of 0 (zero) is similar to setting Displaying Mode to

Always. This option does not cover the Forgot Password and Create User forms. If CAPTCHA is enabled and set to be appear, then it is always included on these form.

To track the number of unsuccessful attempts to log in, the attempts to log in under one email address from one IPaddress are counted. The maximum allowed number of attempts to log in from one IP-address is 1,000. This limitation is only applied when the CAPTCHA functionality is enabled.

Determines the lifetime of the current CAPTCHA.

When the CAPTCHA expires, the user must reload the page.

Determines the number of symbols that are used in the CAPTCHA. Maximum allowed value is 8. You can also specify a range, for example, 5-

8.

Determines which symbols are used in the

CAPTCHA. Only letters (a-z and A-Z) and numbers (0-9) are allowed. The default set of symbols suggested in the field excludes similar looking symbols like i, l, or 1. Displaying these symbols in CAPTCHA decreases the chances that a user will recognize CAPTCHA correctly.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 653

CAPTCHA

Field

Case Sensitive

Chapter 57:  Security

Scope

Website

Description

Determines if the characters used in the

CAPTCHA are case sensitive. Options include:

Yes / No

654 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

System Operations

Chapter 58:

Index Management

Indexing is how Magento transforms data such as products, categories, and so on, to improve the performance of your web store. As data changes, the transformed data must be updated—or reindexed. Magento has very sophisticated architecture that stores merchant data (including catalog data, prices, users, stores, and so on) in many database tables. To optimize storefront performance, Magento accumulates data into special tables using indexers.

For example, suppose you change the price of an item from $4.99 to $3.99. Magento must reindex the price change to display it on your store. Without indexing,

Magento would have to calculate the price of every product on the fly—taking into account shopping cart price rules, bundle pricing, discounts, tier pricing, and so on.

Loading the price for a product would take a long time, possibly resulting in cart abandonment.

Index Management

To access Index Management:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Index Management .

2.

Any indexer with a checkbox next to its name can be managed manually. The other indexers update automatically according to your Magento cron job. The default mode for each indexer is set in the system configuration .

Column Descriptions

Column Description

Index The name of the indexer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 657

658

Chapter 58:  Index Management

Column

Description

Mode

Status

Update Required

Updated At

Action

Description

A description of the indexer.

Applies only to the indicated indexers. Most of the indicated indexers are set to Update on Save, which means a reindex is required when a change is saved. See: Manual

Reindexing.

Displays one of the following:

Reindex Required A change has been made that requires reindexing. If a checkbox and Reindex

Required link appears, can be reindexed manually.

Ready The index is up-to-date.

Scheduled

Running

The following options apply only to the automatic indexers:

Scheduled Reindexing is required but hasn't run yet according to your Magento cron job.

Running

Outdated

Rreindexing is required and is either running or in the queue.

Indicates reindexing is required but there is an issue preventing it from running. If this state persists, submit a bug report.

Applies only to the indicated indexers. Indicates whether or not you must manually reindex. (The value in the Mode column indicates whether the indexer must be manually updated.)

Displays the date and time an index was last manually updated, or Never if the index has never been manually updated.

Indexers that require manual updating display a Reindex

Data link. Click the link to reindex that option only.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 58:  Index Management Manual Reindexing

Manual Reindexing

When reindexing is required, a message appears at the top of the workspace with a link to Index Management.

l l

If the Status column indicates “Reindex Required,” and the Update Required column indicates “No,” only a partial index is produced when you index manually.

If the Status column indicates “Reindex Required,” and the Update Required column indicates “Yes,” a full index is produced when you index manually.

Index States

To reindex manually:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Index Management .

2.

Select the checkbox of each item to be reindexed.

3.

Set Actions to “Reindex Data.”

4.

Click the Submit button.

Index Modes

Magento reindexes automatically whenever one or more items are changed (for example, price changes, catalog or shopping cart price rules are created, new categories added, and so on). Reindexing is performed as a background process; your store is accessible during all reindexing processes.

To change the index mode:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Index Management .

2.

Select the checkbox of each indexer you want to change.

3.

Set Actions to “Change Index Mode.” Then, set Index Mode to one of the following: l l

Update on Save

Manual Update

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 659

Index Modes Chapter 58:  Index Management

660

Change Index Mode

4.

Click the Submit button to apply the change to each selected indexer.

Events that Trigger Reindexing

Index Type Reindexing Event

Product Prices Add customer group

Change configuration settings

Flat catalog

1 product data

Add store

Add store group

Add, edit, or delete attribute (for searching and filtering)

Flat catalog category data Add store

Add store group

Add, edit, or delete attribute (for searching and filtering)

Catalog category/product index

Add, edit, or delete products (single, mass, and import)

Change product-to-category relations

Add, edit, or delete categories

Add or delete stores

Delete store groups

Delete websites

Catalog search index

Stock status index

Add, edit, or delete products (single, mass, and import)

Add or delete stores

Delete store groups

Delete websites

Change inventory configuration settings.

Category permissions index

Add store, add store group, add or delete or update attribute

(for searching and filtering)

1The flat product and category indexers also influence how catalog and shopping cart price rules are indexed. If you have a large number of SKUs (about 500,000 or more), you will notice a dramatic improvement in indexing time for price rules. To take advantage of this improvement, you must enable

Use Flat Catalog Product .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 58:  Index Management Index Modes

Index Actions and Controls

Action Result

Creating a new store, new customer group, or any action listed in

“Actions that Cause a Full

Reindex.”

.

Full reindex

To Control

Full reindexing is performed on the schedule determined by your Magento cron job.

In a few cases, full reindexing must be performed manually.

Bulk loading of items in the following ways: n

Magento import/export n

Direct SQL query n

Any other method that directly adds, changes, or deletes data.

Changing scope (for example, from global to website)

Partial reindex

(only changed items are reindexed)

Partial reindex

(only changed items are reindexed)

At the frequency determined by your

Magento cron job.

At the frequency determined by your

Magento cron job.

Events that Trigger a Full Reindex

Indexer Event

Catalog Category Flat

Indexer

Create a new web store

Create a new web store view

Create, or delete an attribute that is any of the following: n

Searchable or visible in advanced search n

Filterable n

Filterable in search n

Used for sorting

Catalog Product Flat

Indexer

Change an existing attribute to be any of the preceding.

Enable flat category frontend options

Create a new web store

Create a new web store view

Create, or delete an attribute that is any of the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 661

Index Modes Chapter 58:  Index Management

Indexer

Stock status indexer

Event n

Searchable or visible in advanced search n

Filterable n

Filterable in search n

Used for sorting

Change an existing attribute to be any of the preceding.

Enable flat category frontend options

When the following Catalog Inventory options changes in the system configuration:

Stock Options: Display Out of Stock Products

Product Stock

Options:

Manage Stock

Price Indexer

Category or Product

Indexer

Adding a new customer group.

When any of the following Catalog Inventory options changes in the system configuration:

Stock Options: Display Out of Stock Products

Product Stock

Options:

Manage Stock

Price: Catalog Price Scope

Create or delete a store view

Delete a store

Delete a website

662 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 59:

Cache Storage Management

Using Magento’s cache management system is an easy way to improve the performance of your site. The Cache Storage Management page shows the status of each primary cache and its associated tag. Whenever one of the caches needs to be refreshed, a notice appears at the top of the workspace to guide you through the process.

Cache Storage Management

There are separate command buttons to flush the Magento-specific cache, and the more all-inclusive cache storage. In addition, there are command buttons to flush the catalog product images cache and JavaScript/CSS cache.

On the server, the default location for the primary Magento cache is var/cache. As an alternative to using the Cache Management tool, the contents of each cache can be manually deleted from the server.

Clearing Caches

After clearing a cache, always refresh your browser to make sure that it uses the most recent files.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 663

Clearing Caches Chapter 59:  Cache Storage Management

664

Cache Storage Management

To refresh specific caches:

1.

Do one of the following: l l

Click the Cache Management link in the message at above the workspace.

On the Admin menu, select System > Cache Management .

The status of each cache that needs to be refreshed appears in yellow and marked,

“Invalidated.”

2.

Do one of the following: l l

For each cache that needs to be refreshed, click the checkbox at the beginning of the row.

To select a group, click one of the selection options above the list.

3.

Set Actions to “Refresh,” and click the Submit button.

To flush the product image cache:

1.

From the Cache Storage Management page, under Additional Cache Management, click the Flush Catalog Images Cache button.

The message, “Image cache was cleaned” appears at the top of the workspace.

2.

Make sure to also clear the cache of your browser.

To flush the JavaScript/CSS cache:

1.

From the Cache Storage Management page, under Additional Cache Management, click the Flush JavaScript/CSS Cache button.

The message, “The JavaScript/CSS cache has been cleaned” appears at the top of the workspace.

2.

Make sure to also clear the cache of your browser.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 59:  Cache Storage Management Clearing Caches

Button Descriptions

Command Buttons

Flush Magento Cache

Description

Removes all items in the default Magento cache (var/cache), according to its associated Magento tag.

Flush Cache Storage

Flush Catalog Images

Cache

Flush JavaScript/CSS

Cache

Removes all items from the cache, regardless of Magento tag.

If your system uses an alternate cache location, any cached files used by other applications is removed in the process.

Removes all automatically resized and watermarked catalog images that are stored at: media/catalog/product/cache.

If recently uploaded images aren't reflected in the catalog, try flushing the catalog and refreshing your browser.

Removes the merged copy of JavaScript and CSS files from the cache. If recent changes to the stylesheet or JavaScript aren't reflected in the store, try flushing the JavaScript/CSS cache and refreshing your browser.

Cache Types

Type

Configuration

Description

System and module configuration files.

Associated tag: CONFIG

System: config.xml

local.xml

Module: config.xml

Layouts

Blocks HTML Output

Translations

Collections Data

Page layout building instructions.

Associated tag: LAYOUT_GENERAL_CACHE_TAG

The HTML that is associated with page blocks.

Associated tag: BLOCK_HTML

Language translation files.

Associated tag: TRANSLATE

Files that contain data that is the result of a query.

Associated tag: COLLECTION_DATA

EAV Types and Attributes Attribute entities, types, and values.

Associated tag: EAV

Web Services Configuration

Web Services definition files (api.xml)

Associated tag: CONFIG_API

Web Services Configuration

Web Services definition files (api2.xml)

Associated tag: CONFIG_API2

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 665

External Full-Page Cache Chapter 59:  Cache Storage Management

External Full-Page Cache

Full-page caching can improve response time and reduce the load on the server.

Magento Community Edition supports the external Send Full Page Cache. To learn more, see Content Caching (Dynamic) on the Zend website.

To enable external caching:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration.

2.

In the panel on the left, under Advanced, select System.

3.

Click to expand the External Full Page Cache Settings section. Then, do the following: a.

Set Enable External Cache to “Yes.” b.

Set External Cache Control to “Zend Full Page Cache.”

External Full-Page Cache Settings

4.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

666 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 60:

Alternate Media Storage

Magento Community Edition gives you the option to store media files in a database on a database server, or on a Content Delivery Network (CDN), as opposed to storing them on the file system of the web server. The advantage of using alternate storage is that it minimizes the effort required to synchronize media when multiple instances of the system that are deployed on different servers that need access to the same images, CSS files, and other media files.

CDN as alternate media storage is implemented as a support option only, not as a full integration with a specific CDN. You must choose and configure a CDN on your own.

Using a Database for Media Storage

By default, all images, compiled CSS files, and compiled JavaScript files of the

Magento instance are stored in the file system on the web server. You can choose to store these files in a database on a database server. One advantage of this approach is the option of automatic synchronization and reverse synchronization between the web server file system and the database. You can use the default database to store media or create a new one. To be able to use a newly created database as media storage, you must add information about it and its access credentials to the local.xml file.

To use a database for media storage:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under Advanced, select System .

3.

This configuration takes place at the global level, so set Current Configuration

Scope to “Default Config.”

4.

Click to expand the Storage Configuration for Media section. Then, do the following:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 667

Using a Content Delivery Network Chapter 60: Alternate Media Storage

668

Storage Configuration for Media a.

Set Media Storage to “Database.” b.

Set Select Media Database to the database you want to use.

c.

Click the Synchronize button to transfer the existing media to the newly selected database.

d.

Enter the Environment Update Time in seconds.

5.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Accessing Media from a Database

When the customer opens the store page, its browser requests the HTML code and the media specified in the HTML code from the Magento system. The system searches the requested media in the file system and passes it to the browser, if it is found. If the system does not find the media in the file system, it requests the media from the database specified in the settings, places the media to the file system, and sends it to the customer’s web browser.

To get the files from the database to the file system on the web server a PHP script is used. When the browser requests media from the web server, there are two alternatives for when a PHP script is run: l l

If web server rewrites are enabled in the Magento system and supported by the server, the PHP script is run only when the requested media is not found in the web server file system.

If web server rewrites are disabled in the Magento system or not supported by the server, the PHP script is run in any case, even when the required media exists in the file system of the web server.

You can configure web server rewrites in System > GENERAL > Web > Search Engine

Optimization > Use Web Server Rewrites.

Using a Content Delivery Network

Storing media files in a CDN is another alternative supported in Magento. There is no full integration with a specific CDN, and you are responsible for choosing and configuring a CDN on your own. After configuring the CDN, you must complete the

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 60: Alternate Media Storage Using a Content Delivery Network configuration from the Admin. The changes can be made at either the global or website level.

To configure a content delivery network:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the panel on the left, under General, select Web .

3.

Set the Current Configuration Scope as needed.

4.

Click to expand the Unsecure section. Then, do the following:

Unsecure a.

Change the value of the Base Media URL .

b.

Change the value of the Base JavaScript URL .

5.

Click to expand the Secure section.

Secure a.

Change the value of the Base Media URL .

b.

Change the value of the Base JavaScript URL .

6.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 669

Using a Content Delivery Network Chapter 60: Alternate Media Storage

Accessing Media from a CDN

When a CDN is selected as media storage, all paths to media on the web store pages are changed to paths to the CDN. Retrieving media that is stored in a CDN works as follows: l l l

When a customer opens a page in the store, the browser addresses the CDN with the request to acquire some media files, such as images.

If the CDN does not yet have these images in its storage, it requests them from the server, and provides images to the customer’s browser.

If the CDN already has the required images in storage, it simply serves the requested images to the customer's browser.

Important! When a CDN is used as media storage, JavaScript may not function properly if the CDN is not in your subdomain. This is a browser security feature.

670 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 61:

Server Backups & Rollback

Magento enables you to perform different types of backups (backup of database, file system, or both) and to perform rollbacks automatically. Files are compressed using the .gz and .tgz formats. Backup files are stored in the var/backups directory in your

Magento file system. The content of the /var/cache, /var/log, /var/session and

/var/report folders is excluded from the backup.

Backups

Creating a Backup

To create a backup:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Tools > Backups .

2.

Click one of the following buttons, depending on the backup type you need to create:

System Backup Creates a complete backup of the database and the file system. On the next step you will have the possibility to choose whether to include the media folder to the backup.

Creates a backup of the database and the media folder.

Database and Media

Backup

Database Backup Creates a backup of the database.

3.

To put the store into maintenance mode during the backup, select the checkbox.

After the backup is created, maintenance mode is turned off automatically.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 671

672

Chapter 61:  Server Backups & Rollback

4.

If you are creating a system backup, select the Include Media folder to System Backup checkbox if you want to include the media folder. When prompted, confirm the action.

Database backup files are compressed using the .gz format. For the system backups and database and media backups, the .tgz format is used. Backup files are stored in the var/backups directory in your Magento file system. The files that are stored in the

/var/cache, /var/log, /var/session and /var/report folders are excluded from the backup.

Records of all created backups are listed on the Backups page. Deleting a record deletes the archive file as well.

Roll Back Changes

To roll back the whole system or the database:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Tools > Backups .

2.

On the Backups page, find the backup you want. Then in the Action column, click the

Rollback link.

All changes made since the backup was created will be lost after the rollback.

3.

Confirm the roll back. When prompted, enter your Admin Password . Then, choose whether you want to put your store into the maintenance mode during the roll back.

When restoring file system or database and media files you can choose to use the FTP connection.

After the rollback, you are redirected to the Admin login page.

4.

Refresh cache types and rebuild required indexes. This can be done under System >

Cache Management and System > Index Management, respectively.

Important! Use the Rollback with caution. Customers who are in the process of checking out when you start the rollback may not be able to complete checkout.

Limiting Access to Backup and Rollback

Access to the Backups and Rollback management tool can be restricted by configuring user

permissions

for backup and rollback resources. To restrict access, leave the corresponding checkbox unselected. If you need to grant access to the Rollback resources, you must grant access to backup resources as well.

Create a Backup from Magento Connect Manager

Before installing an extension, you should always perform a backup. In the Magento

Connect Manager (MCM), you can choose to create a backup before installing an extension or upgrading Magento.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 61:  Server Backups & Rollback

To create a backup from MCM:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Magento Connect > Magento Connect Manager .

2.

Select the Create Backup checkbox and select the backup type.

Proceed with installing extension or updating Magento. The backup is created automatically, and is listed under System > Tools > Backups.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 673

674

Chapter 61:  Server Backups & Rollback

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 62:

Magento Connect

Magento Connect is the marketplace for Magento extensions. There are hundreds of extensions available from all over the world. Magento out-of-the-box supports a few of the most popular ones. However, community members are developing and publishing new extensions in order to extend Magento with various new features.

Magento Connect

Updating Magento

Magento Community Editionis constantly evolving. New features are added and problems resolved on an ongoing basis. From time to time you will be notified that a new Magento CE version is available. This notice will be published in the Magento blog, and in your Admin InBox.

Consider the following before updating your store:

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 675

Updating Magento Chapter 62:  Magento Connect l l l l

If the update is critical, contains mandatory updates, or resolves issues that you have encountered, you should update your store.

If your store has a custom theme, you will benefit from the bug fixes in the update, but new the functionality might not be implemented in your theme.

Upgrading between major versions, such as between version 1.1 and 1.2, might require minor configuration changes. See the update release notes for more information.

We strongly recommend that you test all updates in a staging environment before upgrading a live store.

To update your store to a new version:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Magento Connect > Magento Connect Manager .

2.

Enter your Admin username and password, and click the Log In button.

3.

Click the Check for Upgrades button. Any upgrades available for Magento CE modules are marked in yellow.

4.

In the Actions column, select the upgrades to be installed. Then, click the Commit

Changes button.

5.

When the installation is complete, click the Return to Admin link in the header.

Congratulations! You have just upgraded your Magento CE. Now check your site to make sure everything works as expected.

676 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 62:  Magento Connect Installing Extensions

Installing Extensions

Many extensions are available on Magento Connect, and the installation process varies for each. Some extensions require additional configuration after the installation. Please read the documentation provided by the extension developer for specific instructions.

The following instructions outline the general process. Before installing any extension, always

back up your store .

To back up your store:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Magento Connect > Magento Connect Manager .

2.

Select the Create Backup checkbox and select the backup type.

The backup is created automatically, and is listed under System > Tools > Backups.

To install an extension:

1.

Go to Magento Connect .

2.

Use the filters to browse through the available extensions.

3.

On the page of the extension you want to install, do the following: a.

If the extension is available for sale, click the Get Extension button. Then, follow the prompts to purchase the extension.

b.

Click the Get Extension Key key button.

c.

Click the link to read the license agreement, and if you agree to the terms, select the checkbox.

An extension key similar to this appears: magento-core/Mage_xxxx. The key is a special link that Magento needs to install the extension to your store.

d.

Click Select to select the key, and press Ctrl + C to copy it to the clipboard.

4.

Log in to your store Admin, and do the following: a.

On the Admin menu, select System > Magento Connect > Magento Connect

Manager .

b.

When prompted, enter your Admin User Name and Password . Then, click the Log

In button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 677

Installing Extensions Chapter 62:  Magento Connect

Log In to Magento Connect Manager c.

In the Install New Extensions section, paste the Extension Key .

d.

Click the Install button and wait for the installation to complete.

5.

You can now return to your store Admin and use the extension.

Look for new options in the related section of the Admin. For example, a payment extension will appear in System > Configuration > Sales > Payment Methods.

678 Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 63:

Web Services

Web services share information across networks using standards-based technologies.

Information from your store can be shared with other Web-based services to help create a more integrated set of tools for your business.

Web services retrieve information from your store using an application programming interface, the Magento Core API. The Magento Core API includes all the parameters for data requests that other web services need to access information from your store.

Magento Core API Settings

The Magento Core API supports both SOAP and XML RPC protocols. The API is permission-based, and allows access to the Customer, Catalog, and Order modules of your store.

The WSDL (Web Services Description Language) definition that you create for your

Magento Community Edition API solution ism by default, WS-I compliant. This makes it possible to use tools that require a WS-I complaint WSDL definition for API integration. No additional settings are required.

WS-I Endpoint URL

Use the following endpoint URL for all WSI-I APIs, and replace {site_url} with the store domain.

http://{site_url}/api/wsi_soap/?wsdl

General Settings

By default, the API default character set is UTF-8, and the timeout for client sessions is 3600 seconds. You can change the default settings through the system configuration of the store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 679

Activating Web Services Chapter 63:  Web Services

To change the general settings:

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Configuration .

2.

In the Configuration panel on the left, under Services, select Magento Core API . Then, click to expand the General Settings section. Then, do the following:

680

Magento Core API General Settings a.

Enter the name of the Default Response Charset that you want to use.

b.

Enter the length of the Client Session Timeout in seconds.

c.

To enable WS-I Compliance , select “Yes.” d.

To enable the WSDL Cache , select “Yes.”

3.

When complete, click the Save Config button.

Activating Web Services

Web Services give you the ability to grant permission to third-party applications to access your store data for the purpose of integration. Magento Community Edition supports both SOAP and REST services.

Step 1:

Create a Web Service Role

1.

On the Admin menu, select System > Web Services > SOAP/XML-RPC Roles .

2.

Click the Add New Role button.

3.

In the Role Information section, enter a Role Name such as “API.”

4.

In the panel on the left, select Role Resources . Then do one of the following: l l l

To enable full access, set Resource Access to “All.”

To provide limited access to data, set Resource Access to “Custom.” Then, select the checkbox of each resource that is available to this role.

By default, when a area is selected, full access is granted. However, you can specify the actions that a person is allowed to take. Specific types of access are listed under many of the resource links, so it is easy to determine exactly what a user is allowed to do with the resource.

5.

When complete, click the Save Role button.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Chapter 63:  Web Services Activating Web Services

Step 2:

Create a Web Service User

1.

On the Admin menu, select Web Services > SOAP/XML-RPC-Users .

2.

Click the Add New User button.

3.

Complete the following fields: l l l l

User Name

First Name

Last Name

Email

4.

In the API Key field, type in a verification key, or password. This is the access credentials that third-party web services will use to access your Magento store.

Web Service User

5.

To confirm, re-enter the key in the API Key Confirmation field.

6.

In the panel on the left, select User Role . Then, select a role for the user.

7.

When complete, click the Save User button.

Step 3:

Add Custom Scripts to Your Store

Some third-party web services rely on snippets of JavaScript code to gather data. Some web services require you to insert code in the

HTML <head>

section, while others require the code to be in the HTML footer, below the closing </body> tag.

REST Roles

The REST API defines a set of functions that developers can use to perform requests and receive responses. To learn more about REST permissions, see:

Web Services .

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 681

Activating Web Services

682

Chapter 63:  Web Services

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix A:

Glossary

A above the fold

The web page content that is immediately visible in the browser window; section of a page that is displayed without the need to scroll.

Admin

The password-protected back office of your store where orders, catalog, content, and configurations are managed.

alt text

The text that is displayed in place of an image when the user is unable to view the image.

anchor text

The visible text that is anchored to another page or page section; the literal text of a hyperlink.

API

Application Program Interface: A software interface that lets third-party applications read and write to a system using programming language constructs or statements.

aspect ratio

The proportional relationship between the width and height of an image.

attribute

A characteristic or property of a product; anything that describes a product.

Examples of product attributes include color, size, weight, and price.

authorization

To give a service permission to perform certain actions or to access resources.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 683

684

Appendix A:  Glossary average inventory cost

Product price, less coupons or discounts, plus freight and applicable taxes. The average is determined by adding the beginning cost of inventory each month, plus the ending cost of inventory for the last month of the period.

B

B2B

Business to Business: A type of business transaction between two business entities that are not the final consumers of the goods or services.

B2C

Business to Consumer: Business transactions between a business entity and a consumer.

banner

Promotional graphics displayed either horizontally on the top of a web page or vertically on the left or right margins. Website advertisements are often displayed as banners.

base currency

The primary form of currency used in store transactions.

base currency rate

The base currency rate is the default for your store.

batch processing

To perform a task or make a change to multiple items all at once, without manual repetition.

bounce rate

The percentage of visitors to your site that leave without viewing any other pages.

brand

A unique identity that defines a particular product or group of products.

breadcrumb

A navigation aid that helps the user to keep track of their location within your store.

brick and mortar

A retail business with a permanent physical location, as opposed to being entirely virtual.

broken link

A hyperlink that fails to send the user to its intended web page.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix A:  Glossary

C callout

A term that is sometimes used to describe a block that is defined as a layout update using XML code.

canonical URL

The canonical meta tag redirects search engines to the correct URL, when seemingly duplicate content is encountered on the server.

capture

The process of converting the authorized amount into a billable transaction.

Transactions cannot be captured until authorized, and authorizations cannot be captured until the goods or services have been shipped.

cardholder

A person who opens a credit card account and is authorized to make purchases.

cascading style sheet

The markup standard used to apply styles to HTML elements on the page.

category

A set of products that share particular characteristics or attributes.

CCV

Credit Card Verification code. (See CVV) checkout process

The process of gathering the payment and shipping information that is necessary to complete the purchase of items in the shopping cart. In the final step, the customer reviews and places the order.

CMS

Content Management System: A software system that is used to create, edit, and maintain content on a website.

composite product

Any product type that offers customers a choice of options.

composite products

Content Delivery Network

A large distributed network of servers that specializes in the high performance delivery of multi-media content.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 685

686

Appendix A:  Glossary content marketing

The art of promoting products or services by providing valuable information at no charge.

conversion

A marketing term that indicates a goal has been reached. If the goal is to sell a product, conversion is reached when a visitor to your site becomes a buyer.

conversion rate

The percentage of visitors who are converted into buyers.

credit memo

A document issued by the merchant to a customer to write off an outstanding balance because of overcharge, rebate, or return of goods.

CSS

Cascading Style Sheets: A style sheet language that controls the appearance of

HTML documents; a way to control the appearance of text, graphics, lists, links, and all other elements on a web page.

CSV

Comma Separated Values: A type of file used to store data values which are separated from each other by commas.

CVM

Card Verification Method: A way to verify the identity of the customer by confirming a 3-digit or 4-digit credit card security code with the payment processor.

CVV

The Card Verification Value, also known as the Card Security Code, provides an additional level of security for online transactions.

D domain

The address of a website on the web; what the customer types in their browser address bar to access the store.

double opt-in

The process for subscribing email recipients by requiring them to take a secondary step to confirm that they want to receive emails.

dynamic content

A web page that displays different content depending on the user request.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix A:  Glossary

Dynamic Media URL

A link to an image that contains a relative reference to the file location in media storage.

E

EAV

Entity Attribute Value evergreen content

Content that has a long shelf life.

F

FAQ

Frequently Asked Questions.

favicon

Short for favorites icon; a 16x16 or 32x32 pixel icon associated with a website; is displayed in the browser address bar and next to the site name in a bookmark list.

feed reader

Software that is used to read syndicated content from RSS feeds.

FOB

Freight On Board: A shipping term indicating who is responsible for paying transportation charges.

frontend properties

Properties that determine the presentation and behavior of an attribute from the standpoint of the customer in your store.

fulfillment

The process of managing customer shipments.

G gateway

A transaction bridge between a customer and a payment processing service that is used to transfer money between the customer and the merchant.

gross margin

The difference between the cost and price of a product.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 687

688

Appendix A:  Glossary

H handle

In programming, a name used to reference an object.

home page

The first home page a visitor sees when they access your website URL.

Considered the most important page on your website according to search engine indexing.

HTML

HyperText Markup Language: A standard for tagging and structuring text, images, videos, and other media on a web page.

I invoice

A document that provides a detailed description of a purchase, including products purchased, quantity, price, shipping cost, sales tax, and total.

J

JavaScript

A scripting language used with HTML to produce dynamic effects and interactions on web pages.

K keyword

A term or phrase used in a search to filter for content that is of significant importance to that term or phrase.

L

LAMP

Linux / Apache / MySQL / PHP landing page

A page on your site where a visitor arrives after clicking a link or advertisement.

layout

The visual and structural composition of a page.

layout update

A specific set of XML instructions that determines how the page is constructed.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix A:  Glossary link juice

The value and authority transferred from one web page to another via hyperlinks (or links). Link juice affects a website’s page rank, a factor used to rank a search engine results page.

liquid layout

A flexible approach to web design that specifies the size and position of elements as percentages rather than as exact measurements in pixels.

load sequence

The order in which scripts are loaded into memory. To work correctly, some scripts must be loaded before others.

locale

A set of configurations that defines the user’s language, country, tax rate, and other settings.

login

The process of signing into an online account.

M markdown

The amount subtracted from the original price of a product.

markup

A percentage added to the cost of an item to determine the retail price.

media storage

A dedicated space on the content delivery network for your store's assets.

merchant account

An account with a bank or financial institution that makes it possible to accept credit card transactions.

meta tags

Information in a web page that is not displayed on the page itself, but is used by search engines to determine the page title, description, and page keywords.

N navigation

The primary group of web page links that a customer uses to navigate around the website; the navigation links to the most important categories or pages on an online store.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 689

690

Appendix A:  Glossary

O opt-in

The process by which a user consents to receiving emails from an online store.

P packing slip

A document that is usually included in a shipped package that describes the contents. Packing slips do not include financial or account information.

path to purchase

The path a prospect follows that leads to a sale.

payment bridge

An application that helps merchants meet PCI- DSS requirements.

payment gateway

A service that charges your customers’ credit cards and sends the funds to your merchant account, for deposit into your business bank account.

PCI

Payment Card Industry: Refers to debit and credit cards and their associated businesses.

privacy policy

A document that explains the merchant’s policies for handling customer information.

purchase order (PO)

A written sales contract between a buyer and seller that describes the merchandise or service to be purchased from a vendor.

R redirect

A method used to alert browsers and search engines that a page has been moved. 301 Redirect: Permanent change 302 Redirect: Temporary change relative link

A hyperlink that includes only the address of the linked page that is relative to the linking page, rather than the full URL.

return policy

A document that explains the merchant’s rules regarding the return of products by customers.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix A:  Glossary robots.txt

A file placed on a website that tells search engine crawlers which pages not to index.

RSS feed

Really Simple Syndication: A technology that creates web content syndication and allows web users to subscribe to product feeds, websites, and blogs.

S

SaaS

Software as a Service: A software delivery model where the vendor provides the software and hosting environment, and customers pay for the service by subscription or per use.

security certificate

Information that is used by the SSL protocol to establish a secure connection.

SEO

Search Engine Optimization: The process of improving a website’s search engine rankings in order to increase valued visitors.

SERP

Search Engine Results Page settlement

Settlement occurs when the acquiring bank and the issuer exchange funds and the proceeds are deposited into the merchant account.

shipping carrier

A company that transports packages. Common carriers include UPS, FedEx, DHL, and USPS.

shopping cart

A grouping of products that the customer wishes to purchase at the end of their shopping session.

sidebar

The right or left column of a two-column page layout.

sitemap

A page that provides search engines with an efficient, alternate route through your site.

SKU

Stock Keeping Unit: A number or code assigned to a product to identify the product, options, price, and manufacturer.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 691

692

Appendix A:  Glossary splash page

A promotional page with a product or advertisement; normally displayed before the home page.

SSL certificate

A validation and security mechanism that identifies the merchant and encrypts credit card and other sensitive information.

static block

A fixed content block that can be displayed on various content pages in a store.

static content

Content that does not change frequently. See also dynamic content.

T theme

A package that contains graphics and appearance information, and customizes the look and feel of the store.

transactional email

A notification email sent to the customer when a transaction is processed.

transactional emails

An automated email message that is sent in response to a specific event or transaction.

U

URL

Uniform Resource Locator: The unique address of a page on the internet.

usability

Refers to the degree to which a product or service is easy to use by its customers.

W widget

A prepared snippet of code that adds functionality and/or dynamic effects to your store.

WYSIWYG

What You See Is What You Get: An editor that displays formatted text as it will appear in its final published form.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix A:  Glossary

X

XML

Extensible Markup Language: A markup format derived from SGML that it used to format information for publication and distribution.

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 693

694

Appendix A:  Glossary

Notes

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix B:

Editor Toolbar

Editor Toolbar

Editing Tools

Button Description

Undo

Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Editing Tools

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 695

696

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Button Description

Paste as Plain Text

Paste from Word

Find

Find and Replace

Spellchecker (not installed)

Mark as Deletion

Mark as Insertion

Citation

Abbreviation

Acronym

Styles and Fonts

Styles and Fonts

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

List Description

Styles

Format

Font Family

Font Size

Character Format

Button Description

Bold

Italic

Underline

Strikeout

Subscript

Character Format

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 697

698

Button Description

Superscript

Special Characters

Button Description

Insert Symbol

Special Characters

Insert Non-Breaking Space

Insert Page Break

Color

Button Description

Select Text Color

Select Background Color

Color

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Paragraph Format

Button Description

Left Justify

Center

Right Justify

Full Justify

Outdent

Indent

Blockquote

Paragraph Format

Coding Tools

Coding Tools

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 699

700

Button Description

Remove Formatting

Cleanup Messy Code

Lists

Button Description

Bulleted (Unordered) List

Lists

Numbered (Ordered) List

Rules

Button

Rules

Description

Insert Simple Horizontal Rule

Insert Formatted Horizontal Rule

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Links and Anchors

Button Description

Insert/Edit Link

Links and Anchors

Remove Link

Insert/Edit Anchor

Images and Media

Button Description

Insert/Edit Image

Images and Media

Insert Media

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 701

702

Tables

Button Description

Insert/Modify Table

Table Row Properties

Table Cell Properties

Insert Row Above

Insert Row Below

Tables

Remove Column

Remove Row

Split Merged Table Cells

Merge Table Cells

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Layers

Layers

Button Description

Insert New Layer

Move Layer Forward

Move Layer Backward

Toggle Absolute Positioning

Variables, Attributes and Widgets

Button

Variables, Attributes and Widgets

Description

Insert Variable

Insert/Edit Attributes

Insert Widget

Magento Community Edition: User Guide 703

704

Workspace Preferences

Button

Workspace Preferences

Description

Toggle Fullscreen Mode

Display Visual Control Characters (On/Off)

Toggle Guidelines / Invisible Elements

Set Typing Direction Left-to-Right

Set Typing Direction Right-to-Left

Help

Appendix B:  Editor Toolbar

Magento Community Edition: User Guide

Index

1

1 Column Layout 106, 411, 413

2

2 Columns

with Left Bar 107, 412, 414

with Right Bar 107, 412

3

3 Column Layout 413, 415

3D Secure Credit Card Validation 543

4

404 Page Not Found 356

A

Abandoned carts 455

report 638

About Us page 356

Account

customer information 434

Magento 25

share 26

Actions

control 52, 56

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Add

Exception, theme 428

New User 644

Root Category 101

to Wishlist 295

Address

Book, customer 434

Address format 482

Address templates 482

Admin 43, 48, 56

CAPTCHA 648

login 44

menu 49

permissions 641 role 641

role, create 642

role, custom 643

security 647

Startup Page 633

user 641 user, create 641

Adobe Reader 475

Advanced Search 117, 221

Advocacy Tools 38

AirMail, mobile 332

Allow

cookies 455

Countries 70

Gift Message 172

HTML tags 117, 122

HTML Tags on Frontend 122

Printed Card 310

705

706

Allowed Currencies 72

American Express 542

Analytics 32, 38

Anchor category 90, 100-101

Antivirus software 80

Any, checkbox 56

AOV 34

API 39, 349, 679

Core 679

Key 681

Append Complex Data 626

Approve product review 301

As Low As, bundle product 150

Associated Product 136, 141

Attribute 109

advanced search 117

code 118

create 111

delete 114

entities 628

filterable 93

Google Shopping 349

group 116

information 113

input types 110

layered navigation 117

predefined 385

price 215

product 117

properties 111

quick search 116 system 116

Attribute set 109, 114, 138-139, 161

Australia, PayPal solutions 528

Authorize.Net 531, 533, 539

capture 533

Direct Post Method 534

refund 542

Auto Bill, recurring payment 167

Autogenerate

Site Map 235

Automatic

redirect 246

Average Order Value 34

Average Orders 48

B

BackendSee also 

Admin 44

Backorders 181-182, 185

PayPal Express Checkout 515

Backup

create 677

delete 672 permissions 672

Bank Transfer 496

Base

currency 71

image 197-198, 200

JavaScript URL 669 media URL 669

Best practice

industry 79

SEO 233

Bestsellers 48, 632

Bill Me Later, PayPal 516

Index

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Billing

agreement 434, 519, 521

recurring payment 168-169

Block 367, 385

category 104, 106

create 368

ID, markup tag 401

Block reference 390-392

category 369

CMS pages 369

product page 370

Blocks HTML Output, cache 665

Blog, Magento 5

Breadcrumb trail 91

Bundle Product 129, 148

group price 213

Items 150

Business location 70

Buy X, Get Y Free 286

C

Cache 663

CSS files 665

JavaScript 664

module 665

Storage Management 663

system 665 types 665

Callout 390

Canada, PayPal solutions 528

Cancel

order 450

Canceled, order status 465

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Canonical meta tag 238, 240, 242

CAPTCHA 648

configuration, Admin 649

configuration, store 651

Capture

Offline 470, 534

Online 468, 533

Cardholder data 80

Cardinal Centinel 543

Cart contents, retrieve 455

Cash On Delivery 498

Catalog 39

Categories Link 363

Category Link 373

flat 123

images 197

indexing 123

Input Type for Store Owner 112

menu 49

New Products List 374

Price Rules 259, 261

Product Link 374

Products Link 363

Search 163

Category 174

create 96

Description 104

Display Settings 104

General Information 103

grayed out 96

ID 98

image 104

landing page 99, 106

levels 90

707

708

link 363

modify 100

name 103

page 104

path, in URL 238-239, 243

Products 107

rewrite 250

root 100

tree 96

URL key 98

Category hidden 102

CDN 667, 669

JavaScript use 670 media retrieval 670

Certification 5

Channels 317

Check / Money Order 499

Checkbox 52

states 56

Terms and Conditions 462

Checkout process 36, 433

Terms and Conditions 460

Checkout with PayPal 512

Child authorizations, PayPal Express

Checkout 516

Clear cache 663

Click for price 213

Closed, order status 465

CMS 33, 353

Block, category 105

menu 51

Page Link 363, 373

page rewrite 252

page, breadcrumbs 91

Index

Pages 355, 357

Static Block 367, 373

Widget 374

COD 498

Collections Data, cache 665

Color

message importance 47

Column 411

layout 106, 390

sort 54

Combine, Search Type 228

Comma-separated values 623

Community 38

Poll 294

Compare Products 117, 121, 293, 296

Comparison operator 263

Comparison properties 117

Complete, order status 465, 473

Compliance, industry 79

Composite product 130

Compound tax 595

Conditions, price rule 270

config.xml 665

Configurable Product 128

create 138

image 144

inventory 192

Manage Stock 192

Configuration

cache 665

email addresses 75

search, default 227

security 647

Consent, cookies 82

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Consistent prices 589

Consulting 5

Contact Us 77

form 402

Contacts 77

Content 353, 355

Delivery Network 667, 669

management system 33

mobile app 327

page 357

Cookie

domain 83

law 82

lifetime 83

persistent 455

Restriction Mode 81-82

Restriction Notice 83

session 455

use, Magento 85

Copy from Configurable 143

Copyright notice 422

Countries Options 70

Coupon 34, 37, 278, 321, 449

Usage, report 638

Coupon Usage, report 283

Create

New Attribute 164

order 445

Packages, shipping labels 572

Simple Associated Products 142

Store 62

Store View 63

Website 61

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Credit 485

card 531

cards, multiple 539

memo 441, 487

Credit Memo

Return to Stock 181, 183

Critical, message 47

Cron job 123

Cross-border trade 589

Cross-sells 177, 260

CSS

cache 665

email 618

CSV file 558, 623, 628, 631, 636

category path 623

customer structure 625

structure 623

Currency

rates 71

Setup 71 symbols 71

Current Configuration Scope 63-64

Custom

Design

Category 106

layout 107

Layout Update

product 171

Layout Update, category 107

Options 130, 178

rewrite 252

scripts 681

Theme 107, 171

URL 32

709

710

variable 385

Custom Order Status 466

Customer

account 38, 433, 451

dashboard 433

VAT Validation 612

address template 482

billing address, PayPal Express

Checkout 514

CSV structure 625

engagement 33

group 452

create 437-438

edit 438

VAT 602

import 626

journey 30-31

Order Status, RSS feed 322

retention 37

Reviews, report 639

segment 34

Service page 356

Support 75

Tags, report 639

Customers 632

by Number of Orders, report 639 by Orders Total, report 639

menu 50

reports 631

Customers online 444

CyberSource 532

D

Dashboard 38, 48, 631

charts 634

configuration 633

customer 433

menu 49

Database

and Media Backup 671 backup 671

compression, backup 672

media storage 667

Date, input type 110

Days of week 68

Default

Config 63

Country 70

Display Currency 71

email template 618

Robots 421

Title, page 420

Value 116

Default theme 424

Delete Entries, Import 626

Demo

login 44

Design 33, 39, 407

custom, category 106

product 171

Development environment 124

DHL 561

shipping labels 567

shipping packages 565

Direct Post Method, Authorize.Net 534

Index

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Discount 261, 502

quantity 206

Display

Actual Price 204, 213

in Suggested Terms 229

Mode, category 105

not required State 69

Settings

Category 104

Store Demo Notice 409, 420

Distributing newsletters 316

Documentation 4

Double opt-in 314

Download

links 156

samples 157

Downloadable Product 129

configure 159

create 153

Downloader 12

Downloads, report 639

Drill-down, price 95

Drop shipments, PayPal Express

Checkout 515

Dropdown

attribute 139

input type 110

Duplicate

content 242

Dynamic

media URL 226, 240

URL 236

values, bundle product 148

Magento Community Edition User Guide

E

EAV 123

Types and Attributes, cache 665

eBook download 153

ECG 6

Eco tax 590

Ecommerce Tracking, Google Analytics 347

Ecosystem, Magento 6

Editor, WYSIWYG 360

Email

a Friend 294, 309

addresses, configuration 75 addresses, domain 75 addresses, store 75

campaign 37

logo 617

Options 77

template 617-618

template, configure 621

template, default 618

Email template 77

variables 385

Empty, page layout 107, 413

Enable

Cookies 357

Qty Increments 192

WYSIWYG Editor 117

Encryption 80

Encryption key 24

Entity Attributes 629

Equalize

Price Ranges, layered navigation 95

Product Counts, layered navigation 95

711

712

EU Member Countries 608

Evergreen content 353

eWAY Direct 533

Excel

XML 636

Export 629 product data 629 product types 629

Settings 629

to, report 636

Expressed consent, cookies 82

Extension

install 24, 677

social media 317

external cache 666

F

Facebook 6

extensions 317

Open Graph 317

Favicon 416, 420

FedEx 561

shipping labels 567

shipping packages 562

Fee failure, recurring payment 168

Feed reader 321

File

compression, backup 671

validation, import 627

File permissions 13

Filter

by Attribute 99

controls 55

Index

Filterable

attribute 93, 121

Filters 52

Firewall 80

First Data Global Gateway 532

Fixed Product Tax 590

input type 110

Flat

catalog 123, 226

setup 124

Rate Shipping 551

Flurry

Analytics 329

API Code 329

Flush

Cache Storage 665

Catalog Cache 665

JavaScript cache 664

JavaScript/CSS Cache 665

Magento Cache 665

product image cache 664

Footer 419, 422

Forum, Magento 5

FPT 590

attribute 592

configuration 591

in attribute set 592

in product 593

setup 594

Frame, running your store in 648

France, PayPal solutions 528

Free

shipping 552

shipping, price rule 283

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Frontend Properties 112

FTP calculations 590

Fulfillment 473

Full

reindex 661

Full Page Cache, external 666

Fulltext, Search Type 228

G

[GLOBAL] 64

Gateway, payment 531

General

Contact 75-76

Product Information 162

Get Extension Key 677

Gift Options

configure 310 product 172, 310

Global

attribute scope 139

search 52-53

Google 337

Analytics 85, 337, 346

API for Shopping 349

Merchant Center 337, 349

Product Listing Ads 337

Reader 321

Shopping 337, 349

Sitemap 337, 342

Webmaster Tools 344

Google API

Google Analytics 348

Google Merchant Center 346

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Grid

filter 55

Only 225

sort 54

View As 223

Group price 213 group_price attribute 213

Grouped Product 128

create 135

Guest

retrieve cart contents 455

H

Handle 399

Header 419, 421

welcome message 408

Help 4

Hidden category 96, 102

Hold, order 450

Home page 355

New Products list 378

Hong Kong, PayPal solutions 529

HTML

address template 484

editor 360

email 618

head 345

Head 419

in product description 122

product descriptions 110

suffix 237

713

714

I

Iframe, running your store in 648

Image

cache, flush 664

catalog, add 198

import 627

placeholder 134, 157, 200

size 197

sort order 199

URL 362

watermarks 201

zoom 196

Implementation 39

Implied consent, cookies 82

Import 626

Behavior 628

file validation 627

guidelines 628

images 627

table rates, shipping 559

In Anchor, category 105

In Stock 186

Inbox, Admin 44

Include in

Advanced Search 221

Navigation Menu 102, 104

Incoming Messages 45

Index 657

actions 661

modes 659

Indexing speed 123

Initial Fees, recurring payment 170

Index

Input type

Bundle product 150

Date 110

Dropdown 110

Fixed Product Tax 110

Media Image 110

Multiple Select 110

Price 110

Text Area 110

Text Field 110

Yes/No 110

Input Validation 116

Insert image 362

Install

extension 677

Magento 44

Update 675

Installation

Part I 11

Part II 20

Integration 679

Inventory 181, 183

configurable product 192

Configuration 181, 183

Manage Stock 186

Invoice 58, 441-442, 468, 472

Comments 473

Invoiced

order, download product 158

IP Anonymization, Google Analytics 348

Is Active 103

Is Anchor 99, 101

Italy, PayPal solutions 528

Iterative splitting, price navigation 94

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

iTunes icon, mobile app 332

J

Japan, PayPal solutions 528

JavaScript

address template 484

cache 664

K

Knowledge base 4

L

Label

price rule 271

shipping 475

Landing page 229

Language 64

Chooser 61

Layered Navigation 92, 105, 117, 121

filterable 93

Interval Division Limit 96

Manual 93

product count 92

Layered Price Navigation Step 105

layout

update 389

Layout

custom 107

Layout Update 367, 377, 399

syntax 394, 397

widget 377, 381

Layouts

cache 665

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Lifetime Sales 48

Light box 195

Like, Search Type 228

Link

image 362

widget 363

LinkedIn 6

List Mode 225

List Only 225

List, View As 223

Listing Sort By, category 105

Load sequence 399

local.xml 665, 667

Locale Options 68

Login

Admin 44

case-sensitive 648

demo store 44

Magento account 25

Logo 421

email 617

header 407

Low Stock, report 639

Loyalty program 38

M

Madison Island 29

Magento

account 25

Connect 40, 317, 349, 423, 427, 675

Connect Manager 672

Connect, install extension 677

Connect, Manager 677

715

Index

716

cookies 85

Core API 679

Design Guide 407

reinstall 24

Solutions Partners 39

Magento Secure Payment Bridge 543

Magento updates 24

Magnify image 196

Main menu 90

Major, message 47

Manage

Attribute Sets 114

Customers 58, 445

Products 58

Stock 183, 186, 192

Stores 61

Manufacturer's suggested retail price 208

Manufacturer, product 164

MAP (Minimum Advertised Price) 204, 208

Mark as Read 46

Markup tag 364, 385, 401, 403

MasterCard SecureCode 543

Match Period To, report 636

Matched Expression 429

Maximal Depth 90

MD5 Hash value 536

Media

Image 198-199

image, input type 110

retrieval, CDN 670

Storage 362, 668

Storage, alternate 667

Storage, database 667-668

URL 240, 362

URL, markup tag 401

Merchandising tools 34

Merchant level, PCI 80

Merchant solutions, PayPal 36

Message

importance 47

InBox 44

queue, mobile 334

template, mobile 333

Messages, Admin 44

Meta

Description, product 165

Information 32, 165, 234

category 103

Description 234

Keywords 103, 234

page 357

product 134

Title 234

Information, product 158, 165

Information, Title 165

Keywords, product 165

tag, canonical 242

Mini Shopping Cart Widget 374, 382

Minimum Advertised Price 208

Miscellaneous

HTML 422

Scripts 345, 421

Misspelled words

redirect 229

Mobile

devices, matched expression 429

menu 49-50

message template 333

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

theme, install 428

Mobile app 323

color themes 326

content 327

create 323

design 325

images 326

iTunes icon 332

navigation 327

splash screen 332

submit to Magento 331

Moderate, product reviews 301

Money Order 499

Most Viewed

Products 632

report 639

Most Viewed Items 48

MSRP (Manufacturer's Suggested Retail

Price) 204, 208

Multiple

addresses, shipping 74

Select, input type 110

Music download 153

My

Account 25

Applications, customer 434

Orders 434

Product Reviews, customer 434

MySQL

Fulltext Search 227

N

Navigation 102

menu 98, 104

Magento Community Edition User Guide

properties 116

top 90

New

Accounts, report 639

Customers 632

order state 465

Products list 321, 374, 379

Store 62

New Zealand, PayPal solutions 529

Newsletter 37, 313

configuration 314

menu 50

Queue 316

subscribers 59

templates 315

No

checkbox 56

layout updates 107

Not

Visible Individually 163

Not Capture 470, 534

Notice, message 47

O

Offline, invoice 542

Offline, refund 490, 542

Ogone 532

On Gesture, display price 204

On Hold, order status 449, 465

Onepage Checkout 460

Online customers 444

Online rates 560

Online refund 490, 542

717

718

Opt-in 314

Order 442, 465, 468, 472

cancel 441, 450

create 445

credit memo 441

fulfillment 40

invoice 441

review 460

shipment 441

status 465-466

submit 442

update 449

Order processing 36

Order Taxes, report 638

Orders

report 634

Orders and Returns 374

Origin, point of 73

Out of Stock 185-187, 190

P

Package

type, by carrier 562

Packing slip 472-473

Page 355

configuration 419

create 357

Title Separator 240

Page Footer 422

Page Layout 107, 171, 411, 413 examples 413

product 171

Page Not Found 356

Index

Page View Tracking, Google Analytics 346

Pagination

controls 52, 54, 223 links 223

Parent

category 106

Partial

reindex 661

Partial authorization 539

Partial invoices 534

Partial payment

workflow 539

Partial refund 542

partners, Magento 5

Password 80

Pay Now button, PayPal 512

Paybox Direct 532

Payment

Action, Order 515

actions 470

gateways 39, 508, 531

methods 39

multiple cards 539

options 36

partial 539

received 442

Review, order status 465

services 39

Payment actions 533

Payment Card Industry (PCI) 80

Payment Methods

Authorize.Net 534

BankTransfer Payment 496

Cash on Delivery 498

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Check / Money Order 499

Purchase Order 501

Zero Subtotal Checkout 502

Payment Services 543

PayPal 507, 531

Bill Me Later 516

business account 508

Express Checkout 507, 512

Billing Agreements 519

Express Checkout, Order

Transactions 515

Express Checkout, save billing

address 514

MECL 328

merchant solutions 36

Mobile Express Checkout Library 328

Payflow Link 526

Payflow Pro 525

Payments Advanced 509

Payments Standard 512

Settlement Report 522, 638

solutions 528

PCI Compliance 80

PDF

address template 484

credit memo 487

invoice 468

Pending

order status 442, 465, 473

order, download product 158

Payment, order status 465

PayPal, order status 465

Reviews 301

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Tags

moderate 305

Permanent

(301) 255

Redirect 246, 253

Permissions

admin 641

backup 672

custom 643

rollback 672

server 13

Persistent

cookie 455 shopping cart 455

PHP script

database media storage 668

Place Order 442

Placeholder image 200

PO 501

Poll 293-294

Manager 307

Popular Search Terms 226, 239

Popular Tags 294, 303

report 639

Postal code, optional 71

Price 203

adjustment 143

attributes 215

display 71

display on gesture 204

drill-down 95

input type 110

Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) 208

navigation 92-94

719

720

Range, bundle product 148

Special 205

Tier 206

View, bundle product 148

Price consistency 589

Price Rule

Catalog 261, 266

condition, attributes 121

coupon 278

promotions 286-287

Shopping Cart 267

Price Type

Fixed 179

Percentage 179

Print

credit memo 487

shipping labels 570, 575

Privacy

policy 81, 85, 356

Processing, order status 442, 465

Product

Bundle 148

catalog 39

Configurable 138

create 127

data, export 629

Description

HTML 122

Downloadable 129

file structure 623

Group Price 213

Grouped 135

image cache 664

image, zoom 196

Index

images 134, 157, 195, 198

import 626

Information 161

Custom Options 178

Design 171

Inventory 183

Prices 203

link 363

list 99, 122

by category 402 markup tag 402 new 402

Sort by 225

name 162

ratings 38

relationships 175-177

return workflow 486

reviews 38, 300

moderate 301

report 639

Rewrite 248

Simple 130

suggestions 34

thumbnails 195

type

export 629

Virtual 145

Product Alerts

configuration 191 run settings 191

Product Bestsellers, report 638

Product Stock Options 181

Product tag

by Admin 304

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Product View Page, visible on 122

Products

in Carts, report 638

Ordered, report 639

per page 225

reports 631

Tags, report 639

Promotions 259

menu 50

Price Rules 286

Publish

page 360

Purchase Order 501

Push Notification, mobile 330, 332

Q

QR code 278

Quantity

Discount 206

Increments 185, 192

Query

length 228 word count 228

Quick Search 220

attributes 121

Quick Simple Product Creation 141

R

Rating, product 302

Recently Compared Products 374

Recently Viewed Products 299, 374

Record selection 52

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Recurring Profile 166

customer account 434

Redirect 248, 250, 252

misspelled words 229

type 254-255

URL 245

Refresh

cache 664

report data 637 statistics 637

Refund 485

Authorize.Net 542

offline 490 online 490

Regular price 215

Reindex 659

events 660

full 661

manual 659

partial 661

required 659

Reindex Required 124

Related

Products 175, 260

Remember Me, shopping cart 455-456

Replace

Complex Data 626

Report 634, 638

Coupon Usage 283

export 636

snapshots 48

statistics, refresh 637

types 631

Reports, menu 51

721

722

Request Path, rediect 247

Resource Access, Custom 680

Responsive Web Design (RWD) 424

REST roles 681

Return to Stock 488

Reviews 293

delete 58

reports 631

Reviews and Ratings 301

Reward Points

product review 300

Rewrite

category 250

custom 252

product 248

type 253-255

Rewrites 22

RMA 37

robots.txt 342, 346, 421

Role

custom 643

Resources 643

Rollback 672 resources 672

Root

categories, multiple 61

category 63, 96, 100

RSS feed 38, 321

Run settings, product alerts 191

S

[STORE] 64

Index

Sales

channels 317

email 76

email templates 621

menu 49

order 441, 445

reports 631

Representative 75

Sample

page 355

Sample data 12

install 13

Samples

download 157

Schedule

recurring payment 168

Scope 63, 118

global attribute 139

settings 65

Scripts

custom 681

Search

Admin 53

configure 227 default 227

global 53

quick 220

results 223

tools, storefront 219

Type, MySQL 228

Search engine 228

friendly URLs 236

optimization 32, 165, 233

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Search Terms 58, 229 add 229

report 640

reports 631

Secret Key

URLs 648

Security 80, 647

running in frame, iframe 648

systems 80

Select

All 56

Visible 56

Selection, records 52

Sender Email 76

SEO 32, 233

SERP 165

Server

backup 671 rollback 671

Service Unavailable 357

503 Service Unavailable 357

Session

cookie 83, 455

lifetime 648

Set Product as New from/to Date 163

Settlement Report, PayPal Express

Checkout 522

SFTP

credentials, PayPal 523 user account, PayPal 523

Share account, Magento 26

Ship

Bundle Items 152

order 442

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Shipment 441, 472-473

Shipping

bundle product 150

carriers 561

labels 475

multiple addresses 74

options 36

packages 562

packing slip 473

rates

import 554

online 560

refund 487

Shipping Labels 36, 567

configure 568

create 570

multiple orders 575 tracking number 575

Shipping Methods 40, 549, 551-552, 554

Shipping Settings 73, 550

Shop By 92

Shopping cart

thumbnails 137

history 37

tools 293

Shopping Cart

persistent 455

price rule 267, 278, 286-287

thumbnails 143, 202

Show Actual Values, report 635, 637

Sidebar, block reference 390

Simple Product 128

create 130

723

724

Site Map 239

Sitemap 32, 235, 342

SKU 162-163

dynamic, bundle product 149

in price rules 266 multiple 266

use of 138

Slider 195

Small Image 197, 199

Social

marketing 317

shopping 295

Software download 153

Solutions Partners, Magento 39

Sort 52

attributes 121

controls 54

product list 105

Sort By 223

Spain, PayPal solutions 528

Spam 314

Special Price 203, 205

Special Products, RSS feed 322

Split orders, PayPal Express Checkout 515

SSL 22

Staging environment 24

Startup Page

Admin 633

State is required for 69

States Options 69

Static Block 377

category page 99

Static URL 236

Index

Status

change 56

product 162-163

Stock Availability 185-186

catalog page 189

Configurable Product 192

product page 188 scenarios 188

Stock, Manage 183

Storage

configuration, media 667

Store

code, in URL 237

URL 44

Store Demo Notice 409

Store Hierarchy 61

product 133

Store Information 67

Store URL, markup tag 401

Storefront

CAPTCHA 648

Stores, multiple 61

Subcategory 96, 102

Subdomain, CDN 670

Submit order 442

Subscription

purchase by 166

Super Products Attributes Configuration 143

Surveys 293, 306

Suspected Fraud, order status 465

Switch Accounts 28

Synchronization 667

Syndicated content 321

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Synonyms 229 search terms 229

Syntax

layout update 394

System

attribute 116

backup 671

menu 51

notifications 46

passwords 80

System requirements 10

T

Table Rate, shipping 554

Tag

cloud 226

products, Admin 304

Tags

moderate 305

product 303

RSS feed 321

reports 631

Target Path, redirect 247, 255

Tax 40, 579

Calculation Settings, configure 581

class

customer group 437

VAT 602

class, price 204

Classes, configure 580

configuration 579

Display Settings, configure 582

rates

VAT 602

rules

VAT 602

Tax Rate

Point of Origin 550

Tax Zones and Rates 585

Template

layout update, widget 374

mobile message 333

tag 402

variables 385

Temporary (302) redirect 253, 255

Terms and Conditions 460

Text

address template 484

Area, input type 110

editor 360

Field, input type 110

Theme 33

change 423, 427

Theme, default 424

Third-party

applications 39, 680

Thumbnail 197, 199, 202

gallery 195

Image

category 104

Tier Price 204, 206

Timezone 68

Top Level Category, RSS feed 322

Top Search Terms 48

Total

Invoiced vs. Paid, report 638

Magento Community Edition User Guide 725

726

Ordered, report 638

Refunded, report 638

Shipped, report 638

Tracking

number, shipping 468

number, shipping label 575

Training 5

Transactional emails 309, 617 logo 617

Translations, cache 665

Trial period, recurring payment 168-169

Twitter 6, 317

U

Under construction 409

Unique Value, attribute property 116

United Kingdom, PayPal solutions 528

United States, PayPal solutions 528

Unselect

All 56

Visible 56

Up-sell products 176, 260

Update Attributes 57

Update Magento 24, 675

UPS 561

shipping labels 567

shipping packages 563

Urban Airship 330

URL

category path 238

custom 32

dynamic 236

Key 163, 237

category 103

page 357

Key, category 103

options 236

redirect 245

rewrite 100

rewrite, create 247

static 236

store code 237

Use

suffix 163, 237, 239

Default checkbox 64

Dynamic Media URLs 226

Flat Catalog Category 226

Flat Catalog Product 226

for Promo Rule Conditions 117, 122

Parent Category Settings 106

to Create Configurable Product 139

User

guides 4

User guides 4

User Role, Admin 642

USPS 561

shipping labels 567

shipping packages 564

V

Value Added Tax 579, 599

Values Required 116

var/backups 671

var/cache 663

Index

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Index

Variables 385

email 618

VAT 599

ID location 607

VAT Validation

configure 602, 604

customer account 612

customer address attribute 610

Verified by VISA 543

View

product 133, 155

View As 223

Virtual

Product 129, 145

Visibility

product 163

Visible on Product View Page 117

Void transaction 534

W

[WEBSITE] 64

Watermark 201

Web server

rewrites 237

synchronization 667

Web Services 679, 681

Configuration, cache 665

Webinars 5

Websites

multiple 61

product 173

WEEE tax 590

Magento Community Edition User Guide

Weight

Bundle Product 152

dynamic, bundle product 149

product 162-163

Welcome

message 408, 421

message, block 397

What's this? link 213

White list 316

Widget 373-374, 402

add to page 363

CMS Static Block 377

code 402

email 618

link 363

Mini Shopping Cart 382

New Products 379

Wiki 4

Wishlist 293, 295, 434

configuration 295

in RSS feed 322

Workflow

order 465

WS-I 679

WYSIWYG Editor 360

enable 110

enable for input 122

X

XML 389, 391

Connect 323

file 631

727

Y

Yes, checkbox 56

Yes/No, input type 110

YouTube 6

Z

Zend Full Page Cache 666

Zero Subtotal Checkout 502

Zones, tax 585

Index

728 Magento Community Edition User Guide

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents